A5E03870010A NGX Operating Manual

0HGLXP9ROWDJH9DULDEOH)UHTXHQF\'ULYH
6,1$0,&63HUIHFW+DUPRQ\*+
1;*&RQWURO
2SHUDWLQJ0DQXDOy$(
SINAMICS Perfect Harmony GH180
$%
Answers for industry.

Introduction 1
Safety notes 2
NXG Control Description 3

Hardware Interface
Description 4
Parameter Assignment /
NXG Control Addressing 5
Operating the Control 6

Operating Manual
Advanced Operating
Functions 7
Software User Interface 8
Operating the Software 9

Troubleshooting Faults and
Alarms 10
NEMA Table A
Abbreviations B
AB
A5E03870010A
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified
personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding
potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in
this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.
Siemens AG A5E03870010A Copyright © Siemens AG 2012 - 2013.

Industry Sector Ⓟ 12/2013 Technical data subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents
1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................................15
1.1 Power Topology..........................................................................................................................15
1.2 Control Overview.........................................................................................................................15
1.3 Protocol for Cell Communication.................................................................................................16
2 Safety notes................................................................................................................................................19
2.1 General Safety Information.........................................................................................................19
2.2 Safety Concept............................................................................................................................20
2.3 Observing the Five Safety Rules.................................................................................................20
2.4 Safety Information and Warnings................................................................................................21
2.5 ESD-sensitive Components........................................................................................................23
2.6 Electromagnetic Fields in Electrical Power Engineering Installations ........................................25
3 NXG Control Description............................................................................................................................27
3.1 Control System............................................................................................................................27
3.1.1 Software Version Requirements and Limitations........................................................................32
3.2 Control Structure.........................................................................................................................32
3.3 Control Modes.............................................................................................................................36
3.3.1 Open Loop Vector Control (OLVC).............................................................................................39
3.3.2 Open Loop Test Mode (OLTM)...................................................................................................39
3.3.3 Synchronous Motor Control (SMC).............................................................................................40
3.3.4 Volts/Hertz Control (V/Hz)...........................................................................................................42
3.3.5 Closed Loop Control (CLVC or CSMC).......................................................................................42
3.3.6 Permanent Magnet Motor Control (PMM)...................................................................................42
3.3.7 Synchronous Motor with DC Brushless Exciter (SMDC).............................................................48
3.4 Watchdog Protections.................................................................................................................49
3.5 Control Loops..............................................................................................................................49
3.5.1 Current Loop...............................................................................................................................49
3.5.2 Speed Loop.................................................................................................................................50
3.5.3 Flux Loop.....................................................................................................................................50
4 Hardware Interface Description..................................................................................................................51
4.1 Signal Conditioning.....................................................................................................................51
4.2 System Inputs and Outputs.........................................................................................................51
4.2.1 Internal User I/O..........................................................................................................................52
4.2.2 System I/O Board........................................................................................................................52
4.2.3 Encoder Interface........................................................................................................................54
4.3 Breakout Board...........................................................................................................................55
4.4 Modulator and Fiber Optics.........................................................................................................57
NXG Control
Operating Manual, AB, A5E03870010A 3
Table of contents
4.5 Bypass Control............................................................................................................................58

4.6 Parameter Interface.....................................................................................................................58
4.7 Discrete External I/O...................................................................................................................59
4.7.1 Interface for External I/O.............................................................................................................59
4.7.2 Support for Additional I/O............................................................................................................61
4.8 I/O Configuration.........................................................................................................................61
4.9 Communications Board...............................................................................................................62
5 Parameter Assignment / Addressing..........................................................................................................63
5.1 Menu Descriptions.......................................................................................................................63
5.2 Safety Notes for Parameter Changes.........................................................................................65
5.3 Options for Motor Menu (1).........................................................................................................66
5.4 Options for Drive Menu (2)..........................................................................................................75
5.5 Options for Stability Menu (3)......................................................................................................91
5.6 Options for Auto Menu (4)...........................................................................................................98
5.7 Options for Main Menu (5).........................................................................................................107
5.7.1 Security Access Levels and Codes...........................................................................................110
5.8 Options for Log Control Menu (6)..............................................................................................111
5.9 Options for Drive Protect Menu (7)............................................................................................113
5.10 Options for Meter Menu (8).......................................................................................................115
5.11 Options for Communications Menu (9)......................................................................................120
5.12 Options for Multiple Configuration Files....................................................................................123
6 Operating the Control...............................................................................................................................129
6.1 Signal Frame of Reference for Motor........................................................................................129
6.2 Cell Bypass...............................................................................................................................131
6.2.1 Fast Bypass...............................................................................................................................131
6.2.2 Mechanical Cell Bypass............................................................................................................133
6.2.3 Neutral Point Shift during Bypass..............................................................................................134
6.3 Energy Saver.............................................................................................................................139
6.4 Power Monitoring......................................................................................................................140
6.5 Motor Thermal Overload Protection..........................................................................................140
6.6 Thermal Over Temperature Rollback........................................................................................146
6.7 Input Side Monitoring and Protection........................................................................................147
6.7.1 One Cycle Protection................................................................................................................149
6.7.2 Excessive Drive Losses Protection...........................................................................................151
6.7.3 System Arc Detection................................................................................................................154
6.8 Drive Output Torque Limiting....................................................................................................154
6.8.1 Input Under-Voltage Rollback...................................................................................................154
6.8.2 Input Single-Phase Rollback.....................................................................................................155
6.8.3 Transformer Thermal Rollback..................................................................................................156
NXG Control
4 Operating Manual, AB, A5E03870010A
Table of contents
6.8.4 Torque Limit Setting..................................................................................................................157

6.8.5 Field-Weakening Limit...............................................................................................................158
6.8.6 Cell Current Overload................................................................................................................158
6.8.7 Timers for Drive Operation in Cell or Transformer Over-temperarure.......................................158
6.9 Command Generator.................................................................................................................159
6.9.1 Analog Input Sources................................................................................................................160
6.9.2 Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) Controller.......................................................................160
6.9.3 Set Point Sources......................................................................................................................161
6.9.4 Speed Profile.............................................................................................................................162
6.9.5 Critical Speed Avoidance..........................................................................................................162
6.9.6 Polarity Control..........................................................................................................................163
6.9.7 Speed Ramp.............................................................................................................................163
6.9.8 Speed Limits..............................................................................................................................164
6.10 Process Tolerant Protection Strategy........................................................................................164
6.11 Drive Tuning..............................................................................................................................166
6.11.1 Auto-tuning................................................................................................................................166
6.11.2 Spinning Load...........................................................................................................................168
6.12 Data Loggers.............................................................................................................................169
6.12.1 Event Log..................................................................................................................................170
6.12.2 Alarm/Fault Log.........................................................................................................................170
6.12.3 Historic Log...............................................................................................................................170
6.13 Faults and Alarms.....................................................................................................................171
6.14 Debug........................................................................................................................................171
7 Advanced Operating Functions................................................................................................................173
7.1 Frequency (Speed) Regulator...................................................................................................173
7.2 Slip Compensation....................................................................................................................173
7.3 Speed Droop.............................................................................................................................175
7.4 Flux Regulator...........................................................................................................................176
7.5 Flux Feed-Forward....................................................................................................................176
7.6 External Flux Reference............................................................................................................177
7.7 Dual-Frequency Braking............................................................................................................178
7.8 Regenerative Braking (six-step)................................................................................................182
7.9 Dynamic Braking with External Resistors .................................................................................184
7.10 Voltage Attenuator Resistors.....................................................................................................185
7.11 Torque Current Regulator.........................................................................................................186
7.12 Magnetizing Current Regulator.................................................................................................187
7.13 Phase Lock Loop.......................................................................................................................187
7.14 Output Filters.............................................................................................................................187
7.15 Synchronous Transfer...............................................................................................................188
7.15.1 Synchronous Transfer Operation for Induction Motors.............................................................189
7.15.2 Synchronous Transfer Operation for Synchronous Motors.......................................................192
NXG Control
Table of contents
7.15.3 Synchronous Transfer for Permanent Magnet Motors (PMM)..................................................194

7.15.4 Parameter Settings for Synchronous Transfer Operation.........................................................195
7.16 Pre-charge.................................................................................................................................195
7.17 Pre-charge using SOP..............................................................................................................196
7.17.1 Preconditions for Pre-charge Types 1 to 3................................................................................196
7.17.2 Type 1 (Closed) Pre-charge......................................................................................................199
7.17.3 Type 2 (Open) Pre-charge........................................................................................................202
7.17.4 Type 3 Pre-charge (Parallel Drives)..........................................................................................203
7.18 Pre-charge using Dedicated I/O................................................................................................205
7.18.1 Preconditions for Pre-charge Types 5 and 6.............................................................................206
7.18.2 Type 5 (Open) Pre-charge........................................................................................................208
7.18.3 Type 6 (Closed) Pre-charge......................................................................................................213
7.19 Paralleling Multiple Drives.........................................................................................................220
7.19.1 Parallel Drive Control................................................................................................................220
7.19.2 Master-Slave Drive Control.......................................................................................................222
7.20 Torque Mode.............................................................................................................................223
7.21 High Performance Control.........................................................................................................224
7.21.1 Low Speed Operation................................................................................................................224
7.21.2 High Starting Torque Mode.......................................................................................................225
7.22 Long Cable Applications............................................................................................................226
7.22.1 Cable Inductance Compensation..............................................................................................226
7.22.2 Operating Parallel Motors over Long Cables............................................................................227
7.23 Drive with Output Transformers................................................................................................228
7.24 Motor Equivalent Circuit Parameters.........................................................................................230
8 Software User Interface............................................................................................................................233
8.1 Standard Keypad.......................................................................................................................234
8.1.1 Fault Reset Key and LED Indicator...........................................................................................235
8.1.2 Automatic Key...........................................................................................................................237
8.1.3 Manual Stop Key.......................................................................................................................237
8.1.4 Manual Start Key.......................................................................................................................238
8.1.5 Numeric Keys............................................................................................................................239
8.1.6 Enter/Cancel Key......................................................................................................................242
8.1.7 Shift Function Keys...................................................................................................................243
8.1.8 Arrow Keys................................................................................................................................244
8.1.9 Summary of Common Shift Key and Arrow Key Sequences....................................................247
8.1.10 Diagnostic Indicators.................................................................................................................249
8.1.11 Display.......................................................................................................................................250
8.2 Multi-Language Keypad............................................................................................................256
8.2.1 Fault Reset Key and LED Indicator...........................................................................................258
8.2.2 Automatic Key...........................................................................................................................260
8.2.3 Manual Stop Key.......................................................................................................................260
8.2.4 Manual Start Key.......................................................................................................................261
8.2.5 Numeric Keys............................................................................................................................262
8.2.6 Enter/Cancel Key......................................................................................................................265
8.2.7 Shift Function Keys...................................................................................................................266
8.2.8 Arrow Keys................................................................................................................................267
NXG Control
Table of contents
8.2.9 Summary of Common Shift Key and Arrow Key Sequences....................................................270

8.2.10 Diagnostic Indicators.................................................................................................................272
8.2.11 Display.......................................................................................................................................272
8.3 NXG ToolSuite..........................................................................................................................280
8.4 Communication Interface..........................................................................................................280
8.4.1 Available Networks ...................................................................................................................280
8.4.2 Multiple Networks......................................................................................................................280
9 Operating the Software.............................................................................................................................283
9.1 SOP Development and Operation.............................................................................................283
9.2 SOP Logic Functions.................................................................................................................283
9.3 SOP Evaluation.........................................................................................................................284
9.4 Input Flags.................................................................................................................................284
9.5 Output Flags..............................................................................................................................284
9.6 Downloading the SOP...............................................................................................................285
9.7 Uploading the SOP....................................................................................................................285
9.8 Multiple Configuration Files.......................................................................................................286
9.9 Selecting the active SOP...........................................................................................................287
10 Troubleshooting Faults and Alarms .........................................................................................................289
10.1 Faults and Alarms.....................................................................................................................289
10.2 Drive Faults and Alarms............................................................................................................291
10.3 Cell Faults and Alarms..............................................................................................................318
10.3.1 Troubleshooting General Cell and Power Circuitry Faults........................................................327
10.3.2 Troubleshooting Cell Over Temperature Faults........................................................................329
10.3.3 Troubleshooting Overvoltage Faults.........................................................................................330
10.3.4 Troubleshooting Cell Communications and Link Faults............................................................330
10.3.5 Status Indicator Summaries for MV Mechanical Bypass Boards..............................................330
10.4 User Faults and Alarms.............................................................................................................331
10.5 Unexpected Output Conditions.................................................................................................331
10.5.1 Speed Rollback.........................................................................................................................332
10.6 Drive Input Protection................................................................................................................334
10.7 Flash Disk Corruption................................................................................................................337
A NEMA Table.............................................................................................................................................339
B Abbreviations............................................................................................................................................343
Glossary...................................................................................................................................................349
Index.........................................................................................................................................................359
Tables
Table 3-1 Symbols used in Figure Vector Control Algorithms.....................................................................38
NXG Control
Table of contents
Table 4-1 I/O Specification .......................................................................................................................53

Table 4-2 Dedicated Inputs.........................................................................................................................56
Table 4-3 Dedicated Outputs.......................................................................................................................56
Table 4-4 WAGO I/O Module Color Codes.................................................................................................60
Table 5-1 Menu and Submenu Summary....................................................................................................63
Table 5-2 Motor Parameter Menu (1000) Parameters .............................................................................67
Table 5-3 Limits Menu (1120) Parameters ...............................................................................................68
Table 5-4 Speed Derate Curve Menu (1151) Parameters* ......................................................................71
Table 5-5 Auto-tune Menu (1250) Parameters .........................................................................................72
Table 5-6 Encoder Menu (1280) Parameters: Closed Loop Vector Control only .....................................72
Table 5-7 Current Profile Menu (1092) Parameters .................................................................................73
Table 5-8 Drive Parameter Menu (2000) Parameters ..............................................................................76
Table 5-9 Speed Setup Menu (2060) Parameters* ..................................................................................78
Table 5-10 Torque Reference Menu (2210) Parameters ...........................................................................79
Table 5-11 Speed Ramp Setup Menu (2260) Parameters .........................................................................79
Table 5-12 Critical Frequency Menu (2340) Parameters ...........................................................................80
Table 5-13 Spinning Load Menu (2420) Parameters .................................................................................80
Table 5-14 Conditional Timer Setup Menu (2490) Parameters ..................................................................81
Table 5-15 Cell Menu (2520) Parameters ..................................................................................................81
Table 5-16 AP Settings (2585) Parameters ................................................................................................83
Table 5-17 Synchronous Transfer Menu (2700) Parameters .....................................................................84
Table 5-18 External I/O Menu (2800) Parameters .....................................................................................85
Table 5-19 Internal I/O Menu (2805) Parameters .......................................................................................86
Table 5-20 Internal Analog Input 1 Menu (2815) Parameters ....................................................................86
Table 5-21 Internal Analog Input 2 Menu (2825) Parameters.......................................................................87
Table 5-22 Internal Analog Input 3 Menu (2835) Parameters.......................................................................87
Table 5-23 Internal Analog Output 1 Menu (2845) Parameters .................................................................87
Table 5-24 Internal Analog Output 2 Menu (2855) Parameters....................................................................87
Table 5-25 Pick list for Internal Analog Output Source..................................................................................88
Table 5-26 Internal Test Point #28 Menu (2860) Parameters ....................................................................88
Table 5-27 Internal Test Point #29 Menu (2865) Parameters.......................................................................88
Table 5-32 Pick list for graphing and analog testpoint variables ................................................................89
Table 5-33 Output Connection Menu (2900) Parameters ..........................................................................90
Table 5-34 High Starting Torque Menu (2960) Parameters .......................................................................90
Table 5-35 Watchdog Menu (2970) Parameters ..........................................................................................91
NXG Control
Table of contents
Table 5-36 Stability Menu (3) Parameters.....................................................................................................92

Table 5-37 Input Processing Menu (3000) Parameters ..............................................................................92
Table 5-38 Var Control Menu (3041) Parameters ......................................................................................93
Table 5-39 Output Processing Menu (3050) Parameters ...........................................................................93
Table 5-40 Low Frequency Compensation Menu (3060) Parameters ........................................................94
Table 5-41 Flux Control Menu (3100) Parameters .....................................................................................95
Table 5-42 Speed Loop Menu (3200) Parameters .....................................................................................95
Table 5-43 Current Loop Menu (3250) Parameters......................................................................................96
Table 5-44 Stator Resistance Estimator Menu (3300) Parameters ............................................................96
Table 5-45 Braking Menu (3350) Parameters ............................................................................................97
Table 5-46 Control Loop Test Menu (3460) Parameters ............................................................................98
Table 5-47 Speed Profile Menu (4000) Parameters ...................................................................................98
Table 5-48 Analog Input Menu (4090) Parameters for External and Internal Inputs ..................................99
Table 5-49 Analog Input #1 Menu (4100) Parameters................................................................................100
Table 5-54 Auxiliary Input #1 Menu (4500) Parameters ...........................................................................103
Table 5-55 Auxiliary Input #2 Menu (4580) Parameters..............................................................................103
Table 5-56 Pick list for Analog Input Sources..............................................................................................104
Table 5-57 Analog Output Menu (4660) Parameters for External Outputs ..............................................104
Table 5-58 Pick list for Analog Output Variable Parameters.......................................................................105
Table 5-59 Analog Output #1 Menu (4661).................................................................................................105
Table 5-60 Speed Setpoint Menu (4240) Parameters* ............................................................................106
Table 5-61 Incremental Speed Setup Menu (4970) Parameters ..............................................................106
Table 5-62 PID Select Menu (4350) Parameters .....................................................................................106
Table 5-63 Main Menu (5) Parameters........................................................................................................108
Table 5-64 Security Edit Functions Menu (5000) Parameters ..................................................................109
Table 5-65 Default Security Access Levels and Access Codes..................................................................111
Table 5-66 Event Log Menu (6180) Parameters ......................................................................................111
Table 5-67 Alarm/Fault Log Menu (6210) Parameters .............................................................................111
Table 5-68 Historic Log Menu (6250) Parameters ...................................................................................112
Table 5-69 Pick list variables for Historic Log (all units are %)....................................................................112
Table 5-70 Drive Protect Menu (7) Parameters...........................................................................................113
Table 5-71 Input Protect Menu (7000) Parameters ....................................................................................114
Table 5-72 Single Phasing Menu (7010) Parameters ................................................................................115
Table 5-73 Meter Menu (8) Parameters......................................................................................................116
Table 5-74 Display Parameters Menu (8000) Parameters .......................................................................116
NXG Control
Table of contents
Table 5-75 Pick list variables for the front display.......................................................................................117

Table 5-76 Hour Meter Setup (8010) Parameters ....................................................................................119
Table 5-77 Input Harmonics Menu (8140) Parameters ............................................................................120
Table 5-78 Communications Menu (9) Parameters.....................................................................................120
Table 5-79 Serial Port Setup Menu (9010) Parameters ...........................................................................121
Table 5-80 SOP and Serial Functions Menu (9110) Parameters .............................................................121
Table 5-81 TCP/IP Setup Menu (9300) Parameters ................................................................................123
Table 5-82 Slave Setup and Configuration Parameters ...........................................................................124
Table 5-83 Parameter Menu for Slave Configuration..................................................................................125
Table 6-1 Signal polarities .......................................................................................................................131
Table 6-2 Symbols used in Figure Input Side Monitoring..........................................................................148
Table 6-3 Transformer Protection Constant for various Full Load Power Factors....................................151
Table 7-1 Motor related data ..................................................................................................................182
Table 8-1 Fault LED Status: Standard Keypad.........................................................................................236
Table 8-2 Hexadecimal digit assignments on the keypad.........................................................................240
Table 8-3 Summary of common [SHIFT] key and arrow key sequences ................................................247
Table 8-4 Line 1 of mode display..............................................................................................................254
Table 8-6 Fault LED Status: Multi-language Keypad ...............................................................................258
Table 8-7 Hexadecimal digit assignments on the keypad.........................................................................263
Table 8-8 Summary of common [SHIFT] key and arrow key sequences ................................................270
Table 8-9 Line 1 of mode display .............................................................................................................278
Table 10-1 Fault/alarm type and drive responses ................................................................................290
Table 10-2 Auto resettable faults ..............................................................................................................290
Table 10-3 Input line disturbance faults.......................................................................................................291
Table 10-4 Motor/output related faults.........................................................................................................296
Table 10-5 System related faults.................................................................................................................301
Table 10-6 Modulator related faults.............................................................................................................303
Table 10-7 Low voltage power supply related faults...................................................................................304
Table 10-8 System I/O related faults...........................................................................................................305
Table 10-9 External serial communications related faults...........................................................................306
Table 10-10 Synch transfer related faults......................................................................................................307
Table 10-11 User defined faults ..................................................................................................................307
Table 10-12 Cooling related faults ..............................................................................................................308
Table 10-13 Input transformer temperature related faults.............................................................................313
Table 10-14 Input reactor temperature related faults....................................................................................315
Table 10-15 Cell bypass related faults .......................................................................................................316
Table 10-16 Non-specific (global) cell related faults ...................................................................................318
NXG Control
Table of contents
Table 10-17 Specific (individual) cell faults...................................................................................................319

Table 10-18 Diagnostic cell faults ...............................................................................................................322
Table 10-19 AP cell faults ...........................................................................................................................323
Table 10-20 MV Mechanical Bypass Board Status LEDs ..........................................................................331
Table 10-21 Speed Rollback Indicator Flags ..............................................................................................333
Table 10-22 Speed Rollup Control Flags ...................................................................................................333
Table A-1 NEMA Table 20-1 from NEMA Standard MG-1 1993 Part 20.42 converted to SI units,
Maximum Load Inertia for Polyphase Squirrel-Cage Induction Motors in kg-m².......................339
Table B-1 Commonly Used Abbreviations.................................................................................................343
Figures
Figure 2-1 ESD Protective Measures...........................................................................................................24

Figure 3-1 NXG Control in a typical drive system.........................................................................................27
Figure 3-2 NXG Master Control Chassis......................................................................................................28
Figure 3-3 NXGII Master Control Chassis....................................................................................................30
Figure 3-4 Location of Flash Disk on the NXGII Microprocessor Board.......................................................31
Figure 3-5 Control Structure for 6000V Drive ............................................................................................35
Figure 3-6 Vector Control Algorithms ........................................................................................................37
Figure 3-7 Drive Arrangement for Synchronous Motor with AC Brushless Exciter ....................................40
Figure 3-8 Flux Regulator for PMM Control Mode........................................................................................43
Figure 3-9 Disabled Mode............................................................................................................................44
Figure 3-10 Auto Mode...................................................................................................................................44
Figure 3-11 Manual Mode / Manual Network Mode (positive Ids)....................................................................45
Figure 3-12 Manual Mode / Manual Network Mode (negative Ids)..................................................................45
Figure 3-13 Auto Phase Advance Voltage Regulator.....................................................................................46
Figure 3-14 Auto Phase Advance below base speed.....................................................................................47
Figure 3-15 Auto Phase Advance above base speed....................................................................................47
Figure 4-1 System I/O and I/O Breakout Board............................................................................................53
Figure 4-2 Encoder Connections on TB3 of the Interface Board..................................................................54
Figure 4-3 Waveforms of Encoder Feedback Signals..................................................................................55
Figure 4-4 WAGO I/O System......................................................................................................................60
Figure 4-5 Breakout Board Schematic..........................................................................................................61
Figure 5-1 Peak Reduction Third Harmonic Injection...................................................................................71
Figure 5-2 Estimated VFD Current Limit.......................................................................................................74
Figure 5-3 Advantage of using speed profiling control.................................................................................99
Figure 5-4 Example of Main Menu..............................................................................................................108
Figure 5-5 Standard Keypad Dynamic Programmable Meter Display........................................................119
Figure 5-6 Multi-Language Keypad Dynamic Programmable Meter Display..............................................119
Figure 6-1 Four Quadrant Operation of a Motor.........................................................................................130
NXG Control
Table of contents
Figure 6-2 Typical Power Cell with Bypass Contactor................................................................................133

Figure 6-3 15 Cell Drive Simplified.............................................................................................................134
Figure 6-4 Drive Output with 2 Cells Bypassed..........................................................................................135
Figure 6-5 Drive Output rebalanced by bypassing functional cells.............................................................135
Figure 6-6 Drive Output rebalanced using neutral shift..............................................................................136
Figure 6-7 Drive Output after loss of 3 Cells...............................................................................................137
Figure 6-8 Drive Output after loss of 5 Cells...............................................................................................137
Figure 6-9 Available Voltage after a failure.................................................................................................138
Figure 6-10 Motor Thermal Model................................................................................................................142
Figure 6-11 Default speed derating curve showing maximum motor load as function of speed..................143
Figure 6-12 Drive current (in percent of motor rated current) vs. time taken for motor temperature............143
Figure 6-13 Motor Current Vs. Time to Trip..................................................................................................145
Figure 6-14 OT Rollback Action....................................................................................................................147
Figure 6-15 Input Side Monitoring................................................................................................................148
Figure 6-16 Implementation of One Cycle Protection...................................................................................149
Figure 6-17 Maximum Reactive Current versus Real Current with Transformer Constant of 0.5................150
Figure 6-18 Implementation of the Drive Loss Fault Circuit..........................................................................152
Figure 6-19 Inverse Time-to-trip Curves.......................................................................................................153
Figure 6-20 Drive Power (Pmax) as Function of Input Voltage Magnitude (Ed)..............................................155
Figure 6-21 Drive Power (Pmax) as Function of Input Unbalance Voltage (Eunbalance).....................................156
Figure 6-22 Command Generator.................................................................................................................159
Figure 6-23 PID Controller............................................................................................................................161
Figure 6-24 Critical Speed (Resonance) Avoidance.....................................................................................163
Figure 7-1 Speed Droop.............................................................................................................................175
Figure 7-2 Synchronous Motor Flux Feed-Forward....................................................................................177
Figure 7-3 Dual Frequency voltages added with normal 3-phase voltages................................................180
Figure 7-4 Dual Frequency Braking waveform...........................................................................................180
Figure 7-5 Braking torque with DFB for a typical motor ...........................................................................182
Figure 7-6 Pmax in Regeneration with respect to Erms.............................................................................184
Figure 7-7 Dynamic Braking with External Resistors..................................................................................185
Figure 7-8 Multiple Motor Synchronous Transfer.......................................................................................191
Figure 7-9 Communications using a Modbus network configuration..........................................................192
Figure 7-10 Type 1 Pre-charge Component Connections............................................................................200
Figure 7-13 Type 5 Pre-charge Circuit Schematic........................................................................................209
Figure 7-15 Type 6 Pre-charge Circuit Schematic........................................................................................215
NXG Control
Table of contents
Figure 7-17 Parallel Drive Control with Synchronous Motor ........................................................................220

Figure 7-18 Parallel Drive Control with Induction Motor...............................................................................221
Figure 7-19 Example of Master-Slave Drive Control ...................................................................................222
Figure 7-20 Torque Mode.............................................................................................................................223
Figure 7-21 Torque Demand Options...........................................................................................................224
Figure 7-22 High Starting Torque Mode Example System...........................................................................225
Figure 7-23 Modified High Starting Torque Mode.........................................................................................226
Figure 7-24 Motor Terminal vs. Cemf...........................................................................................................227
Figure 7-25 Multiple Motors on Long Cables using Single Drive..................................................................228
Figure 7-26 Output Transformer and Cable..................................................................................................229
Figure 7-27 Output Transformer...................................................................................................................229
Figure 8-1 Standard Keypad and Display Interface ...............................................................................234
Figure 8-2 Example of two programmed control modes.............................................................................239
Figure 8-3 Numeric keypad key..................................................................................................................241
Figure 8-4 Location of shift mode indicator on the display.........................................................................243
Figure 8-5 Using the up and down arrow keys to control velocity demand................................................245
Figure 8-6 Security Level Cleared message on the display.......................................................................246
Figure 8-7 Identification/version screen and meter display........................................................................250
Figure 8-8 Dynamic Programmable Meter Display.....................................................................................250
Figure 8-9 Dynamic Programmable Meter Display in Rollback Mode........................................................251
Figure 8-10 Dynamic Programmable Meter Display in Regeneration Mode................................................251
Figure 8-11 Status display in metering mode...............................................................................................252
Figure 8-12 Status display after [SHIFT] + [2] key sequence.......................................................................252
Figure 8-13 Status display after [⇓] [⇓] key sequence.................................................................................252
Figure 8-14 Status display after [⇒] key sequence.......................................................................................252
Figure 8-15 Status display after [⇓] key sequence.......................................................................................252
Figure 8-16 Status display after [ENTER] key to change a parameter.........................................................252
Figure 8-17 Status display upon entering a value in the range of the system..............................................253
Figure 8-18 Status display after pressing [SHIFT] [⇒] and entering ID 1020 ...............................................253
Figure 8-19 Status display after pressing [ENTER] twice.............................................................................253
Figure 8-20 Status display upon entering a value beyond the range of the system.....................................254
Figure 8-21 Multi-Language Keypad and Display Interface .....................................................................256
Figure 8-22 Multiple Alarms Active...............................................................................................................259
Figure 8-23 Example of two programmed control modes.............................................................................262
Figure 8-24 Numeric keypad key..................................................................................................................264
Figure 8-25 Location of shift mode indicator on the display.........................................................................266
Figure 8-26 Using the up and down arrow keys to control velocity demand................................................268
Figure 8-27 Security Level Cleared message on the display.......................................................................269
Figure 8-28 Identification/version screen and meter display........................................................................273
NXG Control
Table of contents
Figure 8-29 Dynamic Programmable Meter Display.....................................................................................273

Figure 8-30 Dynamic Programmable Meter Display in Rollback Mode........................................................274
Figure 8-31 Dynamic Programmable Meter Display in Regeneration Mode................................................274
Figure 8-32 Status display in metering mode...............................................................................................275
Figure 8-33 Status display after [SHIFT] + [2] key sequence.......................................................................275
Figure 8-34 Status display after [⇓] [⇓] key sequence.................................................................................275
Figure 8-35 Status display after [⇒] key sequence.......................................................................................276
Figure 8-36 Status display after [⇓] key sequence.......................................................................................276
Figure 8-37 Status display after [ENTER] key to change a parameter.........................................................276
Figure 8-38 Status display upon entering a value in the range of the system..............................................277
Figure 8-39 Status display after pressing [SHIFT] [⇒] and entering ID 1020................................................277
Figure 8-40 Status display after pressing [ENTER] twice.............................................................................277
Figure 8-41 Status display upon entering a value beyond the range of the system.....................................278
NXG Control
Introduction 1
The Perfect Harmony series of drives maintain a common control system, the NXG Control.
This manual describes the NXG Control System and the related hardware and user interfaces.
This manual covers the parameter assignment necessary for operation and provides
descriptions of specific functions and advanced features that may be required when operating
the NXG Control System.
The NXG Control Operating manual is intended for use with the Perfect Harmony series of
adjustable speed AC motor drives. This manual is intended for use by persons with a working
knowledge of the NXG Control System. Specific configurations of the drive family are described
in more detail in the specific Operating Instructions Manual pertaining to that hardware
configuration. In addition, for information relating to maintenance and trouble-shooting of the
NXG Control System, refer to the drive-specific Operating Instructions Manual.
NXG Software Version

This manual applies to NXG software Version 5.2 and later.
1.1 Power Topology

Perfect Harmony drives contain individually controlled, interconnected power cells.
Each cell consists of a three-phase input and a single phase output, which are configured in
three individual, concatenated strings of cells making up three output phases. Control and
diagnostic data is transmitted between the control and the cells on independent fiber optic
channels.
1.2 Control Overview

Perfect Harmony is a simple "synchronous" control. It coordinates the complex, cell-based
power topology to produce a simple, multi-level pulse width modulation (PWM) to the output
connection of the drive. Basic operation is summarized as follows:
1. The control sends a message to each power cell control via dedicated fiber links. The return
cell response, via a separate fiber, communicates cell status and diagnostics.
2. The cell executes the request by gating one switch pair, which results in one of the following
outcomes:
– Plus DC voltage
– Minus DC voltage
– Zero voltage
NXG Control
Introduction
1.3 Protocol for Cell Communication
3. The cell control confirms that the switch pair gated.

4. The control confirms gating from:
– Output voltage divider
– Output Hall effect current transducer
● No two cells switch at the same time.
● The cell switching rate is low compared to the effective switching frequency of the VFD:
– Typically 600 Hz carrier frequency per pole results in 1200 Hz switching frequency per
cell.
● The VFD effective switching frequency is calculated simply as:
– cell switching frequency * number of cells per phase
● The switching rate is constant over the entire output frequency range.
● The default control mode is open loop vector control (OLVC). Control modes Volts/Hertz
(V/Hz) and closed loop vector control (CLVC), i.e. with encoder, are also available.

Perfect Harmony cells incorporate a dedicated, simple protocol to communicate with the cells.
While the drive is running, information sent to each cell consists of:
● run enable
● gating information
● a synchronizing bit for the temperature feedback engine.
Information sent from the drive consists of:
● the cell temperature encoded into a single bit
● the fault status
● a low cell voltage level warning.
Fault information is "wire-OR'd" at the modulator so that all cells can shut down within
microseconds of a detected fault on a single cell. After a fault is detected, diagnostic routines
run to identify the exact fault and cell location.
Advanced Protocol (AP)

In addition to this protocol, advanced protocol (AP) provides further information communicated
from and to the cell while the drive is running. AP maintains backward compatibility with older
cell types.
AP requires new cell control boards (CCBs) and a new modulator board because this
communication is handled completely in the firmware of both boards.
The modulator detects the presence of CCBs supporting AP on an individual cell basis, and
can dynamically fall back to original protocol for an older cell type. Although this capability is
available in the control, it may not be feasible within the power electronics to mix cell types,
unless running at the least common denominator of cell capability.
NXG Control
Introduction
AP provides additional feedback from cells equipped with this protocol capability for the
NXG Control while the drive is running. AP maintains the fast legacy signals needed for control
and fault handling.
NXG Control
Safety notes 2
2.1 General Safety Information
Proper Use
Perfect Harmony™ Medium Voltage Drives must always be installed in closed electrical
operating areas. The Drive is connected to the industrial network via a circuit-breaker.
The specific transport conditions must be observed when the equipment is transported. The
equipment shall be assembled/installed and the separate cabinet units connected properly by
cable and/or busbar in accordance with the assembly/installation instructions. The relevant
instructions regarding correct storage, EMC-compliant installation, cabling, shielding and
grounding and an adequate auxiliary power supply must be strictly observed. Fault-free
operation is also dependent on careful operation and maintenance. Refer to the Drive's
Operating Instructions Manual, Section EMC Installation Guidelines for Perfect Harmony.
WARNING
Potential Arc Hazard
● Arcing can result in damage to property, serious injury and even death.
● The equipment has not been tested for resistance to internal arcing.
● Avoiding arc hazard risks is dependent upon proper installation and maintenance.
● Incorrectly applied equipment, incorrectly selected, connected or unconnected cables, or
the presence of foreign materials can cause arcing in the equipment.
● Follow all precautionary rules and guidelines as used in working with Medium Voltage
switchgear.
● The equipment may be used only:
– for the applications defined as suitable in the technical description.
– in combination with equipment and components supplied by other manufacturers
which have been approved and recommended by Siemens.
The power sections are designed for variable-speed drives use with synchronous and
asynchronous motors. Operating modes, overload conditions, load cycles, and ambient
conditions different to those described in this document are allowed only by special
arrangement with the manufacturer.
Commissioning may only be carried out by trained service personnel in accordance with the
commissioning instructions.
System components such as circuit-breaker, transformer, cables, cooling unit, motor, speed
sensors, etc., must be matched to VFD operation. System configuration may only be carried
out by an experienced system integrator.
NXG Control
Safety notes
2.3 Observing the Five Safety Rules
2.2 Safety Concept

The medium-voltage variable frequency drive (VFD) and its components are subject to a
comprehensive safety concept which, when properly implemented, ensures safe installation,
operation, servicing, and maintenance.
The safety concept encompasses safety components and functions to protect the device and
operators.
The VFD is also equipped with monitoring functions to protect external components.
The VFD operates safely when the interlock and protection systems are functioning properly.
Nevertheless, there are areas on the medium-voltage drive that are hazardous for personnel
and that can cause material damage if the safety instructions described in this section and
throughout the product documentation are not strictly observed.
2.3 Observing the Five Safety Rules

There are five safety rules that must always be observed to assure not only personal safety,
but to prevent material damage as well. Always obey safety-related labels located on the
product itself and always read and understand each safety precaution prior to operating or
working on the drive.
The five safety rules:
1. Disconnect the system.
2. Protect against reconnection.
3. Make sure that the equipment is de-energized.
4. Apply grounding means.
5. Cover or enclose adjacent components that are still live.
DANGER
Danger Due to High Voltages
High voltages cause death or serious injury if the safety instructions are not observed or if
the equipment is handled incorrectly.
Potentially fatal voltages occur when this equipment is in operation which can remain present
even after the VFD is switched off.
Ensure that only qualified and trained personnel carry out work on the equipment.
Follow the five safety rules during each stage of the work.
NXG Control
Safety notes
2.4 Safety Information and Warnings
DANGER
Hazardous Voltage!
● Always follow the proper lock-out/tag-out procedures before beginning any maintenance
or troubleshooting work on the VFD.
● Always follow standard safety precautions and local codes during installation of external
wiring. The installation must follow wiring practices and insulation systems as specified
in IEC 61800-5-1.
● Always work with one hand, wear electrical safety gloves, wear insulated electrical hazard
rated safety shoes, and safety goggles. Also, always work with another person present.
● Always use extreme caution when handling or measuring components that are inside the
enclosure. Be careful to prevent meter leads from shorting together or from touching other
terminals.
● Use only instrumentation (e.g., meters, oscilloscopes, etc.) intended for high voltage
measurements (that is, isolation is provided inside the instrument, not provided by isolating
the chassis ground of the instrument).
● Never assume that switching off the input disconnector will remove all voltage from internal
components. Voltage is still present on the terminals of the input disconnector. Also, there
may be voltages present that are applied from other external sources.
● Never touch anything within the VFD cabinets until verifying that it is neither thermally hot
nor electrically alive.
● Never remove safety shields (marked with a HIGH VOLTAGE sign) or attempt to measure
points beneath the shields.
● Never operate the VFD with cabinet doors open. The only exception is the control cabinet
which contains extra low voltages (ELV).
● Never connect any grounded (i.e., non-isolated) meters or oscilloscopes to the system.
● Never connect or disconnect any meters, wiring, or printed circuit boards while the VFD
is energized.
● Never defeat the instrument’s grounding.
● Only qualified individuals should install, operate, troubleshoot, and maintain this VFD. A
qualified individual is "a person, who is familiar with the construction and operation of the
equipment and the hazards involved."
● Hazardous voltages may still exist within the VFD cabinets even when the disconnect
switch is open (off) and the supply power is shut off.
● When a system is configured with VFD bypass switchgear (e.g. contactors between line
and motor, and VFD and motor), these switches should be interlocked so that the line
voltage is never applied to the VFD output if the medium input voltage is removed from
the VFD.
NXG Control
Safety notes
Additional safety precautions and warnings appear throughout this manual. These important
messages should be followed to reduce the risk of personal injury or equipment damage.
WARNING
Obey Rules to Avoid Risk of Death
● Always comply with local codes and requirements if disposal of failed components is
necessary (for example, CPU battery, capacitors, etc.).
● Always ensure the use of an even and flat truck bed to transport the VFD system. Before
unloading, be sure that the concrete pad is level for storage and permanent positioning.
● Always confirm proper tonnage ratings of cranes, cables, and hooks when lifting the VFD
system. Dropping the cabinet or lowering it too quickly could damage the unit.
● Never disconnect control power while medium voltage is energized. This could cause
severe system overheating and/or damage.
● Never store flammable material in, on, or near the drive enclosure. This includes
equipment drawings and manuals.
● Never use fork trucks to lift cabinets that are not equipped with lifting tubes. Be sure that
the fork truck tines fit the lifting tubes properly and are the appropriate length.
NXG Control
Safety notes
2.5 ESD-sensitive Components
Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD)
NOTICE
ESD Sensitive Equipment
● Always be aware of electrostatic discharge (ESD) when working near or touching
components inside the VFD cabinet. The printed circuit boards contain components that
are sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Handling and servicing of components that are
sensitive to ESD should be done only by qualified personnel and only after reading and
understanding proper ESD techniques. The following ESD guidelines should be observed.
Following these rules can greatly reduce the possibility of ESD damage to printed circuit
(PC) board components.
● Always transport static sensitive equipment in antistatic bags.
● Always use a soldering iron that has a grounded tip. Also, use either a metallic vacuum-
style plunger or copper braid when desoldering.
● Ensure that anyone handling the printed circuit boards is wearing a properly grounded
static strap The wrist strap should be connected to ground through a 1 Megohm resistor.
Grounding kits are available commercially through most electronic wholesalers.
● Static charge build-up can be removed from a conductive object by touching the object
with a properly grounded piece of metal.
● When handling a PC board, always hold the card by its edges.
● Do not slide printed circuit boards (PCBs) across any surface (e.g., a table or work bench).
If possible, perform PCB maintenance at a workstation that has a conductive covering
that is grounded through a 1 Megohm resistor. If a conductive tabletop cover is
unavailable, a clean steel or aluminum tabletop is an excellent substitute.
● Avoid plastic Styrofoam™, vinyl and other non-conductive materials. They are excellent
static generators and do not give up their charge easily.
● When returning components to Siemens Industry, Inc. always use static-safe packing.
This limits any further component damage due to ESD.
Components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge (ESD)
NOTICE
Electrostatic discharge
Electronic components can be destroyed in the event of improper handling, transporting,
storage, and shipping.
Pack the electronic components in appropriate ESD packaging; e.g. ESD foam, ESD
packaging bags and ESD transport containers.
To protect your equipment against damage, follow the instructions given below.
NXG Control
Safety notes
● Avoid physical contact with electronic components. If you need to perform absolutely
essential work on these components, then you must wear one of the following protective
gear:
– Grounded ESD wrist strap
– ESD shoes or ESD shoe grounding strips if there is also an ESD floor.
● Do not place electronic components close to data terminals, monitors or televisions.
Maintain a minimum clearance to the screen (> 10 cm).
● Electronic components should not be brought into contact with electrically insulating
materials such as plastic foil, plastic parts, insulating table supports or clothing made of
synthetic fibers.
● Place components in contact with ESD-suited materials e.g. ESD tables, ESD surfaces,
ESD packaging.
● Measure on the components only if one of the following conditions is met:
– The measuring device is grounded with a protective conductor, for example.
– The measuring head of a floating measuring device has been discharged directly before
the measurement.
The necessary ESD protective measures for the entire working range for electrostatically
sensitive devices are illustrated once again in the following drawings. Precise instructions for
ESD protective measures are specified in the standard DIN EN 61340-5-1.
d d d
b b
e e
f f f f f
c a c a c a

1 Sitting
2 Standing
3 Standing/sitting
a Conductive floor surface, only effective in conjunction with ESD shoes or ESD shoe grounding
strips
b ESD furniture
c ESD shoes or ESD shoe grounding strips are only effective in conjunction with conductive
flooring
d ESD clothing
e ESD wristband
f Cabinet ground connection
Figure 2-1 ESD Protective Measures
NXG Control
Safety notes
2.6 Electromagnetic Fields in Electrical Power Engineering Installations
2.6 Electromagnetic Fields in Electrical Power Engineering Installations
WARNING
Electromagnetic fields "electro smog" when operating electrical power engineering
installations
Electromagnetic fields are generated during operation of electrical power engineering
installations.
Electromagnetic fields can interfere with electronic devices, which could cause them to
malfunction. For example, the operation of heart pacemakers can be impaired, potentially
leading to damage to a person's health or even death. It is therefore forbidden for persons
with heart pacemakers to enter these areas.
The plant operator is responsible for taking appropriate measures (labels and hazard
warnings) to adequately protect operating personnel and others against any possible risk.
● Observe the relevant nationally applicable health and safety regulations. For example, in
Germany, "electromagnetic fields" are subject to regulations BGV B11 and BGR B11
stipulated by the German statutory industrial accident insurance institution.
● Display adequate hazard warning notices on the installation.
● Place barriers around hazardous areas.
● Take measures, e.g. using shields, to reduce electromagnetic fields at their source.
● Ensure personnel are wearing the appropriate protective gear.
NXG Control
NXG Control Description 3
The NXG Control monitors input power conditions and status, coordinates all power
components, controls output power to the motor, and performs special functions such as
integration into a process and transferring motors synchronously to and from power lines. At
the same time, the NXG Control protects the drive, the connected system process and the
motor. With specially equipped cells, the control also allows the cells to cleanly regenerate
power back into the input power feed.
7UDQVIRUPHUDQG 3RZHU 2XWSXW

,QSXW6HFWLRQ (OHFWURQLFV&HOOV &RQQHFWLRQ
0RWRU
60)LHOG6XSSO\
LIXVHG
%\SDVV
&RQWURO
1;*&RQWURO
1HWZRUN
&RQQHFWLRQ
.H\SDG 'ULYH+RVW
7RRO
Figure 3-1 NXG Control in a typical drive system
Note
The terms velocity and speed are used interchangeably throughout this manual.
3.1 Control System
The NXG Control System was first used in the second generation of Perfect Harmony drives.
A third generation Perfect Harmony control, known as NXGII, is now available. The NXGII
Control System has a lower part count, smaller footprint, and faster performance. Along with
the hardware, the real-time operating system (RTOS) has been upgraded for increased
NXG Control
NXG Control Description
3.1 Control System
performance and to meet increasing processing and feature demands. The following figures
detail the NXG and NXGII control platforms.
NXG Control Platform

The NXG Control System, located within the control cabinet, consists of a chassis and several
control boards as shown in Figure NXG Master Control Chassis .
'LJLWDO0RGXODWRU%RDUG
)LEHU2SWLF,QWHUIDFH%RDUGV
)LEHU2SWLF&DEOHWR
0HGLXP9ROWDJH%\SDVV
&RPPXQLFDWLRQV%RDUG
%RDUG
6\VWHP,QWHUIDFH%RDUG
$QDORJWR'LJLWDO%RDUG
0LFURSURFHVVRU%RDUG
3RZHU6XSSO\
&RQQHFWLRQ
)LEHU2SWLF&DEOHVWR&HOOV
Figure 3-2 NXG Master Control Chassis
The NXG Control uses the following power supplies:
NXG Control
3.1 Control System
● One rack-mounted power supply

– +5V
– ± 12 V
– -5V
● Two hall effect power supplies
– + 15 V
– - 15 V
● One WAGO power supply
● + 24 V power supply
NXG Control
3.1 Control System
NXGII Control Platform

The NXGII Control System, located within the control cabinet, consists of a chassis and several
control boards as shown in Figure NXGII Master Control Chassis.
7R%UHDNRXW%RDUG
7R6LJQDO&RQGLWLRQLQJ%RDUG
&RPPXQLFDWLRQV%RDUG 7R%UHDNRXW%RDUG
%*$'LJLWDO0RGXODWRU%RDUG
$Q\EXV
0RGXOHV
.H\SDG$GDSWHU
%RDUG
6\VWHP,2%RDUG
)LEHU2SWLF,QWHUIDFH
%RDUG
1HZ0LFURSURFHVVRU%RDUG
1HZ3RZHU6XSSO\
Figure 3-3 NXGII Master Control Chassis
The NXGII Control uses a single integrated power supply with:

● +5V
● ± 12 V
NXG Control
3.1 Control System
● ± 15 V
● + 24 V
- 5 V is not used.
Microprocessor Board
The heart of the control is the microprocessor board. This board is the master of the backplane
bus and controls the operation of each board in the system.
The flash disk contains the control software, the RTOS, the specific parameter information and
the System Program (SOP) for the VFD. This is mounted on the microprocessor board. The
flash disk may be disconnected and moved to a spare microprocessor board, without having
to reprogram the VFD. See the figure below for the flash disk location on the NXGII
microprocessor board.
)ODVK'LVN
Figure 3-4 Location of Flash Disk on the NXGII Microprocessor Board
NXG Board Communications

The NXG Control system interface board collects the drive input and output feedback signals
and sends them to the analog-to-digital conversion board.
NXG Control
3.2 Control Structure
The analog-to-digital conversion board executes the conversion at specified intervals and
sends digital representations of the feedback signals to the microprocessor board.
The microprocessor board then computes the next set of values for output control and sends
them to the digital modulator.
The digital modulator sends specific commands or messages for each cell. These messages
are sent through the fiber optic interface boards.
NXGII Board Communications

The NXGII Control System combines the functionality of the system I/O board with the analog-
to-digital board. The system I/O board provides additional I/O not available on NXG systems.
Further detail is provided in Section System I/O Board of Chapter Hardware Interface
Description.
The number of fiber optic interface boards and the number of fiber optic channels vary
depending on the number of cells in the drive.
The NXG and NXGII Control Systems include a communications board. This board provides
a direct interface to a Modbus network and allows network adapter boards for several other
industrial networks to be connected to the drive control.
3.1.1 Software Version Requirements and Limitations

Since NXG software versions 4.x and above require NXGII hardware, no software limitations
remain.
Note
The 266 MHz CPU of the NXG board cannot operate correctly with software versions 3.0 and
later.
Do not load software versions 3.0 and later on old NXG hardware without upgrading the
boards to NXGII levels.

The NXG Control System consists of the following components:
● signal interface and conditioning
● A/D converter
● processor
● digital modulator
● fiber optic interfaces.
Figure Control Structure for 6000V Drive shows an example of the control system structure.
NXG Control
Signal Interface and Conditioning

The signal interface processes the feedback signals collected from the drive. These circuits
scale and filter the feedback signals before passing them along to the A/D Converter.
Provisions are included to interface to an emergency stop (ESTOP) signal.
A/D Converter
The function of the A/D converter is to sample the input and output currents and voltages, and
convert them to digital signals for the processor. The sample rate varies from 3 kHz to 6 kHz
and is a function of the carrier frequency (which is also the IGBT switching frequency), and
the number of "available" cells in the system. The digital modulator generates the signal for
the A/D converters to start sampling. Once the A/D converters finish sampling, they provide
an interrupt to the processor to begin its calculation cycle.
Note
The A/D converter board includes provisions for encoder feedback monitoring.
Processor
The processor performs all of the functions for motor control and generates three-phase
voltage commands for the digital modulator. In addition, it monitors the input voltages and
currents to provide:
● metering functions such as power factor, input power, and harmonic calculation
● input protection such as excessive losses, excessive reactive current, under-voltage, and
single-phasing
● input voltage magnitude, frequency, and phase angle for synchronous transfer.
Digital Modulator
The digital modulator contains registers that are used for communication with the processor.
For each phase voltage command, the processor writes two values to the modulator. The first
for the present time instant and the second for a time instant that is extrapolated for half a
sampling period. Also written to the modulator is a voltage increment or step corresponding to
these values and the direct number of steps between values. These phase commands are
written by the processor once every sampling period.
The modulator creates a set of timing signals that cause the control software to sample the
feedback signals and run the control and monitoring algorithms. The timing signals are used
to transmit information to the cells simultaneously, once every 9 to 11 microseconds. This time
is determined by the processor and is based on the drive configuration. The time is fixed for
a particular configuration. In between every transmission period, the modulator performs
interpolation, phase-shifted carrier generation, pulse-width modulation (PWM), and cell
communication. The resulting PWM commands for each cell, along with the mode of operation,
is assembled as a data packet that is transmitted to each cell through dedicated fiber optic
interfaces. In response to the transmitted data, the modulators receive a similar data packet
from each of the cells. The return message from the cells contains status bits that are decoded
by the modulator and conveyed to the processor.
Every transmission is checked for completeness and parity. If an error is detected, a link fault
is generated. The data packet sent to the power cells provides operational mode and switching
information. The local communication circuits in each power cell operate as slaves to the
NXG Control
modulator. The local control circuits on each power cell convert the information received to
IGBT firing pulses.
The return packet echos the operational mode and cell status, except for AP cells. Should an
individual cell be bypassed, the modulator commands all power cells to disable their outputs
with the next message to the cells. The worst case shut down of all power cells requires two
transmission cycles or 22 µsec maximum.
When advanced cell bypass is included with a drive, the modulator communicates with the
bypass controller and monitors hardware faults such as instantaneous over-current (IOC),
ESTOP, and power supply faults. The bypass controller is configured to control the cell bypass
(mechanical) contactors. After detection of a cell fault, the processor communicates with the
bypass controller to bypass the faulted cells. In addition to bypassing cells, the bypass
controller constantly checks the status of the contactors to verify that they are in their requested
states.
Fiber Optic Interface

The fiber optic interface transfers data between the modulator and the cells over dedicated
fiber optic channels. Each cell receives its firing commands and status signals through a full
duplex fiber optic channel.
NXG Control
&HOO
$
6SHFLDO7UDQVIRUPHU
&HOO
ZLWK,VRODWHG
%
6HFRQGDULHV
IRU9$& &HOO .H\SDG
&
&HOO
$
&HOO
%
&HOO
&
'LJLWDO
0RGXODWRU
&HOO %RDUG
$
,QSXW3RZHU 0LFURSURFHVVRU
SKDVH$& &HOO
%RDUG
%
&HOO
&
&HOO
$
&HOO
%
&HOO
&
&HOO )LEHU
$
2SWLF
&HOO ,QWHUIDFH
% %RDUG
IRU $QDORJWR
&HOO H[SDQVLRQ 'LJLWDO%RDUG
& DQG
6\VWHP
,QWHUIDFH
%RDUG
&RQGLWLRQLQJ
9ROWDJH &LUFXLWV
$WWHQXDWRU
9$&
,QGXFWLRQ
,QSXW9ROWDJHDQG
0RWRU
&XUUHQW)HHGEDFN
Figure 3-5 Control Structure for 6000V Drive
Overmodulation
To achieve increased voltage with the same number of cells, cells can be overmodulated. This
is done automatically in air-cooled 6SR4[ ]02 (GenIV) and water-cooled 6SR3[ ]52 (WCIII)
drives. For other drive types, set the "OverModulationEnable_O" SOP flag true for
overmodulation of cells.
NXG Control
3.3 Control Modes
To disable overmodulation, set the "OverModulationDisable_O" SOP flag true.

Overmodulation may be used in place of standard modulation with the advantage that less
cells are required. A disadvantage of overmodulation is that it can increase output harmonics.
3.3 Control Modes
Vector Control
Perfect Harmony drives use vector control to control induction motors and synchronous
motors. Vector control provides a framework that is simple to implement, and performs nearly
as well as a DC motor. Figure Vector Control Algorithms shows a simplified representation of
the vector control algorithms implemented in Perfect Harmony drives. The basic components
of vector control are:
1. Motor model: determines motor flux, angle and speed.
2. Current regulators: these regulators are referred to as the inner loops.
3. Flux and speed regulators: these regulators are referred to as the outer loops.
4. Feed-forward (FF) compensation: improves the transient response of torque loop and flux
loop.
Components of Vector Control
Motor Model
The motor model uses measured motor voltage and estimated stator resistance voltage drop
to determine stator flux amplitude, motor speed and flux angle. This allows stator resistance
compensation to be automatic. A simplification of motor equations is obtained by transforming
the three-phase AC quantities, which are referred to being in a stationary reference frame, to
DC quantities that are in a synchronously rotating or DQ reference frame. A phase-locked loop
(PLL) within the motor model tracks the stator frequency and angle of the flux vector.
Flux and Speed Regulators

Motor flux amplitude is controlled by the flux regulator; its output forms the command for the
magnetizing or flux-producing component. Motor speed is determined from stator frequency,
and is controlled by the speed regulator. Its output is the command for the torque-producing
current regulator. Motor speed is compensated for slip in induction machines.
Current Regulators
The flux angle is used to decompose the measured motor currents into magnetizing and torque
producing components. It is this decomposition that allows independent control of flux and
torque, similar to DC motor control. These current components are regulated to their
commanded values by the current regulators. Outputs of the current regulators are combined
and converted to produce three-phase voltage commands that get modified with signals from
NXG Control
3.3 Control Modes
various other control routines, before being passed on to the modulator. These control routines
include:
● Dead-time compensation to compensate for dead-time in the switching of the upper and
lower IGBTS of each pole in a power cell.
● Peak reduction for third-harmonic injection to maximize drive output voltage, and for drive
neutral-shift during transparent cell-bypass.
● Voltage commands to produce losses for dual-frequency braking.
Feed-forward Compensation
Transient response of the flux and torque regulators is improved with the use of feed-forward
(FF) compensation as shown in Figure Vector Control Algorithms.
)OX['6
,GV
)OX[ 0DJQHWL]LQJ
5HJXODWRU &XUUHQW5HJXODWRU 'XDO
)OX[5HI ,GVUHI )UHTXHQF\
ː 3,/3) ː 3, %UDNLQJ >@ 9ROWDJH

FRPPDQGVWR
>@ >@ 0RGXODWRU
9GVUHI 'HDG7LPH
'4
)OX[)) &RPSHQVDWLRQ
7R ː
DQG3HDN
>@ 9TVUHI
5HGXFWLRQ
6SHHG 7RUTXH&XUUHQW >@
5HJXODWRU 5HJXODWRU
ˆ6
6SHHG5HI
ː 3,/3) ː 3, ː
,TVUHI

>@ >@
,TV
˶U 0RWRU
6SHHG ˶V
&/9&60& ,T))
)OX['6 >@
ː 9+]
˶V
˶ HQFRGHU ,GV
&/9&&60& ,D &XUUHQW
&/9&&60&
7R )HHGEDFN
60&9+] ,E
2/9& ,TV '4 >@
,F
˶ VOLS
)OX['6
/RZ)UHT \D ,QWHJUDWHG
6OLSFDOFXODWLRQ
>@ &RPSDQG 9ROWDJH
>@ \E
7R'4 )HHGEDFN
,GVUHI ,TVUHI )OX['6 ˶V 3// \F >@
)OX[46 >@
ˆ6
ˆ6 >@
0RWRU0RGHO
Numbers within square brackets show the parameter ID for the corresponding function.
Figure 3-6 Vector Control Algorithms
NXG Control
3.3 Control Modes
Table 3-1 Symbols used in Figure Vector Control Algorithms
Symbol Description
FluxDS D-component of motor flux as referenced to the stator; also equal to the motor flux, since
Q-component is zero. Motor Flux is defined as: Motor_Voltage / Stator_Frequency (rad/s).
Flux (which has units of Volt-seconds) is also proportional (but not equal) to Volts-per-Hertz
ratio.
r For an induction motor: Motor_Speed = Stator_Frequency / Pole_Pairs – Slip_Speed
This is the rotor (mechanical) frequency, which is equivalent to the motor speed.
For a synchronous motor: Motor _Speed = Stator_Frequency / Pole_Pairs
Ids Magnetizing component of motor current.
Iqs Torque producing component of motor current.
Vds,ref Output of magnetizing current regulator used in the inverse D-Q transformation to produce
3-phase voltages.
Vqs,ref Output of torque current regulator used in the inverse D-Q transformation to produce 3-
phase voltages.
ωs Stator frequency or output frequency of the drive. This is motorspeed (r) + Slip.
θs Flux angle. This is the instantaneous position of the rotating flux vector.
Ia, Ib, Ic Motor phase currents.
Motor torque in newton-meters and shaft power can be calculated as:
Torque (Nm) = 3 * Pole_Pairs * Flux (V-secs) * Iqs (A)

≈ 3 * Pole_Pairs * Motor_Voltage (V) * Iqs (A) / (2 π * Frequency (Hz))
Shaft Power (W) = Torque (Nm) * Speed (rad/s) = Torque (Nm) * Speed (rpm) / 9.55
Rated Speed = 120 * rated frequency / number of pole pairs
Vector Control Modes

The NXG Control provides several control modes for the Perfect Harmony drive. The modes
are described in the sections that follow.
Summary of the Control Modes
Control Mode Vector Control Type of Motor Encoder Features

Open loop vector Vector control Induction Without encoder ● Fast bypass option
control mode (OLVC) ● Spinning load
option
Open loop test mode N/a Not for motor control N/a Fast bypass and
(OLTM) spinning load are
disabled.
Synchronous motor Vector control Synchronous Without encoder ● Fast bypass option
control mode (SMC) ● Spinning load
option
NXG Control
3.3 Control Modes
Control Mode Vector Control Type of Motor Encoder Features

Volts / Hertz control No vector control Induction - usually Without encoder ● No fast bypass
mode (V/Hz) muliple connected in ● No spinning load
parallel
Closed loop vector Vector control Induction With encoder ● Fast bypass option
control mode (CLVC) ● Spinning load
option
Closed synchronous Vector control Synchronous With encoder ● Fast bypass option
motor control mode ● Spinning load
(CSMC) option
Permanent magnet Vector control Permanent magnet Without encoder ● Fast bypass option
motor control mode motor ● No spinning load
(PMM)
● High starting
torque enabled
automatically
Synchronous motor Vector control Synchronous with DC Without encoder ● No fast bypass
brushless DC exciter exciter ● No spinning load
mode (SMDC)
3.3.1 Open Loop Vector Control (OLVC)

Open loop vector control (OLVC) is used for most applications with single induction motors.
In this mode, the control estimates motor slip as a function of load torque, and provides a
performance that matches a vector controlled drive with speed sensor/transducer above a
certain minimum speed. With the correct motor parameters, the control can provide good
performance even at 1% of rated speed.
With this mode, speed feedback is synthesized from the stator frequency and the estimated
motor slip, and slip compensation is automatic.
In this control mode, if spinning load is selected, the drive begins by scanning the frequency
range to detect the speed of the rotating motor. Once the drive has completed the scan or if
the feature is disabled, the drive goes into magnetizing state. During this state, the drive ramps
the motor flux to its commanded value at the specified flux ramp rate. Only when the flux
feedback is within 90% of the commanded flux, the drive changes to the run state. Once in
run state, the drive increases the speed to the desired value. All motor and drive parameters
are required for this mode of operation. Default values for the control loop gains are sufficient
for most applications.
3.3.2 Open Loop Test Mode (OLTM)
CAUTION
Open loop test mode (OLTM) is used for test purposes during commissioning only.
Do not use this mode to control a motor.
NXG Control
3.3 Control Modes
In OLTM the motor current feedback signals are ignored. This control mode is used during
drive setup, when the modulation on the cells is to be verified, or when testing the drive without
a load. It can also be used when the motor is first connected to the drive to make sure that the
Hall effect transducers are working correctly and are providing the correct polarity on the
feedback signals. Do not use this mode to adjust scale factors for input and output, voltage
and currents.
In this mode, the drive goes through the magnetizing state to the run state without considering
the motor flux. Only motor nameplate values and some drive related parameters are required
for this mode. Ensure the following parameter settings are configured for this control mode:
● Disable spinning load and fast bypass.
● Increase acceleration and deceleration times in the Speed Ramp Menu.
● Reduce flux demand. Flux and voltage instability may occur with an attached motor.
● Uncouple any connected motor from a load. Do not run higher than 20 to 25 %, this allows
for verification of the current feedback polarity.
3.3.3 Synchronous Motor Control (SMC)

For synchronous motor control (SMC), the drive is equipped with a field exciter that usually
consists of a SCR based current regulator; a 3PCI controller is typically used for the exciter.
The field exciter operates to maintain a field current level that is commanded by the flux
regulator. An example application for a brushless synchronous motor is shown in the figure
below.
3HUIHFW+DUPRQ\'ULYH
6\QFKUR
,QSXW
,QYHUWHU QRXV
09
0RWRU
&RQWURO &LUFXLW:KHHO
RQ0RWRU
)LHOG&XUUHQW
&RPPDQG
9
$X[
3RZHU
SKDVHZRXQG
3&,)LHOG([FLWHU ,QGXFWLRQ([FLWHU
a9$&
Figure 3-7 Drive Arrangement for Synchronous Motor with AC Brushless Exciter
NXG Control
3.3 Control Modes
The figure shows a brushless synchronous motor with the static exciter wound for 3-phase AC
in the range of 350 to 400 volts. If this is not the case, then a transformer is needed between
the auxiliary power and the 3PCI. The circuit wheel needs only a rectifier.
Motor Protection
The NXG Control provides for minimal motor protection when the motor is connected to the
drive. For a system that employs drive, not cell, bypass, external protection of the motor is
required. NXG Control will trip the drive on a loss of field fault if the motor draws excessive
reactive current, which will occur when the exciter fails full on or off. An external means to
disconnect the exciter power from the field is required to fully protect the motor.
Flux regulator implementation

The overall control strategy is similar to OLVC, except for the flux regulator implementation.
Refer to Figure Vector Control Algorithms. For synchronous motors, the flux regulator provides
2 current commands, one for the field exciter current, and another for the magnetizing
component of stator current.
Determining motor speed

SMC avoids the need to scan the motor frequency to determine motor speed. The control uses
information from the rotor-induced speed voltages on the stator to determine rotor speed. The
drive begins, in the magnetizing state, by giving a field current command that is equal to the
no-load field current setting to the exciter. This lasts for a time equal to the programmable flux
ramp time that is entered through the menu system.
After this period of time, the drive goes into the run state. In most cases, the regulator in the
field exciter is slow, and the drive applies magnetizing current, through the stator windings to
assist the exciter in establishing rated flux on the motor. At the same time, the speed regulator
commands a torque-producing current to accelerate the motor to the demanded speed. Once
the field exciter establishes the required field current to maintain flux in the motor, the
magnetizing component of stator current reduces to zero. From this point onward, the drive
provides torque-producing current, for acceleration or deceleration that is in-phase with the
drive output voltage. That is, under steady state conditions, unity power factor condition is
automatically maintained at the drive output. The field current command is provided to the field
exciter with the use of an analog output signal.
Summary of differences between SMC and OLVC

● The motor no-load current parameter represents the field no-load current value in SMC.
● With SMC, the flux loop gains are slightly lower than with OLVC.
● Spinning load is always enabled with SMC.
● The drive magnetizing current regulator uses only the proportional gain for the flux exciter.
NXG Control
3.3 Control Modes
● Only Stage 1 auto-tuning can be used with synchronous motors.

● When you are performing Stage 1 auto-tuning, you must short the field winding to get a
proper setup of the stator resistance.
CAUTION
Incorrect use of Stage 2 auto-tuning will lead to drive instability.
Never use Stage 2 auto-tuning with synchronous motors.
Only use Stage 1 auto-tuning with synchronous motors.
3.3.4 Volts/Hertz Control (V/Hz)

Volts/Hertz (V/Hz) control is used when the drive is connected to multiple motors in parallel.
The control algorithm is similar to OLVC, except that it does not use some of the motor
parameters in its control algorithm that OLVC does. High starting torque mode is available in
this control mode.
Note
Many of the features available with OLVC, such as fast bypass, spinning load, and slip
compensation, are not available with this mode, as individual feedback and control of each
motor is not possible.
3.3.5 Closed Loop Control (CLVC or CSMC)

Closed loop vector control (CLVC or CSMC) is used for more precise speed control and for
higher torque at lower speeds. In applications where stable, low speed operation (below 1 Hz)
under high torque conditions is required, an encoder may be used to provide speed feedback.
Encoder speed feedback is directly used as an input to the speed regulator.
When an encoder is used with the drive, the control loop type is required to be set to CLVC
for closed loop vector control with an induction motor, or to CSMC for closed loop vector control
with a synchronous motor. Enable spinning load when using this control mode.
3.3.6 Permanent Magnet Motor Control (PMM)

Permanent magnet motor (PMM) control is used for permanent magnet motors, as these
motors have special starting requirements. Magnets in the PMM provide flux. The drive does
not have to generate Ids to maintain flux. Output power factor (PF) control is possible.
NXG Control
3.3 Control Modes
Although PMMs are considered synchronous motors, PMM control features differ from the
synchronous motor control types. One such difference is that PMM control automatically
enables high starting torque mode.
Note
There is no encoder capability for use with PMM control mode. Do not use the CSMC for
PMM control to include an encoder, as this will not function correctly.
With PMM control, the flux regulator output is disabled. Instead, Ids,ref is calculated based on
the Reactive Current mode (2981) selection. PF, as shown in the vector diagrams, is measured
from the drive output terminals, not from the motor reference.
The following figure shows the control with the flux regulator disabled.
0DQXDORU
1HWZRUN
,QSXW
$XWR'LVDEOHG
)OX['6
)OX[
5HJXODWRU
300
)OX[5HI ː 3,/3)
,GVUHI
$OO0RGHV
([FHSW300
Figure 3-8 Flux Regulator for PMM Control Mode
The possible selections for Reactive Current mode are as follows.
Note
Since the Auto and Auto Phase Advance modes increase the output power and voltage to
the motor, these modes must be disabled if attempting synchronous transfer of the PMM.
The Manual modes may also prevent proper operation of synchronous transfer.
Disabled mode
This mode is the basic PMM control configuration. Since the flux is along the D-axis and Ids
and Vds are zero, the drive voltage is uncompensated and motor back EMF is unknown.
The figure below shows the vector diagram for disabled mode:
NXG Control
3.3 Control Modes
4D[LV
M; /,V 9TV
9V
&HPI
&XUUHQW ,TV ,V
)OX['V 'D[LV
Figure 3-9 Disabled Mode
● Ids,ref = 0
● Drive output PF = 1
● Motor PF (rotor reference) is less than unity
● Ids compensation is off
Auto mode
In this mode, the PF is controlled to produce the maximum torque per amp of the PMM motor
by ensuring the torque producing current is aligned to the motor Cemf. This is accomplished
by compensating for the voltage loss and phase delay caused by the total stator inductance,
parameter Stator Ls Total (1081). Total Stator inductance is defined as:
Total Stator Inductance = Leakage inductance + Magnetizing stator inductance
The figure below shows the vector diagram for auto mode:
4D[LV
9GV 9GV M; /,V

9V
&HPI
&XUUHQW ,TV ,V
9TV
)OX['V 'D[LV
Figure 3-10 Auto Mode
● Ids,ref = 0
● Drive output PF < 1
NXG Control
3.3 Control Modes
● Motor PF (rotor reference) = 1

● Auto PF is on
Manual mode
This mode is used on test stands for which manual control is desired. Ids,ref is entered manually
via parameter Output Ids (2982). The value entered can be positive or negative 100% of the
motor current rating. The magnitude is prevented from becoming less than 1% to prevent
instability. Vs is aligned to the q-axis.
The figures below show the vector diagrams for manual mode and manual network mode with
positive Ids and negative Ids.
4D[LV
M; /,V
9V &HPI
,GV
,TV
&XUUHQW ,V
)OX['V 'D[LV
Figure 3-11 Manual Mode / Manual Network Mode (positive Ids)
● Ids,ref > 0
● Drive output PF < 1 based on the stator current vector
● Motor PF (rotor reference) < 1
● XL compensation is off (motor inductance voltage drop not compensated)
4D[LV
M; /,V
&HPI
9V
,TV
&XUUHQW ,V
,GV )OX['V 'D[LV
Figure 3-12 Manual Mode / Manual Network Mode (negative Ids)
NXG Control
3.3 Control Modes
● Ids,ref < 0
● Drive output PF < 1 based on the stator current vector
● Motor PF (rotor reference) < 1
● XL compensation is off (motor inductance voltage drop not compensated)
Manual network mode

This mode is similar to manual mode but does not have all the protections of manual mode.
Ids,ref is provided by the network as a percentage * 10 for scaling purposes.
● Ids,ref is entered via the network
● Vs is aligned to the q-axis
● Drive Output PF < 0 based on the stator current vector
● Motor PF (rotor reference) < 1 (motor inductance voltage drop not compensated)
Refer to figures in Manual Mode Section for vector diagrams associated with this mode.
Both manual and manual network mode can be used to test PMMs that require a full current
test where no torque load is available.
Auto phase advance mode

Auto phase advance mode is similar to auto mode in that it works below the base speed of the
motor, to obtain maximum torque per amp, by compensating for the voltage loss and phase
shift due to the stator inductance. Above base speed, a voltage regulator is enabled to maintain
the voltage of the PMM at the base rating, by producing negative Ids,ref. The flux produced in
the stator counteracts the constant flux of the magnets, thereby maintaining the motor terminal
volts constant as the counter EMF goes up. PMMs have a fixed flux and therefore a fixed V/
Hz ratio.
● Below base speed, the voltage regulator output is clamped at zero, so it adds no more flux
to the machine. The reference for the voltage is rated motor voltage.
● Above base speed, the voltage regulator comes out of the clamp limits, and Ids current starts
to move in a negative direction, producing a counter field in the stator inductance that
maintains the motor terminal voltage to the motor rated value.
97
)OX[YROWDJH
UHJXODWRU

9UDWHG
ː 3,/3) ,GVUHI

,GVUDWHG
Figure 3-13 Auto Phase Advance Voltage Regulator
The figures below show the vector diagrams for auto phase advance mode below and above
base speed:
NXG Control
3.3 Control Modes
4D[LV
9GV 9GV M; /,V

9V
&HPI
&XUUHQW ,TV ,V
9TV
)OX['V 'D[LV
Figure 3-14 Auto Phase Advance below base speed
● Ids,ref = 0
● Drive output PF < 1 (motor inductance voltage drop is compensated)
● Motor PF (rotor reference) = 1 with the motor inductance drop being compensated
● Auto PF is on (XL compensation)
4D[LV
M; /,V
&HPI
9V
,TV
&XUUHQW ,V
,GV )OX['V 'D[LV
Figure 3-15 Auto Phase Advance above base speed
● Ids,ref is from the output of the voltage regulator

● Drive output PF < 1 (motor inductance voltage drop is compensated)
● Motor PF < 1 (XL compensation is on)
● Ids < 0
Parameter Settings for PMM Control

The parameters associated with this control mode are:
● Stator Ls Total (1081) to select auto PF or auto phase advance control.
● Reactive current mode (2981) to select the mode of operation.
● Output Ids (2982) to enter a value between -100.0 % and 100.0 % for manual control.
NXG Control
3.3 Control Modes
3.3.7 Synchronous Motor with DC Brushless Exciter (SMDC)

Synchronous Motor with DC Brushless Exciter (SMDC) control is used for all applications with
synchronous motors (SMs) that have a brushless DC exciter. Unlike SMs with an AC exciter,
SMs with a brushless DC exciter require a different starting strategy to pull the motor into
synchronization.
For normal SM operation with brushless AC excitation, the full flux is already established when
the VFD starts. The DC exciter cannot provide any main field current, and hence the flux, when
at standstill. To start such a machine, the VFD applies a high starting torque current with a
slowing rotating vector, to align enough with the rotor poles to begin magnetization of the motor.
When alignment begins, the motor shaft will begin to spin. Once the motor is rotating, the drive
will pull the motor into synchronization and transition to normal SMC.
Startup is based on the high starting torque method already implemented in NXG code. It adds
a separate starting state machine that requires only the selection of SMDC control mode. High
starting torque mode is set internally and automatically.
Once operational, the machine will continue in operation as a standard SM. Spinning load and
fast bypass cannot be used in this control mode, these features are disabled internally.
NOTICE
Potential Damage to Motor
If the motor does not come to a complete stop before restarting it may result in higher than
rated torque on the motor and shaft, and lead to damage to the motor or load.
Ensure that the motor has come to a complete stop before restarting.
Parameter Settings for SMDC

The parameters associated with this control mode are detailed in Sections Drive Menu (2)
Options and Motor Menu (1) Options of Chapter Parameter Assignment / Addressing. These
parameters are:
● Control loop type (2050) in the Drive Parameter Menu (2000)
● Max DC Exciter Curr (1105) in the Motor Parameter Menu (1000)
● Initial Mag Current (1106) in the Motor Parameter Menu (1000)
NXG Control
3.5 Control Loops
3.4 Watchdog Protections

There are three internal watchdog protections across all control modes. The purpose of
watchdog protection is to shut down the drive if an internal error were to occur during operation.
The watchdog protections are:
● I/O watchdog - This watchdog is built into the system I/O board, as part of the NXGII
hardware. On an I/O watchdog trip, the analog outputs and digital outputs are all set to
zero. Any circuitry connected to these circuits will be affected in this manner.
● CPU watchdog - This watchdog triggers if any processes of the drive's operating system
stop functioning. This feature, enabled by the Enable Watchdog parameter (2971) monitors
the state of all processes, and trips the drive after a fixed 20 seconds if any processes are
non-functioning. Enable Watchdog parameter (2971) is located in the Watchdog Menu
(2970). For details, refer to Section Options for Drive Menu (2) of Chapter Parameter
Assignment / Addressing.
● Modulator watchdog - This watchdog disables all cell outputs if the CPU stops
communicating with the modulator. Since the CPU has stopped functioning properly, no
fault condition can display but the power electronics will shut down via the modulator
watchdog.
If the external Wago I/O system is used, the Wago watchdog must be enabled. Refer to "Wago
timeout" parameter (2850) for additional information.
See also
Options for Drive Menu (2) (Page 75)
3.5 Control Loops
The NXG Control includes three main control loops that are defined in the following sections.
3.5.1 Current Loop

The current loops form the innermost loop of the NXG Control System. It is essential that these
loops are stable for correct operation of the drive. When the current loop gains are very low,
then the drive output currents do not have a sinusoidal waveshape, i.e., dead-bands can be
seen around the zero-crossings, and the peaks are not smooth but appear flat. On the other
hand, when current loop gains are too high, then a high frequency ringing appears on the
sinusoidal current waveform. IOC trips can also occur if this is the case.
Default values of the current loop gains are sufficient for most applications. Tuning may be
required for high performance applications and when output filters are used. Refer to Section
Output Filters in Chapter Advanced Operating Functions for more information. Lower current
loop gains are recommended in synchronous transfer applications when the drive output
voltage capability is only a couple of percent higher than the utility or line voltage. This capability
is displayed as "Safe Voltage" on the debug screen.
NXG Control
3.5 Control Loops
See also
Output Filters (Page 187)
3.5.2 Speed Loop

Control of motor speed is accomplished with the speed regulator. The output of the speed loop
forms the torque current command (Iqs,ref). The default speed loop gains work well when the
motor and the load have similar inertia. Speed loop gains require tuning when its output shows
significant oscillations during small changes in speed command. In general, when this occurs,
reduce the integral gain first and then reduce the proportional gain.
Default values for the double speed Kf gain and the speed loop filter time constant are
sufficient. A value closer to 0.5 for the double speed gain allows reduced overshoot, while a
value closer to 1.0 makes the speed regulator a traditional PI regulator and could have more
overshoot.
For applications where the motor and load do not have similar inertia, adjustment of the default
settings is necessary, as in the following examples:
● ESP applications have motors with very low inertia. In such applications, the speed loop
proportional and integral gains can be safely reduced by a factor of 5 or more from their
default settings.
● Fan applications have motors with very high inertia. In such applications, the speed loop
proportional and integral gains are typically reduced by a factor of 2 to 5 from their default
settings. These applications, in general, do not require fast speed regulator response, and
a reduction in speed loop gains prevents large or sudden changes in the torque current
command.
3.5.3 Flux Loop

Regulation of motor flux is accomplished with the flux control loop. The output of the flux loop
forms the magnetizing current command (Ids,ref). The default flux loop gains work well for most
induction motor applications. For synchronous motor applications, use lower gains. Flux loop
gains require tuning when the regulator output shows significant oscillations during steady
state operation.
NXG Control
Hardware Interface Description 4
This chapter details the interfacing components of the NXG Control. The NXG and NXGII
Controls are structured differently but essentially have the same interface functionality.
The scope of the interface, as described in this chapter, is from the control rack to the cell
interface, and includes hardware descriptions of the various components.
4.1 Signal Conditioning

The drive must have feedbacks from the system under control to function properly. Due to the
wide range of input voltages and currents, and due also to the dangerously high levels of both
input and output signals, interposing sensors are used to scale the signals to a safe and usable
level in the control cabinet, and present them to the controls. These are composed of input
and output voltage attenuators, input current transformers (CTs), and output Hall effect
sensors. Detailed information, including values and locations of sensors, is described in the
Operating Instructions Manual for the specific Perfect Harmony system.
The control uses various direct signal levels. The signals are scaled in such a way as to present
the same control level signals independent of the source levels. This allows the control to be
consistent in response from application to application, since the rated values are entered once
for the inputs, and the drive responds in a similar fashion to scaled per unit signals. This is
known as a normalized system.
Signal Conditioning Board

In the NXG Control, a signal conditioning board that is external to the drive control rack provides
connectivity of the signals, while conditioning the signals for conversion into the control
computer board. This board in turn connects via cable to the internal signal interface board,
and finally to the analog to digital converter board.
In NXGII Control, the board functions are combined in the system I/O board.
4.2 System Inputs and Outputs
The drive provides terminal strips as required for end-user connection of isolated analog and
digital input/output (I/O) signals to the drive. Specific I/O implementation is customized for each
drive and you must refer to the drawings provided with the drive. The NXG Control interfaces
each of the I/O points via either built-in or expansion I/O modules. The built-in I/O is dedicated
to I/O points critical to drive operation. The expansion I/O connections, as required, are
intended for system I/O that is for typical drive operation or non-critical for protection.
NXG Control
Hardware Interface Description
4.2.1 Internal User I/O

The system includes provisions for the following types of I/O with specific configuration shown
in the system drawings.
● Analog inputs/outputs
– 0 to 20 mA
– 4 to 20 mA
– 0 ± 10 V
● Digital inputs - low side switching
– 24 Vdc
– 120 Vac
● Digital (relay) outputs
– Normally open or normally closed contacts available
– Refer to system drawings for contact ratings
The SOP determines the routing of each of these I/O points, while the NXG Control provides
a means to define the type and scaling of the analog signals.
4.2.2 System I/O Board

With NXGII Control, the system I/O board provides additional internal digital and analog I/O,
through the I/O breakout board, which can eliminate the need for the WAGO I/O system. The
system I/O provided by the NXGII system I/O board consist of the following capability:
● 20 digital inputs arranged in five groups of four inputs: they accept 24 Vdc or 120 Vac logic
based on which I/O breakout board is used. The first four groups have a single 'common'
per group. The last group are individually isolated.
● 16 digital outputs that are individually isolated: they are form 'C' contacts capable of 1 A
(2 A derated to 1 A), 250 Vac or 30 Vdc, the same as the WAGO system.
● three isolated analog inputs: two that handle 0 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 Vdc and one that is 0 to
20 mA only. The 0 to 10 Vdc inputs also supply the source voltages for the potentiometers.
● two analog outputs: they are 4 to 20 mA sources with a minimum range of 300 μA to 20 mA,
but not zero.
● Isolated encoder interface for a typical quadrature, optical encoder, interface type HTL.
The following functions performed by the system I/O board provide a signal directly to the
modulator to shut down all cells immediately:
● Hall effect power supply fail signal to modulator
● IOC level to modulator (0 to 10 Vdc)
● Control power supply fail signal to modulator
● Inhibit or CR3 signal to modulator
NXG Control
SLQFDEOH
,2%UHDNRXW
6\VWHP,2%RDUG %RDUG
'ULYH)HHGEDFN
6LJQDOV
SLQFDEOH $QDORJ,2
SLQULEERQFDEOH
0RGXODWRU%RDUG
'LJLWDO,2
%DFNSODQH
(QFRGHU
SLQFDEOH
Figure 4-1 System I/O and I/O Breakout Board
Table 4-1 I/O Specification
I/O Breakout I/O Point Nominal Maximum Minimum Threshold Loading

Board P/N Type Voltage Voltage Voltage
A5E01648776 Digital input 120 Vac 135 Vac 85 Vac ~51 V 500 mW
A5E01649341 Digital input 24 Vdc 135 Vac 18 Vdc ~9.1 V 500 mW
I/O Breakout I/O Point Type Type Voltage Current

Board P/N
Both Digital output Relay form "C" 250 Vac, 30 Vdc 1 A, derated
I/O Breakout I/O Point Type Type Load Accuracy Software

Board P/N Correction
Both Analog input 0 to 20 mA, 25 Ohm 10 bits range, offset
4 to 20 mA
Both Analog input 0 to 10 Vdc 10K Ohm 10 bits range, offset
Both Analog output 4 to 20 mA (4) 250 Ohm 10 bits range, offset
loads
NXG Control
I/O Breakout I/O Point Nominal Maximum Minimum Threshold Loading

Board P/N Type Voltage Voltage Voltage
Both Encoder 15 V 18 V 9V ~4.5 V 20 mA
Note
● AC ratings are given in RMS.
● It is not recommended to operate the 24 V digital input circuit at 120 Vac due to the low
threshold voltage.
Since this I/O resource is consistent with every system that uses this board set, and to improve
consistency of usage, some of the I/O have been given standard assignments that are used
by the drive core code. This improves response time, and prevents changes in the SOP from
affecting the drive protection measures assigned to the specific I/O.
4.2.3 Encoder Interface

Closed loop vector control requires speed feedback signals. These inputs come from an
encoder that directly senses the shaft speed of the motor being driven. The drive requires four
square wave signals from the encoder, as shown in Figure Waveforms of Encoder Feedback
Signals.
The channel A and channel B signals are directly proportional to the motor shaft speed. The
signals are 90° out of phase with each other and are 180° out of phase with their respective
complements.
,QWHUIDFH%RDUG
ChA, ChA ChA, ChA

Com, +15V TB3
ChB, ChB ChB, ChB
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5HVHUYHGIRU )HHGEDFN(QFRGHU (QFRGHU 6KLHOG

)HHGEDFN(QFRGHU 6XSSO\
Figure 4-2 Encoder Connections on TB3 of the Interface Board
NXG Control
4.3 Breakout Board
9'&PD[
&KDQQHO$
9'&PD[
9'&PD[
&KDQQHO%
9'&PD[
9'&PD[
&KDQQHO$
9'&PD[
9'&PD[
&KDQQHO%
9'&PD[
90o
Figure 4-3 Waveforms of Encoder Feedback Signals
The maximum signal level at the input to the drive is 0.5 VDCmax for the low signal and 13.5
VDCmax for the high signal. Siemens recommends a minimum pulse rate of 1024 pulses per
revolution to ensure good speed regulation.
Note
The drive requires all four feedback signals to function properly.
4.3 Breakout Board
In the NXGII Control System the breakout board is attached with a cable to the card-mounted
system I/O board. The connections are made to the card rack via the system breakout board.
The breakout board is mounted on the same panel as the control rack and is connected to the
rack via a multi-conductor cable. This is the point to which customer connections are made to
the control system.
Secondary Breakout Board

You may add a second breakout board if necessary. This is achieved by connecting it to the
same Modbus connector as the external Wago - their usage is mutually exclusive.
Set up the secondary board using the menus for the External I/O in the same way that the
Wago is set up, with the exception that the I/O configuration is constant and must be set as
follows:
● Analog inputs: 3
● Analog outputs: 2
NXG Control
4.3 Breakout Board
● Digital inputs: 20
● Digital outputs: 16
Dedicated I/O for Type 5 and Type 6 Pre-charge

The following I/O assignments are dedicated. They are controlled via the NXG code and do
not require SOP intervention. If not listed, the I/O point is mapped by SOP flag as is all WAGO
"external" digital I/O.
These are available for any cell type by selecting type 5 or 6 pre-charge.
Note
Water-cooled 6SR3[ ]52 (WCIII) cells, 750V AP and 750V AP 4Q, must use type 5 or 6 pre-
charge.
Table 4-2 Dedicated Inputs
Input Function Description

6 InSyncRelayACK Precharge Sync OK DI-2B (InternalDigitalInput2b_I)
14 PrechargeRequest Request to start precharge DI-2D (InternalDigitalInput2d_I)
15 M2CloseACK Feedback of M2 contact DI-3D (InternalDigitalInput3d_I)
16 M3CloseACK Feedback of M3 contact DI-0E (InternalDigitalInput0e_I)
Table 4-3 Dedicated Outputs

9 PrechgCompleteM1Close Command to close M1 DO-9 (InternalDigitalOutput9_O)
10 M2Close Command to close M2 DO-10 (InternalDigitalOutput10_O)
13 BreakerTrip Command to open (trip) pre-charge DO-13 (InternalDigitalOutput13_O)
supply breaker
14 M1ClosePermit M1 close permissive DO-14 (InternalDigitalOutput14_O)
Dedicated I/O for Input Protection (IP)

Any cell type may use these dedicated I/O if parameter Dedicated Input Protect (7108) is set
"ON".
Air-cooled 6SR4[ ]02 (GenIV) cells and water-cooled 6SR3[ ]52 (WCIII) cells must use these
dedicated inputs and outputs for IP faults, which are on by default. Turning the parameter off
has no effect on these cell types.
NXG Control
4.4 Modulator and Fiber Optics
Dedicated Inputs

19 LFRInputProtectACK Latch Fault Relay (LFR) status DI-3E (InternalDigitalInput3e_I)
Dedicated Outputs
Output Function Description

14 M1ClosePermit M1 close permissive DO-14 (InternalDigitalOutput14_O)
15 LFRInputProtect Command to set LFR (1 sec pulse) DO-15 (InternalDigitalOutput15_O)
Cell types or Pre-charge modes when Dedicated I/O is not used

For all cell types and pre-charge modes that do not have dedicated I/O assignments in the
code or if the system I/O board is not detected, internal digital I/O are mapped to SOP flags.
The flags are entirely controlled via the SOP.
4.4 Modulator and Fiber Optics

The control system ensures that the power cell units that comprise the power section of the
drive are controlled to act in unison in order to provide a clean, three-phase, sinusoidal output
source to the motor.
The control system inputs the desired control reference signals and regulates the outputs to
provide the cells with the appropriate pulse width modulation (PWM) information. The cells
require the PWM information to operate the transistor H-bridge in each of the cells. The
modulator sends PWM signals nominally to each cell every 10 µs via a fiber optic cable. Fiber
optic cables provide needed electrical isolation from the high cell voltages.
The modulator also sends the drive enable command to each cell to enable the transistors.
The cell responds with status information that is monitored with every transmission.
The modulator is programmed to perform the following actions:
NXG Control
4.6 Parameter Interface
● The modulator uses the cell fault bit to disable all drive cells in a fast manner. There are
two cell transmission periods, of about 20 µs, to protect the cells.
● The modulator shuts down the cells in the case of a link fault which is generated if the cell
does not respond before the next message is sent, or if a hardware inhibit signal (CR3) is
present.
● The modulator synchronizes the control software with the carrier signal to provide accurate
voltage sampling. To do so, the modulator triggers the following process:
– The modulator provides a start of sampling signal called Fsamp, to the analog-to-
digital converters (ADC) to begin sampling the output signals of the drive.
– At the end of the sampling conversion of the ADCs, the analog system generates a
hardware interrupt to the control processor board to read the converted signals with
minimum delays.
– This interrupt spawns a processing thread known as the fast loop cycle to sample and
filter the signals.
– The control reads the signals, filters the signals, calculates the next set of signal
commands and sends them to the modulator for conversion into PWM signals.
If the drive does not update the modulator in 4 fast loop cycles, the protection in the modulator
shuts down the cells. This protection is the modulator watchdog which is enabled automatically
anytime the drive enable is true allowing the transistors in the cells to gate or turn on.
4.5 Bypass Control

The modular configuration of the power section ensures that, if a device or cell fails, the cell
can be bypassed at the output and the drive will continue to run at near full capability.
The modulator board controls the activation of the bypass contactors via a fiber optic link. The
fiber optic link between the modulator board and the medium voltage (MV) bypass board
contains pilot relays to interface to the cell-based output contactors. Via this interface, the
control trips on a cell fault, immediately isolates the faulted cell, compensates for the neutral-
shift to equalize the three output phase voltages, and re-enables the drive output within
250 msec. This fast bypass feature provides maximum availability by making the cell trip
transparent to the system process.
4.6 Parameter Interface

To tune and monitor the drive performance, an interface is required to input data to the control.
The standard interface for the Perfect Harmony drive is the keypad which is detailed in Chapter
Software User Interface.
In addition, a PC based tool can optionally be connected for remote configuration and
monitoring via an Ethernet connection. This drive tool includes most of the functionality of the
keypad plus it provides graphing capability for a number of internal control signals. The drive
tool is part of a collection of tools known collectively as the ToolSuite.
NXG Control
4.7 Discrete External I/O
The NXG and NXGII Control provide an interface to connect external analog and digital control
signals to the drive. The interface is flexible in the amount of I/O needed and provided to the
system. This is referred to as external user I/O.
● External Digital I/O
– Digital I/O data is only available and usable within the SOP. The WAGO digital inputs
are mapped directly to SOP flags for use within the SOP. The SOP has predefined
variable names for external digital I/O. The SOP makes use of these I/O for whatever
functionality or logic is required.
● External Analog I/O
– Analog I/O data is used as assigned to the system through menu selection, by assigning
a WAGO module to a menu based analog input or output, and selecting a WAGO analog
input as an input to the drive via the associated analog input SOP flag. It is enabled by
setting the selection true in the SOP. This can be done either directly or conditionally.
Refer to the External I/O Menu (2800) in Chapter Parameter Assignment / Addressing of this
manual for details of setup and usage.
See also
4.7.1 Interface for External I/O

The interface that connects external control signals to the drive is the WAGO I/O system. A
dedicated serial port communicates with the WAGO I/O system via Modbus protocol.
Configuring the WAGO I/O System

Customize the system per application requirements via the I/O modules (digital in/out, analog
in/out). The WAGO I/O system consists of DIN rail mounted modules that you can expand by
inserting modules into existing modules.
Note
Grouping I/O modules
Like modules must be grouped together.
Refer to literature on the WAGO website for specific information about limitations and power
equipment.
NXG Control
0RGEXV&RXSOHU
(QG7HUPLQDWRU
'LJLWDO,QSXW
$QDORJ,QSXWV
'LJLWDO2XWSXWV
Figure 4-4 WAGO I/O System
Table 4-4 WAGO I/O Module Color Codes
Module Function Color

Digital Output Red
Digital Input Yellow
Analog Output Blue
Analog Input Green
Special Module Colorless
Setting DIP switches on the Modbus coupler

The Modbus coupler provides the communication between the NXG Control and the WAGO
I/O system. The Modbus coupler is configured at the Siemens factory and there is normally
no need to make changes.
NOTICE
Changing standard settings
Only personnel trained by Siemens are entitled to perform changes of standard settings.
Work carried out incorrectly can result in damage to the equipment and in breakdown during
operation.
Ensure that only personnel trained by Siemens carry out work on the equipment.
NXG Control
4.8 I/O Configuration
4.7.2 Support for Additional I/O

The breakout board can be interfaced with NXG Control using the serial Modbus interface and
NXGpro Control using fiber optic communication, as shown in the following diagram:

'LJLWDO2XWSXW
5HOD\V
1;*SUR
)LEHU2SWLFV
6\VWHP
&RPPXQLFDWLRQ 'LJLWDO,QSXW
6\VWHP,2
,QWHUIDFH
2U
%UHDNRXW%RDUG
$QDORJ,QSXW
1;*1;*,,
6\VWHP 6HULDO0RGEXV
&RPPXQLFDWLRQ
$QDORJ2XWSXW
Figure 4-5 Breakout Board Schematic
The board can be used with NXG and NXGII. The number of output and input ports are limited
and fixed in this case. If additional I/O ports are required the interface can be switched to the
previous WAGO system where ports can be added or removed as required by inserting
individual Modbus modules.
The port configuration for the board is as follows:
I/O Type Number of I/Os Ranges or configuration

Analog input 3 1. 0 - 20 mA (not selectable)
2. Selectable between 0 - 20 mA or
4 - 20 mA or 0 - 20 VDC or 3 wire 100 Ω
RTD
Analog output 2 0 - 20 mA or 4 - 20 mA output
Digital input 20 All 24 VDC or all 120 VDC or all 240 VDC
Digital output 16 Form C Relay
The digital inputs cannot be mixed between the given voltage levels. Once configured, the
system is fixed for a particular voltage level. The board has a built in controller which manages
the I/O peripherals and also the communication between the board and the system. The
controller used in this board is ATXMEGA64, which is a high performance, low power 8/16 bit
AVR XMEGA microcontroller. The board requires an external power supply of 24 VDC. Two
power supply connections are provided to allow for redundant power supply. The board does
not contain circuitry too detect loss of power supply. The connections to the system are simple
and involve plug-in for I/O and power supply. Two ground lugs are provided for panel grounding
and shielding.
4.8 I/O Configuration

The system program (SOP) interpreter is built into the drive core software for configuration of
Perfect Harmony drives.
NXG Control
4.9 Communications Board
The SOP interpreter maps the digital I/O points in the hardware to internal drive system flags.
With the system I/O, this is also possible for inputs and outputs not specifically assigned.
In the more advanced format, simple Boolean relationships allow more complex combinations
of external or internal inputs. In addition, timers, counters, and comparators, allow great
configurability to the logic.
Note
The SOP is written and compiled externally, therefore error checking is done at the compiler
level.
Follow correct implementation of the SOP as described in Chapter Operating the Software.
If not followed correctly this could result in drive instability.
4.9 Communications Board
Standard communication via Modbus and Ethernet

As standard, the communications board provides a serial port with Modbus protocol and an
Ethernet port to communicate with the outside world.
Extended communication via network adapter boards

The communications board also allows the addition of 2 network adapter boards. These may
be connected to the drive control and cover all the other supported protocols. See the NXG
Communications Manual for use and configuration of these features.
NXG Control
Parameter Assignment / Addressing 5
5.1 Menu Descriptions
Note
Changing Drive Parameters
Only Siemens trained personnel are authorized to change drive parameters.
Familiarize yourself with the safety notes in Section Safety Notes for Parameter Changes
and preferentially contact Siemens customer service before changing the default
configuration.
The following sections contain a description of parameter items available in the

Perfect Harmony menu structure. Table Menu and Submenu Summary lists main menus and
submenus of the system. Each menu and submenu is associated with an ID shown in the ID
column. Use the key sequence [SHIFT]+[⇒] followed by the ID number to directly access each
menu item. Use the four arrow keys to navigate through the menu tree.
Table 5-1 Menu and Submenu Summary
Menu ID Submenu Names ID Table Description

Motor Menu 1 Motor parameter 1000 Motor Parameter Menu Enter motor-specific
Current Profile 1092 Current Profile Menu data. These
parameters provide
Limits 1120 Limits Menu per unit ratings for
Auto-tune* 1250 Auto-tune Menu most of the output
Encoder 1280 Encoder Menu: CLVC only variables.
Drive Menu 2 Drive parameter 2000 Drive Parameter Menu Configure the VFD for
PMM Control 2980 PMM Control Menu various load
conditions and drive
Speed setup 2060 Speed Setup Menu applications.
Torque reference 2210 Torque Reference Menu
Speed ramp setup 2260 Speed Ramp Setup Menu
Critical frequency 2340 Critical Frequency Menu
Spinning load 2420 Spinning Load Menu
Conditional time setup 2490 Conditional Timer Setup Menu
Cells 2520 Cell Menu
Sync transfer 2700 Synchronous Transfer Menu
External I/O 2800 External I/O Menu
Internal I/O 2805 Internal I/O Menu
Output connection 2900 Output Connection Menu
High starting torque 2960 High Starting Torque Menu
Watchdog 2970 Watchdog Menu
NXG Control
Parameter Assignment / Addressing
5.1 Menu Descriptions
Menu ID Submenu Names ID Table Description

Stability Menu 3 Input processing 3000 Input Processing Menu Adjust the VFD's
Output processing 3050 Output Processing Menu various control loop
gains, including
Control loop test 3460 Control Loop Test Menu current and speed
regulator gains.
Auto Menu 4 Speed profile 4000 Speed Profile Menu Configure various
Analog inputs 4090 Analog Input Menu speed setpoint,
profile, critical speed
Analog outputs 4660 Analog Outputs Menu avoidance and
Speed setpoints 4240 Speed Setpoint Menu comparator
Incremental speed setup 4970 Incremental Speed Setup Menu parameters.
PID select 4350 PID Select Menu Set up PID
parameters.
Comparator setup 4800 Comparator Setup Menu Configure the analog
comparators
controlled through the
SOP.
Main Menu 5 Motor 1 Motor Menu Access menus directly
Drive 2 Drive Menu from the keypad.
Stability 3 Stability Menu
Auto 4 Auto Menu
Logs 6 Logs Menu
Drive protect 7 Drive Protect Menu
Meter 8 Meter Menu
Communications 9 Communications Menu
Security edit functions 5000 Security Edit Functions Menu Configure security
features.
Logs Menu 6 Event log 6180 Event Log Menu Configure and inspect
Alarm/fault log 6210 Alarm/Fault Log Menu the event, alarm or
fault, and historic logs
Historic log 6250 Historic Log Menu of the VFD.
Drive Protect Menu 7 Input protection 7000 Input Protect Menu Adjust set point limits
for critical VFD
variables.
Meter Menu 8 Display parameters 8000 Display Parameters Menu Set up variables for
Hour meter setup** 8010 Hour Meter Setup display to LCD.
Input harmonics 8140 Input Harmonics Menu
Fault display override* 8200 Meter Menu
Communications 9 Serial port setup 9010 Serial Port Setup Menu Configure the various
Menu Network control 9943 See Communications Manual communications
features of the VFD.
Network 1 configure 9900
Network 2 configure 9914
Display network monitor* 9950 Communications Menu
Serial echo back test* 9180 See Communications Manual
Sop & serial functions 9110 Serial Functions Menu
TCP/IP setup 9300 TCP/IP Setup Menu
NXG Control
5.2 Safety Notes for Parameter Changes
* Applies to keypad only. Submenu does not show in drive tool.

** Applies to keypad only. In drive tool submenu displays in top row of status menu.
5.2 Safety Notes for Parameter Changes

Familiarize yourself with the following safety notes and preferentially contact Siemens
customer service before changing the default configuration.
CAUTION
Changing parameter values
Changes to parameter values may result in drive trip, instability or damage of the drive parts.
Rated input and output variables determine internal scaling for protection, stability and
control, and must never be changed from actual drive and motor ratings.
Do not change settings of any of the following parameters unless you are completely certain
that the change is safe.
If the changes have to be done, make sure that while you change parameter settings the
drive is not running and run is inhibited.
NOTICE
Entering correct parameter values
Entering parameter values may impact drive functions severely.
Do not enter parameter values unless you are completely sure of the effect your changes will
have.
You are responsible for providing correct parameter values.
Note
Consulting Siemens applications engineering
The parameters discussed in this chapter are based on hardware used within the drive and
on the design limits of drive components.
Do not change these settings in the field to match the conditions on the site unless hardware
modifications have been made and Siemens applications engineering approves of these
changes.
NXG Control
5.3 Options for Motor Menu (1)
Note
Preventing unauthorized parameter changes
To prevent unauthorized changes to the parameters, you can set SOP flag
KeySwitchLockOut_O to true via a key-lock switch. You will be able to display all
parameters as usual. See Chapter Operating the Software for information about SOP flags.
Additionally, you can modify the password for security levels via the security edit function at
security level 7. See Section Security Access Levels and Codes for further information.
Note
Using the help feature
A help feature is available for all parameter settings. Press [SHIFT] + [0] key sequence on
the keypad, to activate the help feature.
This feature provides a text description of the desired selection, plus the parameters minimum
and maximum value if applicable. If more than two lines of help text are available, use the up
[⇑] and down [⇓] arrow keys to scroll through and view the complete help message.
Parameters are hidden in the menu display when there is insufficient security clearance to
edit the parameter.
Menu items may be hidden if they do not apply to the current drive configuration. For example:
If Network 1 Type (9901) is set to "none" then all associated parameters and menus from ID
9902 to 9966 (network configuration and register data) are not displayed.
Table Menu and Submenu Summary lists menus with associated "Off" submenu names only.
Parameters and functions found in these menus are described in the following sections. Use
the associated submenu name from this table to locate the section of the chapter that explains
the associated items.
Menu items change with new releases of software. The menu system described here may
vary slightly from the menu system on your drive. Your drive has help functions for every
parameter and these can be used if the function is not described here.
Note
configuration.
The Motor Menu (1) consists of the following menu options:

● Motor Parameter Menu (1000)
● Limits Menu (1120)
NXG Control
● Speed Derate Curve Menu (1151)

● Auto-tune Menu (1250)
● Encoder Menu (1280)
● Current Profile Menu (1092)
These menus are explained in the tables that follow.
Table 5-2 Motor Parameter Menu (1000) Parameters
Parameter ID Units Default Min Max Description

Motor frequency 1020 Hz 60.0 15.0 400.0 Enter the rated or base frequency of the
motor from the nameplate.
Full load speed 1030 RPM 1780 1 31500 Enter the full load speed of the motor from
the nameplate. Full load speed is base or
rated speed minus slip.
Motor voltage 1040 V 4160 380 13800 Enter the rated voltage for the motor from
the nameplate.
Full load current 1050 A 125.0 12.0 1500.0 Enter the rated nameplate full load current
of the motor.
No load current 1060 % 25.0 0.0 100.0 Enter the no load current of the motor from
the nameplate, if it is provided, or use the
default value. Use of auto-tune stage 2 is
NOT recommended except in special
circumstances. See note in auto-tune
description.
Motor kW rating 1010 kW 746.0 120.0 100000.0 Enter the motor kW (0.746 * Hp) from the
nameplate.
Leakage 1070 % 16.0 0.0 30.0 Enter the motor leakage inductance based
inductance on percent of drive base impedance if
provided on nameplate or motor sheet, or
calculate using auto-tune stage 1.
Stator resistance 1080 % 0.10 0.00 25.00 Enter the stator resistance of the motor, if
provided.
Use the following formula to convert from
ohms to percent:
[%Rs = 100 * √3 * Rs (in ohms) * (Motor
Current / Motor Voltage)] or use the auto-
tune stage 1 function.
Stator Ls Total 1081 % 50.00 5.00 200.00 PMM stator inductance as the sum of
leakage inductance plus magnetizing stator
inductance. This is for PMM motors only.
Inertia 1090 Kgm2 30.0 0.0 100000.0 Enter the rotor inertia of the motor if known
(1 Kgm2 = 23.73 lbft2) or use auto-tune
stage 2. See note in auto-tune description
before use.
Saliency constant 1091 % 0.2 0.0 2.5 Ratio of total q-axis inductance ‘L’ to d-axis
mutual inductance ‘L’. Enter as percent of
base drive impedance. This is used to
compensate for current ripple as the rotor
poles interact with stator magnetic fields.
NXG Control

Max DC Exciter 1105 0.25 0.00 1.00 Set the maximum exciter current when
Curr starting a SM with a DC exciter (SMDC
mode).
Initial Mag Current 1106 0.04 0.00 1.00 Initial magnetizing current for starting SM
with DC exciter.
Table 5-3 Limits Menu (1120) Parameters

Select the overload trip algorithm:
● Constant: fixed current-based TOL
● Straight inverse time: motor
Overload select 1130 2 for temperature-based TOL
inverse ● Inverse time with speed derating: motor
time with temperature-based TOL
speed ● Legacy inverse time TOL (with or
derating without speed derating) for out-of-range
motor sizes.
Motor inertia must be accurate for the
temperature model algorithm to work
properly.
Note: Select "constant" and set the next two
parameters (1139 & 1140) to maximum to
disable this function.
Overload pending 1139 % 105.0 for 10.0 210.0 Set the thermal overload level at which a
constant first level warning is issued:
and inverse ● Constant mode: based on motor total
time current as a percent of rating.
settings
● Inverse mode: percentage of thermal
capacity based on the thermal model
motor heating.
This parameter is not used for legacy
inverse TOL options.
Overload 1140 % 110.0 for 20.0 210.0 Set the motor thermal overload trip level
constant and an impending trip warning. Once this
and inverse level is reached, the timeout counter is
time started for the overload fault.
settings. ● Constant mode: based on motor total
100.0 for current as a percent of rating.
Legacy ● Inverse mode: percentage of thermal
TOL capacity based on the thermal model
modes. motor heating.
● Legacy inverse time TOL (with or
without speed derating) for out-of-range
motor sizes. Must be set to 100% for
proper operation.
NXG Control

Overload timeout 1150 sec 5.0 for 0.01 300.0 Set the time for the overload trip once the
inverse overload trip level has been reached. Since
time the inverse time algorithms estimate
modes. thermal heating of the motor, the overload
60.0 for timeout is minimal for trip.
constant
mode.
60.0 for
Legacy
TOL
modes.
Speed Derate 1151 Submenus define a curve for a quadratic load Set allowable motor load as a function of
Curve for self cooling with the internal fan on the motor. speed to tailor the derating curve to the
Use manufacturers data if available. specific motor manufacturers data for best
protection. See Table Speed Derate Curve
Menu (1151).
Maximum Motor 1159 Kgm2 0.0 0.0 500000.0 Set the motor inertia for calculating the
Inertia motor thermal capacity for the inverse time
TOL function. This does not include load
inertia.
Entering zero allows the software to
estimate the thermal capacity of the motor
as the default. Use manufacturers data if
available.
Refer to Appendix NEMA Table for the
correct value.
This parameter must be non-zero for proper
operation of the inverse time modes if the
motor parameters are outside the
supported range.
This parameter does not apply for Legacy
inverse time modes.
.Motor trip volts 1160 V 4800 5 20000 Set the motor over-voltage trip point.
Overspeed 1170 % 120.0 0.0 250.0 Set the motor overspeed trip level as a
percentage of rated speed.
Underload enable 1180 Disable Enable or disable underload protection.
I underload 1182 % 10.0 1.0 90.0 Set the current underload level based on
the rated motor current.
Underload timeout 1186 sec 10.0 0.01 900.0 Set the time for underload trip. The time is
cumulative, increasing and decreasing to
measure total time less than the underload
limit. Once the timeout is reached, the drive
will trip. The drive alarms if the current falls
below the threshold, with a half second
hysteresis.
NXG Control

Motor torque limit 1 1190 % 100.0 0.0 300.0 Set the motoring torque limit as a function
of the rated motor current. Torque limit 1
(1190 and 1200) are used as default when
no other torque limits are selected via the
SOP. The magnitude of this torque limit is
the maximum effective magnitude for the
remaining torque limits (1200, 1210, 1220,
1230 and 1240).
Regen torque 1200 % -0.25 -300.0 0.0 Set the regenerative torque limit as a
limit 1 function of rated motor current at full speed.
The limit is allowed to increase inversely
with speed for a two quadrant drive.
Note: For drives with film capacitors (i.e.
WCIII and HV), change the setting to
0.15 %. These cells have less losses and
failure to make this change could result in
an over voltage trip during deceleration of
the drive.
of the available motor current. Select via the
SOP.
with speed to a maximum of the motoring
limit. Select via the SOP.
the drive.
of the available motor current. Select via the
SOP.
with speed to a maximum of the motoring
limit. Select via the SOP.
the drive.
Phase Imbalance 1244 % 40.0 0.0 100.0 Set the current threshold level for the output
Limit phase current imbalance alarm.
Ground Fault Limit 1245 % 5.0 0.0 100.0 Set the threshold of voltage for the output
ground fault alarm.
NXG Control

Ground Fault Time 1246 sec 0.017 0.001 2.000 Set the filter time constant for averaging the
Const ground voltage and delaying the response
of the ground fault detection.
H/W Ground Fault 1247 Disable Enable or disable hardware ground fault
Enable detection. This parameter requires the
NXGII system I/O board.
Peak Reduction 1248 VFD volt Select the Peak reduction (third harmonic
Enable* rating injection point) based on VFD or motor
voltage rating and neutral connection:
● VFD volt rating (default)
● Mot volt rating
Loss of field level 1141 % 40.0 5.0 50.0 Set the loss of field (Ids) level for SM control.
Loss of field 1142 sec 10.0 0.5 25.0 Set the loss of field timeout period for SM
timeout control.
* The purpose of the Peak Reduction Enable (1248) parameter is to set the starting point of
third harmonic injection, peak reduction, based on either the default VFD voltage rating or
the motor voltage rating. Refer to Figure Peak Reduction 3rd Harmonic Injection. This is
used in motor test stand applications where the VFD voltage rating may be considerably
higher than the motor voltage rating, to reduce voltage stress on the insulation of a smaller
motor.
6LQHZDYHPRGXODWLRQZLWKUGKDUPRQLFLQMHFWLRQ
HTXLYDOHQWWRSXUHVLQHZDYHPRGXODWLRQ
9)'YROWDJHUDWLQJ
ORZHUWKDQSHDNRI
100 XQFRPSHQVDWHG
IXQGDPHQWDO
3:0GXW\F\FOHIXOOPRGXODWLRQ
80 0RWRUYROWDJHUDWLQJ
60
40
3:0PRGXODWLRQ
20 UGKDUPRQLF
8QFRPSHQVDWHG
0 IXQGDPHQWDO
Figure 5-1 Peak Reduction Third Harmonic Injection
Table 5-4 Speed Derate Curve Menu (1151) Parameters*

0 Percent 1152 % 0.0 0.0 200.0 Set the maximum motor load at 0% speed.
Break Point
Break Point
NXG Control

Break Point
Break Point
Break Point
100 Percent 1157 % 100.0 0.0 200.0 Set the maximum motor load at 100%
Break Point speed.
* The parameters in this table are used to set the inverse time TOL algorithm for speed
derating, in parameter Overload select (1130).
Table 5-5 Auto-tune Menu (1250) Parameters
Parameter ID Type Description

Auto-tune 1260 Function This function determines the stator resistance and leakage inductance of the motor.
stage 1 The motor does not rotate during this stage. If this function is not used the menu-
entered values are used. If the function is used, the parameters will be updated with
the calculated values.
Auto-tune 1270 Function This function determines the no-load current and rotor inertia of the motor. The motor
stage 2 rotates during this stage. If this function is not used the menu entered values are
used. Only use this function in special circumstances requiring high response rates.
Further Description of Auto-tuning

Auto-tuning provides motor information that optimizes the output processing control. Auto-
tuning is performed in two stages, both stages are optional. Enter the motor information if
available, as described in Table Auto-tune Menu (1250). Refer to Section Drive Tuning in
Chapter Operating the Control for further information.
CAUTION
Stage 2 Auto-tuning
Use of Stage 2 auto-tuning increases the current loop gains.
Do not use this function without guidance from Siemens customer service.
Failure to do so can lead to highly unstable performance.
Table 5-6 Encoder Menu (1280) Parameters: Closed Loop Vector Control only

Encoder 1 1290 720 1 10000 Enter the rated number of pulses per revolution delivered
PPR by the encoder. See nameplate value.
Encoder 1300 0.75 0.1 0.999 Set the gain of the filter for encoder feedback. This
filter gain parameter can have a value between 0.0 i.e., no filtering,
and 0.999 i.e., maximum filtering.
NXG Control

Encoder 1310 % 5.0 1.0 75.0 Set the level for the error between encoder output and
loss calculated motor speed to determine encoder loss.
threshold
Encoder 1320 Stop (on Set the drive response to a loss of encoder event:
loss fault) ● Stop (on fault)
response
● Open Loop (control). If Open Loop is selected, set
motor slip to zero.
Table 5-7 Current Profile Menu (1092) Parameters

Motor current 1193 % 100 10 300 Current limit 1 set point for speed/current profile.
limit 1
Speed at 1194 % 100 -200 200 Motor speed point 1 on the speed/current profile curve.
current lim 1
limit 2
current lim 2
limit 3
current lim 3
limit 4
current lim 4
limit 5
current lim 5
limit 6
current lim 6
limit 7
current lim 7
limit 8
current lim 8
limit 9
current lim 9
NXG Control
Further Description of Current Limit Profile Function

The speed/current limit profile function can be added by modifying the SOP, This feature
consists of nine set points composed of a speed and current limit value per each point that
make up the total curve. The drive follows the curve made up of the nine set points, as shown
in the figure below. The purpose of this function is to allow the user to set a maximum current
limit point associated with a specified maximum speed point. This limit is not absolute, other
factors may occur causing the control to reduce the limit, as described below.
120
100

80
Current limit (A)

60

40
20
0
0 730 960 1250 1560 1745 1985 2275 2585 3000
speed (rpm)
Figure 5-2 Estimated VFD Current Limit
Current Limit Profile Operation

SOP flags are used to activate this function and to indicate to the user when the function is
active. SOP flag CurrentLimitProfileEnable_O must be set true to enable the function.
The Current Profile Menu (ID 1092) is used to set the parameters of the profile.
The current limit profile function can be explained better by describing the existing torque limit.
The torque limits can be set by menus accessible using the Drive Tool, keypad, analog or
network registers. The actual torque limit is set by comparing these menu limits to other limiting
values used in the limit logic functions. The limits are checked and the torque may be reduced
during braking, cell bypass, single phase occurrence, under voltage condition, field weakening,
thermal overload of the transformer as calculated by the control, and over voltage regeneration
from the motor.
The current limit profile is another input to set these limits, however, it does not change any of
the other limiting functions as previously described in the limit logic. The control will attempt
to run at the current limits set in the profile, but can not override the limitations in the limit logic.
The control uses the lowest magnitude of all limit sources in the limit logic.
NXG Control
5.4 Options for Drive Menu (2)
Rollback Considerations
The current limit setting in this profile is a maximum current limit setting that can be overridden
by external drive factors, such as loss of an input voltage phase, loss of cells, etc. If such an
event occurs, the current limit is internally calculated by the control and may not be the desired
current limit that was set in the profile. In addition, if the load is increased beyond this current
limit, the speed will be reduced in order to maintain torque. Reducing the speed may in turn
reduce the torque depending on the next current set point within the profile. This could cause
a cascading effect, and must be considered when setting up the profile.
Note
configuration.
The Drive Menu (2) consists of the following submenus:

● Drive Parameter Menu (2000)
● Speed Setup Menu (2060)
● Torque Reference Menu (2210)
● Speed Ramp Setup Menu (2260)
● Critical Frequency Menu (2340)
● Spinning Load Menu (2420)
● Conditional Timer Menu (2490)
● Cell Menu (2520)
● AP Settings Menu (2585)
● Synchronous Transfer Menu (2700)
● External I/O Menu (2800)
● Internal I/O Menu (2805)
● Output Connection Menu (2900)
● High Starting Torque Menu (2960)
● Watchdog Menu (2970)
NXG Control
NOTICE
IP Address Duplication
Duplicating IP addresses will cause unintended communication issues that will lead to
incorrect drive operation.
To avoid duplication of IP addresses, ensure that the IP addresses of the drive and the PC
are NOT the same before connecting an external PC to the Ethernet connection of the drive.
NOTICE
Setting Rated Values Incorrectly
Rated values must be set according to actual rated values.
Failure to do so can result in unintended performance and may disable drive protections.
Note
Consulting Applications Engineering
The parameters discussed in this section are based on hardware used within the drive and
on the design limits of drive components.
Do not change these settings in the field to match the conditions on the site unless hardware
modifications have been made and Siemens applications engineering approves the changes.
Table 5-8 Drive Parameter Menu (2000) Parameters

Rated input 2010 V 4160 200 125000 Rated RMS input voltage to the drive. Set
voltage according to the input transformer primary
voltage rating.
Note: The input attenuator kit must correspond
to the rated primary voltage of the transformer.
Rated input 2020 A 100.0 12.0 3000.0 Rated RMS input current to the drive. Set
current according to input transformer nameplate kVA
rating as noted below.*
Rated output 2030 V 4160 200 23000 Rated drive output voltage RMS. Set
voltage according to the rating of the output attenuator
kit
Note: This value is typically equal to or higher
than the motor voltage rating.
Rated output 2040 A 100.0 12.0 1500.0 Rated drive output current RMS. Set equal to
current the cell output current rating.
Note: Size the output Hall effects and burden
resistors for the cell current rating.
Rated Leading 2042 % 50.0 0.0 75.0 Rated leading VAR output in percent of rated
Vars input transformer VA.
NXG Control

Rated Lagging 2043 % 50.0 0.0 75.0 Rated lagging VAR output in percent of rated
Vars input transformer VA.
Control loop type 2050 OLVC Select control loop algorithm type1:
● V/Hz for parallel motors.
● OLVC for single induction motors.
● CLVC for single induction motors with
speed sensor(s).
● OLTM for checking cell modulation and
testing Hall effect transducer only. Not
intended for continuous motor or load
control.
● SMC without speed sensor.
● CSMC with speed sensor.
● SMDC which automatically sets high
starting torque.
● PMM.
Parallel system 2051 Disable Enable parallel drive control operation.
Drives/motor 2052 1 1 99 Number of drives connected to a single motor.
winding
Number of 2053 1 1 99 Number of sets of motor windings.
windings
Drive index 2054 0 0 255 Drive sequence number determined by PLC.
Node Id 2055 0 0 255 Shared memory card unique node ID.
Service Mode 2056 0 0 99999 Service mode register.
PMM Control 2980 Menu for PMM control.
Reactive 2981 Disable Select output reactive current source method
Current mode for PMM control:
● Disabled: Ids, ref set to zero, no flux regulator.
● Manual: Ids, ref set manually.
● Auto: maintains unity power factor (PF) as
seen from the rotor.
● Manual network: Ids, ref set through network.
● Auto phase advance: enable a voltage
regulator to clamp terminal voltage to rated
of the motor. This method maintains unity
PF, as seen from the rotor, below rated
speed to produce maximum torque per
amp of the motor.
Note: For synchronous transfer of a PMM, the
Auto and Auto Phase Advance must be
disabled.
Output Ids 2982 % 0.0 -100.0 100.0 Ids, ref (reactive current) as percentage of rated
current. Internal code clamps magnitudes from
getting lower than 1.0%.
NXG Control
* Rated input current calculation is derived as follows:

Rated Input Current = [(kVA rating) x (802)] ÷ [(√3) x (rated nominal primary voltage)
x (0.96) x (0.94)
= [(kVA rating) ÷ (rated nominal primary voltage)] x 513.11
1
Changing the control loop algorithm type to OLTM or V/Hz disables fast bypass (2600) and
spinning load (2430) regardless of parameter setting.
Table 5-9 Speed Setup Menu (2060) Parameters*

Ratio control 2070 % 100.0 -250.0 250.0 Adjust the scaling of the speed reference value.
Speed fwd max 2080 % 100.0 0.0 200.0 The forward maximum speed reference limit 1.
limit 1
Speed fwd min 2090 % 0.0 0.0 200.0 The forward minimum speed reference limit 1.
limit 1
limit 2
limit 2
limit 3
limit 3
Speed rev max 2140 % -100.0 -200.0 0.0 The reverse maximum speed reference limit 1.
limit 1
Speed rev min 2150 % 0.0 -200.0 0.0 The reverse minimum speed reference limit 1.
limit 1
limit 2
limit 2
limit 3
limit 3
Zero speed 2200 % 0.0 0.0 100.0 The zero speed threshold value. Use for the
threshold of the "Minimum Speed Trip" or alarm.
* The parameters in this table are enabled for use by SOP flags. If enabled, the values as
set are used.
NXG Control
Table 5-10 Torque Reference Menu (2210) Parameters

Sop / Menu 2211 SOP flag or Control the source of the torque demand,
control menu use either SOP flag or menu.
To utilize an analog or network source, SOP
flag must be selected.
The default torque demand is always the
menu, regardless of this setting, unless one
of the SOP flags is set true during pre-
configuration.
Torque setpoint 2220 % 0.0 -125.0 125.0 Set the desired torque demand when menu
is selected, or if no SOP is selected.
Holding torque 2230 % 0.0 -100.0 100.0 Holding torque is used to supply an offset
to the torque ramp output.
Use in an application that prevents the load
from drifting backwards at zero speed, or to
counter a fixed load against gravity where
an offset in the torque is required.
Torque ramp 2240 sec 1.00 0.01 10.00 Control the rate of change of the torque
increase command increase in seconds from zero to
rated torque.
Torque ramp 2250 sec 1.00 0.01 10.00 Control the rate of change of the torque
decrease command decrease in seconds from rated
to zero torque.
Torque 2242 1.00 -1.25 1.25 Scale the torque command to compensate
command scalar for system offsets and gain changes.
Table 5-11 Speed Ramp Setup Menu (2260) Parameters

Accel time 1 2270 sec 5.0 0.0 3200.0 Acceleration time 1 in seconds from zero to
rated speed.
Decel time 1 2280 sec 5.0 0.0 3200.0 Deceleration time 1 in seconds from rated
to zero speed.
rated speed.
to zero speed.
rated speed.
to zero speed.
Jerk rate 2330 0.1 0.0 3200.0 Jerk rate in time to reach an acceleration
rate that will achieve rated velocity in 1 sec.
NXG Control
Table 5-12 Critical Frequency Menu (2340) Parameters

Skip center freq 2350 Hz 15.0 0.0 360.0 Enter the center of the first critical frequency
1 band to be avoided.
Skip center freq 2360 Hz 30.0 0.0 360.0 Enter the center of the second critical
2 frequency band to be avoided.
Skip center freq 2370 Hz 45.0 0.0 360.0 Enter the center of the third critical
Skip bandwidth 2380 Hz 0.0 0.0 6.0 Enter the bandwidth of the first critical
Skip bandwidth 2390 Hz 0.0 0.0 6.0 Enter the bandwidth of the second critical
Skip bandwidth 2400 Hz 0.0 0.0 6.0 Enter the bandwidth of the third critical
Table 5-13 Spinning Load Menu (2420) Parameters

Spinning load 2430 Off Enable or disable spinning load and set the
mode* direction of frequency scans:
● Off
● Forward
● Reverse
● Both; scans first in the forward direction,
then in the reverse direction.
Scan end 2440 % 20.0 1.0 50.0 The point where scan ends if motor flux is
threshold above this level, as a percentage of motor
rated flux.
Current Level 2450 % 15.0 1.0 50.0 Set the drive current level (Id), as a
Setpoint percentage of motor rated current, used
during scanning.
Current ramp 2460 sec 0.01 0.00 5.00 Time to ramp drive current (Id) to Current
Level Setpoint.
Max current 2470 % 50.0 1.0 50.0 Set the current trip level to abort spinning
load, as a percentage of motor rated
current, for scanning. Use the default value
of 50%.
Frequency scan 2480 sec 3.00 0.00 5.00 Set the time taken to scan from rated speed
rate to zero. The default value of 3.00 sec is
usually satisfactory.
* If spinning load mode is disabled from this parameter, it will enable automatically on an as-
needed basis; this occurs only when fast bypass is enabled and only for the duration of
the bypass. This action is internal and does not require user intervention. This action does
not affect the spinning load mode parameter.
NXG Control
Table 5-14 Conditional Timer Setup Menu (2490) Parameters

Cond stop timer 2500 sec 0.8 0.0 999.9 Dwell time after stop is invoked. User function
defined.
Not implemented
Cond run timer 2510 sec 0.8 0.0 999.9 Dwell time after start is invoked. User function
defined.
Not implemented
Table 5-15 Cell Menu (2520) Parameters

Installed cells/ 2530 4 1 8 Installed cells per phase in the drive.
phase
Min cells/phase 2540 4 1 8 Minimum cells per phase count. Due to neutral point
count (n/3) shifting, three times this number, allowing one
active cell per phase is the minimum allowable cells
(n) permitted to run in a system, allowing for the
shift in the neutral point.
A further restriction is enforced in the code to only
allow a maximum of nine cells in bypass. A bypass
fault will occur if the bypass operation attempts to
exceed the number.
Cell voltage* 2550 Vrms 630 Set the value of the cell rated voltage:
● 460 V
● 630 V
● 690 V
● 750 V 6SR4[ ]02 (GenIV)
● 1375 V High Voltage
● 600 V AP AFE (PWM regen)
● 750 V AP
● 750 V AP 4Q (six-step regen)
● 1375 V High Voltage AP
Thermistor warn 2560 % 20.0 5.0 70.0 Set the level at which a cell over-temperature alarm
level is generated.
Contactor 2570 msec 250.0 200 1000.0 Time taken by bypass contactors to change state.
settling time Use 100 ms for small contactors and 250 ms for
larger contactors.
Max back EMF 2580 sec 7.0 0.0 10.0 Set the maximum time that the control waits for the
decay time motor voltage to decay while attempting a fast
bypass.
Once cell fault(s) occurs, the drive may not be able
to support actual motor voltage. If the motor voltage
does not decay below the max drive voltage
capability with the faulted cell(s), within the time set
by this parameter, the drive will issue a fault.
Bypass type 2590 Mech Designate the type of bypass in the drive:
● Mechanical
● None
NXG Control

Fast bypass 2600 Disable Enables or disable fast cell bypass. Disabling fast
bypass with mechanical contactors will still provide
manual bypass after a manual reset.
AP Settings 2585 Submenu Access the AFE cell settings.
Display cell 2610 Function Display cell status:
status ● A = active
● B = bypassed
● F = faulted
Format is all A phase followed by all B phase
followed by all C phase.
Display bypass 2620 Function Display bypass status (same format as for cell
status status):
● A = available
● B = active
● U = unavailable
Reset bypassed 2640 Function Reset bypassed cells when the drive is in an idle
cells state. Use the reset function only after verifying that
(keypad only) the problems with the faulted cell(s) have been
resolved.
Neutral 2630 T2 Set the pole inversion type based on the cell neutral
connection connection point. Select the cell terminal, T1 or T2,
which forms the neutral connection. This selection
depends on the terminal of cells A1, B1, and C1 that
is used to form the drive start-point neutral.
Precharge 2635 off Enable input transformer pre-charge for the
enable* protection of cells from in-rush current:
● Type 1 HV - 3CB (resonant pre-charge)
● Type 2 HV - 2CB (resonant pre-charge)
● Type 3 Parallel Drive
● Type 4 (not used)
● Type 5 Open (750 V AP and 750 V AP 4Q)
● Type 6 Closed (750 V AP and 750 V AP 4Q)
Precharge delay 2636 sec 1.0 0.0 10.0 Time delay between end of pre-charge and start of
time cell diagnostics. For HV and 6SR4[ ]02 (GenIV)
cells, although pre-charge is not used, it replaces
the nominal 1 sec delay in cell diagnostics.
Precharge 2637 0 0 1 Select pre-charge maintenance mode.
service mode
Precharge 2638 0 0 1 Start pre-charge in maintenance mode.
service start
* To pre-charge water-cooled 6SR3[ ]52 (WCIII) drives, set parameters as follows:

● Set parameter Precharge enable (2635) to 'Type 5 Open' or 'Type 6 Closed'.
● Set parameter Cell voltage (2550) to ‘750 V AP’ or ‘750 V AP 4Q.’
Refer to the Water-cooled 6SR3[ ]52 Operating Instructions Manual for more information
on the 750 V AP cell.
NXG Control
CAUTION
Incorrect parameter settings
The drive will not work properly if relevant parameters are not set correctly.
Incorrect parameter settings may impair the drive function and cause severe material
damage.
Verify changed parameters and ensure that all parameter settings are correct.
Table 5-16 AP Settings (2585) Parameters

AP Cells/phase 2581 0 0 8 Enter number of AP cells installed per
phase.
AP cell current 2582 A 787.0 300.0 1500.0 Set AP input current rating for cell.
rating
AP cell overcurrent 2621 % 165.0 100.0 200.0 Set AP over current rating for cell.
AFE cell input 2583 μH 242.0 50.0 500.0 Set AFE per phase input line reactance.
reactance
AP cell PWM 2584 25th Select the AP cell PWM frequency as a
harmonic multiple of the fundamental frequency.
Possible selections are 13, 15, 17, 19, 21,
23, 25, 27 and 29. However, 29 is not a valid
selection for 60 Hz applications.
AP cell control 2586 1 Select the AP cell control algorithm.
mode
AFE cell DC P gain 2587 1.24 0.5 3.3 Set the AFE cell DC control proportional
constant.
AP cell DC I gain 2588 4.8435 1 10 Set the AP cell DC control integral constant.
AP cell Id P gain 2589 0.2187 0.0078 4 Set the AP cell real current regulator
proportional constant.
AP cell Id I gain 2591 46.875 5.859 3000 Set the AP cell real current regulator
integral constant.
AP cell Id D gain 2592 x100 0.0166 0 0.0333 Set the AP cell real current regulator
derivative constant.
AP cell Iq P gain 2593 0.2187 0.0078 4 Set the AP cell reactive current regulator
proportional constant.
AP cell Iq I gain 2594 46.875 5.859 3000 Set the AP cell reactive current regulator
integral constant.
AP cell Iq D gain 2595 x100 0.0166 0 0.0333 Set the AP cell reactive current regulator
derivative constant.
AP diff temp fault lvl 2596 deg 24.0 10.0 30.0 Set the AP cell maximum temperature
differential before fault.
AP Mplx Data 2597 Air Temp Select the source of the AP cell multiplexed
Select data.
AP sync ang offset 2579 deg 0 -180 180 Set the AP cell carrier synchronous angle
offset for all cells. Use to offset drive carriers
among two or more drives.
NXG Control

Set Angles 2598 Set the AP cell angles as they relate to the
primary voltage.
AP cell ang off 1 2571 deg -181 -181 180 Set the AP cell angle offset from the
transformer primary voltage for this rank.*
Regen OV I gain 2623 0.0010 0.0001 1.0000 Set the regen overvoltage rollback regulator
integral gain.1
Regen OV P gain 2624 0.0000 0.0000 10.0000 Set the regen overvoltage rollback regulator
proportional gain.1
Regen Shift Angle 2625 deg 0.00 -11.25 11.25 Regen angle adjustment.1
* -181 indicates that AP cells are not installed on this rank.

1
Default values are recommended.
Table 5-17 Synchronous Transfer Menu (2700) Parameters

Phase I gain* 2710 2.0 0.0 15.0 Phase integrator gain
Phase P gain* 2720 4.0 0.0 12.0 Phase proportional gain
Phase offset 2730 deg 2.00 -90.00 90.00 Specify the phase angle setpoint used
during up transfer. This is set positive and
expressed in degrees leading to prevent
power flow back into drive.
Phase error 2740 deg 1.50 0.00 5.00 Specify the phase synchronization error
threshold1 window during up transfer. This parameter
adjusts the amount of error allowed during
phase-locking and is expressed in degrees.
Frequency offset 2750 % 0.5 -10.0 10.0 Frequency offset used during down transfer
to establish torque current by driving the
speed regulator into limit.
NXG Control

Up transfer 2760 sec 0.0 0.0 600.0 If the time taken for up transfer exceeds this
timeout2 value then an up transfer timeout fault is
generated.
Ensure this setting is greater than the
acceleration time setting (2270, 2290, or
2310). Set to 0 to disable the timeout fault.
Down transfer 2770 sec 0.0 0.0 600.0 If the time taken for down transfer exceeds
timeout2 this value then a down transfer timeout fault
is generated. This is unaffected by the
acceleration rate. Set to 0 to disable the
timeout fault.
* Default values are highly recommended. Changing from defaults may have unintended
results.
1
The phase error threshold parameter (2740) was input in radians instead of degrees in
software versions up to and including 2.4. For these versions, multiply the desired degrees
by π/180 and enter.
2
Up and down transfer timeout "faults" create a drive alarm and return the drive to the prior
state before transfer was attempted. A reset must be issued to clear this "fault" before
attempting another transfer.
Table 5-18 External I/O Menu (2800) Parameters

Analog inputs 2810 0 0 24 Set the quantity of analog inputs in the
attached external I/O.
Analog outputs 2820 0 0 16 Set the quantity of analog outputs in the
Digital inputs 2830 0 0 96 Set the quantity of digital inputs in the
Digital outputs 2840 0 0 64 Set the quantity of digital outputs in the
Wago timeout 2850 sec 10.0 0.0 600.0 Set the WAGO watchdog timeout period.
Set to 0 to disable this function.
Configuring the External I/O

The External I/O is configured from External I/O Menu (2800). You must define the total number
of I/O per the table for each type of I/O, analog I/O and digital I/O. If the I/O count is incorrect
the drive will indicate a "Wago configuration fault". Once the correct number of I/O is entered,
clear the fault by a fault reset.
For proper functioning of the WAGO timeout, the parameter Enable Watchdog (2971) must
be enabled. The Modbus coupler DIP switches must also be set correctly, these are configured
at the Siemens factory. Refer to Section External User I/O in Chapter Hardware Interface
Description.
NXG Control
Internal I/O Submenus

The Internal I/O Menu (2805) consists of the submenus listed below. Contents of these
submenus are explained in the tables that follow.
Table 5-19 Internal I/O Menu (2805) Parameters

Int Analog In1 2815 Submenu Access the setup menu for internal analog input 1.
See Table Internal Analog Input 1 Menu (2815).
Int Analog Out1 2845 Submenu Access the setup menu for internal analog output 1.
See Table Internal Analog Output 1 Menu (2845).
Int Analog Out2 2855 Submenu Access the setup menu for internal analog output 2.
See Table Internal Analog Output 2 Menu (2855).
Int Test Point #28 2860 Submenu Access the setup menu for internal test point #28.
See Table Internal Test Point #28 Menu (2860).
Table 5-20 Internal Analog Input 1 Menu (2815) Parameters

Type 2816 1 Set the operational mode for internal AI1:
● 0 to 20 mA
● 4 to 20 mA
● 0 to 10 V
Hardware Zero 2817 0 -200 200 Internal analog input 1 zero
Hardware Span 2818 1 0.75 1.25 Internal analog input 1 span
NXG Control

● 0 to 20 mA
● 4 to 20 mA
● 0 to 10 V

● 0 to 20 mA
● 4 to 20 mA
● 0 to 10 V
Table 5-23 Internal Analog Output 1 Menu (2845) Parameters

Analog variable 2846 1 Internal analog output 1 source pick list.
See Pick list for Internal Analog Output
Source.
Full range 2847 % 100 0 300 Scale output range of selected variable
Output Mode 2848 0 Internal analog output 1 mode:
● 4 to 20 mA
● 0 to 20 mA
Output Min 2841 % 0 -300 300 Internal analog output 1 minimum
Output Max 2842 % 100 -300 300 Internal analog output 1 maximum
Table 5-24 Internal Analog Output 2 Menu (2855) Parameters

Analog variable 2856 1 Internal analog output 2 source pick list.
See Pick list for Internal Analog Output
Source.
Full range 2857 % 100 0 300 Scale output range of selected variable
Output Mode 2858 0 Internal analog output 2 mode:
● 4 to 20 mA
● 0 to 20 mA
Output Min 2851 % 0 -300 300 Internal analog output 2 minimum
Output Max 2852 % 100 -300 300 Internal analog output 2 maximum
NXG Control

Hardware Span 2854 1 0.75 1.25 Internal Analog Input 2 span
Table 5-25 Pick list for Internal Analog Output Source
Motor Voltage Neg Sequence Q Out Neutral Volts Analog Input #8

Total Current Input Frequency Synch Motor Field Input KVAR
Average Power Input Power Avg Motor Torque Drive Losses
Motor Speed Input Pwr Factor Encoder Speed Excess React Current
Speed Demand Ah Harmonic Analog Input #1 Speed Droop Percent
Speed Reference Bh Harmonic Analog Input #2 Torq Current (Iqs) Ref
Raw Flux Demand Total Harmonics Analog Input #3 Torq Current (Iqs) Fb
Flux Reference Xfmr Therm Level Analog Input #4 Torq Current (IqsFilt) Filtered
Current (RMS) 1 Cycle Protect Analog Input #5
Zero Sequence Av Single Phase Cur Analog Input #6
Neg Sequence D Under Volt Limit Analog Input #7
Table 5-26 Internal Test Point #28 Menu (2860) Parameters

Analog variable 2861 0 Internal test point #28 source pick list.
See Pick list for graphing and analog testpoint
variables.
TP 28 Scaler 2862 0.00 0.00 10.00 Scale output range of selected variable, in pu,
for full range.

variables.
for full range.

variables.
for full range.
NXG Control

variables.
for full range.

variables.
for full range.

variables.
for full range.
Table 5-32 Pick list for graphing and analog testpoint variables
Output Power Average (kW) Drive State AFE Input Voltage Feed- Input Voltage Fundamental
forward Magnitude
Phase A filter current Up Transfer State AFE Real Current Feed- Disable Rollback active
forward
Phase B filter current Down Transfer State Input Id unfiltered Total Output Current filtered
Phase C filter current Drive Internal Losses Input Iq unfiltered Phase A output volts (rms)
Measured Phase A volts (not Excess Input Reactive AFE kVar Phase B output volts (rms)
functional) Current
Measured Phase B volts (not Speed Droop AFE kW Phase C output volts (rms)
functional)
Measured Phase C volts (not Precharge State Variable Maximum Demand Output Phase A output current (rms)
functional)
Measured Output Neutral Precharge Voltage SMDC Mode state variable Phase B output current (rms)
Voltage
Max Available Output Volts Input Real Current Drive Loss Fault Limit Phase C output current (rms)
Input Reactive Power (kVar) Input Reactive Current Torque ramp output Max Total Current Limit
Drive Efficiency AFE Reactive Current High Speed delay angle
Reference
NXG Control
Table 5-33 Output Connection Menu (2900) Parameters

Filter CT sec 2910 0 0 250 Assuming primary turns = 5, secondary side
turns turns of the CTs is used to measure filter
capacitor currents.
Filter inductance 2920 % 0.0 0.0 20.0 Set the output filter inductor i.e. impedance
value as a ratio of the base output impedance
of the drive; typically 5%.*
Filter 2930 % 0.0 0.0 20.0 Set the output filter capacitor i.e. admittance
capacitance value as a ratio of the base output admittance
of the drive; typically 10%. Admittance is the
inverse of impedance.*
Cable resistance 2940 % 0.0 0.0 50.0 Output cable resistance value as a ratio of the
base output impedance of the drive.*
Cable inductance 2941 % 0.0 0.0 50. 0 Output cable inductance is used for long runs
of cable. Enter in percent of drive base
impedance.*
Filter damping 2950 0.50 -5.00 5.00 Control the gain for damping oscillations due
gain to output filter. Use a positive constant,
typically 0.5, with cable lengths less
than 30000 feet. Use a negative constant,
typically -0.5, for long cable lengths.
* Refer to Section Cable Inductance Compensation in Chapter Advanced Operating

Functions for information on calculating the drive base impedance.
Table 5-34 High Starting Torque Menu (2960) Parameters

Enable high 2961 Disable Enable or disable high starting torque mode
torque operation.
Torque current 2962 % 50.0 0.0 150.0 Set the value of torque current used in high
starting torque mode. This value is
determined by the stiction or breakaway
torque that is needed for the application.
Trq Current 2 2965 % 50.0 0.0 125.0 Second level torque current for fall back after
start.
Current ramp 2963 sec 0.5 0.0 5.0 Set the time for torque current to ramp from
time zero to the torque current level (2962) for high
starting torque mode. Default value is
acceptable in most cases.
PLL Acq time 2964 sec 2.0 0.0 5.0 Set the time allowed for the phase-locked loop
to acquire the motor flux and frequency in high
starting torque mode. Default value is
acceptable in most cases. Less time may be
needed if the minimum speed limit is lower
than 1% of rated speed.
NXG Control
5.5 Options for Stability Menu (3)
Table 5-35 Watchdog Menu (2970) Parameters

Enable watchdog 2971 Enable Enable or disable the CPU watchdog, which
watches the various threads. If a thread stops
running the watchdog will timeout, tripping the
drive by allowing the modulator watchdog to
timeout. There is a fixed 20 second trip time.
No fault is recorded and the CPU is rebooted.
Further information on the Enable Watchdog Parameter

It is highly recommended that the Enable Watchdog parameter be set true. If the WAGO I/O
System is being used, this parameter must be enabled for proper operation of parameter Wago
Timeout (2850).
Note
configuration.
The Stability Menu (3) consists of the following menu options:

● Input Processing Menu (3000)
● Output Processing Menu (3050)
● Control Loop Test Menu (3460)
● Dead Time Compensation (3550)
● Feed Forward Constant (3560)
● Sampling Delay Compensation (3570)
● Carrier Frequency (3580)
The Stability Menu also contains additional menus and parameters. These menus and
parameters are explained in the tables that follow.
NXG Control
Table 5-36 Stability Menu (3) Parameters

Input processing 3000 Submenu Access submenus related to drive line-side
processing.
See Table Input Processing Menu (3000).
Output processing 3050 Submenu Access submenus related to drive motor-side
processing.
See Table Output Processing Menu (3050).
Control loop test 3460 Submenu Access submenus related to speed and torque
loop testing.
See Table Control Loop Test Menu (3460).
Dead time comp 3550 μsec 16.0 0.0 50.0 Set the dead time, or firing delay time, of the
IGBTs for software compensation.
Feed forward 3560 0.0 0.0 1.0 Set the gain for voltage feed forward. This is used
constant to improve the torque current regulator response.
Sampling Delay 3570 % 0.0 0.0 150.0 Compensate the flux vector angle for sampling
Comp delay on high speed motor operation.
Carrier frequency 3580 Hz 400.0 100.0 1550.0 Enter the IGBT switching frequency. The control
adjusts the entered value according to available
resolution from the modulator registers, e.g., if
you enter 400.0 the actual frequency may be
398.6:
fC = Power cell carrier frequency
fO = Drive rated output frequency
For fO < 167 Hz, fC = 600 Hz is typically adequate.
A smaller value of fC can be chosen provided
300 Hz < fC > (3.6 x fO) Hz.
For fO = 167 to 330 Hz, 1550 Hz > fC > (3.6 x fO) Hz.
High switching frequencies may result in some
derating due to increased switching losses.
Consult Siemens customer service for derating
values.
Table 5-37 Input Processing Menu (3000) Parameters

PLL prop gain 3010 70.0 0.0 200.0 Proportional gain of input phase-locked loop
(PLL).
PLL integral gain 3020 3840.0 0.0 12000.0 Integral gain of input PLL.
Input current scaler 3030 1.0 0.0 2.0 Set the scaling for input current feedback. Default
value is normally adequate.
CT secondary turns 3035 200 50 3000 Secondary side turns for input current CT, with
primary turns equal to 5.
Input voltage scaler 3040 1.0 0.0 2.0 Set the scaling for input line voltage feedback.
Default value is normally adequate.
PT secondary turns 3011 1 1 3000 Secondary turns input voltage PT.
VAR control 3041 Submenu Access the cell input control parameters.
Input Attenuator 3045 kOhm 3000 1 32767 Set scaling for input nominal value. This is the
Sum sum of the two input resistors per phase.
NXG Control
CAUTION
PLL gains and scaling parameter values
Changing PLL gains from the default values or setting scaling parameter values incorrectly
can cause unintended results that affect performance and disable drive protections.
Scaling parameter values must match actual hardware ratings.
Never change scaling parameter values from actual hardware ratings.
Table 5-38 Var Control Menu (3041) Parameters

VAR prop gain 3042 0.2 0 200 VAR PI regulator proportional gain term.
VAR integral gain 3043 0.1 0 12000 VAR PI regulator integral gain term.
AFE Vd scaler 3036 1 0 2 Scaler for input voltage to AFE Vd feed forward.
AFE Id scaler 3037 0 0 2 Scaler for input Id to AFE Id feed forward.
AFE Iq scaler 3038 1 0 2 Scaler for Var regulator output to AFE Iq
command.
AFE current scaler 3039 0.745 0 2 Scaler to match AFE cell per unit current with
drive per unit current.
AFE Iq limit filter 3044 0.95 0.5 1 Filter constant for AFE Iq limit.
AFE Sat. filter 3046 1 0.1 3 Weight applied to Var error depending upon how
many AFE cells are in saturation.
Table 5-39 Output Processing Menu (3050) Parameters

Low freq comp 3060 Submenu Access parameters that affect compensation for
hardware and software filter poles.
See Table Low Frequency Compensation Menu
(3060).
Flux control 3100 Submenu Access the flux control parameters.
See Table Flux Control Menu (3100).
Speed loop 3200 Submenu Access the speed loop parameters.
See Table Speed Loop Menu (3200).
Current loop 3250 Submenu Access the current loop parameters.
See Table Current Loop Menu (3250).
Stator resis est 3300 Submenu Access the stator resistance estimator
parameters. See Table Stator Resistance
Estimator Menu (3300).
Braking 3350 Submenu Access the dual frequency braking parameters.
See Table Braking Menu (3350).
PLL prop gain 3420 188 1 500 Flux vector PLL proportional gain.
Default value is highly recommended in most
applications.
PLL integral gain 3430 2760 0 12000 Flux vector PLL integral gain.
Default value is highly recommended in most
applications.
NXG Control

Output current 3440 1.0 0.0 2.0 Scaling for output current feedbacks.
scaler Default value is normally adequate.
Output voltage 3450 1.0 0.0 2.0 Scaling for output voltage feedbacks.
scaler Default value is normally adequate.
Output attenuator 3455 kOhm 3000 100 32767 Scaling for the output nominal value. This is the
sum sum of the two output resistors per phase.
CAUTION
Setting scaling parameter values
Setting scaling parameter values incorrectly can cause unintended results that affect
performance and disable drive protections.
Scaling parameter values must match actual hardware ratings.
Never change scaling parameter values from actual hardware ratings.
Note
Additional fine-tuning of the drive
Many of the parameters in the output processing menu use the default settings.
Only in special circumstances may you need to make changes to these parameters for
additional fine-tuning of the drive.
Table 5-40 Low Frequency Compensation Menu (3060) Parameters

Low Freq Wo 3070 Rad 12.566 0.0 125.664 Pole of hardware RC integrator. This is the
setting for the -00 board. For the 02 board the
value is set to 37.859.
The NXGII Standard I/O board must be set the
same as the -00 board using the default 12.566
value. There is no -02 System I/O board.
Low freq com gain 3080 1.0 0.5 5.0 Low Frequency compensation gain for scaling
estimated flux.
S/W compensator 3090 2.0 0.5 20.0 Pole of software integrator used for flux
pole estimation.
Further information for estimating flux using the pole of software integrator
NXG Control converts the motor voltage feedback into motor flux for estimating speed and
torque. This process requires an integrator to convert voltage into flux. An integrator has the
transfer function 1/s in the Laplace domain. If implemented, this translates to infinite gain at
zero frequency or dc.
This process magnifies offsets and noise that are introduced by the measurements. In order
to limit the gain at extremely low frequencies, the transfer function is approximated by 1/(s +
a), where a is the S/W compensator pole. The pole introduced by a affects the motor flux phase
angle, and is chosen to be low enough such that the error introduced is small.
NXG Control
In typical applications that have short cables between the motor and the VFD the default value
of a, 2 rad/s, provides a good compromise between flux phase angle error and reduced gain
at dc.
In long cable applications, the effect of compensating the cable voltage drop, resistive and
inductive, causes additional terms to be introduced in the motor flux calculation, i.e. Vmotor =
Vvfd – I*Rcable – I*w*Lcable. This requires that a be increased so as to avoid the sensitivity of offsets
and measurement errors. However, there is an adverse effect on the starting torque capability.
Typically for cables longer than 5000 m, a can be set in the range of 4 to 6 rad/s. With such a
setting, enable High starting torque mode (2960) to maintain good starting torque capability.
Table 5-41 Flux Control Menu (3100) Parameters

Flux reg prop gain 3110 1.72 0.0 10.0 Flux PI regulator proportional gain term.
Flux reg integral 3120 1.0 0.0 1200.0 Flux PI regulator integral gain term.
gain
Flux filter time const 3130 sec 0.0667 0.0 10.0 Time constant of the low pass filter used on the
flux error.
Flux demand 3150 pu 1.0 0.16 10.0 Set the flux demand, or desired V/Hz ratio. Use
the default setting to set the V/Hz ratio to
nameplate values.
Flux ramp rate 3160 sec 0.5 0.0 5.0 Set the ramp time to go from zero to rated flux.
This time establishes the time to magnetize the
motor.
Energy saver min 3170 % 100.0 10.0 125.0 Set the lowest value of flux, as a percentage of
flux rated motor flux that the drive will apply to an
unloaded motor.
Energy Saver is enabled if you enter a value that
is less than the flux demand. The control
establishes the amount of flux or motor voltage
that minimizes the losses in the motor.
Flux droop 3195 % 0 0 200 Set flux droop for parallel drives, to keep the
voltage balanced between drives. This
parameter is used for fine adjustments on flux
droop with the main reference coming from an
external PLC. Refer to Section Parallel Drive
Control for a single IM.
Table 5-42 Speed Loop Menu (3200) Parameters

Speed reg prop 3210 0.02 0.0 1.0 Speed PI regulator proportional gain term.*
gain
Speed reg integral 3220 0.046 0.0 1200.0 Speed PI regulator integral gain term.*
gain
Speed reg Kf gain 3230 0.6 0.1 1.0 Allows a smooth variation of the speed regulator
from a simple PI (Kf = 1.0) to a double speed loop
(Kf = 0.5).
NXG Control

Speed filter time 3240 0.0488 0.0 10.0 Time constant of the low pass filter used on the
const speed error.*
Droop in % @ FL 3245 % 0.0 0.0 10.0 Desired speed droop in percent of rated speed
current at full load current. Enter 0 to disable.
* Values are automatically calculated after Stage 2 auto-tuning.

Refer to Section Auto-tuning of Chapter Operating the Control for warnings associated with
this function.
Table 5-43 Current Loop Menu (3250) Parameters

Current reg prop 3260 0.5 0.0 5.0 Current PI regulator proportional gain term.*
gain
Current reg integ 3270 25.0 0.0 6000.0 Current PI regulator integral gain term.*
gain
Prop gain during 3280 0.16 0.0 5.0 Current PI regulator proportional during dual
brake frequency braking.*
Integ gain during 3290 9.6 0.0 6000.0 Current PI regulator integral gain term during
brake dual frequency braking.*
* Values are automatically updated after Stage 1 auto-tuning.

Refer to Section Auto-tuning of Chapter Operating the Control for warnings associated
with this function.
Table 5-44 Stator Resistance Estimator Menu (3300) Parameters

Stator resistance 3310 Off Enable or disable the stator resistance estimator
est function:
● Off
● On
This parameter is not implemented.
Stator resis filter 3320 0.0 0.0 1.0 Stator resistance estimator filter gain.
gain
Stator resis integ 3330 0.002 0.0 1.0 Stator resistance estimator integral gain.
gain
NXG Control
Table 5-45 Braking Menu (3350) Parameters

Enable braking 3360 Off Enable or disable DFB.
Note: You must be aware of torque pulsations
and motor heating produced with this method.
Pulsation 3370 Hz 275.0 100.0 5000.0 Torque pulsation frequency when DFB is
frequency enabled. Adjust for a different torque pulsation
frequency. The control always recalculates the
desired value due to limited resolution. Adjust to
avoid mechanical resonance frequencies.
Brake power loss 3390 % 0.25 0.0 50.0 Amount of high frequency losses at the onset of
braking. Affects the limit of the Vq component of
output braking voltage.
VD Loss Max 3400 pu 0.25 0.0 0.5 Max amplitude of the loss inducing voltage. Use
this to adjust the braking torque. Sets the
maximum loss limiting (Vd) voltage amplitude.
Braking constant 3410 pu 1.05 0.0 10.0 Ratio of motor-induced losses to power absorbed
from load.
Always set this parameter to a value greater than
1.0.
Setting this parameter higher increases Vq and
Vd voltage amplitude of losses in the motor and
increases braking.
Exercise caution to prevent a motor thermal trip.
Note
Dual-frequency Braking (DFB)
Braking capacity is accomplished by means of DFB.
This feature injects a counter-rotating flux vector at well beyond the slip of the machine. This
creates a braking function and generates additional losses in the motor.
You may adjust the injection frequency via a menu setting to avoid critical frequencies, i.e.
mechanical resonances.
DFB is for braking only. Do not use DFB as a replacement for a four quadrant drive. Maximum
losses in the motor provide a deceleration torque that is much lower than the regenerative
torque provided by a regenerative drive.
Note
Restrictions for dual frequency operation
When AFE or six step regeneration are enabled, DFB is disabled.
NXG Control
5.6 Options for Auto Menu (4)
Table 5-46 Control Loop Test Menu (3460) Parameters

Test type 3470 Speed Select the type of loop test desired:
● Speed
● Torque
Test positive 3480 % 30.0 -200.0 200.0 Positive going limit of the test waveform.
Test negative 3490 % -30.0 -200.0 200.0 Negative going limit of the test waveform.
Test time 3500 sec 30.1 0.0 500.0 Set the time for the drive to spend in either the
positive or negative test setting.
Begin test 3510 Function Start the speed or torque loop test.
Stop test 3520 Function Stop the speed or torque loop test.
Note
configuration.
The Auto Menu (4) consists of the following menu options:

● Speed Profile Menu (4000)
● Analog Input Menu (4090)
● Analog Outputs Menu (4660)
● Speed Setpoint Menu (4240)
● Incremental Speed Setup Menu (4970)
● PID Select Menu (4350)
Table 5-47 Speed Profile Menu (4000) Parameters

Entry point 4010 % 0.0 0.0 200.0 Set the percent of speed command at which the drive
begins, following the speed command.
Exit point 4020 % 150.0 0.0 200.0 Set the percent of speed command at which the drive
stops, following the speed command.
Entry speed 4030 % 0.0 0.0 200.0 Set the speed command to which the drive accelerates
when given a start command, when the speed profile
function is enabled.
NXG Control

Exit speed 4040 % 150.0 0.0 200.0 Set the speed command that the drive reaches at the exit
point.
Auto off 4050 % 0.0 0.0 100.0 Set the level of command at which the drive turns off.
Delay off 4060 sec 0.5 0.5 100.0 Set a time delay between the time the command reaches
the auto off point and the time the drive shuts off.
Auto on 4070 % 0.0 0.0 100.0 Set the level of command at which the drive turns on.
Delay on 4080 sec 0.5 0.5 100.0 Set a time delay between the time the command reaches
the auto on point and the time the drive starts.
Further Description of Speed Profiling Control

Speed profiling control provides an increased resolution in the "usable control range" for the
motor. The speed profiling function allows the speed of the motor to be adjusted in much finer
increments i.e. higher resolution, in the desired operating range. The following figures illustrate
the advantage of speed profiling control.
6SHHG 6SHHG
1R$FWLRQ8QWLO6SHHG5HDFKHVRI
5DWHG0RWRU O
WUR
RQ ([LW6SHHG RO
& &RQWU
D EOH 8VDEOH
8V
(QWU\
0LQ ,QSXW6LJQDO 0LQ ,QSXW6LJQDO

P$ P$ P$ P$ P$
(QWU\3RLQW ([LW3RLQW
1R6SHHG3URILOLQJ 8VLQJ6SHHG3URILOLQJ
Figure 5-3 Advantage of using speed profiling control
Table 5-48 Analog Input Menu (4090) Parameters for External and Internal Inputs

Analog 4100 Submenu Access menu for analog input 1 setup.
input #1 See Table Analog Input #1 Menu (4100).
NXG Control

Auxiliary 4500 Submenu Access menu for auxiliary input 1 setup.
input #1 See Table Auxiliary Input #1 Menu (4500).
Auxiliary 4580 Submenu Access menu for auxiliary input 2 setup.
input #2 See Table Auxiliary Input #2 Menu (4580).
Configuring the External and Internal Inputs

Set up the analog inputs to receive the converted data from the selected user modules as one
of the following choices:
● 0 to 20 mA
● 4 to 20 mA
● 0 to 10 V
● -10 V to +10 V
Define the minimum and maximum values for scaling, and the loss of signal (LOS) threshold
and action.
Table 5-49 Analog Input #1 Menu (4100) Parameters

Source 4105 Off Set the input source for analog input 1:
● Off
● Ext 1 to 24
● Int 1 to 12
See Table Pick list for Analog Input Sources.
Type 4110 4–20 mA Set the operational mode for analog input 1:
● 0 to 20 mA
● 4 to 20 mA
● 0 to 10 V
Min input 4120 % 0.0 -300.0 300.0 Minimum analog input.
Max input 4130 % 100.0 -300.0 300.0 Maximum analog input.
Loss point 4140 % 15.0 0.0 100.0 Threshold where loss of signal action is activated. Enter
threshold as a percentage of upper range for any type.
Loss of 4150 Preset Select loss of signal action:
signal action ● Preset
● Maintain
● Stop
Loss of 4160 % 20.0 -200.0 200.0 Loss of signal preset speed.
signal
setpoint
NXG Control

● Off
● Ext 1 to 24
● Int 1 to 12
● 0 to 20 mA
● 4 to 20 mA
● 0 to 10 V
● Maintain
● Stop
signal
setpoint

● Off
● Ext 1 to 24
● Int 1 to 12
● 0 to 20 mA
● 4 to 20 mA
● 0 to 10 V
● Maintain
● Stop
signal
setpoint
NXG Control

● Off
● Ext 1 to 24
● Int 1 to 12
● 0 to 20 mA
● 4 to 20 mA
● 0 to 10 V
● Maintain
● Stop
signal
setpoint

● Off
● Ext 1 to 24
● Int 1 to 12
Note: Analog input number is redundant since the menu
displays the input number.
● 0 to 20 mA
● 4 to 20 mA
● 0 to 10 V
NXG Control

● Maintain
● Stop
signal
setpoint
Table 5-54 Auxiliary Input #1 Menu (4500) Parameters

Source 4510 Off Auxiliary input 1 source:
● Off
● Ext 1 to 24
● Int 1 to 12
Type 4520 4–20 mA Set the operational mode for auxiliary input 1:
● 0 to 20 mA
● 4 to 20 mA
● 0 to 10 V
Min input 4530 % 0.0 -300.0 300.0 Minimum auxiliary input.
Max input 4540 % 100.0 -300.0 300.0 Maximum auxiliary input.
● Maintain
● Stop
signal
setpoint
Table 5-55 Auxiliary Input #2 Menu (4580) Parameters

Source 4590 Off Auxiliary input 2 source:
● Off
● Ext 1 to 24
● Int 1 to 12
Type 4600 4–20 mA Set the operational mode for auxiliary input 2:
● 0 to 20 mA
● 4 to 20 mA
● 0 to 10 V
Min input 4610 % 0.0 -300.0 300.0 Minimum auxiliary input.
NXG Control

Max input 4620 % 100.0 -300.0 300.0 Maximum auxiliary input.
threshold as percentage of upper range for any type.
● Maintain
● Stop
signal
setpoint
Table 5-56 Pick list for Analog Input Sources
Off External 8 External 16 External 24 Internal AI8

External 1 External 9 External 17 Internal AI1 Internal AI9
External 5 External 13 External 21 Internal AI5
Use the pick list variables to assign hardware inputs to internal analog variables used within the code as assigned by the
associated SOP flag selections.
Table 5-57 Analog Output Menu (4660) Parameters for External Outputs

Analog 4660+4(n-1)+1 Submenu Submenu for analog output n (n = 1 to 16).
output #n*
Analog 4660+4(n-1)+2 Total Set the input source for analog output n.
variable Current See Table Pick list for Analog Output Variable
Parameters.
Output 4660+4(n-1)+3 Unip Set the output type for the module:
module type ● Unip (unipolar)
● Bip (bipolar)
Full range 4660+4(n-1)+4 % 0.0 0.0 300.0 Scale the output range of the selected variable.
NXG Control
* Each analog output parameter, 1 to 16, contains a submenu consisting of the following
parameters:
● Analog variable
● Output module type
● Full range
The formulas presented in the ID column give you the direct ID number for the
corresponding analog output.
For example, for analog output 4:
● The analog output ID will be 4660 + 4 (4 - 1) + 1, or 4673.
● The analog variable ID for analog output 4 will be 4660 + 4 (4 - 1) + 2, or 4674.
Configuring the External Outputs

Set up the analog outputs via the pick list parameters in the analog output menus, 4661 through
4721, to complete setup:
1. Select the variable to be output to the analog output module from the pick list; all units are
%.
2. Select the type of output, unipolar or bipolar.
3. Select the percent of the value to provide scaling of the variable.
Table 5-58 Pick list for Analog Output Variable Parameters
Motor Voltage Neg Sequence Q Out Neutral Volts Analog Input #8

Total Current Input Frequency Synch Motor Field Input KVAR
Average Power Input Power Avg Motor Torque Drive Losses
Motor Speed Input Pwr Factor Encoder Speed Excess React Current
Speed Demand Ah Harmonic Analog Input #1 Speed Droop Percent
Speed Reference Bh Harmonic Analog Input #2 Torq Current (Iqs) Ref
Raw Flux Demand Total Harmonics Analog Input #3 Torq Current (Iqs) Fb
Flux Reference Xfmr Therm Level Analog Input #4 Torq Current (IqsFilt) Filtered
Current (RMS) 1 Cycle Protect Analog Input #5
Zero Sequence Av Single Phase Cur Analog Input #6
Neg Sequence D Under Volt Limit Analog Input #7
Table 5-59 Analog Output #1 Menu (4661)

Analog 4662 Set the input variable for analog output 1.
variable
Output 4663 Set the output type for the module:
module type ● unipolar
● bipolar
Full range 4664 % 0 0 300 Scale the output range of the selected variable.
NXG Control
Table 5-60 Speed Setpoint Menu (4240) Parameters*

Speed 4250 rpm 0 -18000 18000 Programmable speed setpoint1
setpoint 1
setpoint 2
setpoint 3
setpoint 4
setpoint 5
setpoint 6
setpoint 7
setpoint 8
Jog speed 4330 rpm 0 -18000 18000 Set the drive jog speed.
Safety 4340 rpm 0 -18000 18000 Safety override preset speed.
setpoint
* Inputs are fixed in the command generator setpoint sources. Refer to Section Command
Generator in Chapter Operating the Control.
1
Can be selected through an external contact and the SOP.
Table 5-61 Incremental Speed Setup Menu (4970) Parameters

Speed 4971 % 1.0 0.0 200.0 When selected through the SOP it will increase the
increment 1 speed demand by the program amount.
Speed 4972 % 1.0 0.0 200.0 When selected through the SOP it will decrease the
decrement 1 speed demand by the program amount.
Table 5-62 PID Select Menu (4350) Parameters

Prop gain 4360 0.39 0.0 98.996 Set the PID loop "Proportional (P) gain".
Integral gain 4370 0.39 0.0 98.996 Set the PID loop "Integral (I) gain".
Diff gain 4380 0.0 0.0 98.996 Set the PID loop "Derivative (D) gain".
NXG Control
5.7 Options for Main Menu (5)

Min clamp 4390 % 0.0 -200.0 200.0 Set the minimum value for the PID loop integrator.
Max clamp 4400 % 100.0 -200.0 200.0 Set the maximum value for the PID loop integrator.
Setpoint 4410 % 0.0 -200.0 200.0 Set a value to be used as the reference setpoint for
the external PID loop. The value is set as a percent
of full scale. This parameter can be used instead of
Analog Input #1 (4100) for reference in the PID loop.
Using a PID controller for speed reference

When using an external PID controller as the speed reference, analog input 1 (4100) or the
set point (4410) are used for PID command, and analog input 2 is used for PID feedback.
The input is pre-selected via the SOP.
See Tables Analog Input #1 Menu (4100) and Analog Input #2 Menu (4170) for scaling
information.
CAUTION
Providing correct inputs and parameters for PID command and feedback
If you assign incorrect inputs for PID command and feedback, it may cause instability of the
system and severe mechanical damage.
You are responsible for providing correct inputs and parameters for PID command and
feedback.
Check that all inputs and parameters for PID command and feedback are correctly assigned.
Note
configuration.
The Main Menu (5) consists of the following menu options:

● Motor Menu (1)
● Drive Menu (2)
● Stability Menu (3)
NXG Control
● Auto Menu (4)

● Log Control Menu (6)
● Drive Protect Menu (7)
● Meter Menu (8)
● Communications Menu (9)
● Security Edit Functions Menu (5000)
● Parameter Default/File Functions
● Language and Security Functions
Note
Description of menu options
The contents of menus 1 to 9 are explained consecutively in this chapter. Refer to the
appropriate section for descriptions of options within each menu.
You can access all of the menus directly using the keypad or from Main Menu (5). The following
figure depicts a typical menu selection from the main menu level, as viewed through the Drive
Tool.
Figure 5-4 Example of Main Menu
Main Menu (5) functions and submenus are explained in the tables that follow.
Table 5-63 Main Menu (5) Parameters

Motor 1 Submenu Access the Motor Menu.
Drive 2 Submenu Access the Drive Menu.
Stability 3 Submenu Access the Stability Menu.
Auto 4 Submenu Access the Auto Menu.
Logs 6 Submenu Access the Log Control Menu.
Drive protect 7 Submenu Access the Drive Protect Menu.
Meter 8 Submenu Access the Meter Menu.
NXG Control

Communications 9 Submenu Access the Communications Menu.
Security edit functions 5000 Submenu Access functions for editing a menu item’s security codes.
Set current as default 5045 Submenu Set all default parameters to the current parameter settings.
Reset to defaults 5050 Submenu Reset all parameters to their factory defaults.
Select language 5080 Pick list Set language for keypad:
● English (default)
● French
● German
● Spanish
Enter security code 5500 Function Enter the security code to set the clearance level for access.
Security Edit Functions

An electronic security code is provided to limit unauthorized access to various parameters
within the drive equipment.
Table 5-64 Security Edit Functions Menu (5000) Parameters

Change security level 5010 Function Set the level of security on a menu item. Prohibit access to a menu or
menu items until "enter security level" is set to that level or higher.
When active, an "x" will appear as the first character on the second line
of the display.
1. Scroll past Main Menu (5) into another menu. The current security
level will appear as the last character on the second line of the display.
2. Press [ENTER] to edit the security level for the ID that is shown.
3. Choose level: 0, 5, 7, or 8.
Drive running inhibit 5020 Function Enable or disable a menu item’s run inhibit. Prohibit certain parameters
from being changed when drive is in the Run State (D).
When active, an "x" will appear as the first character on the second line
of the display. The current run inhibit state will appear as the last
character on the second line of the display.
Drive running lockout will not allow the parameter to be changed while
the drive is running.
"0" indicates that a parameter may be changed while the drive is running.
"1" indicates that a parameter may not be changed while the drive is
running.
Change security codes 5090 Function Change the default security codes for the various security levels used
by the drive. See Section Security Access Levels and Codes. This is how
the parameter displays in the keypad.
NXG Control
CAUTION
Changing parameter settings for Drive Running Inhibit (5020)
Changes to Drive running inhibit (5020) may enable parameter changes while the drive is
running.
This may result in drive trip or instability.
Do not change the Drive running inhibit (5020) setting of any parameter unless you are
completely certain that the change is safe.
Editing security levels

When you select either of these functions, the display returns to the top of the Main Menu (5).
You can navigate the menu system as you normally would.
1. When the menu item, that you want to change is displayed, press the [ENTER] key to edit
the security level. An asterisk character (*) appears on the left of the display to indicate that
the menu or submenu is in the security edit mode, and not in normal mode.
2. Press the [CANCEL] key to exit the security edit mode.
5.7.1 Security Access Levels and Codes
Note
Changing default access codes
Access codes allow you to access and change the default security settings of the drive control.
Menu options above security level 5 are intended only for trained Siemens personnel during
commissioning or servicing.
Siemens recommends changing access codes to provide a higher level of security and to
prevent tampering.
Access the Security Edit Menu (5000) to change the factory default security settings. When
the drive is configured for security level 7 access, the Security Edit Menu (5000) is visible from
the Main Menu (5). Functions within this menu are used to:
● set the security levels for menu items
● hide menu items
● prevent changes to specific parameters.
The Security Edit Functions Menu (5000) contains security functions described in the table
below.
NXG Control
5.8 Options for Log Control Menu (6)
Table 5-65 Default Security Access Levels and Access Codes
Access Level Default Access Code Level of Security

0 None Minimum access
5 5555 Startup access for service and/or startup
7 7777 Advanced access for troubleshooting
8 Proprietary Factory use only
Note
configuration.
The Log Control Menu (6) consists of the following menu options:
● Event Log Menu (6180)
● Alarm/Fault Log Menu (6210)
● Historic Log Menu (6250)
CAUTION
Damage to circuitry
When using the RS232 serial port to upload logs, you must use an optically isolated adaptor
to protect the circuitry on the control.
Table 5-66 Event Log Menu (6180) Parameters

Upload event log 6190 Function Upload the event log via the RS232 serial port.
Table 5-67 Alarm/Fault Log Menu (6210) Parameters

Alarm/Fault log display 6220 Function Display the fault log.
Alarm/Fault log upload 6230 Function Upload the fault log via the RS232 serial port.
Alarm/Fault log clear 6240 Function Clear the fault log.
NXG Control
Table 5-68 Historic Log Menu (6250) Parameters
Parameter ID Default Description

Store in event log 6255 On When selected, the historic log is stored in the event log.
Historic log variable 1 6260 Spd Ref Select the 1st variable for the historic log.*
Historic log variable 2 6270 Trq I Cmd Select the 2nd variable for the historic log.*
Historic log variable 3 6280 Mtr Flux Select the 3rd variable for the historic log.*
Historic log variable 4 6290 Pwr Out Select the 4th variable for the historic log.*
Historic log variable 5 6300 I Total Out Select the 5th variable for the historic log.*
Historic log variable 6 6310 Mag I Fdbk Select the 6th variable for the historic log.*
Historic log variable 7 6320 Mtr Flux Select the 7th variable for the historic log.*
Historic log upload 6330 Upload the historic log via the RS232 serial port.
* See Table Pick list variables for Historic Log for pick list variables.
Table 5-69 Pick list variables for Historic Log (all units are %)
Abbreviation Description
Mtr Spd Motor speed
Spd Ref Speed reference
Spd Dmd Raw speed demand
Trq I Cmd Torque current command
Trq I Fdbk Torque current feedback
Mag I Cmd Magnetizing current command
Mag I Fdbk Magnetizing current feedback
I Total Out Total motor current
Mtr Volt Motor voltage
Mtr Flux Motor flux
V Avail Line voltage available
V Avail RMS Line voltage RMS
Pwr Out Output power
V Neutral Output neutral volts
I Total In Total input current
Pwr In Input power
Freq In Input frequency
KVAR In Input reactive power pu
Drv Loss Internal drive power losses in pu of input power
Xcess I Rct Excessive input reactive current (above limit) pu
Spd Droop Speed droop pu
Freq Out Output frequency pu
NXG Control
5.9 Options for Drive Protect Menu (7)
Note
configuration.
The Drive Protect Menu (7) consists of the following menu options:
● Input Protect Menu (7000)
● Single Phasing Menu (7010)
Table 5-70 Drive Protect Menu (7) Parameters

Input protection 7000 Submenu Access the input protection parameters.
See Table Input Protect Menu (7000).
Drive IOC 7110 % 150.0 50.0 175.0 Drive instantaneous over current setpoint
setpoint as a percentage of drive output rating.
This parameter sets a hardware based
comparator threshold on the system I/O
board.
Cell Overload 7112 % 100.0 100.0 150.0 Cell current overload, as a percentage of
Level drive output rating, allowed for 1 minute
out of every 10 minutes.
Auto reset 7120 No Enable the reset of the drive after a fault.
enable
Auto reset time 7130 sec 1 0 120 Adjust the time between the fault and its
automatic reset.
Auto reset 7140 4 1 10 Set the number of attempts a drive will be
attempts reset before a permanent shutdown.
Auto reset 7150 sec 10 1 1000 Set the amount of time between faults
memory time that will clear the attempts counter.
Fault Reset 7160 Function Issue a drive fault reset when selected.
Thermal OT 7170 Submenu Thermal over temperature rollback
Rollback submenu.
Refer to Section Thermal Over
Temperature Rollback for a description
of operation.
Min Rollback 7171 Function Minimum rollback level.
Level
Rollback Ramp 7172 Function Rollback base rate.
Rate
NXG Control

Cell OT Alarm 7174 Function Display the cumulative time under Cell
Timer OT.
Xformer OT 7177 Function Display the cumulative time under
Alarm Timer Xformer OT.
Table 5-71 Input Protect Menu (7000) Parameters

Single phasing 7010 Submenu Access the single phasing protection
parameters. See Table Single Phasing
Menu (7010).
Undervoltage 7060 0.0 0.0 10.0 Under voltage PI regulator proportional
prop gain gain term.
Undervoltage 7070 0.001 0.0 1.0 Undervoltage PI regulator integral gain
integ gain term.
UV Flux 7075 0.05 0.0 0.5 Undervoltage Flux Reduction Integrator
Reduction gain regulator gain term. Rolls back flux
demand on synchronous motors when up
against the modulation index clamp limit.
UV Flux 7076 0.01 0.0 0.5 Undervoltage Flux Recovery Integrator
Recovery gain regulator gain term.
MI Lim Spd 7077 0.01 0.0 0.5 Overmodulation Speed Reduction
Reduce gain Integrator regulator gain term. Rolls back
speed demand on PMM motors when up
against the modulation index clamp limit.
MI Lim Spd 7078 0.01 0.0 0.5 Overmodulation Speed Recovery
Recover gain Integrator regulator gain term.
1 Cyc Protect 7080 0.0025 0.0 1.0 Gain of integral regulator for detecting
integ gain excessive input reactive current. Output
of this regulator is used to fault the drive
in case high reactive currents flow in the
input, other than when MV is applied to
the drive. Adjust the gain to change the
response to high reactive currents.
1 Cycle Protect 7081 % 50.0 0.0 100.0 Set the integrator output level at which
Limit the drive issues a 1 Cycle Protect fault.
Excess Loss 7084 % 5.0 1.0 5.0 Set the excessive drive power loss level
Idle when the drive is idle, in particular when
cell is fast bypassing. The default is 5 %
of input power, which is the hard-coded
value of previous releases.
Excess Loss 7086 % 7.0 3.0 12.0 Set the excessive drive power loss level
Running when the drive is running. The default is
7% of input power, which is the hard-
coded value of previous releases.
Xformer tap 7050 % 1 Choose from settings -5%, 0%, +5%,
setting +10% to match transformer tap setting.
Xformer 7090 0.0133 0.0 1.0 Gain of integral regulator to limit input
thermal gain current to 105% of its rated value.
NXG Control
5.10 Options for Meter Menu (8)

Xformer 7100 0.5 0.0 10.0 Gain to adjust model of input transformer.
protection const Use the default value of 0.5.
Phase 7105 % 40.0 0.0 100.0 Set the input current level, as a
Imbalance Limit percentage of rated input current, above
which input phase imbalance alarm is
issued.
Ground Fault 7106 % 40.0 0.0 100.0 Set the level above which the drive
Limit issues an input ground fault alarm.
Ground Fault 7107 sec 0.2 0.001 2.0 Set the time constant of filter used for
Time Const averaging input neutral voltage when
detecting a ground fault.
Table 5-72 Single Phasing Menu (7010) Parameters

SPD prop gain 7020 0.0 0.0 10.0 Single phase detector PI regulator
proportional gain term.
SPD integral 7030 0.001 0.0 1.0 Single phase detector PI regulator
gain integral gain term.
SPD threshold 7040 % 50.0 0.0 100.0 Regulator output level below which an
alarm is generated.
Note
configuration.
The Meter Menu (8) consists of the following menu options:

● Display Parameters Menu (8000)
● Hour Meter Setup Menu (8010)
● General Drive Parameters Menu (Set Time, Software Version, Language, Output Units)
● Input Harmonics Menu (8140)
NXG Control
Table 5-73 Meter Menu (8) Parameters

Display params 8000 Submenu Access the display parameters. See Table
Display Parameters Menu (8000).
Hour meter setup 8010 Submenu Access the hour meter setup parameters. See
Table Hour Meter Setup (8010).
Input harmonics 8140 Submenu Access the input harmonics parameters. See
Table Input Harmonics Menu (8140).
Fault display override 8200 Off Enable or disable the display of fault/alarm
messages on the keypad.
Set the clock time 8080 Function Change the time and date of the real-time clock
chip.
Display version 8090 Function Display the installed version of firmware.
number
Customer order 8100 0 0 9999999 View the 7 digit customer order number. This
parameter is now obsolete due to ID 8101 on
Version 4.1.0 code.
Customer order 8101 0 0 9999999999 View the 10 digit customer order number. This
parameter replaces ID 8100 on Version 4.1.0
code and later.
Customer drive 8110 1 0 9999999 View the customer drive number.
The following menu contains the pick lists to select the variables to be displayed on the front
panel default display.
Table 5-74 Display Parameters Menu (8000) Parameters
Parameter ID Default Description

Status variable 1 8001 DEMD Select variable 1 to display on the LCD display.*
Status variable 2 8002 %SPD Select variable 2 to display on the LCD display.*
Status variable 3 8003 VLTS Select variable 3 to display on the LCD display.*
Status variable 4 8004 ITOT Select variable 4 to display on the LCD display.*
Status variable 5 8005 IMRF Select variable 5 to display on the Tool1 display.*
* See Table Pick list variables for the front display.

1
Available for drive tool only.
Table Pick list variables for the front display contains the abbreviation, variable name, units
and description of the standard pick list variables used in menus such as the Historic Log Menu
or the Display Variable Menu.
The variable name column contains the name of the display variable. The content of the
variable name column is displayed as you scroll through the list of available display variables.
The abbreviation column contains an abbreviation that is displayed after a variable is selected
from the list. The abbreviation is between 3 and 4 characters in length and is displayed on the
front panel of the drive.
NXG Control
Table 5-75 Pick list variables for the front display
Abbreviation Variable Name Units Description

IMRF Mag current ref A Output Ids reference.
ITRF Trq current ref A Output Iqs reference.
FLDS Flux DS % Motor Flux DS. Main flux component, magnitude of flux
vector.
FLQS Flux QS % Motor Flux QS. Quadrature component; normally close to
or at zero.
VDRF Vds reference % Motor Vds reference. Direct component.
VQRF Vqs reference % Motor Vqs reference. Quadrature component.
SLIP Slip frequency % Motor slip frequency.
%SPD Motor speed %
FREQ Output Frequency Hz
RPM Motor speed rpm Motor speed with slip correction.
VLTS Motor voltage V
IMAG Mag current filtered A Motor Ids filtered. Motor voltage producing current.
ITRQ Trq current filtered A Motor Iqs filtered. Torque producing current.
ITOT Motor current A Motor total motor current.
%TRQ Torque out % Motor Torque. Percentage of rated torque.
KWO Output power kW Output power. Real output power component.
RESS Stator resistance Motor stator resistance.
DEMD Speed demand % Motor speed demand, before the ramp.
SREF Speed reference % Motor speed reference. Input to speed regulator, ramp
output.
FDMD Raw flux demand % Motor raw flux demand.
FXRF Flux reference % Motor flux reference.
IDIN Id input current A Input real current.
IQIN Iq input current A Input reactive current.
IAIN Phase A input current Arms
IBIN Phase B input current Arms
ICIN Phase C input current Arms
IAVI Total input current Arms 3-phase input current.
VAIN Phase A input voltage Vrms
VBIN Phase B input voltage Vrms
VCIN Phase C input voltage Vrms
VZSQ Zero sequence voltage V Input zero sequence average.
VNSD Negative sequence D voltage V Input negative sequence D voltage. Direct component of
the negative sequence input voltage, responsible for input
losses and heating.
VNSQ Negative sequence Q voltage V Input negative sequence Q voltage. Quadrature
component of the negative sequence input voltage,
responsible for input losses and heating.
VDIN Input D voltage Vrms Input voltage magnitude.
NXG Control
Abbreviation Variable Name Units Description

VQIN Input Q voltage V Input quadrature voltage. This drives the input PLL. A
value that is too high implies the PLL is not locked onto the
input voltage.
VAVI Input voltage V Input voltage. 3-phase, L-L rms voltage.
FRIN Input frequency Hz
KWIN Input power average kW
PFIN Input power factor %
HRCA Ah harmonic coefficient % Input ah harmonic.
HRCB Bh harmonic coefficient % Input bh harmonic.
HARM Total A, B harmonics % Input total harmonics.
XTHL Transformer thermal level % Input transformer thermal level.
1CRI One cycle reactive current level % Input one cycle reactive current level.
SPHI Single phasing current level % Input single phasing current level.
UNVL Under Voltage level % Input under voltage level.
EFF Efficiency % Input drive efficiency.
THD Total Harmonic Distortion % Input total harmonic distortion.
VNGV Output Neutral Voltage V Output neutral to ground voltage.
%VNG Output Neutral Voltage % Output neutral to ground voltage.
SMFC Synch Motor Field Current A Motor synch motor field current command.
%ESP Encoder Speed % Motor encoder speed.
ERPM Encoder Speed rpm Motor encoder speed.
IAF Phase A filter current A Output Filter Current Ia.
IBF Phase B filter current A Output Filter Current Ib.
ICF Phase C filter current A Output Filter Current Ic.
MVAO Measured Phase A volts V Voltage Phase A (Va) at drive output.
MVBO Measured Phase B volts V Voltage Phase B (Vb) at drive output.
MVCO Measured Phase C volts V Voltage Phase C (Vc) at drive output.
MVNG Measured Output Neutral Voltage V Output drive neutral voltage.
%MAV Max Avail Output Volts % Output maximum available output voltage.
KVAR Input Avg Reactive Power KVAR Input drive average reactive power.
LOSS Excessive Drive Losses kW Drive internal power losses (input - output).
XRCA Excessive Reactive current A Input reactive current over max allowed.
UXFR Up Transfer State value Up transfer state machine state variable.
DXFR Down Transfer State value Down transfer state machine state variable.
%DRP Speed Droop % Motor speed droop. Speed slow-down proportional to
torque current.
NXG Control
8VHUGHILQHGGLVSOD\9DULDEOH 8VHUGHILQHGGLVSOD\9DULDEOH
8VHUGHILQHGGLVSOD\9DULDEOH
8VHUGHILQHGGLVSOD\9DULDEOH
)L[HGGLVSOD\ILHOG
8VHUGHILQHGGLVSOD\ILHOGV
7RSURZRIGLVSOD\
VKRZVILHOGQDPHV 02'( '(0' 530 09/7 2$03
%RWWRPURZRIGLVSOD\
2))
VKRZVG\QDPLFYDOXHV
Figure 5-5 Standard Keypad Dynamic Programmable Meter Display
8VHUGHILQHG
GLVSOD\ 02'( .<3' )L[HGGLVSOD\
9DULDEOH '(0' ILHOG
9DULDEOH 530

8VHUGHILQHG
9DULDEOH 9/76 GLVSOD\ILHOGV
9DULDEOH ,727
/HIWFROXPQRIGLVSOD\ 5LJKWFROXPQRIGLVSOD\
VKRZVILHOGQDPHV VKRZVG\QDPLFYDOXHV
Figure 5-6 Multi-Language Keypad Dynamic Programmable Meter Display
Table 5-76 Hour Meter Setup (8010) Parameters

Display hour 8020 Function Display the amount of time that the drive has been
meter operational since it was commissioned.
Preset hour 8030 Function Preset the hour meter to the accumulated time that
meter the drive has been operational since it was
commissioned in the event that a microboard has
been replaced on an existing drive.
Reset hour 8040 Function Reset the hour meter when the drive is
meter commissioned.
Display Output 8050 Function Display the total output kW hours that have been
kWH meter accumulated since the drive was commissioned.
Preset output 8060 Function Preset the output kW hour counter to a previous
kWH meter value when the microboard is replaced.
Reset output 8070 Function Reset the output kW hour counter to zero.
kWH meter
Display input 8072 Function Display the total input kW hours that have been
kWH meter accumulated since the drive was commissioned.
Preset input 8074 Function Preset the input kW hour counter to a previous
kWH meter value when the microboard is replaced.
Reset input 8076 Function Reset the input kW hour counter to zero.
kWH meter
NXG Control
5.11 Options for Communications Menu (9)
Table 5-77 Input Harmonics Menu (8140) Parameters

Selection for 8150 IA Select harmonic analysis:
HA ● IA
● IB
● IC
● VA
● VB
● VC
Harmonics 8160 1.0 0.0 30.0 Harmonic order
order
Harmonics 8170 0.001 0.0 1.0 Harmonics regulator integral gain term
integral gain
Note
configuration.
The Communications Menu (9) consists of the following menu options:

● Serial Port Setup Menu (9010)
● Network Control (9943)
● Network 1 Configure (9900)
● Network 2 Configure (9914)
● SOP and Serial Functions (9110)
● TCP/IP Setup (9300)
Table 5-78 Communications Menu (9) Parameters

Serial port 9010 Submenu Access serial port setup parameters.
setup See Table Serial Port Setup Menu (9010).
Network 9943 Submenu
Control
Network 1 9900 Submenu
Configure
NXG Control

Network 2 9914 Submenu Refer to NXG Communications manual.
Configure
Display 9950 Function
Network
Monitor
Serial echo 9180 Function
back test
Sop & serial 9110 Submenu Access functions that utilize the local serial port.
functions See Table Serial Functions Menu (9110).
TCP/IP setup 9300 Submenu Access functions that set the parameters for TCP/IP.
See Table TCP/IP Setup Menu (9300).
Table 5-79 Serial Port Setup Menu (9010) Parameters

Serial port use 9020 Local Designate the usage of the on board serial port:
● Local
● Modem
● Remote
Modem 9025 NXG1 Enter the 4 character password that can consist of 0 to 9, A
password to Z, by scrolling through each character.
Flow Control 9030 Xon/Xoff Designate the type of flow control used by the serial port:
● None
● Xon/Xoff
Baud rate 9040 9600 Designate the baud rate of the on board serial port:
● 9600
● 19200
● 38400
● 57600
● 115200
Note
Requirements for baud rates of 19.2 k or greater
Baud rates of 19.2 k or greater require the newer Siemens Communications Board; Siemens
part number A1A10000096.00.
Table 5-80 SOP and Serial Functions Menu (9110) Parameters

System 9120 Function Transfer the SOP to a remote system.
program
download
System 9130 Function Transfer the SOP from a remote system.
program
upload
NXG Control

Display sys 9140 Function Display the current SOP name.
prog name
Select system 9145 None Display the list of SOP files. This function stores the
program result as an offset into an array and is replaced by ID
9146 on Version 4.1.0 code and later.
Select system 9146 nowago. Display the list of SOP files on the flash disk to select
program hex the active one. This function stores the selected file
by filename and replaces ID 9145.
Display drctry 9147 Function Display the current directory file version.
version
Multiple 9185 Off Enable multiple configuration files.
config files
Parameter 9150 Function Transfer the current configuration file from a remote
data upload system.
Parameter 9160 Function Transfer the current configuration file to a remote
data system.
download
Parameter 9170 Function Obtain a print out of the current configuration data.
dump
Menu based 9111 Submenu Access the menu-based SOP timers 1 to 16.
timer setup
MenuTimer 9112 to Sec 0.0 0.0 86400.0 Menu timers 1 to 8 timeout.
1-8 9119
MenuTimer 9121 to Sec 0.0 0.0 86400.0 Menu timers 9 to 16 timeout.
9-16 9128
Use parameter upload functions to transmit data from the drive to a printer or computer.
Use parameter download functions to transmit data to the drive.
A terminal emulator such as the Microsoft® program "HyperTerminal" or equivalent is required
to upload, download, and echo files.
Windows "Terminal" protocol settings for the RS232 port are:
● no parity
● one stop bit
● a baud rate that is appropriate for the on-board serial port
All parameters are printed on the parameter dump.
CAUTION
Damage to port
When using a connection with the RS232 port, you must use an optically isolated adapter to
protect the port from damage from a ground loop or currents.
NXG Control
5.12 Options for Multiple Configuration Files
Table 5-81 TCP/IP Setup Menu (9300) Parameters

IP address 9310 172.17.20.16 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 Enter the drive IP address in dotted decimal.
Subnet 9320 255.255.0.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 Enter the drive subnet mask in dotted
mask decimal (keypad only).
Gateway 9330 172.16.1.1 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 Enter the drive gateway address in dotted
address decimal (keypad only).

The drive can operate with multiple motors that may vary in size. The drive uses multiple
parameter configuration files to accomplish multiple motor operation. There is one master
configuration file that is always named current cfg. The slave files are stored on the
CompactFlash card in a subfolder of the 'CfgFiles' configuration folder named 'SubCfgs'. The
slave files can have any legal name conforming to the "xxxxxxxx.yyy" file naming convention.
File extension for slave configuration files

The file extension of slave configuration files is always ‘.sfg’. You cannot add or change the
file extension for the slave configuration files through the menus. Choose 8 characters only
for the file name.
Press [ENTER] to save the parameters as they exist in memory to a new configuration file
name. This file will be stored to the CompactFlash card in the ‘SubCfgs’ subdirectory. This
function does not make this configuration file the active configuration file. It uses the current
data in memory to create a new slave configuration file. Any parameter that is saved to a slave
configuration file is identifiable by the small ‘s’ adjacent to the parameter ID number if it has
not been changed from the default setting, or a ‘$’ if it has been changed from the default
setting, for example (s9586) or ($9586).
Creating configuration files

You can create configuration files at runtime in the drive’s memory and then store them to the
CompactFlash card.
Create slave files via the keypad menus. To do so, set the slave parameters as desired and
write them to the CompactFlash card, see Table Slave Setup and Configuration Parameters.
You may set up to 8 SOP flags to point to a configuration file. Use the menus to map each
SOP flag to a corresponding configuration file. Once mapped, use the SOP flags to activate
the SOP for a particular motor.
NXG Control
Menu Item Descriptions
Multiple config files Use this pick list to switch slave configuration files.
Disable this item by setting it to "OFF". No other multiple configuration
file menus will be displayed.
Enable this item by setting any one of the SOP flags to true. The
corresponding configuration file will become active.
Show active config file Use this function to display the current active configuration file.
Only one configuration file can be active at one time.
If the correct configuration file is not displayed, check the SOP file for
accuracy. Check the ‘Setup SOP configuration flags menu' to be sure
the correct file is mapped to the SOP flag.
Set active config file Use this pick list to set the displayed file to be the active configuration
file.
This function overrides what is set in the SOP. Any change in the
SOP is checked against the file set in this function. Once a change
in the SOP is detected, that file will then be the active file. The keypad
menu setting is now ignored. This ensures no unintentional toggling
of the configuration files.
To switch back to the keypad file set it by this menu. If no change in
the SOP occurs, the keypad set configuration file will remain in
memory.
Setup SOP config flags Use this submenu for SOP flag configuration.
Create new config file Use this function to save slave parameters to a file name you specify.
Use the drive keypad to enter the file name. To get to the
alphanumeric characters, use the left or right arrow keys to position
the cursor. Use the up or down arrow keys to scroll to the desired
letter or number.
Set Use this function to map the name of the flag in the SOP file,
SOPConfigFileX_O SOPConfigFileX_O (X = 1 to 8) to a name of a slave configuration
file.
Once the SOP is running, and this flag is set to ‘true’, the configuration
file will be switched into memory. This is a method of switching among
multiple motors using one drive.
Select the file names from a pick list or create new files as described.
Table 5-82 Slave Setup and Configuration Parameters

Multiple config files 9185 Off Enable multiple configuration file
operation.
Show active config file 9195 Display the current active configuration
file on the flash disk.
Set active config file 9196 defaults.sfg Set the displayed file to be the active
configuration file on the flash disk.
Setup SOP config flags 9186 Submenu Access menu for SOP flag configuration.
Create new config file 9197 Create a new configuration file using the
numeric keypad.
NXG Control

Set SOPConfigFile1_O 9187 defaults.sfg Set the name of configuration file 1 to be
used with corresponding SOP flag 1.
Table 5-83 Parameter Menu for Slave Configuration
Parameter ID Parameter ID
Motor Menu
Motor kW rating 1010 50 Percent Break Point 1156
Motor frequency 1020 100 Percent Break Point 1157
Full load speed 1030 Maximum Load Inertia 1159
Motor voltage 1040 Motor trip volts 1160
Full load current 1050 Overspeed 1170
No load current 1060 Underload enable 1180
Leakage inductance 1070 I underload 1182
Stator resistance 1080 Underload timeout 1186
Inertia 1090 Motor torque limit 1 1190
Overload select 1130 Regen torque limit 1 1200
Overload pending 1139 Motor torque limit 2 1210
Overload 1140 Regen torque limit 2 1220
Overload timeout 1150 Motor torque limit 3 1230
0 Percent Break Point 1152 Regen torque limit 3 1240
10 Percent Break Point 1153 Phase Imbalance Limit 1244
17 Percent Break Point 1154 Ground Fault Limit 1245
25 Percent Break Point 1155 Ground Fault Time Const 1246
Drive Menu
Control loop type 2050 Skip center freq 3 2370
Ratio control 2070 Skip bandwidth 1 2380
Speed fwd max limit 1 2080 Skip bandwidth 2 2390
Speed fwd min limit 1 2090 Skip bandwidth 3 2400
Speed fwd max limit 2 2100 Freq avoid accel time 2410
Speed fwd min limit 2 2110 Spinning load mode 2430
NXG Control
Speed fwd max limit 3 2120 Scan end threshold 2440
Speed fwd min limit 3 2130 Current Level Setpoint 2450
Speed rev max limit 1 2410 Current ramp 2460
Speed rev min limit 1 2150 Max current 2470
Speed rev max limit 2 2160 Frequency scan rate 2480
Speed rev min limit 2 2170 Cond. stop timer 2500
Speed rev max limit 3 2180 Cond. run timer 2510
Speed rev min limit 3 2190 Min cells/phase count (n/3) 2540
Accel time 1 2270 Fast bypass 2600
Decel time 1 2280 Phase I gain 2710
Accel time 2 2290 Phase P gain 2720
Decel time 2 2300 Phase offset 2730
Accel time 3 2310 Phase error threshold 2740
Decel time 3 2320 Frequency Offset 2750
Jerk rate 2330 Up Transfer Timeout 2760
Skip center freq 1 2350 Down Transfer Timeout 2770
Skip center freq 2 2360 Cable Resistance 2940
Stability Menu
Flux reg prop gain 3110 Integ gain during brake 3290
Flux reg integral gain 3120 Enable braking 3360
Flux Filter Time Const 3130 Pulsation frequency 3370
Flux demand 3150 Brake power loss 3390
Flux ramp rate 3160 VD Loss Max 3400
Energy saver min flux 3170 Braking constant 3410
Speed reg prop gain 3210 Test Type 3470
Speed reg integral gain 3220 Test positive 3480
Speed reg Kf gain 3230 Test negative 3490
Speed filter time const 3240 Test time 3500
Current reg prop gain 3260 Slip constant 3545
Current reg integ gain 3270 Feed forward constant 3560
Prop gain during brake 3280
Auto Menu
Entry point 4010 Delay on 4080
Exit point 4020 Prop gain 4360
Entry speed 4030 Integral gain 4370
Exit speed 4040 Diff gain 4380
Auto off 4050 Min clamp 4390
Delay off 4060 Max clamp 4400
Auto on 4070 Setpoint 4410
Log Control Menu
Historic log variable 1 6260 Historic log variable 5 6300
NXG Control
Historic log variable 4 6290
Drive Protect Menu
Auto reset Enable 7120 Auto Reset Attempts 7140
Auto Reset Time 7130 Auto Reset Memory Time 7150
Display Configuration Data Menu
Status variable 1 8001 Status variable 5 8005
Status variable 4 8004
Meter Menu
Customer order 8101 Harmonics order 8160
Customer drive 8110 Harmonics integral gain 8170
Selection for HA 8150 Fault display override 8200
NXG Control
Operating the Control 6
This chapter covers the NXG Control related operating functions of the Perfect Harmony drive.
General and application specific drive features are covered. Where applicable, the functions
are described by listing first the feature and then the associated menu parameters.
For more advanced drive features, please refer to Chapter Advanced Operating Functions.
See also
Advanced Operating Functions (Page 173)
6.1 Signal Frame of Reference for Motor
Assignment of motor control signals

The control signals controlling the motor are assigned a polarity for use over four quadrants
of control to maintain consistency of the algorithms.
This section clarifies what the control signals are and what their polarities mean in the various
quadrants.
Frame of reference
The four quadrant frame of reference is defined as the four quadrants of operation of a motor.
They are divided left to right by the direction of rotation and from top to bottom by the polarity
of the torque in the machine. Energy flow from the drive into the machine is called motoring.
Energy flow out of the machine and into the drive is called regeneration or braking.
Quadrants I and II represent the forward motoring and braking quadrants, respectively.
Quadrants III and IV represent the reverse motoring and braking quadrants, respectively. Top
and bottom of the diagram represent the positive and negative directions of the applied torque
respectively.
NXG Control
Operating the Control
6.1 Signal Frame of Reference for Motor
+slip
+T
-P Braking Motoring +P
+α +α
-V IV I
+V
−ω +ω
Reverse Forward
III II
−α −α
+P Motoring Braking -P
-T
-slip
Figure 6-1 Four Quadrant Operation of a Motor
The diagram shows the relationship between the polarities of the signals in the ordinances of
the two axes.
This is governed by the following equations:
α = T/J ω = ∫αdt
where:
α = acceleration T = torque
J = inertia (an unsigned magnitude) ω = rotational speed
Starting at rest, if a positive torque is applied to the motor, the acceleration is positive and the
resultant speed increases in the forward direction. Once the motor is rotating in the forward
direction, if the applied torque becomes negative, the quadrant will switch over into quadrant
II, showing that a negative torque produces negative acceleration i.e., deceleration, which will
stop the motor.
If, however, the same torque is applied continuously, the speed of the motor will decrease to
zero and begin to accelerate in the opposite direction producing a negative rotational speed
(ω) in what is now quadrant III. Now if a positive torque is applied, the motor enters quadrant
NXG Control
6.2 Cell Bypass
IV and begins to decelerate as the rotational speed is negative. Once the speed decreases to
zero, it crosses back over to quadrant I, and assumes a positive value as the motor accelerates
in this direction. The signs of the signals of the applied torque and resultant speed are illustrated
in the figure above.
The injection frequency must always be opposing the direction of rotation and is only used in
the case of braking or negative energy flow. Therefore, it is zero in the motoring quadrants, I
and III, and is the inverse polarity of the electrical frequency in the braking quadrants, II and
IV. See Table Signal Polarities.
Table 6-1 Signal polarities
Signals Quadrant I Quadrant II Quadrant III Quadrant IV

Rotation speed (ωr) + + - -
Electrical frequency (ωs) + + - -
Slip (ωslip) + - - +
Torque + - - +
Current (Iq) + - - +
Voltage (Vqs) + - - +
Acceleration + - - +
Injection Frequency (ωinj) 0 - 0 +
Power (flow) + - + -
Mag Current (Id) + + + +
Voltage (Vds) + + + +
Note
Signal polarity for the electrical frequency (ωs)
The electrical polarity is uncertain for the electrical frequency (ωs) in the braking quadrants
(II and IV), where the slip opposes the rotational speed, when the speed magnitude
approaches the slip magnitude. The sign will match that of the slip rather than the sign of the
rotor speed, when the slip magnitude is greater than the rotor speed. This is due to the
relationship between slip and torque.
6.2 Cell Bypass
6.2.1 Fast Bypass

Fast bypass is a feature that limits the interruption of torque to a process by less than ½ second
if a cell failure is detected. This helps to prevent operational down-time as a small interruption
in output torque of a medium voltage drive can cause a process to stop. Most processes can
ride through an interruption of ½ second or less.
NXG Control
6.2 Cell Bypass
In fast bypass the drive will start to deliver torque to the motor in ½ second after a fault occurs.
It may take longer for the drive to get back up to the setpoint speed based on load inertia, and
the loss of speed when torque is interrupted.
Fast bypass does not prevent a drive fault from occurring. It provides a means of isolating the
faulted cell, and quickly resetting the drive back into the run state. A drive fault still occurs, and
is logged by the system.
The drive can meet this ½ second maximum interruption under the following conditions:
Cell fault detection

All cell failures are detected in hardware. The hardware is designed to quickly shut down the
drive so that additional damage will not occur. The control is notified in the event of a cell
failure; it quickly determines which cell failed and starts the bypass process. A cell fault is
always a drive fault. Fast bypass issues an automatic reset to the drive after the cell has
successfully bypassed.
Drive trip
When the drive trips and stops delivering torque to the motor, the motor acts like a generator
and produces a voltage on the drive output terminals. This voltage decays over time, but can
be near the drive rated output voltage for a few seconds. If a cell is bypassed the remaining
cells may not be able to support this voltage and damage can occur.
A check in the control serves to prevent this damage. The control verifies if the motor output
voltage can be supported before it bypasses a cell and restarts the drive. If the check passes,
the cell is bypassed and torque is delivered to the drive in under ½ second from the time the
fault occurred. If the motor voltage is too high, cell bypass is delayed to allow the voltage to
decay to a safe level.
Number of cells
To guarantee that the drive will bypass a cell fault in under ½ second the drive needs to be
running at an output voltage that can be supported by one less than the existing number of
cells per phase.
● One option is to size the drive so that it has more than the minimum number of cells required
to provide the voltage needed.
● Another option is to limit the maximum speed.
These issues will have been studied and resolved before the drive is installed.
In a drive with an additional cell per phase, bypass in under ½ second will happen only on the
first cell failure per phase. If a second cell in a phase fails the control needs to wait for the
motor voltage to decay, hence the bypass time may exceed ½ second.
Note
Cell bypass limitations
Cell bypass is limited to allow no more than nine cells at a time to be in bypass. Attempting
to bypass more than nine cells will result in a bypass fault and subsequent drive fault from
fast bypass.
NXG Control
6.2 Cell Bypass
6.2.2 Mechanical Cell Bypass

Mechanical cell bypass protects against the following potential failures:
● Failure of any component in the power circuits
● Failure of any component in the communications circuits
● Power semiconductor failure
The tolerated amount of reduction in capacity will depend on the application but in most cases
a reduction in capacity is preferable to a complete shutdown.
To implement the mechanical cell bypass option, a contactor is added to the output of each
cell as shown in the figure below.
%\SDVV
&RQWDFWRU
&RQWDFWRUVKRZQ
4 4
&RLO LQGHHQHUJL]HG
6WDWH

)URP'HGLFDWHG 2XWSXWRI
6HFRQGDU\RI 3RZHU
,QSXW7UDQVIRUPHU 0RGXOH

4 4
)LEHU2SWLF6LJQDOVWRDQG
/RFDO&RQWURO&LUFXLWV
IURP0DVWHU&RQWURO
Figure 6-2 Typical Power Cell with Bypass Contactor
Once the control detects that a cell has failed, it sends a command to close the appropriate
contactor. Closing the contactor simultaneously disconnects the cell output from the circuit
and connects the two adjacent cells together. These steps effectively take the failed cell out
of the circuit. The drive can then be restarted and operation can continue at reduced capacity.
These contactors are not rated to interrupt current. Therefore the drive remains in the idle state
after a trip, until the contactor is closed.
NXG Control
6.2 Cell Bypass
Activating this function

Any component failure within the cell that can be detected activates the mechanical bypass
function. Even a failure in the fiber optic link that communicates to the cell can be detected
and bypassed.
Note
Cell bypass limitations
Cell bypass is limited to allow no more than nine cells at a time to be in bypass. Attempting
to bypass more than 9 cells will result in a bypass fault.
6.2.3 Neutral Point Shift during Bypass

Neutral point shift ensures that line-to-line voltage remains the same. In a Perfect Harmony
drive, the cells in each phase are connected in series. Bypassing a failed cell has no effect on
the current capability of the drive but reduces the voltage capability.
As the required motor voltage is approximately proportional to speed, reduced voltage
capability will also reduce the required maximum speed. To ensure that the drive can fulfill the
application requirements, it is important to maximize the motor voltage available after one or
more cells have failed.
The following figures illustrate the voltage available from a Perfect Harmony drive for different
cell failure examples. The cells, represented by circles, are shown as simple voltage sources.
15 cell drive in which no cells are bypassed

The following figure shows a 15 cell drive with no cells bypassed. 100% of the cells are in use,
and 100% of full voltage is available. The voltage commands to the three phase groups of cells
will have phase A displaced from phase B by 120°, and from phase C by 120°.
$
$
$
$
9$& 9%$
$ r
W\S
& 1 %
& %
& %
& %
& %
& 9&% %
Figure 6-3 15 Cell Drive Simplified
NXG Control
6.2 Cell Bypass
Drive output with two cells bypassed

When cells are bypassed in one of the drive phases, the output voltage will become
imbalanced. This example shows a 15 cell drive after bypass of two cells in phase A. 87% of
the cells are in use but the output voltage is imbalanced.
$
$
$ r
9$& W\S 9%$
& 1 %
& %
& %
& %
& %
& 9&% %
Figure 6-4 Drive Output with 2 Cells Bypassed
Drive output rebalanced by bypassing functional cells (not using neutral shift)
One solution is to bypass an equal number of cells in all three phases, even though some may
not have failed. This method prevents imbalance but sacrifices voltage capability. The example
below shows a 15 cell drive after bypass of two cells in all phases to restore balance. 87% of
the cells are functional but only 60% are in use, and only 60% of full voltage is available.
$
$
9$& 9%$
$ r
7<3
& 1 %
& %
& %
& 9&% %
Figure 6-5 Drive Output rebalanced by bypassing functional cells
Drive output re-balanced by adjusting phase angles (neutral shift)

A better approach is using neutral shift. This method takes advantage of the fact that the star-
point of the cells is floating, and is not connected to the neutral of the motor.
Neutral shift:
NXG Control
6.2 Cell Bypass
● shifts the star-point of cells away from the motor neutral

● adjusts the phase angles of the cell voltages
● helps to obtain a balanced set of motor voltages even though the cell group voltages are
not balanced.
This approach is equivalent to introducing a zero-sequence component into the voltage
command vectors for the cells.
The example shows a 15 cell drive after bypass of two cells in phase A only. Neutral shift
adjusts the phase angles of the cell voltages so that phase A is displaced from phase B and
from phase C by 132.5°, instead of the normal 120°. 87% of the functional cells are in use,
and 80% of full voltage is available.
$
$
$
r r
9$& 9%$
& 1 %
& r %
& %
& %
& %
& 9&% %
Figure 6-6 Drive Output rebalanced using neutral shift
This neutral shift approach can be applied to more extreme situations.
Using neutral shift after loss of three cells

This example shows a 15 cell drive: five cells remain in phase A; one cell has failed in phase
B; two cells have failed in phase C.
Without neutral shift, all phases would need to be reduced to match the cell count of phase C
to maintain balanced motor voltages. 1 functional cell would be bypassed in phase B, and two
functional cells would be bypassed in phase A. Only 60% of the original cells would remain in
use, and only 60% of the original voltage would be available.
With neutral shift only the failed cells are bypassed. The phase angles of the cell voltages have
been adjusted so that phase A is displaced from phase B by 96.9° and from phase C by 113.1°,
instead of the normal 120°. The star-point of the cells no longer coincides with the neutral of
the motor voltages, but the motor voltage is balanced. 80% of the cells are in use, and 70%
of full voltage is available.
NXG Control
6.2 Cell Bypass
$
$
$
9$& $ 9%$
r $ r
& %
& %
& %
%
& 9&% %
Figure 6-7 Drive Output after loss of 3 Cells
Using neutral shift after loss of five cells

This example shows a 15 cell drive: five cells remain in phase A; two cells have failed in phase
B; three cells have failed in phase C.
Without neutral shift, one functional cell would be bypassed in phase B, and three functional
cells would be bypassed in phase A. Only 40% of the original cells would remain in use, and
only 40% of the original voltage would be available.
With neutral shift only the failed cells are bypassed. The phase angles of the cell voltages have
been adjusted so that phase A is displaced from phase B by 61.1° and from phase C by 61.6°.
The star-point of the cells is far removed from the neutral of the motor voltages, but the motor
voltage is balanced. 67% of the cells are in use, and 50% of full voltage is available.
$
$
9$& 9%$
$
$
& 9&% %
& r $ r %

%
& %
Figure 6-8 Drive Output after loss of 5 Cells
NXG Control
6.2 Cell Bypass
Available voltage after failure with and without neutral shift

The following graph compares the available voltage after a failure with and without using
neutral shift. In many cases, the extra voltage available with neutral shift will determine whether
or not a cell failure can be tolerated.

:LWK1HXWUDO6KLIW

3HUFHQWRI2ULJLQDO9ROWDJH
$YDLODEOHDIWHU2QH)DLOXUH

:LWKRXW1HXWUDO6KLIW

2ULJLQDO1XPEHURI&HOOVSHU3KDVH
Figure 6-9 Available Voltage after a failure
The voltage capability of a drive after cell bypass can be calculated using the following
calculation:
If X is the largest number of cells in bypass in two of the phases, then the maximum voltage
at the drive output will be:
Vout_bypass = Vout * (2*N - X) / (2*N)
where: Vout is maximum output voltage that the drive can deliver (Vout = 1.78*N*Vcell)
N is the number of ranks (i.e. number of installed cells = 3*N)
Vcell is the cell voltage rating
Example
For a drive with 18 cells, each rated for 690 V the maximum output voltage that this drive can
deliver is 7.37 kV:
Vout = 1.78 * 6 * 690 = 7.37 kV

With N = 6 and Vcell = 690 V
NXG Control
6.3 Energy Saver
If after cell bypass, the drive has six cells operational in phase A, five cells in phase B, and
four cells in phase C, then the maximum voltage that the drive can produce with neutral shift
from the above formula is 5.53 kV:
Vout_bypass = 7370 * (2 * 6 - 3) / (2 * 6) = 5.53 kV

With X = 1 + 2 = 3, because 2 cells in phase C and 1 cell in phase B are bypassed.
The ratio (Vout_bypass / Vout) is available as the maximum available drive voltage (%MAV)
for display on the keypad and for use in the comparator and analog output menus.
When a cell fails, the drive control uses this information to automatically calculate the phase
angles of cell voltages in order to maintain balanced motor voltages. During neutral shift, each
phase of the drive operates with a different power factor. Under lightly loaded conditions, one
or more phases may absorb real power while the other phase(s) are delivering power to the
motor.
An increase of the cell dc-voltage in the cells that are absorbing real power may cause a drive
trip condition. To prevent an increase of the cell dc-voltage in the cells, the control automatically
enables the energy saver function. Refer to Section Energy Saver for information associated
with this function.
6.3 Energy Saver
Improve the Power Factor with Energy Saver Control

Energy saver control reduces motor losses and improves overall efficiency when the
demanded motor load is low. This is accomplished by lowering the flux from rated when the
load torque is not required, thereby lowering the reactive current.
Use of Energy Saver in cell bypass

The control automatically enables the energy saver function when an unbalanced set of cells
is present after cell bypass. Under light loads one or more phases may absorb power from the
motor. To prevent the cell dc-voltage from increasing to a drive trip level, the energy saver
function reduces motor flux so that the motor operates with 70% power factor.
At this operating point, the magnetizing and torque components of motor current are equal,
and all cells deliver real power to the motor. As motor load is increased, the motor flux level is
automatically increased to maintain 70% power factor until rated flux, or maximum possible
flux, is achieved. This function ensures that the cells are delivering real power under all
operating conditions.
Note
Impact of load changes on drive response
The response of the drive to sudden load changes is reduced with lower flux demand.
NXG Control
6.5 Motor Thermal Overload Protection
Setting Energy Saver Control Parameter

Refer to the Flux Control Menu (3100) in Section Options for Stability Menu (3) of Chapter
Parameter Assignment / Addressing for the parameter associated with this function:
● Energy saver min flux (3170)
Adjust this parameter to a value that is less than the flux demand (3150). The value for the
flux demand is typically set to 1.0. Depending on the motor load, the control will reduce
motor flux to a level between the energy saver minimum flux demand and the flux demand.
As motor load increases, the control will increase motor flux until the value set by flux
demand is achieved.
See also
Options for Stability Menu (3) (Page 91)
6.4 Power Monitoring

Perfect Harmony drives may require Power Quality Meters (PQMs). The NXG Control provides
PQMs as a built-in functionality.
The drive determines and displays information about the drive input and output, as the
NXG Control processes the input waveforms and continuously samples the drive output.
For details on displaying this information, see Chapter Parameter Assignment / Addressing,
Section Options for Meter Menu (8). For a complete listing of the display parameters, refer to
Table Pick list variables for the front display in the same section.
See also
Options for Meter Menu (8) (Page 115)

NXG Control provides the motor thermal overload (TOL) protection feature for motor
protection. TOL prevents the motor from being subjected to excessive temperatures that could
lead to overheating.
This software model does not measure the motor temperature directly; it estimates the
temperature from available data and is dependent on the entered parameters being accurate.
The software model has no data about the ambient temperature at the location of the motor.
For critical applications, you must use a direct measurement method such as Resistance
Temperature Detectors (RTD) inside the motor.
NXG Control
Setting TOL Parameters

Refer to Limits Menu (1120) in Section Options for Motor Menu (1) of Chapter Parameter
Assignment / Addressing for parameters to set up TOL protection of the motor. The associated
parameters are:
● Overload select (1130)
● Overload pending (1139)
● Overload (1140)
● Overload timeout (1150)
● Speed derate curve (1151)
● Maximum motor inertia (1159)
You may select one of four options for the overload select parameter for motor protection.
Constant Mode
The first option, "constant", is based on the current flowing into the motor. A Motor Thermal
Overload Alarm 1 of an impending overload fault is issued as a warning, when the motor current
exceeds the overload pending parameter. A Motor Thermal Overload Alarm 2 is issued and a
thermal trip timer is started, when the drive current exceeds the overload setting. If this
condition is present for a period greater than the time set in the Overload timeout parameter,
the drive will trip and annunciate the event as Motor Thermal Overload Fault.
Note
Displaying motor thermal overload alarms
Alarms 1 and 2 must be enabled through the SOP for the drive to display these conditions.
Inverse time Modes

The second and third options, "straight inverse time" and "inverse time with speed derating",
use a software motor thermal model to determine motor temperature.
For these options, the overload pending and overload settings represent the motor temperature
limits, in percent of rated motor temperature, at which the overload warning and trip are
generated.
Description of the Motor Thermal Model

The motor thermal model estimates motor temperature based on the net heat generated in
the motor and its thermal mass as depicted in figure Motor Thermal Model .
NXG Control
0RWRUYROWDJHV 0RWRUORVV 0RWRUWHPSHUDWXUH

FXUUHQWV FDOFXODWLRQ ː ෾0 7+

0RWRU
SDUDPHWHUV 0RWRU
FRROLQJ
PRGHO
6SHHGGHUDWH
FXUYH
Figure 6-10 Motor Thermal Model
The motor thermal model estimates the heat generated in the motor from the following values:
● stator voltages
● stator currents
● motor parameters.
The motor thermal model makes an estimate of the heat transferred from the motor, due to
motor cooling, from the allowable motor current.
The motor loss calculation also includes the losses generated with dual-frequency braking
(DFB). The thermal mass of the motor, or its heat capacity, shown as MTH, is determined from
the maximum motor inertia listed in Appendix NEMA Table. You may enter a known value of
maximum motor inertia. Obtain this value from the manufacturer.
Straight inverse time

Choose "straight inverse time" protection if the motor has an allowable current level of 100%
e.g. when the motor is equipped with a constant-speed cooling fan.
Inverse time with speed derating

Choose "inverse time with speed derating" when the motor is not equipped with an external
blower. With this option the allowable current level is determined from the speed derating curve.
Note
Importance of speed derating
The motor has no external blower, and is cooled only by the rotor mounted internal fan, which
decreases in efficiency with speed. This could lead to overheating of the motor and lack of
protection.
Enter the allowable motor load curve values for various speed breakpoints via the keypad. The
default derating curve provides breakpoints for a quadratic cooling curve.
NXG Control

0D[0RWRU/RDG

6SHHG
Figure 6-11 Default speed derating curve showing maximum motor load as function of speed
The motor manufacturer normally provides data for the curve. The control software uses the
allowable current level to determine the cooling capability of the motor.
If you prefer to enter a fixed value of an allowable current level other than 100%, as with the
"straight inverse time" option, you can modify the speed derating curve to have the same
desired level for all breakpoints.

'ULYHFXUUHQW

7LPHVHF
Figure 6-12 Drive current (in percent of motor rated current) vs. time taken for motor temperature
The plot in the above figure shows results from an experimental evaluation of the software
thermal model with the "straight inverse time" option (100% "overload" setting) for various
levels of drive current. A 4 kV, 300 Hp motor was used for this test. The experimental data
shows the time taken for the estimated motor temperature to go from rated temperature to
120% of rated. This curve is quite conservative as compared to a Class 10 TOL that trips at
280 sec with 150% current and at 630 sec with 125% current.
NXG Control
Legacy Inverse Time Mode

This algorithm mimics the operation of a thermal overload relay commonly employed to protect
a motor from excessive thermal stress. It is not as precise as the existing thermal model
described above, but it can work over a broader range. It comes in two inverse time TOL
choices, in both the speed derated and non-derated types, to provide protection to motors that
are beyond the range of the NEMA table. Therefore use this algorithm on out-of-range motor
sizes only.
This algorithm uses the integration of power over the nominal load capability to determine the
energy flow balance. At rated conditions the system will be at equilibrium and can run
continuously at this point provided the motor is running at or below rated current and voltage,
and the ambient temperature is within range of the motor tolerances.
If a load is above rated, or if cooling (proportional to speed) is inadequate, the motor will
eventually overheat. The algorithm provides a derating curve inversely based on speed when
the only cooling on the motor is the internal, shaft-mounted fan. For motors that use an external
blower, this derating curve is not required.
The algorithm requires an overload threshold and a timebase parameter, which is achieved
using the parameters listed below.
Note
When switching between TOL modes, ensure that the internal timebase (integrator) is set to
the appropriate value, otherwise it will reset to the default of the mode selected.
The following parameters are used with modifications:

● Overload timeout (1150): this parameter is used to determine the scaling of the overload
from the typical curve (1 sec). The setting is ideally set to 60 seconds as the default for this
algorithm so that the OL relay response is mimicked. The curve is based on 150% overload
operation with the overload set to100%.
● Overload (1140): this parameter is used to determine the threshold of the algorithm for the
TOL, above which the drive will eventually trip (based on the curve). For this algorithm, set
it to the level of maximum normal operation, above which the algorithm will trip. The
algorithm is designed to have this parameter set to 100%, and the time set for the Overload
timeout, ideally 60 sec for OL relay response, such that with 150% overload, the drive will
trip in this time.
● Speed Derate Curve (1151 – 1157): this parameter is used to characterize the derating
based on the loss of cooling via an internal (rotor based) cooling fan on the shaft.
● Overload select (1130): this parameter includes two additional pick list items, Legacy TOL
and Legacy TOL with derate. When changing to either mode, the TOL integrator resets to
zero.
The following figure shows the typical TOL relay response in the inverse time graph of Motor
Current overload (above 1.0 PU rating of the motor) versus time to trip. This is the response
of a classic TOL relay, based on 150% overload for 1 second (time to trip). The figure is
approximate but representative of the response.
NXG Control

380RWRU&XUUHQW

7LPHWR7ULSVHF
Figure 6-13 Motor Current Vs. Time to Trip
For other current levels and time to trip, these can be taken from the table below, with an Iovld
set to 1 PU (these are approximate values):
Overload (%) Time to Trip (sec)

150 1
140 1.3
130 1.8
120 3.1
110 7.2
100 Continuous operation
I Overload = 100%
I timeout = various settings
The actual amount of time until the VFD trips can be taken directly from the figure.
Examples
● Example 1: Unit is running at 110% rating
I timeout = 1 second
Actual time to trip = 1 x 7.2 = 7.2 seconds
● Example 2: unit is running at 110% rating
Actual time to trip = 50 x 7.2 = 360 seconds
Actual time to trip = 60 x 1 = 60 seconds
Actual time to trip = 60 x 3.1 = 186 seconds
If a 150% overload is required for 1 minute and it is a variable torque load, Example 3 is the
recommended setup.
To use the table for other settings, the following equation can be applied:
NXG Control
6.6 Thermal Over Temperature Rollback
Ttrip = Itimeout * TI-overload (0.1)

where:
Ttrip = actual trip time
Itimeout = menu trip time
TI-overload = time to trip from table or figure at the overload amount used.
● A first alarm occurs when the Tovld > (0.75 * TTimeout).
● A second alarm occurs when the Tovld > (0.90 * TTimeout).
● Trip occurs when Tovld > TTimeout resulting in a TOL fault.
There is hysteresis on both alarms, but not on the fault.
See also
Options for Motor Menu (1) (Page 66)
6.6 Thermal Over Temperature Rollback

The Thermal Over Temperature Rollback feature provides a longer run-time for an air-cooled
drive that has lost some of its cooling capability due to a clogged air filter, higher ambient, or
some other cooling issue.
The purpose of this algorithm is to allow a drive to continue functioning after receiving two cell
Over Temperature (OT) alarms, or a transformer OT alarm, but at a lower torque current output.
This allows the drive and associated process to continue operating until a new thermal
equilibrium is reached or until the lowest process torque requirement is reached.
● If a new thermal equilibrium is reached, the drive is able to operate indefinitely.
● If the lowest process torque requirement is reached, the drive OT trip may only be delayed
until an OT trip eventually occurs.
The thermal time constants for all cells are essentially the same, approximately 100 seconds.
This makes the algorithm universal for all cell types, although the primary use is for air-cooled
drives.
Every cell has a thermal alarm and fault built-in. The transformer also has several thermal
switches installed. Using these early warning indicators, the rollback algorithm attempts to
prevent a drive trip by reducing the real current output and thereby reducing the heating losses
in the drive. If the response is adequate, the drive torque limit will ramp the torque current
between a point that will reset the alarms and a point at which the alarms comes back on. In
this slow, cyclic action, the drive will establish a new thermal equilibrium point at a reduced
torque level.
To prevent problems, the algorithm will do nothing until two cell OT alarms are detected (or a
transformer OT alarm, which is weighted as two cells). When this occurs, the algorithm will
capture and store the torque command from the limit logic and use this as the starting point,
snapping to the IdsRef magnitude immediately, then ramping down the torque limit toward the
minimum level.
The torque limit continues to ramp down as long as two or more OT alarms are active, and
until the lower programmable limit is reached. Once the alarm conditions have reset, the torque
limit will ramp back up to the menu based torque limit at the same rate as set by the parameter,
NXG Control
6.7 Input Side Monitoring and Protection
or until the alarms become active again. If the lower limit is low enough to prevent a thermal
trip, the drive will remain on indefinitely.
Since the algorithm rolls back the torque current level, and subsequently the speed of the
motor, it is only appropriately used for loads that have a direct torque/speed relationship where
shedding speed will reduce the torque requirement. The process must also be tolerant of the
reduced speed and torque to make use of this feature.
The following parameters affect the performance of the algorithm:
● Min Rollback Level (7171): This parameter establishes the lower boundary of the rollback
algorithm. It is used to bound the lower limit to which the torque limit can be reduced. If set
to 100 %, the algorithm is disabled.
● Rollback Ramp Rate (7172): This parameter sets the slope or rate of the ramp. It establishes
the slope of the ramp as how long it would take the value to go from 1 PU to zero. It is used
for both the ramp down (toward the minimum level), and for the recovery ramp (toward the
menu motor torque limit).
When working properly, the torque limit will have a sawtooth, cyclic waveform with the
frequency determined by the slope and the up and down travel between the upper and lower
limits, based on seeking a new thermal equilibrium. This is shown in the following figure.
1RWRUTXHOLPLW
6ORSHVHWE\5ROOEDFN
5DPS5DWH
0LQLPXPUROOEDFN
OHYHO
$ODUPV $ODUPV $ODUPV $ODUPV

$FWLYH 5HVHW $FWLYH 5HVHW
Figure 6-14 OT Rollback Action
The NXG Control monitors input side and output side voltages and currents. Input side
monitoring allows the control to respond to events on the input side of the drive. RMS values
of the input currents and voltages are available, along with input power, kVA, energy and power
factor.
Figure Input Side Monitoring shows a simplified view of the functions implemented for input
side monitoring. Quantities such as drive efficiency, average input current THD, and individual
harmonic component in input voltages/currents are also calculated. All variables have an
accuracy of ±1%, except for efficiency, which is < ±2% and input current THD, which is ±1%
above ~60% of rated power. Table Symbols used in Figure Input Side Monitoring lists symbols
used in Figure Input Side Monitoring and describes the parameters they represent. The
NXG Control
definitions of Id and Iq components of the input current are different from the output side
quantities.
Input side monitoring allows the drive to protect the secondary side of the transformer from
abnormal conditions. Excessive drive losses and one cycle protection faults are generated
under such conditions. Input side control also provides torque current limiting for line under-
voltage, single-phasing, and transformer overload conditions.
(DEF
,QSXW
,QSXW ([FHVVLYH'ULYH
3RZHU 'ULYH
,DEF 3RZHU /RVVHV$ODUP
&DOF /RVVHV
9ROWDJH 2XWSXW &DOF
3RZHU 8QGHU 8QGHU9ROWDJH
)HHGEDFN ( UPV 9ROWDJH /LPLW
>@ ,QSXW 5LGH
(DX
(D 3RZHU 7KURXJK >@
9D =HUR (EX 8QEDODQFH (
(E 506
9E 6HT (FX 9ROWDJH XQEDODQFH
&RPS (F &DOF &DOF

9F ( UPV 6LQJOH3KDVLQJ
6LQJOH
/LPLW
( 3KDVLQJ
,QSXW
'HWHFW
7DS 3RZHU
(D (G >@
6HWWLQJ
(E 7R
'4 (T
(F 3// ˶X 2QH&\FOH
>@ 2QH
3URWHFWLRQ/LPLW
&\FOH
ˆD ˆX 3URWHFW >@
ˆD ː >@

,D ,G ˭ ,QSXW3RZHU
3RZHU
)DFWRU
,E 7R ,T )DFWRU
&XUUHQW ,F '4 &DOF
)HHGEDFN
>@
>@ ,DX 7KHUPDO2YHUORDG
,D 0D[ ;IUPU /LPLW
506 ,EX
,E 506 7KHUPDO
&DOF ,FX 2YOG
,F &DOF
>@
, UPV
Numbers within square brackets show the parameter ID for the corresponding function.
Figure 6-15 Input Side Monitoring
Table 6-2 Symbols used in Figure Input Side Monitoring
Name Description
Erms Average rms voltage (of all three phases)
Ed Amplitude of voltage taking the transformer tap setting into account. This represents the actual voltage
being provided to the cells. If the tap setting is +5%, Ed will be 5% smaller than Erms, and vice versa.
Ea,b,c Zero sequence (DC offset) corrected input phase voltages
ωu Input frequency
θu Angle of input-side flux
Irms Average rms current (of all three phases)
Id Real component of input current
NXG Control
Name Description
Iq Reactive component of input current
Ia,b,c Single-phase components of input current
6.7.1 One Cycle Protection

One cycle protection is also referred to as excessive input reactive current detection.
NXG Control utilizes input reactive current to determine whether a "hard" fault on the secondary
side of the transformer has occurred. For example, a short circuit in one of the secondary
windings will result in poor power factor on the high voltage side of the transformer. A model
of the transformer, based on the power factor at rated load (typically 0.95), is implemented in
the control processor. The drive input reactive current is continuously checked with the
predicted value from the model. An alarm/trip is generated if the actual reactive current exceeds
the prediction by more than 10%. This check is avoided during the first 0.25 seconds after
medium voltage power-up to avoid the inrush current from causing nuisance trips.
Implementation
The following figure shows the implementation of one cycle protection.
,T0D[>,'@ . WU >,'@ , JDLQ >,'@
, 5HDFWLYH0D[
7UDQVIRUPHU
, 5HDO 0RGHO
ː , JDLQ ෾

)DXOW
, 5HDFWLYH &\FOH3URWHFW/LPLW
>,'@
, T0D[ 2QHF\FOHPD[LPXPUHDFWLYHFXUUHQWDWLGOHGHIDXOWLV

. WU 7UDQVIRUPHUSURWHFWLRQFRQVWDQW
, JDLQ 2QHF\FOHSURWHFWLRQLQWHJUDOJDLQ
&\FOH3URWHFW/LPLW 7ULSWKUHVKROG
Figure 6-16 Implementation of One Cycle Protection
Transformer Model
The transformer model in Figure Implementation of One Cycle Protection provides the
maximum value of the input reactive current for a given value of transformer constant, Ktr, as
given below:
IReactive,Max = 1.10 * (IqMax + Ktr * IReal2)
The following figure shows a plot of the Maximum Reactive Current versus Real Current with
a transformer constant of 0.5.
NXG Control

0D[5HDFWLYHFXUUHQWSX

5HDOFXUUHQWSX
Figure 6-17 Maximum Reactive Current versus Real Current with Transformer Constant of 0.5
Integral Timer
The integral timer gain can be calculated based on the desired response time (Ttrip) as shown
below:
Igain = Ttrip / (Error * Slow_loop_sample_rate)
Where:
● Error is the maximum error (in per unit) that can be tolerated between IReactive,Max and actual
reactive current Ireactive
● Slow_loop_sample_rate is the sample frequency of the slow loop, typically 450 to 900 Hz.
Note
Sampling Rate
If the sampling rate is below 4500, the slow loop is 1/5 of the sampling frequency (Fsamp).
If the sampling rate is at 4500 or above, the slow loop is 1/10 of Fsamp.
Setting Parameter for One Cycle Protection

Set parameter Xformer protection const (7100), Ktr, according to the expected input power
factor at full load. On a typical Perfect Harmony transformer, the full load power is no worse
than 0.96. Hence, the default value of 0.50 for the transformer protection constant parameter
NXG Control
is adequate. The following table shows that the default value is acceptable for power factors
as low as 0.90, but may be marginal.
Table 6-3 Transformer Protection Constant for various Full Load Power Factors
Full load PF Ktr

0.88 0.54
0.89 0.51
0.90 0.47
0.91 0.43
0.92 0.40
0.93 0.36
0.94 0.32
0.95 0.29
0.96 0.24
6.7.2 Excessive Drive Losses Protection

The excessive drive loss protection guards against low-level fault currents. After initial power-
up, the detection algorithm allows detection of a catastrophic cell fault during cell bypass that
could result in collateral damage to other adjacent cells if not immediately acted upon by the
removal of input voltage from the source of the drive. This algorithm is an integral part of the
input protection of the drive.
Drive losses are calculated as the difference between the measured input and output powers,
and compared against reference losses. When the calculated losses exceed the reference
losses, a drive trip is issued. This condition is "excessive drive losses."
In addition to this response, a digital output is set low in the SOP, which in the default drive
configuration is used to open the input disconnect device. The fixed reference limit is low
enough to detect a fault in one set of transformer windings, and at the same time is large
enough to avoid nuisance trips. When the drive is not supplying power to the motor, the losses
in the system are primarily due to the transformer; the fixed limit is then lowered to increase
the sensitivity of the protection routine.
An inverse power loss function is implemented for excessive drive loss protection. The
excessive drive loss algorithm is always enabled, and can be set as an alarm via a SOP flag,
for cells other than air-cooled 6SR4[ ]02 (GenIV) or water-cooled 6SR3[ ]52 (WCIII).
For air-cooled 6SR4[ ]02 (GenIV) or water-cooled 6SR3[ ]52 (WCIII) drives, the input protection
is implemented in the NXG code to operate dedicated outputs to open the main contactor. The
customer interface must allow these outputs to trip the breaker to provide this protection.
Calculation of Drive Losses

NXG Control uses input power and output power calculations to determine whether an internal
fault has occurred. Drive power loss is estimated as the difference between input power and
output power. This quantity is continuously checked with a pre-defined threshold that is inverse
time-based, i.e., if the threshold is exceeded by a large margin, then the trip occurs a short
time after the event, and vice-versa.
NXG Control
For NXG versions after 5.2.1, the recharging power to the cells after a prolonged low input
line, or line dip is accounted for to prevent false trips.
The calculation of drive losses depends on input and output power calculations. Due to this
dependency it is important to ensure that the following values are correctly set:
● Drive input and output rated values, voltage and current:
– Rated input voltage (2010)
– Rated input current (2020)
– Rated output voltage (2030)
– Rated output current (2040)
● Drive input scalers
– Input current scaler (3030)
– Input voltage scaler (3040)
● Input CT turns ratio
– CT secondary turns (3035)
● Output scalers
– Output current scaler (3440)
– Output voltage scaler (3450)
● Low Freq Wo (3070)
Implementation
The following figure shows the implementation of the drive loss fault circuit.

ū ū ,QYHUVH7LPH )DXOW
,QSXW3RZHU 'ULYH/RVVHV

2XWSXW3RZHU ,QSXW7KUHVKROG
,QWHUQDO7KUHVKROG LQ,GOH6WDWH
LQ5XQ6WDWH
Figure 6-18 Implementation of the Drive Loss Fault Circuit
Inverse Time Curve

The following figure shows the inverse time-to-trip curves as a function of calculated drive
losses for liquid and air cooled drives. Each plot shows two curves: one is used when the drive
NXG Control
is in the idle state, i.e. medium voltage is applied, but the motor is not being operated; the other
is used when the drive is in the run state, i.e., a slightly longer time to trip.
([FHVVLYH'ULYH/RVV3URWHFWLRQ ([FHVVLYH'ULYH/RVV3URWHFWLRQ
LQ/LTXLG&RROHG'ULYHV LQ$LU&RROHG'ULYHV

7LPHWRWULSV
7LPHWRWULSV
5XQ6WDWH 5XQ6WDWH

,GOH6WDWH ,GOH6WDWH

'ULYH/RVVHV 'ULYH/RVVHV
Figure 6-19 Inverse Time-to-trip Curves
Internal Threshold
The internal threshold is a function of the rated drive input power. For example, in the run state,
the internal threshold is given as:
Internal Threshold (Watts) = 0.07 * rated Drive Input Power

= 0.07 * √3 * Rated Input Voltage * Rated Input Current
Where:
● Rated input voltage (ID 2010) and Rated input current (ID 2020).
Parameters for Excessive Drive Losses Protection

The running and idle setpoints can be adjusted separately via parameters.
Refer to Input Protect Menu (7000) in Section Options for Drive Protect Menu (7) of Chapter
Parameter Assignment / Addressing for the parameters to set up excessive drive losses
protection. The associated parameters are:
● Excess loss idle (7084)
● Excess loss running (7086)
NXG Control
6.8 Drive Output Torque Limiting
CAUTION
Internal Threshold Settings
The default values of these parameters will not normally be changed.
Consult Siemens customer service before changing any of these parameters.
Unauthorized changes could result in the system not being adequately protected.
See also
Options for Drive Protect Menu (7) (Page 113)
6.7.3 System Arc Detection

It is a safety requirement that an arc flash event must be detected as quickly as possible. Once
the risk of arc flash is detected, it is contained and any source that could feed additional energy
into the arc event is rapidly disconnected. The detection circuitry also removes the drive run
enable via the CR3 input to prevent a run command from being issued to the cells.
Arc flash detection is handled external to the control, but a digital input must set SOP flag
"SystemArcFaultDetected_O" to produce an error/fault message and trigger an input
protection. This allows the drive to detect that the input protection has been triggered to record
the event in the event and fault logs and that input power has been removed. This SOP flag
will trigger both an IP protection fault and log the fault message. It will also cause the LFR
relay to set to the tripped position to indicate an IP fault, and require a manual, keyswitch reset.
Fault message "System Arc Detected" will display in the Event Log and Fault Log to indicate
a System Arc Fault has been triggered and MV has been shut down via external means.
The drive uses measured voltages and currents to implement rollback conditions. Under one
or more of these conditions, the drive will continue to operate, but at a lower output torque or
current level. An output torque limit will force the motor and the drive to go into speed rollback,
during which speed is reduced until the torque demanded by the load falls below the torque
limit. Rollbacks are triggered by various conditions and are described in the following
sections.
6.8.1 Input Under-Voltage Rollback

When the input line voltage drops below 90% of its rated value, the drive limits the amount of
power, and thus torque, that can be delivered to the load. The maximum allowable drive power
as a function of line voltage is shown in the figure below. At 66% input voltage, the maximum
drive power is limited to 50%, and is quickly reduced to a slightly negative value at 65%. This
NXG Control
is the regenerative limit. This limit forces the drive to absorb power from the motor and maintain
the cell DC-bus voltages, in case the input voltage recovers during MV ride-through. The limit
is implemented as an inverse function of speed to maintain constant power flow to the cell DC-
bus.
A regulator is implemented to match the maximum drive power (Pmax) to the actual power
flowing into the drive. The output of this regulator sets the output torque limit.
3PD[

5HJHQ/LPLW

(
UPV
0D[
Figure 6-20 Drive Power (Pmax) as Function of Input Voltage Magnitude (Ed)
Parameters for Proportional and Integral Gains of the Regulator

Parameter Assignment / Addressing for parameters associated with this function.
● Undervoltage prop gain (7060) represents the proportional gain of this regulator.
● Undervoltage integ gain (7070) represents the integral gain of this regulator.
● An under-voltage rollback condition is indicated by the drive, by displaying UVLT on the
keypad and in the ToolSuite.
See also
6.8.2 Input Single-Phase Rollback

With NXG Control, input voltage unbalance (Eunbalance) is used for rolling back the drive output
torque. The figure below shows the reduction in drive power as a function of the unbalance
voltage. When the unbalance is less than 10%, the drive operates without any output limitation.
There is a linear reduction as the unbalance voltage increases from 10% to 30%, at which
point the input has a single-phase condition. When the input line voltage unbalance increases
NXG Control
above 30%, the drive limits the amount of output power that can be delivered to the load to
40% of rated.
A regulator is implemented to match the maximum drive power (Pmax) with the actual power
flowing from the drive. The output of this regulator sets the output torque limit.
3PD[

(
XQEDODQFH

Figure 6-21 Drive Power (Pmax) as Function of Input Unbalance Voltage (Eunbalance)
Parameters for the Proportional and Integral Gains of the Regulator

Refer to Single Phasing Menu (7010) in Section Options for Drive Protect Menu (7) of Chapter
● SPD prop gain (7020) represents the proportional gain of this regulator.
● SPD integral gain (7030) represents the integral gain of this regulator.
● SPD threshold (7040) sets the level to generate a single-phasing alarm if the output level
of this regulator falls below the SPD threshold.
● A single-phase rollback condition is indicated by the drive, by displaying SPHS instead of
MODE on the keypad, and by displaying SPHS in the ToolSuite.
See also
6.8.3 Transformer Thermal Rollback

The input currents to the drive are monitored continuously. The largest among the three input
phase currents is limited to be at or below 105% of the nominal rating of the transformer. Drive
output torque is reduced when this current level is exceeded. A regulator is implemented to
limit the maximum input current to 105% by reducing the output current. The output of this
regulator sets the output torque limit.
NXG Control
Parameter for the Integral Gain of the Regulator

Parameter Assignment / Addressing for the parameter associated with this function.
● Xformer thermal gain (7090) represents the integral gain of this regulator.
● During transformer thermal rollback, the drive displays T OL on the keypad and in the
ToolSuite.
See also
6.8.4 Torque Limit Setting

When the VFD output torque current exceeds the maximum torque limit setting for the motor,
the drive will limit output current. When this happens the drive displays TLIM on the keypad
and in the ToolSuite.
Regenerative Torque Limit Setting

For a 2 quadrant drive, an inverse speed function based on the regenerative torque limit setting
is used during drive deceleration. This forces the drive to absorb a minimal amount of power
from the load, enough only to overcome losses and maintain cell DC bus voltage.
For a 4 quadrant drive, i.e. a drive that is fully regenerative, there is no inverse speed function
and the full regenerative capability of the drive is allowed.
When power is flowing from the motor back into the drive, the drive displays RGEN on the
Setting Parameters for Torque Limit Setting

Refer to Limits Menu (1120) in Section Options for Motor Menu (1) of Chapter Parameter
Assignment / Addressing for parameters to set the torque limit setting. The associated
parameters are:
● Motor torque limit 1 (1190)
● Regen torque limit 1 (1200)
See also
NXG Control
6.8.5 Field-Weakening Limit

The field-weakening limit is a torque limit that is based on the motor flux and motor leakage
inductance. Under this condition the motor has limited torque capability. This limit prevents the
motor slip from exceeding pullout torque slip. Therefore, it prevents unstable operation of the
motor. This limit normally occurs when motor flux is reduced significantly during energy saver
operation, or when operating beyond the base speed of the motor. Under such conditions, a
large increase in load will force the output to be limited, resulting in a loss of speed rather than
motor pullout. A field-weakening condition is indicated by the drive by displaying F WK on the
6.8.6 Cell Current Overload

The NXG Control provides a power cell current overload setting. A cell can operate at this
overload value for 1 minute out of every 10 minutes. When the current is between the cell
rating and the overload rating, the time spent at that level is inversely proportional to the
overload current.
If the motor current rating is less than the drive rating, then the drive displays this rollback as
TLIM for torque limit on the keypad and in the ToolSuite. However, when the drive current
rating is less than the motor rating, the drive displays C OL for cell overload.
Note
Power cell overload capability
The power cells used in Perfect Harmony drives do not have a fixed overload capability.
Consult Siemens customer service to determine the level of overload capability for a specific
power cell.
Parameter for Cell Current Overload

● Cell Overload Level (7112)
See also
6.8.7 Timers for Drive Operation in Cell or Transformer Over-temperarure

Independent cell and transformer over-temperature (OT) timers will determine the length of
time that temperature alarms (in conditions that cause rollback) have been active. This is
important to record the length of time that overheating has occured on a drive.
NXG Control
6.9 Command Generator
The timers record the accumulative duration of multiple cell OT and transformer OT alarms.
The timers accumulate, with one second resolution, the amount of time that at least two cell
OT or the single transformer (first level) alarms are active while the drive is in operation.
The timers record cumulative time similar to the kWHr recorder. The timers activate on over-
temperature alarm conditions regardless of whether the rollback feature is active or not, and
only when the drive is running.
● The cell alarm timer will accumulate time when two or more cell OT alarms are active.
● The transformer alarm timer will accumulate when the lower alarm level 1 is active.
These timers are updated in the slow loop with the timers incremented by the slow loop sample
period whenever the conditions are met to count as described above.
The time stamp for going into and coming out of thermal limit is recorded in the event log. The
timers are viewable from the Drive Tool and the keypad. The timers are not available via the
network.
To display the timers or other timer functions, refer to the Thermal OT rollback menu (7170).
See also
The NXG Control includes provisions for output speed demand entry as required for a specific
application. The active reference source is configured per specific system requirements and
can be dynamically changed. This is implemented via the drive’s SOP.
The following subsections define the command generator functional blocks shown in the figure
below.
$QDORJ,QSXW
6RXUFHV
5DWLR
&RQWURO
&ULWLFDO
6SHHG 3RODULW\ 6SHHG 6SHHG
6SHHG
3URILOH &RQWURO 5DPS /LPLWV
$YRLGDQFH
3,'&RQWUROOHU
5HIHUHQFH
6HWSRLQW
6RXUFHV
Figure 6-22 Command Generator
NXG Control
Stopping modes
There are three stopping modes in the NXG Control. SOP logic is required to select the modes:
● Ramp Stop for controlled speed deceleration: Ramp Stop selected AND Run Request false
● Quick Stop for rapid torque-limited deceleration: Quick Stop selected AND Ramp Stop not
selected AND Run Request false
● Coast Stop for removing power to the motor quickly, the load and motor will coast to rest
based on friction and inertia: Quick Stop not selected AND Ramp Stop not selected AND
Run Request false
6.9.1 Analog Input Sources

The NXG Control provides a means to provide multiple analog input sources that can be
selected as demand inputs to the system. The control scales these analog values into internal
units, and monitors the levels for possible loss of signal conditions. The control includes
provisions for predetermination of VFD action upon loss of signal conditions, including maintain
speed, transition to preset speed, or trip VFD.
Ratio Control
The ratio control is simply a fractional scaling unit available for the analog reference signals.
This feature allows multiple drives to share the same reference signal with rescaled output
signal levels.
6.9.2 Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) Controller

The NXG Control has a built-in PID controller available for use as a process control input of
the NXG command generator.
The PID loop is programmable from the user Interface. It is used to incorporate an external
process as an outer control loop to the drive. The PID command set point can be either an
external analog input or an internal set point. The PID feedback is always from an analog input.
The proportional, integral, and derivative gains, as well PID output limits, are programmable.
The PID is depicted in the following figure.
NXG Control
3LG0HQXB WUXH
3,'6(732,17
0D[LPXP
FODPS
$QDORJ,QSXW
3,'&21752//(5 5DZ'HPDQG3LGB WUXH
3LG0HQXB IDOVH
$QDORJ,QSXW
0LQLPXP
FODPS
Figure 6-23 PID Controller
Configuring the PID Controller

1. Select the PID output as the speed demand for the system by setting SOP flag
RawDemandPid_0 to true.
2. The PID command feedback source is fixed from analog input #2. You can use any of the
available analog inputs within the system, but you must designate it as analog input #2 in
the setup menu. Refer to Analog Input #2 Menu (4170) in Section Options for Auto Menu
(4) of Chapter Parameter Assignment / Addressing.
3. The PID command has two possible sources: analog input #1 or the PID set point menu
(4410). Select the source using SOP flag PidMenu_0:
– Set flag to true to select the PID set point menu as the source.
– Set flag to false to select analog input #1 as the source.
4. Configure analog input #1 source from Analog Input #1 Menu (4100) in Section Options for
Auto Menu (4) of Chapter Parameter Assignment / Addressing.
Parameters for the PID Controller

Refer to PID Select Menu (4350) in Section Options for Auto Menu (4) of Chapter Parameter
Assignment / Addressing for parameters to set the PID controller.
See also
Options for Auto Menu (4) (Page 98)
6.9.3 Set Point Sources

Set points are internal menu entries that are static values based on user entry, keypad settings,
or remote demand from a network communication interface. There are a total of eight inputs
NXG Control
that are menu entries from remote communications. There are two additional entries that are
reserved for safety override and jog level set points.
● Keypad
– Use front panel keypad or ToolSuite software to set speed demand.
● Increment/decrement (sample and hold)
– 2 digital inputs that increase/decrease raw speed demand at the active acceleration/
deceleration rate, while input is maintained. When the input is released, the current value
is maintained.
● Increment/Decrement Step
– 6 digital inputs that provide programmable step change to output demand each time
input transitions from low to high state.
● Preset levels
– Multiple user-defined preset values via menu system.
● Jog
– Set to maximum active speed limit, intended for test purposes to "bump" motor.
● Communication Network
– Digital value as set per external communication interface to a PLC/DCS.
6.9.4 Speed Profile

The speed profile uses the velocity demand signal as input, and generates a modified best fit
straight line (BFSL) velocity demand output.
Parameter for the Speed Profile

Refer to Speed Profile Menu (4000) in Section Options for Auto Menu (4) of Chapter Parameter
Assignment / Addressing for parameters to set the speed profile and for further description of
speed profiling control.
See also
6.9.5 Critical Speed Avoidance

Critical speed avoidance is used to prohibit the drive from operating in frequency ranges that
may cause resonant frequencies in mechanical systems. NXG control provides three
independent avoidance bands.
The critical frequency feature, also known as resonance avoidance, is accomplished using
skip frequencies and skip bands, as illustrated in the following figure.
NXG Control
530 [)UHTRI3ROHV
)UHT 530[RI3ROHV
0D[
6NLS)UHT
6NLS%DQG
6NLS)UHT
6NLS%DQG
6NLS)UHT
6NLS%DQG
&RQWUROOHU2XWSXW
0LQ 'HPDQG

Figure 6-24 Critical Speed (Resonance) Avoidance
Parameters for Critical Speed Avoidance

Refer to the Critical Frequency Menu (2340) in Section Options for Drive Menu (2) of Chapter
See also
6.9.6 Polarity Control

Polarity control is an inverter. The output of the polarity block is the opposite polarity of the
input. The selection of this feature is based solely on the SOP logic.
6.9.7 Speed Ramp

The speed ramp is a functional block that takes an input demand and generates an output with
a controlled rate of change, based on the acceleration and deceleration limits established by
the end user. Provisions are included for multiple sets of acceleration and deceleration settings.
The control provides a means to use any one of three separate menu-defined acceleration/
deceleration sets, or PLC network control as selected by the SOP.
NXG Control
6.10 Process Tolerant Protection Strategy
6.9.8 Speed Limits

The speed limit limits the final output of the demand shaping chain to within preset operating
limits defined by the user. Provisions are included for multiple sets of forward rotation maximum/
minimum limits, and reverse rotation maximum/minimum limits. The control provides a means
to use any one of three separate menu-defined speed limit sets, or PLC network control as
selected by the SOP.
Process Availability
Process availability is the primary prerequisite for applying a medium voltage VFD system in
a process critical application. It is essential that the process operator receive complete and
accurate information on drive status, to allow for process adjustments that can preclude
process trips and disruptions in process capability.
Process Tolerant Protection Strategy (ProToPS™)

ProToPS™ is a standard implementation of the drive SOP. ProToPS™ is a system program
implemented from a customer process perspective that puts the process operator in control
of the process.
ProToPS™ indicates a change in state in the VFD to the operator. These annunciations identify
changes that can impact the ability of the VFD to meet process demands, or to provide advance
indication of a pending VFD trip.
ProToPS™ allows the process operator to take the following actions:
● make process corrections
● maintain the VFD in service
● adjust the process to address a pending VFD trip
With ProToPS™, the process operator not only knows the general status of the VFDs, but also
understands the VFD condition that has caused the general alarm to exist.
ProToPS™ Function
In the ProToPS™ SOP all of the automatic roll-back flags are turned off, and both cell bypass
and auto-restart are implemented as standard. The need to roll-back is still necessary, but the
process operator is now responsible to implement a roll-back as part of a process correction,
as opposed to having the VFD roll-back either dictating, or in worse case upsetting, the
process.
ProToPS™ takes the standard fault indications available in the VFD and categorizes them into
four categories as follows:
NXG Control
1. Alarm
An alarm indicates that a VFD parameter limit has been reached, or that a VFD system
condition is present. An alarm draws the operator's awareness to the condition, but
demands no immediate action. Examples of alarm causes include the following:
– over-voltage
– under-voltage
– ground fault
2. Process alarm
A process alarm indicates that a VFD parameter limit has been exceeded and that the
process either should be limited, or that the VFD capacity to meet the process demand is
limited. Examples of process alarms include thermal limits above the rated limit and the
condition of a cell having been bypassed.
3. Trip alarm
A trip alarm clearly indicates that a VFD high parameter limit has been reached and that a
VFD trip is pending. The operator receives a message that unless the alarm can be cleared
by a process change the VFD will trip.
4. Trip
Certain VFD faults cannot be provided with advance warning. This limited number of faults
will result in a VFD trip. A trip message is also annunciated when a trip alarm time limit has
been exceeded. The number of mandated trips is considerably reduced with the
implementation of cell bypass.
With ProToPS™ the VFD Run signal is maintained as "true" and the VFD Trip signal is
maintained as "false" for all alarm states.
ProToPS™ Implementation
ProToPS™ provides the five main protection indication categories as separate digital output
signals. The concept is to provide the operator, or the process program, with a clear message
indicating a status change in the VFD. The WAGO I/O system provides these five digital
outputs. The location of the outputs is maintained as a standard set of TB2 terminations.
ProToPS™ indicates the specific information on the VFD parameter change, along with the
general category information, as a serial address across a serial communications interface.
ProToPS™ supports any serial communications protocol supported by the VFD product.
If other specific digital output information is required for a specific customer project, that
information must be mapped to a new digital output point on an additional digital output module.
The five basic category outputs must be present as digital outputs, at the standard designated
TB2 terminal point locations, to validate the ProToPS™ implementation.
NXG Control
6.11 Drive Tuning
6.11 Drive Tuning
The following sections describe the drive tuning functions.

● Auto-tuning This section describes the auto-tuning feature provided by the NXG control
and its use in determining motor and control parameters.
● Spinning Load This section describes the setup of the spinning load function. This feature
is used by the drive control to detect motor speed by scanning the output frequency over
the operating range of the application.
6.11.1 Auto-tuning
When operating an induction motor, the drive control is capable of performing auto-tuning.
This feature allows the drive to estimate parameters of the motor equivalent circuit. Apart from
measuring the motor equivalent circuit parameters during auto tuning, the control uses the
measured motor parameters to adjust the control loops for the best possible control bandwidth
(the bandwidth for each control loop is fixed internally in software), and hence provides good
performance in demanding applications. Such a feature provides drive tuning without the need
for an extensive adjustment procedure. Although the auto-tuning feature can be used with all
induction motors, there are some limitations. Both stages of auto-tuning can be performed with
induction motors (OLVC or CLVC).
When to use Auto-tuning

Auto-tuning is optional and is recommended only for applications in which high performance
is required.
In most general-purpose applications, such as pumps and fans, default data for the motor
equivalent circuit is sufficient and auto-tuning is not necessary.
CAUTION
Improper use of Stage 1 and Stage 2 auto-tuning
Improper use can lead to drive instability.
Do not use auto-tuning for standard applications. Only use auto-tuning if the application calls
for special tuning.
Never use auto-tuning as a substitute for entering known values manually.
The basic motor parameters can be divided into the following categories:
NXG Control
6.11 Drive Tuning
● Nameplate data is readily available. Examples include motor rated voltage and full load
current.
● Equivalent circuit data is available only from the motor manufacturer.
– If this data is available, it can be entered into the NXG menu system.
– If this data is not available, either default settings or auto-tuning functions can be used.
Examples include stator resistance and no-load current. The correct equivalent circuit
data is required only when good control performance, such as high starting torque or
very low speed operation, is desired.
Auto-tuning Implementation
There are two stages of auto-tuning, each stage being selected individually.
DANGER
Electric Shock Hazard
Lethal voltages are present on the drive outputs during both Stage 1 and Stage 2 of auto-
tuning.
Stay clear of drive outputs during auto-tuning to avoid death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Incorrect use of Stage 2 auto-tuning
Incorrect use will lead to drive instability.
Never use Stage 2 auto-tuning with synchronous motors or when output filters are connected.
Only use Stage 1 auto-tuning with synchronous motors (SMC or CSMC) or when output filters
are connected.
Stage 1 of Auto-tuning (ID 1260)

Stage 1 determines the Stator Resistance and Leakage Inductance. This stage of auto tuning
does not require the motor to be de-coupled from the load. The motor does not rotate during
this stage but does apply voltage. The data obtained from stage 1 is used in the inner regulators
that control motor current. The current loop gains are automatically calculated and saved by
the control.
NXG Control
6.11 Drive Tuning
Stage 2 of Auto-tuning (ID 1270)

Stage 2 determines the no-load motor current and the motor inertia. The motor rotates at 30%
of rated speed during this stage.
DANGER
Spinning of the Motor
The motor spins during Stage 2 of auto-tuning.
Stay clear of moving parts to avoid death or serious injury.
Ensure that it is acceptable to spin the motor before this test is enabled.
Generally, Stage 2 of auto-tuning requires the motor to be de-coupled from the load. Quadratic
loads, such as pumps and fans, do not require the motor to be de-coupled for Stage 2 auto-
tuning. The control is designed to minimize the errors introduced by such loads.
Data obtained in Stage 2 is used to optimize the operation of the outer loops that control motor
speed and motor flux. The speed and flux loop gains are automatically calculated and saved
by the control.
6.11.2 Spinning Load

The spinning load feature allows the drive to determine the speed of a motor that is already
rotating. This allows the drive to apply output voltages at the same frequency as the rotating
motor and minimize any chance of a speed or torque transient.
When to use Spinning Load

Enable spinning load if any of the following operating modes or features are selected:
● Fast bypass
● Auto-restart (controlled through the auto reset parameters 7120 to 7150 and the SOP)
● Synchronous motor control (SMC and CSMC)
● Closed loop vector control (CLVC)
Note
Characteristics of Spinning Load Operation
Spinning load is disabled with V/Hz and OLTM Control.
Spinning load is automatically enabled if fast bypass is enabled regardless of menu setting.
With synchronous motors, spinning load is almost instantaneous, i.e. the drive only goes
into a scan mode until flux is established, then the phase locked loop (PLL) locks onto the
output frequency.
NXG Control
6.12 Data Loggers
Spinning Load Implementation

The spinning load feature in NXG Control is divided into two stages:
● During the first stage, spinning load operates automatically when enabled, and requires no
user adjustments. The drive control monitors motor flux and is able to provide an
instantaneous restart. This stage is valid as long as there is detectable flux in the motor.
Typically the drive is capable of restarting instantaneously, if the time duration between
drive disable and restart is within 3 to 4 motor time constants.
● The second stage consists of a scan feature during which a fixed level of current of varying
frequency is applied to the motor. This is set via the current level setpoint parameter (2450).
The control monitors the measured motor flux. When the motor flux exceeds a flux
threshold, set by the scan end threshold parameter (2440), the control assumes that the
applied frequency is equal to the rotating speed of the motor. This stage requires
parameters to be tuned in order for the scan to function properly.
Parameters for Spinning Load

Refer to the Spinning Load Menu (2420) in Section Options for Drive Menu (2) of Chapter
See also
6.12 Data Loggers
NXG Control includes three separate data loggers to record events detected by the software.
The logs are stored in non-volatile memory and you can capture data via the VFD’s serial
debug port or the ethernet port.
● Debug port: This is a standard RS232 interface and requires a PC or printer to be attached.
The operation must be initiated from the drive via the keypad. Refer to Section Options for
Log Control Menu (6) for usage and warnings.
● Ethernet port: You must connect a PC, running the NXG ToolSuite software, to the drive
and upload the files directly from the PC. Refer to the NXG ToolSuite User Manual for
operational information.
See also
Options for Log Control Menu (6) (Page 111)
NXG Control
6.12 Data Loggers
6.12.1 Event Log

The event log is a very large circular file that is used to record significant drive events. Recorded
data is time stamped to a resolution of 1 second. Data in the log includes:
● All alarms and faults, i.e. alarm/fault log data.
● If enabled, historic log at the time of a fault in a truncated form to prevent overflow.
● Significant events:
– CPU bootup including installed NXG software version
– Medium voltage status
– Drive operating state changes, e.g. idle, magnetize, run, stop
– Fault reset requests from User Menu entries
– Complete pre-charge sequence including success, all states and faults.
The event log is stored in a file on the CompactFlash card. The maximum file size is 512 Kbytes.
The file is archived once the maximum size is reached and a new file is created.
Refer to Event Log Menu (6180) in Section Options for Log Control Menu (6) of Chapter
Parameter Assignment / Addressing for associated parameters.
6.12.2 Alarm/Fault Log

The alarm/fault log consists of a circular buffer that records up to 256 faults or alarms, so that
you can access the 256 most recent faults and/or alarms that have been detected. The faults
and/or alarms are time stamped to a resolution of 1 second, and also include a time stamp
showing when the fault and/or alarm was reset or cleared.
Refer to Alarm/Fault Log Menu (6210) in Section Options for Log Control Menu (6) of Chapter
6.12.3 Historic Log

The historic log records operating data of the drive and is frozen upon detection of a fault. The
data recorded consists of both fixed and programmable data points, which are sampled at the
slow loop rate, typically 300-600 Hz. Upon detection of a drive fault by the NXG software, the
fault is recorded at time = 0 and the drive continues to record data for a brief period after the
fault. This allows recovery of data just prior to and after any fault so that operational data prior
to and after a fault can be reviewed. A new fault will overwrite the recorded historic log. The
event log includes the option to copy and record the historic log so that all fault events are
recorded.
The historic log is stored in memory with a total of 512 records. Non-volatile memory is used
to store the most recent 78 records. Snapshots are recorded at the slow cycle update rate:
● Most snapshots are recorded before a fault occurs.
● 20 snapshots are recorded after a fault occurs.
NXG Control
6.14 Debug
If parameter Store in event log (6255) is on at the time of a drive fault, the non-volatile portion
of the historic log is stored in the event log following the fault message.
Refer to the Historic Log Menu (6250) in Section Options for Log Control Menu (6) of Chapter
6.13 Faults and Alarms

If a fault or alarm condition exists, it will be annunciated on the keypad and recorded in both
the fault and event logs. External hardwire indicators are also set as defined in the SOP. PLC
access is available for all faults and alarms.
All faults will immediately remove power from the motor and inhibit the drive from running,
resulting in the motor coasting to rest. Some faults that are user-defined can control the drive
response via the SOP. Alarms are annunciated and logged, but usually do not inhibit the drive
from operation. Faults are either detected via direct hardware sensing or by software
algorithm.
The NXG Control includes both internal faults and alarms and the ability to define "User Faults"
via the SOP, which can be set as either faults or alarms.
6.14 Debug
The serial debug function of the NXG Control serves as a means for the user to connect to an
interactive menu that allows a user to capture VFD run-time data, including debug data. This
port does not permit any data to be downloaded to the drive. It is provided as a means to
extract user readable VFD status and logs from the NXG Control.
The port is configured as a standard RS-232 serial interface where no hardware handshake
is required. The NXG Control includes provisions to allow a serial modem to be connected so
that drive status can be remotely accessed via telephone. When a modem is connected, it can
be configured as an auto-answer device, or the NXG Control is capable of configuring
compatible modems to automatically answer.
Note
Configuring an RS232 compatible device
Any RS232 compatible device can be connected to this port.
The user must initiate desired output data via single character inputs to the port.
The port must be isolated. This can be achieved with a device that is isolated from ground,
i.e. a laptop running from battery, or using an optical RS232 isolator.
Diagnostic data available via this port includes:

● parameter dump
● fault/event/historic log
● drive status/ID
● debug functions
NXG Control
Advanced Operating Functions 7
This chapter covers the NXG Control related advanced operating functions of the Perfect
Harmony drive. Where applicable, the advanced functions are described by listing first the
feature and then the associated menu parameters.
7.1 Frequency (Speed) Regulator

A frequency regulator generates the motor’s torque-producing current reference. The stator
frequency reference (ωs,ref) is generated from the output of the slip compensator. The stator
frequency (ωout) comes from phase lock loop, an estimate of the actual stator frequency. The
frequency regulator is evaluated at 1/5 of the inner current loop update rate.
7.2 Slip Compensation

NEMA B induction motors require slip of the rotor speed (rpm) relative to the stator speed
(frequency) to develop torque. The amount of slip is directly affected by the loading of the
machine. For induction motors, the control provides slip compensation to the speed reference
to allow the motor to run at commanded speed, regardless of the torque output required.
Slip compensation operates as an open loop speed regulator that increases the electrical
output frequency of the drive as the load increases, or decreases the frequency of the drive
as the load decreases, to maintain commanded speed regardless of load conditions
Effect of Slip Compensation on Motor Speed with NXG Control

With slip compensation, the electrical frequency is always greater than the desired shaft speed,
i.e. mechanical frequency, for all non-zero loads. Therefore at 100% speed demand, NXG
Open Loop Vector Control (OLVC) will maintain the shaft speed at the rated synchronous
speed of the motor, not full load speed.
Example: Operation of the Slip Compensation for a 6-pole Motor

A 6-pole motor rated for 60 Hz has a synchronous speed of 1200 rpm.
Enter the full load speed from the nameplate, e.g. 1192 rpm, to Full load speed parameter
(1030).
Sending a speed demand of 100% will produce a mechanical speed, i.e. shaft speed, of
1200 rpm with slip compensation. This will result in a higher output (electrical) frequency, to
the motor, to provide the necessary torque to achieve the desired speed. The slip frequency
is directly proportional to the required torque, up to the rated torque current. Depending on the
selection, the display will show:
NXG Control
Advanced Operating Functions
7.2 Slip Compensation
● Motor speed, in rpm, of 1200 rpm

● Motor speed, in percent, of 100%
● Motor frequency, in Hz, of 60.4 Hz at rated torque or if motor frequency is displayed in
percent, 101%
Calculation of Synchronous or Rated Speed

Sending the drive a speed demand of 100% means that you desire synchronous or rated
speed. To calculate, follow equation 1.
Synchronous speed, Ns, is defined by the formula:
1. NS = 120 * fRATED / # of poles
Calculation of Slip
At rated torque, slip is defined as a percentage of the difference between synchronous and
full-load speed (NFL) divided by the synchronous speed:
2. Slip (%) = 100 * (NS – NFL) / NS
Calculation of desired Shaft Speed with Slip Compensation

If a speed other than synchronous speed is desired for shaft rotation, use the following equation
to calculate the desired speed demand.
With slip compensation, subtract the slip frequency from the output frequency (fOUT) to ensure
that the mechanical speed matches the desired speed. Multiply the per unit (pu) torque (TPU)
by the slip and subtract it from the speed feedback (in frequency), effectively adding it to the
speed reference:
3. SMOT = fOUT – (Slip * TPU)
4. SERR = SDMD – SMOT
In equation 4, SERR represents the error signal processed by the speed regulator. The
implication for this is that for a speed command of 100%, based on the synchronous speed,
the applied electrical frequency will be higher than rated frequency due to the increase created
by the slip compensation. See equation 3 and 4. This will result in the motor running at true
requested mechanical speed with the electrical frequency adjusted to provide the torque
necessary to produce that speed.
Limiting Frequency by Disabling Slip Compensation

Slip compensation can be disabled to limit the motor to a specific frequency. Using the same
example, set the Full load speed parameter (1030) to 1200 rpm. This disables the slip
compensation by reducing equation 2 to produce a slip of zero. Equation 3 and 4 reduce to:
1. Slip = (1200 – 1200) / 1200 = 0
2. SMOT = fOUT – 0 = fOUT
The end result is that the drive will regulate to the output frequency rather than the motor shaft
speed (mechanical speed). No compensation for slip is done.
NXG Control
7.3 Speed Droop
Summary
With slip compensation:
● Output shaft speed will equal the percentage of synchronous speed requested
● The frequency will vary depending on load but the speed will be fixed
● Monitor motor speed in rpm
Without slip compensation, set the Full load speed parameter (1030) to the synchronous speed:
● The output frequency will equal the speed demand percentage of rated frequency
● The mechanical speed, i.e. shaft speed, will vary with load but the frequency will be fixed
● Monitor motor frequency in Hz
7.3 Speed Droop

Speed droop is the decrease in the speed of a motor with a constant voltage and frequency
when the motor is under load. The difference between the synchronous (unloaded) speed of
the motor and the full load speed is known as slip. Normally, slip compensation increases the
output frequency of the VFD as the motor speed attempts to decrease. This compensation
maintains a constant motor speed by minimizing droop. However, in some applications, droop
is needed.
Applications requiring Speed Droop

Speed droop is used in systems that are mechanically coupled to accomplish current (load)
sharing. Speed droop works for controlling current sharing with multiple drives in parallel with
a single motor, or for sharing load between multiple motors with separate drives e.g. large
conveyors or rock crushers, that are mechanically coupled to the same load. Speed droop
shares the load or current by decreasing the speed demand slightly as load increases.
Equilibrium is reached when the load is evenly shared between drives and/or motors.
0RWRU6SHHG
6SHHG 6SHHG 6SHHG

5DPS 5DPS 5HIHUHQFH
,QSXW 6SHHG 2XWSXW 6SHHG 7RUTXH
5DPS ෤ ෤ &XUUHQW
5HJXODWRU
5HIHUHQFH

6SHHG 0HDVXUHG
'URRS 7RUTXH
*DLQ &XUUHQW
Figure 7-1 Speed Droop
This function is linear and the amount of droop is directly proportional to the load (torque)
current. The droop is applied across the entire speed range.
NXG Control
7.5 Flux Feed-Forward
Setting Parameter for Speed Droop

Refer to the Speed Loop Menu (3200) in Section Options for Stability Menu (3) of Chapter
Parameter Assignments / Addressing for the parameter associated with this function:
● Speed droop (3245)
Parameter settings for this function are application dependant. The default is zero or
disabled.
See also
7.4 Flux Regulator

The flux regulator generates the magnetizing motor current reference. The flux reference
(λds,ref) is generated from the control’s flux ramp. The flux feedback (λds) comes from motor
voltage D-Q converter. The flux regulator is evaluated at 1/5 of the inner current loop update
rate.
7.5 Flux Feed-Forward
Flux feed-forward is a compensation input to increase performance of the flux loop. It works
in the following way:
1. The flux reference is preset to the no-load flux command when enabled. This eliminates a
delay in the response of the flux loop that would occur if starting from zero.
2. Next, the flux based on the load is compensated by feeding a reference proportional to the
torque command to the output of the flux regulator.
This compensates for the reduction of flux resulting from interaction with the torque current,
increasing the Id (reactive) current as a linear function of Iq (torque) current.
The functionality of flux feed-forward is essentially the same for both induction motors (IM) and
synchronous motors (SM). The difference between the motor types is as follows:
● IM: compensate for leakage inductance losses only using parameter Leakage inductance
(1070) to affect the amount of compensation.
● SM: compensate for the leakage inductance and a part of the mutual inductance, using
parameter Saliency constant (1091). This parameter applies only to SM control, and is used
instead of the leakage inductance parameter. Zeroing the saliency constant still provides
the no load feed-forward term, which essentially provides the no load flux reference. The
saliency constant provides additional compensation for the inductance losses due to
fluctuations of torque current for which the flux regulator may be too slow to correct. Setting
it too high can cause the motor flux to be too high resulting in motor over-voltage or
saturation.
NXG Control
7.6 External Flux Reference
)OX['V
6\QF0RWRU
)LHOG&XUUHQW
)OX[5HI )OX[5HJ
- 5HI
3, +
෤ ෤
, Ͷ<2%)
+
+
,1/
9ROWDJH +
෤
6FDOLQJ + )OX[))
,WRUT
6DOLHQF\
&RQVWDQW
Figure 7-2 Synchronous Motor Flux Feed-Forward
Note
Default Value for Saliency Constant Parameter (1091)
Use the default value of 0.2.
Only special cases may require changing the default value.
Consult Siemens customer service before changing from the default value.
Parameters for Flux Feed-Forward

Refer to Motor Parameter Menu (1000) in Section Options for Motor Menu (1) of Chapter
Parameter Assignments / Addressing for parameters associated with this function:
● Leakage inductance (1070)
● Saliency constant (1091)
See also
7.6 External Flux Reference
For certain synchronous motor types, the flux must be reduced for startup. This is mostly a
thermal problem with large inertial loads and virtually no cooling when the rotor is stationary.
This feature is enabled via a SOP flag that, when enabled, allows the flux demand to come
through a network register instead of using the internally computed value.
NXG Control
7.7 Dual-Frequency Braking
This feature can also be used to import a flux profile from an external device, i.e. PLC or PC,
and transfer to the motor via the network register.
Parameters for External Flux Reference

Location: Drive → Drive Protect → Input Protect
Parameters associated with external flux reference are detailed in the following table.

Global Data to 9200 Sub-menu Menu for Global registers for data sent to drive from
Drive the network.
Data to Drive 2201 to None Global register that contains data sent from the
01 -Drive 32 2231 <picklist> network to drive. One of these registers must be set
to "Flux Demand" from the pick list to use the register
value.
VFD requirements for Braking Functionality

Many applications for VFDs require occasional negative torque for braking. Most static
converters used for VFDs are not capable of returning energy to the utility. Such applications
require additional circuits to regenerate the braking energy into the AC mains, or to dissipate
the braking energy in a resistor.
DC Injection Braking
One method of doing this that avoids additional power devices, is to use the existing circuits
to inject DC current into the motor windings. DC injection braking dissipates the braking energy
in the motor.
● DC injection braking is not effective unless the available current is several times rated,
especially for large motors.
● The estimation of motor speed is difficult during DC injection braking.
Dual-Frequency Braking (DFB)

Dual-frequency braking is another method to dissipate braking energy in the motor.
● DFB provides higher torque per ampere than DC injection braking.
● DFB permits continuous estimation of motor speed.
Like DC injection braking, DFB is implemented in software and requires no additional hardware
that can reduce the reliability of the drive.
NXG Control
Limitations of DFB
● When DFB is enabled, the motor flux is reduced above 50% speed to prevent overvoltage
trips.
● The drive must be maintained in the run state to produce the counter-rotating field for loss
production.
● DFB is not operable in V/Hz control mode.
DFB Operation
Enable DFB with parameter Enable braking (3360) or via SOP flag BrakingEnable_O.
DFB induces extra losses in the motor by applying a second set of three-phase voltage vectors
to the motor, in addition to the normal set of voltage vectors used for speed control. The motor
uses the extra losses to absorb the kinetic energy released during braking.
With DFB, motor protection is required and is applied as follows:
1. Torque pulsations:
– DFB can subject the motor to as much as 1 per unit torque pulsation at the pulsation
frequency. Select the torque pulsation frequency via the menu entry for pulsation
frequency to avoid any mechanical resonance frequencies.
2. Motor heating:
– The losses generated during DFB cause motor heating and limit the number of
deceleration ramps from full speed to zero, that can be performed repetitively. Motor
heating due to the additional losses is designed to be no worse than a line start.
The software motor thermal model in the NXG control monitors motor heating and
provides an alarm and/or a trip to indicate excessive heating. Refer to Section Motor
Thermal Overload Protection for information on the thermal model. The number of
repetitive deceleration ramps, from full speed to zero, is limited to two per hour. This
limitation is based on MG-1, Part 20, which assumes that the motor has cooled down
to its rated temperature before the second ramp down. It applies when the load inertia
and load torque are those for which the motor is designed. You can use DFB more
frequently with lower values of load inertia and/or smaller speed reductions.
Pulsation Frequency
The second set of voltage vectors creates a counter-rotating flux vector that produces high
slip in the machine and generates these additional losses in the motor. You can adjust the
pulsation frequency via a menu setting as to avoid critical frequencies i.e., mechanical
resonances. The injection frequency is always in opposite rotation to the electrical frequency
applied to the motor i.e., speed and direction of the machine.
Note
Programming the pulsation frequency
Select parameter Pulsation frequency (3370) to program the pulsation frequency via the
NXG Control. This parameter provides a reference to produce the desired additional braking
for the system. Adjust this parameter setting to avoid resonance in the system.
NXG Control
Effects of added voltage vectors VA1 and VA2 on DFB

The voltage vectors, normal VA1 and loss-inducing VA2, are added together to produce the
braking function.
,$,$
=HUR
9$ 9$
6HTXHQFH
9ROWDJH
,%,%
$&
9=6 9% 9% ,QGXFWLRQ
0RWRU
9& 9&
,&,&
1RUPDO /RVV,QGXFLQJ
SKDVH SKDVH
9ROWDJHV 9ROWDJHV
(TXLYDOHQW&LUFXLWWR2XWSXWRI'ULYH
Figure 7-3 Dual Frequency voltages added with normal 3-phase voltages
Note
Zero sequence voltage
Zero sequence voltage is the DC offset voltage.
The following is a scope picture of the two voltage vectors added together. The higher
frequency voltage waveform VA2 is riding on the lower frequency waveform VA1.
Figure 7-4 Dual Frequency Braking waveform
NXG Control
The first vector set controls the torque and flux in the motor, and is nearly synchronous. The
second vector set induces losses in the motor to absorb the braking power returned by the
first vector set.
The amplitudes of the two vector sets are coordinated to best utilize the current and voltage
limitations of the converter. If the frequency of the loss-inducing vector set is chosen with the
goal of maximizing losses per ampere, this automatically minimizes the torque pulsations by
minimizing the loss-inducing current.
The dominant losses in a motor are conduction losses, proportional to I2R. Maximum losses
per ampere require a large value of R. The nominal resistance of the motor windings is fixed
by the design. The effective resistance depends on the frequency. The rotor windings are
deliberately designed to exhibit a strong "deep-bar" effect, so that their resistance that lies
above a low threshold increases roughly proportional to frequency.
The frequency of the loss-inducing vector set should be as high as possible for maximum
effective resistance. Since this high loss-inducing frequency produces negative slip, it will have
negative sequence. The maximum applied frequency is limited by the control bandwidth of the
converter, and also by the available voltage. However, because the loss-inducing vector set
is negative sequence, the rotor frequency will be higher than the stator frequency due to the
rotational speed.
See also
Motor Thermal Overload Protection (Page 140)
Parameters for DFB

Refer to Braking Menu (3350) in Section Options for Stability Menu (3) of Chapter Parameter
Assignment / Addressing for parameters associated with this function:
● Enable braking (3360)
● Pulsation frequency (3370)
● Brake power loss (3390)
● VD loss (3400)
● Braking constant (3410)
Use these parameter settings to run the drive with DFB:
● Choose a pulsation frequency that avoids the mechanical resonant frequencies of the
system i.e. motor, shaft and load. A study of the mechanical system is required to determine
the resonant frequencies.
● Use brake power loss (3390) to set the initial value of motor losses. The default value is
satisfactory in most cases.
● Use VD loss (3400) to set the maximum voltage that is applied at the second, loss-inducing
frequency. This parameter cannot be set to a value higher than 0.5 pu. Adjusting this
parameter will have a direct effect on the achievable braking torque.
● Use braking constant (3410) to set the ratio of the power losses created in the motor to the
power absorbed by the drive during braking. Using the default value gives sufficient margin
and prevents the cell DC-bus voltages from increasing to trip levels.
NXG Control
7.8 Regenerative Braking (six-step)
See also
Limitations of DFB
The drive output current plus the braking current must not exceed the current capability of the
cells in the drive. Hence the braking torque is limited in the drive, it is greatest at slow speed
and smallest at high speed. The typical braking torque that can be expected with DFB is
illustrated below.

3HUFHQWRI5DWHG7RUTXH

,PD[

3HUFHQWRI5DWHG6SHHG
Figure 7-5 Braking torque with DFB for a typical motor
With high efficiency and inverter duty motors, the braking torque that can be achieved with
DFB is lower than the values shown in the figure above.
Contact Siemens customer service with the motor-related data listed below to determine the
braking torque capability with a higher efficiency motor. Information on critical frequencies will
allow a selection for the torque pulsation frequency.
Table 7-1 Motor related data
Rated HP Rated Voltage

Rated frequency Full-load speed
Half-load efficiency Full-load efficiency
Half-load power factor Full-load power factor
Locked-rotor torque Locked-rotor current
Pull-out torque Critical frequencies of the mechanical system
Each cell has an active front end (AFE), which allows regeneration power to flow from the drive
output to input. No drive input reactors are needed for this regeneration algorithm.
NXG Control
For this algorithm, cell DC bus voltage is not controlled. Therefore, when the line impedance
is high and the drive is regenerating heavily at near-rated speed, where the primary
regeneration current is highest, the drive input voltage may increase to the point where cells
trip on the DC bus overvoltage fault.
Operation of Regenerative Braking

To use regenerative braking, the AFE must be maintained in the on condition, therefore the
run request must be active, and the speed demand reduced to zero to brake the load. This
requires a special SOP configuration.
OV Rollback Function
The "OV rollback" function limits the rise in the drive input voltage produced by regenerative
current to prevent a cell DC bus overvoltage fault. The output torque (power) reduces to a point
that will not cause an overvoltage. After this point is reached, the torque limitation caused by
the rollback is defeated, and full braking torque is available.
NOTICE
Limited drive capabilities
A delay can occur when transitioning from motoring to regenerative braking.
Do not use regenerative braking as a replacement for full 4-quadrant operation.
Parameters for Regenerative Braking

Refer to AP Settings (2585) in Section Options for Drive Menu (2) of Chapter Parameter
Assignment / Addressing for the parameters associated with this function:
● Regen OV I gain (2623)
● Regen OV P gain (2624)
● Regen shift angle (2625)
See also
NXG Control
7.9 Dynamic Braking with External Resistors
Limit Conditions of Regenerative Braking

The regenerative capability is restricted when the line input voltage gets too high. The rollback
limits the output torque current regenerative capability when input voltage (Erms) reaches or
exceeds 1.08 pu, and decreases it linearly to zero at 1.2 pu as shown in the figure below.
(UPV0D[

3PD[SX

Figure 7-6 Pmax in Regeneration with respect to Erms
The conditions for enabling this rollback are as follows by priority. The first two run the
algorithm, and the third is calculated by the limiting overvoltage algorithm:
● Drive input power negative (drive in regeneration only)
● Drive is running in six-step
● Drive input voltage is at or above 1.08 pu input voltage
● Pre-charge is complete.
When this limit routine is active and its output is being used to limit regenerative torque, the
display will show the limit used as "OVLT" in the mode field of the keypad and Drive Tool, and
"REGEN OV" on the debug screen.
7.9 Dynamic Braking with External Resistors

This function is for providing quick stopping capability to a two quadrant drive, so that under
special conditions, the motor can be brought to a faster stop than by ramping. Deceleration is
based on motor and load inertia, and the sizing of the braking resistors and contactors.
This function is provided through the SOP via a digital input to trigger a fast braking event i.e.
"Fast Decel" or "Emergency Brake" event. A digital output from the SOP provides control for
an output device to connect the resistor banks across the terminals of the AC motor.
The drive will be commanded to go into the quick stop mode, and a second set of regenerative
torque limits will be selected to set the maximum current limit to prevent over-stressing the
motor. The deceleration action maintains the drive enable and provides reactive current to the
NXG Control
7.10 Voltage Attenuator Resistors
motor for maximum results in braking. Once the motor speed reaches zero speed setting, the
drive will enter the coast stop state, exit the special braking function and reset the braking
contactor. The quick stop flag, secondary torque limits and braking action will cease.
The dynamic braking mechanism converts the motoring action of the machine into generator
action during the braking. The dynamic braking technique of an induction motor is aimed at
fast braking action or fast deceleration action of the motors. During braking, the motor starts
regenerating and as a result, a large voltage is induced across the stator terminals.
The deceleration time required by the motor depends on the time required by the heat
generated during regeneration to be dissipated. For this purpose, resistor banks are switched
across the motors.
The resistor banks put large loads on the electrical circuits. When a generator circuit is loaded
down with resistance, it causes the machines to slow their rotations. By varying the amount of
excitation in the induction motor fields and the amount of resistance imposed on the circuit by
the resistor grids, the induction motor can be slowed down to a virtual stop. The generated
electric energy is dissipated through the resistor bank. The resistor banks also provide the
protection to the IGBTs in the drive circuitry. Switching a resistor bank across the terminals
enables the electrical and the thermal energy to dissipate across the resistors, rapidly slowing
down the motor.
The drive control is able to maintain stable operation during deceleration even though the
connection of the resistors abruptly changes the impedance seen by the drive at its output
terminals. The drive control is able to limit the output current satisfactorily without causing any
over-voltage trips in the cells.
(OHFWULFDOHQHUJ\
JHQHUDWHG
'ULYH $&
0RWRU
(OHFWULFDODQGWKHUPDO
HQHUJ\GLVVLSDWHGLQWKH
UHVLVWRUEDQN
5HVLVWRU
%DQN
Figure 7-7 Dynamic Braking with External Resistors
7.10 Voltage Attenuator Resistors
Input and output voltages are attenuated to provide a low voltage signal for measurement.
Typically, two resistors are used, on both the input and output sides, to support medium
voltages. The attenuator circuit is used to convert medium voltages to low voltage
NXG Control
7.11 Torque Current Regulator
measurement signals. Calculations are usually carried out at the Siemens factory. If issues
exist with calculations, consult the factory.
Note that even if the discrete value of available resistors is not the same as the exact calculated
value, no scaling is required; the NXG software automatically scales the voltages as needed.
NOTICE
Drive Stability
Selecting attenuator resistors incorrectly can cause unintended results that affect drive
stability and drive protections.
The input attenuator resistors must be selected to match the input transformer nameplate
rating. The output attenuator resistors must be selected to match the motor nameplate rating.
WARNING
Protection of the transorbs in the attenuator circuit is violated by placing a third resistor inside
the control cabinet in series with the medium voltage resistors.
If the protection of the transorbs in the attenuator circuit is violated, dangerous voltages are
introduced into the control cabinet, which could cause death or serious injury.
Never place a third resistor inside the control cabinet in series with the medium voltage
resistors to achieve the calculated values.
Software Supported Voltages for Attenuator Resistors

Although the voltage ranges for the input, 200 to 125000 V, and the output, 200 to 23000 V,
allow for much flexibility, the usable voltages must be supported by the appropriate set of
attenuator resistors. The values input to the drive determine the rated input and output voltages
respectively. If not set to the values represented by the actual hardware devices, the drive may
not operate properly.
7.11 Torque Current Regulator

The torque current regulator generates the motor’s Q-axis motor voltage. The torque producing
motor current reference (Iqs,ref) is generated from the output of the frequency regulator. The
torque producing current feedback (Iqs) comes from motor current D-Q converter. The torque
current regulator is evaluated at the inner current loop update rate. This regulator is the
innermost, i.e. fastest, control loop in the NXG control, operating at the sampling rate of the
system. This is typically 3 to 6 KHz or approximately 9 KHz for high speed motors.
NXG Control
7.14 Output Filters
7.12 Magnetizing Current Regulator

The magnetizing current regulator generates the D-axis motor voltage reference. The
magnetizing motor current reference (Ids,ref) is generated from the output of the flux regulator.
The magnetizing producing current feedback (Ids) comes from motor current D-Q converter.
The magnetizing current regulator is evaluated at the inner current loop update rate. This
regulator is the innermost, i.e. fastest, control loop in the NXG control, operating at the sampling
rate of the system. This is typically 3 to 6 KHz or approximately 9 KHz for high speed motors.
7.13 Phase Lock Loop

The phase lock loop module generates the flux angle (θ) and stator frequency (ωout). The flux
Q-axis term is generated by the motor flux D-Q transformation (λqs). The phase lock loop
module is evaluated at 1/5 of the inner current loop update rate.
Motor terminal voltage feedback is integrated to provide a true flux feedback in volt-sec units.
The PLL uses this to provide a flux vector phase reference for all internal motor control.
7.14 Output Filters

Output filters are used for the following reasons:
● for down-hole pumping with long cables.
● when shielded output cables are used.
● to avoid any problem with cable reflections.
● to address EMI or DV/DT requirements.
● with the capacitors omitted, the filter can be used as output reactors for synchronous
transfer to limit the current that can circulate while the VFD output is connected to the MV
input.
NXG Control supports output filters for all control modes.
Output Filter design and operation

The output filter consists of an LC filter used to prevent the output cable dynamics from
interfering with the drive output. It is designed to remove all high frequency components in the
drive output voltage to result in a nearly perfect sinusoidal output waveform.
The output filter adds losses proportional to the square of the RMS output current. The filter
inductance is in series with the VFD output and motor load and can reduce the output voltage
capability, depending on the load power factor. The filter also introduces an amplifying
resonance, which could limit the closed-loop gain for high-performance applications. The filter
consists of series inductors in each phase connected between the drive outputs and the load
(motor) terminals. Shunt capacitors in each phase connect between the load terminals and
are arranged in a floating wye configuration. Capacitors are omitted for closed synchronous
transfer applications.
NXG Control
7.15 Synchronous Transfer
The synchronous transfer feature is used to avoid line-start mechanical and electrical strain
in constant-speed applications. The VFD soft starts the motor(s), and then NXG control
matches line/load electrical characteristics, allowing "bumpless" synchronous transfer.
Note
Additional hardware requirements
Synchronous transfer requires hardware in addition to the drive: output reactor and
switchgear. Siemens recommends using a PLC for multi-motor applications.
● Up transfer is the process of transferring a VFD-controlled motor to the line, and then
decoupling the motor from the drive.
● Down transfer is the process of transferring a line-energized motor to VFD control, and then
decoupling the motor from the line.
To achieve successful up and down transfers, the output voltage of the VFD must match or
exceed the amplitude of the line. If the line is unstable with frequency and/or voltage variations,
the VFD may not be able to synchronize, and therefore transfer is inhibited.
Note
Applications that use a synchronous motor
In transfer applications where a synchronous motor is used, the VFD must have control of
the field supply with smooth transition of the field control to an external source via a PLC.
Note
Control modes
Synchronous up and down transfer is not available in control modes V/Hz or OLTM.
WARNING
Fire Hazard
Improper phase sequence may result in a synchronous transfer related VFD fault, which
could lead to shorted phase to phase connections on the MV source and become a fire
hazard. This may result in death, serious injury or damage to equipment.
Ensure that input and output phases are properly wired to match the sequence.
VFD Synchronous Transfer Implementation

Synchronous transfer is inherent to NXG Control. To optimize this feature, Siemens
engineering must be involved, regardless of scope of supply, in the switchgear configuration
and logic sequencing for both equipment safety and personnel safety. Siemens engineering
NXG Control
can supply switchgear and reactors as part of the drive or provide recommendations as
needed.
CAUTION
Potential damage to VFD Power Cells
The VFD output contactor and motor line contactors must never be simultaneously closed if
the digital output signal "VFD Transfer Permissive" is low, or when the VFD input is not
energized.
Failure to ensure that this condition does not occur could result in severe damage to the VFD
power cells.
Input/Output Signals for Synchronous Transfer

Excluding standard run, stop, and speed reference inputs, synchronous transfer requires 4
dedicated input signals and 6 dedicated output signals to be implemented. These signals can
either be hardwired or implemented as digital control bits over one of the NXG-supported PLC
communication links.
Input Signals to the VFD:

● Up Transfer Request
● Down Transfer Request
● VFD Output Contactor Status
● Motor Line Contactor Status
Output Signals from the VFD:

● VFD Transfer Permissive
● Up Transfer Permit
● Up Transfer Complete
● Down Transfer Permissive
● Down Transfer Complete
● Open Motor Line Contactor
7.15.1 Synchronous Transfer Operation for Induction Motors
Verifying Command Generator Options

Before attempting synchronous transfer, examine the command generator options selected
during pre-synchronous transfer. It is important to disable command generator functions that
may cause the transfer to fail.
NXG Control
Verify that the speed profile, polarity change function, and speed limits do not modify the input
frequency when a synchronous transfer is requested. The input frequency is treated much the
same way as any other raw speed demand into the drive.
Potential Fault Conditions

During synchronous transfer there are three alarm/fault conditions that can occur:
● Up Transfer timeout (alarm):
– Means that the transfer has taken longer than allocated in the "Up transfer timeout"
menu (ID 2760).
● Down Transfer timeout (alarm):
– Means that the transfer has taken longer than allocated in the "Up transfer timeout"
menu (ID 2770).
● Phase Sequence (alarm or fault):
– Indicates that the drive input phase sequence or direction is different than the drive
output.
Note
Further causes for failed transfer
The timeout alarms may indicate that other conditions are causing the transfer to fail.
For example, there are not enough active cells left in the drive to support the line voltage
during down transfer.
In this case, the drive sets the SOP flag InsufficientOutputVolts_I high.
Up Transfer of Induction Motor

Up transfer takes the motor up to speed on the VFD to match the frequency of the line, once
the drive software receives the "Up Transfer Request". The drive software uses the drive input
line frequency as a velocity reference. Once the frequency is matched the phase also needs
to be matched with a predetermined leading phase to ensure the power flow is out of the VFD
while the line contactor is closed. To match the phase with a predetermined leading phase,
the drive software uses the line frequency and phase information from the input
Phase Locked Loop (PLL) and the output phase information from the output PLL to determine
a vernier adjustment to the frequency that is added to the velocity command. When the
synchronization is complete, the drive contactor is opened and the drive coast-stopped to end
the transition.
The procedures for up transfer setup are carried out during the commissioning process.
Down Transfer of Induction Motor

Down transfer is used to transfer a motor from the line to the drive. With NXG control, the drive
monitors the output voltage before locking-in to the motor frequency via the spinning load
algorithm. For the drive to perform this action, the VFD contactor must be closed at the
NXG Control
beginning of the down transfer sequence while the drive output is still disabled. The drive is
capable of locking-in within a few milliseconds. The drive then raises the output torque current
before indicating that it is ready to accept the motor and open the line contactor.
The procedures for down transfer setup are carried out during the commissioning process.
Synchronous Transfer with Multiple Motors

Perfect Harmony drives can control multiple motors using synchronous transfer methodology.
In such applications, the drive sequentially controls a series of motors, one motor at a time.
&%
/
/ 9 / 9
9)'
0 0
3/&
Figure 7-8 Multiple Motor Synchronous Transfer
Figure Multiple Motor Synchronous Transfer shows the VFD configuration for synchronous
transfer of a two motor implementation. A PLC must be used for multiple motor synchronous
transfer applications. The PLC and its logic can be supplied by Siemens to coordinate the
transfer sequence and also control the switchgear. In addition, motor protection relays are
recommended since the VFD cannot protect a motor operating from the line.
It is not required that all motors connected to a drive configured for synchronous transfer have
matching ratings. If mismatched motors are implemented, the drive must be sized for the worst
case load. "Smaller" motor loads can be mechanized via parameter read/write functionality or
the NXG control multiple configuration file capability, as described in Chapter Operating the
Software. As a rule, the smallest motor rating should be greater than 50% of the ratings of the
largest motor to ensure feedback signal integrity. When mismatched motors are used, the
proper configuration file must be active for the subject motor.
NXG Control
PLC Interface
VFD control is accomplished over a RS485 serial or Ethernet communications network using
a supported communications protocol.
Example of supported communications protocol

Modicon’s Modbus communications protocol:
● A Modicon-compatible PLC interface is located at each motor control center.
● The PLCs are networked to a main Modbus controller, e.g. a PC, and the communications
board on the drive.
02'%861HWZRUN
0&& 0&&
0DLQ
&RPPXQLFDWLRQ%RDUG 02'%86 3/& 3/&
&RQWUROOHU
9 9
3HUIHFW+DUPRQ\9)'
/ /
/2
0 0
/LQH9ROWDJH
Figure 7-9 Communications using a Modbus network configuration
Note
Supported communications protocol
This section uses Modicon’s Modbus serial interface as one example of a supported
communications protocol.
Any supported communications network can be used.
The interface can also be achieved with no PLC, or by direct logic control.
7.15.2 Synchronous Transfer Operation for Synchronous Motors

Synchronous transfer with a synchronous motor (SM) is essentially the same as with an
induction motor (IM) with the addition of transfer of the control of the motor field winding excitor
from or to the drive to or from an external source.
NXG Control
Also, for synchronous transfer with SMs, an analog signal from the drive is required to control
the field current, and another analog signal from the controller to the drive, is required to read
the output of the external controller.
For handshaking with a required external controller, a minimum of two digital inputs and two
digital outputs is required to provide adequate handshaking between the drive and the external
controller. The external controller is a separate PLC for most applications and if the analog
control signal is a 4 to 20ma current loop.
NOTICE
Potential Circuitry Damage
4 to 20ma current loops cannot be switched without potentially damaging circuitry.
An intervening PLC can digitize the signals and retransmit the signal, facilitating the switching
function.
The PLC allows for monitoring and matching between an external field reference source and
the drive field reference source during transfer.
Up Transfer of Synchronous Motor

Up transfers are accomplished by taking the SM up to speed on the VFD to match the frequency
and then the phase of the line. This is accomplished the same as for an IM, by using the drive
input line frequency as a velocity reference. The main difference comes after the
synchronization and when both contactors are closed simultaneously. At this point the field
control has to be transferred from the drive to an external field controller. When the field transfer
is complete, the drive contactor is opened and the drive coast-stopped to end the transition.
Down Transfer of Synchronous Motor

Down transfer with synchronous motor control transfers a motor running directly connected to
a power line to the control via the VFD. The VFD output is synchronized with the line connected
to the motor, not necessarily the input to the drive. The NXG Control utilizes the connection
through the VFD output contactor with the power devices disabled to synchronize the VFD to
the line. Once synchronized, the outputs of the power devices are enabled in synchronization
with the line so that there is little or no power flow from the drive, and none back into the drive.
A 2-quadrant cannot absorb power.
Down transfer of synchronous motors not only involves the transfer of the stator voltage source
but also the transfer of the separate field exciter control. This adds a level of complexity to the
logic and control.
Down transfer of synchronous motors requires an external PLC or equivalent to control the
transfer and to provide the external field exciter reference when the motor is on the line.
Preconditions for Down Transfer of Synchronous Motor

NXG control uses the spinning load algorithm to synchronize the drive to the line connected
motor.
NXG Control
Preconditions for activating spinning load:

● The Spinning Load Enable parameter must be set true.
● The drive must be in the "IDLE" state prior to down transfer.
● The motor is running from the line. The line contactor is closed and the
"Contactor Acknowledge" signal is provided to the drive.
Procedure for Presetting the Internal Field Control Regulator

Refer to Analog Input #4 Menu (4332) in Section Options for Auto Menu (4) in Chapter
Parameter Assignment / Addressing to preset the internal field control regulator during
transition between sources. This signal is fed back from the PLC as the active field command
level. Analog Input #4 is dedicated for this function. No other input can be used.
1. Select the correct analog source through the pick list on this parameter. The field command
from the drive must exit via a programmable analog output.
2. Select the menu item for the desired analog output and select "Synch Motor Field" as the
signal. This signal goes to the PLC as the drive source for the field command.
3. Set SOP flag EnableAnalog4_O to true and select the Loss of Signal (LOS) action.
See also
7.15.3 Synchronous Transfer for Permanent Magnet Motors (PMM)
NOTICE
Potential Damage to Motor
Line operation for a PMM is not recommended as there is no protection for the motor for pole
slippage.
Use of synchronous transfer with a PMM could result in damage to the motor.
Note
For synchronous transfer of a PMM, the Auto and Auto Phase Advance modes must be
disabled. The Manual modes may be used with caution, but may also prevent proper
operation.
Up Transfer of a PMM
With PMMs, up transfers are accomplished by taking the SM up to speed on the drive to match
the frequency and then the phase of the line. This is the same way that up transfer is
accomplished for an IM, by using the drive input line frequency as a velocity reference.
However, with a PMM connected to the line, there is nothing to protect it from pole slip, which
NXG Control
7.16 Pre-charge
can damage the motor. The drive has a pole slip detection, which will protect the drive. Also,
the drive has limited power as compared to a low impedance line source, so fault currents
could be higher.
This external protection must be supplied by the customer and is not within the scope of the
design.
Down Transfer of a PMM

With PMMs, down transfer is used to transfer a motor from the line to the drive. With NXG
Control, the drive monitors the output voltage before locking-in to the motor frequency via the
spinning load algorithm. For the drive to perform this action, the drive contactor must be closed
at the beginning of the down transfer sequence while the drive output is still disabled. The drive
is capable of locking-in within a few milliseconds. The drive then raises the output torque
current before indicating that it is ready to accept the motor and open the line contactor.
The starting sequence for the PMM requires the drive to go through the high starting torque
mode. This must be bypassed if the motor is spinning, most importantly at the line frequency.
7.15.4 Parameter Settings for Synchronous Transfer Operation

The Synchronous Transfer Menu (2700) is used exclusively for synchronous transfer
applications. Refer to Section Options for Drive Menu (2) of Chapter Parameter Assignment /
Addressing for parameters associated with this function.
See also
7.16 Pre-charge
The following sections describe the pre-charge types used in the Perfect Harmony Water
Cooled drive cells.
Perfect Harmony drive types that do not require pre-charge, can use pre-charge where a soft
line or power source requires limiting in-rush.
Description of Pre-charge
Pre-charge types were developed to control the inrush current and the voltage overshoot seen
by the drives and, in particular, by the cell capacitors. Reduced capacitance in the cells has
NXG Control
7.17 Pre-charge using SOP
exacerbated the overshoot problem due to increased ringing, and so the cell charge voltage
must be more closely controlled.
NOTICE
Disconnecting medium voltage (MV) after control power shut off
Shutting off the control power without disconnecting MV may cause severe damage to the
drive, since all the transformer and cell protection is accomplished by the NXG Control.
If the control power is shut off, disconnect the MV and re-start the pre-charge sequence to
ensure the protection of the drive.
Pre-charge Types
There are six types of pre-charge. Each pre-charge type has special requirements and is
discussed independently.
● Pre-charge types 1 to 3 are SOP based. They require the designated pre-charge SOP flags
in order to control the I/O for the pre-charge and main contactors unless otherwise noted.
For pre-charge types 1 to 3, the complete pre-charge cycle is 30 seconds maximum:
– This time takes into account the maximum low level fault that can be sustained before
serious damage is done to the drive should an input fault occur.
– Going beyond this time results in the removal of the Pre-charge Start Enable signal and
the cycle aborts with a pre-charge fault.
Types 1 to 3 are discussed in the following sections.
● Pre-charge type 4 is obsolete.
● Pre-charge types 5 and 6 are not SOP based, and instead control the I/O directly. These
are discussed in Section Pre-charge using Dedicated I/O of this chapter.
Pre-charge status information is recorded in the event log. If pre-charge fails, check the event
log for information.
Note
Pre-charge overvoltage protection
For pre-charge overvoltage protection, the fundamental frequency component is used instead
of the RMS input voltage. This new variable is IP Voltage Fundamental Magnitude.
7.17.1 Preconditions for Pre-charge Types 1 to 3

Aside from safety concerns, and assuming that input power is available, the following
conditions need to be met to initiate pre-charge types 1 to 3. Monitor the entire pre-charge
NXG Control
sequence through an externally connected monitor or through the Debug Tool set to the "Drive
Misc Status Flags 2" using Ctrl-Y on the keyboard or menu selection in the tool.
NXG Control
Prerequisites to initiating pre-charge types 1, 2 or 3

● The DriveReadyToPrecharge flag in the lower right corner must be set true for pre-
charge to begin. Monitor the progress on the ‘MedVolts’, ‘Precharge State’, and
‘PrechargeExitState’ variables on the right side. Every step in the pre-charge sequence is
logged in the event log, including any fault conditions that abort pre-charge. Also the exit
condition from the pre-charge state machine is logged.
● If all conditions are met, the DriveReadyToPrecharge_I flag is true. If any conditions
are not met, the flag is set false, therefore this flag can be used as part of the conditions to
start pre-charge. Pre-charge cannot be initialized or started if this flag is not true. Once pre-
charge commences, the flag goes false and remains false until all conditions are again met.
● When all conditions are met, the pre-charge state machine advances from the initial state
of "INIT_PRECHARGE", into the "WAIT_FOR_VOLTS" state and pre-charge becomes
active. The loss of the DriveReadyToPrecharge_I flag causes the state machine to
remain in the "INIT_PRECHARGE" state until the drive is ready and the
PrechargeStartEnable_O flag is set true.
– Type 1, 2, or 3 pre-charge selected
– Drive not running
– MV is low (not OK)
– Output to M1 Permissive is open, PrechargeM1Close_I is false
– M1 is open, PrechargeM1CloseAck_O is false
– No medium low fault
– LFR not tripped and latched (due to Input Protection) or dedicated input protection isn't
used
– No pre-charge fault exists
– MV is not disabled, MainInputVoltageDisable_O is false, or maintenance or
service mode is enabled.
– No pre-charge circuit breaker alarm active
– No pre-charge contactor alarm active
– No pre-charge main contactor fault
– No input protection fault
Note
Cells in bypass
If any cells are in bypass prior to losing MV, their respective bypass contactor is opened
since the bypass contactor power supply is energized by one phase of the MV input.
During the subsequent pre-charge, if the cell is detected as faulted, pre-charge will
pause indefinitely until a manual drive reset is activated.
Pre-charge will then proceed and the detected faulted cell will be bypassed after pre-
charge is complete.
NXG Control
Setting PrechargeStartEnable_O to true initiates the pre-charge sequence. Pre-charge

will not initiate if DriveReadyToPrecharge_I is not true, or any of the above conditions are
not met.
7.17.2 Type 1 (Closed) Pre-charge

Type 1 pre-charge uses a capacitor circuit chosen to be in resonance with the inductance of
the secondary windings of the input transformer.
● This circuit design allows a lower voltage source to charge a higher voltage rated cell while
limiting the inrush to both the transformer and the cell capacitors.
● The voltage must be carefully monitored to prevent the cells from overvoltage.
To prevent cells from overvoltage, a resistor circuit is connected through contactor M3 when
the highest of the three input phase voltages, measured on the primary of the input
transformer, reaches 95% of rated voltage. The resistor overdamps the pre-charge circuit
and the voltage increase ceases. At this point the capacitor circuit is disconnected and the
main contactor to the medium voltage source is closed. Once closed, the resistor network
is opened and pre-charge is complete. The pre-charge request can be removed. This
constitutes a make-before-break (closed) contactor sequence.
Type 1 Pre-charge circuit design

Type 1 pre-charge uses contactors M2 and M3 in addition to the main input contactor M1. The
pre-charge source can either be attached to one of the existing secondary windings, or can
be a separate dedicated winding on the secondary. The second choice is preferable for the
high voltage cells since applying near rated voltage from an external source is less desirable
than supplying 480 to 690 Vac to a special dedicated secondary winding on the transformer.
NXG Control
0 2KPSHUSKDVH
0 0)'SHUSKDVH
,QSXW3RZHU WR9 9 3UHFKDUJH9ROWDJH
SKDVH$& SKDVH6RXUFH
3UHFKDUJH&XUUHQW
3UHFKDUJH:LQGLQJ
&HOO
$
&HOO
%
7UDQVIRUPHUZLWK &HOO
9,VRODWHG &
6HFRQGDULHV
&HOO
$
&HOO
%
&HOO
&
0
,QSXW3RZHU &HOO
SKDVH$& $
&HOO
%
&HOO
&
&HOO
$
&HOO
%
&HOO
&
,QGXFWLRQ
0RWRU
Figure 7-10 Type 1 Pre-charge Component Connections
Sequence of Operation
1. To start pre-charge, DriveReadyToPrecharge_I must be true.
PrechargeStartEnable_O is set true to start the sequence.
2. M2 is closed to begin resonance by connecting a capacitor in series with the secondary,
PrechargeM2Close_I is set equal to true.
3. When the input primary voltage reaches 95% of rated voltage, a damping resistor is
connected through M3. PrechargeM3Close_I is set equal to true.
4. The M3 acknowledge comes back, PrechargeM3CloseAck_O is set equal to true. M2
contactor is commanded to open, PrechargeM2Close_I is set equal to false.
contactor is commanded to close, PrechargeM1Close_I is set equal to true.
NXG Control

contactor is commanded to open, PrechargeM3Close_I is set equal to false.
7. The M3 acknowledge comes back, PrechargeM3CloseAck_O is set equal to false. Pre-
charge is complete, PrechargeComplete_I is set equal to true. The pre-charge request
can be removed, PrechargeStartEnable_O is set equal to false.
8. After the pre-charge request is removed, the drive is now able to run.
PrechargeDriveEnable_I is set equal to true.
Note
Pre-charge faults
The following conditions will result in a pre-charge fault:
● failure to follow the sequence
● failure to leave a minimum of 250 msec between receiving a response and issuing the
next command
● removal of pre-charge start enable before the cycle completes.
All handshaking must follow the sequence of operation.
NXG Control
7.17.3 Type 2 (Open) Pre-charge

Type 2 pre-charge uses a resonant circuit. Type 2 pre-charge avoids inrush into the cells; it
does not prevent input transformer inrush.
● This pre-charge type has a break-before-make (open) contactor sequence that does not
require close synchronization between the input voltage to the pre-charge circuit and the
input voltage to the transformer primary. Breaking the connection to the pre-charge source
after the cells are fully charged, causes the flux in the transformer to collapse almost
immediately. So, when the main input contactor is closed, the only inrush is for magnetizing
the transformer itself, and not for charging the cell capacitors.

Type 2 pre-charge uses contactor M2 in addition to M1. An additional pre-charge secondary
winding is employed to be able to reach full rated voltage of the transformer primary and cell
connected secondaries.
0 0)'SHUSKDVH
SKDVH$& SKDVH6RXUFH
3UHFKDUJH&XUUHQW
3UHFKDUJH:LQGLQJ
&HOO
$
&HOO
%
9,VRODWHG &
6HFRQGDULHV
&HOO
$
&HOO
%
&HOO
&
0
,QSXW3RZHU &HOO
SKDVH$& $
&HOO
%
&HOO
&
&HOO
$
&HOO
%
&HOO
&
,QGXFWLRQ
0RWRU
NXG Control
2. M2 is closed to begin resonance by connecting a capacitor in series with the secondary.
3. When the input primary voltage reaches 95% of rated voltage, M2 contactor is commanded
to open. PrechargeM2Close_I is set equal to false.
5. The M1 acknowledge comes back, PrechargeM1CloseAck_O is set equal to true. Pre-
charge is complete, PrechargeComplete_I is set equal to true. The pre-charge
request must be removed, PrechargeStartEnable_O is set equal to false.
6. With the removal of the pre-charge request, the drive is now ready to run.
Note
Pre-charge faults
next command
7.17.4 Type 3 Pre-charge (Parallel Drives)

Pre-charge in parallel drives, or other selected drives, is known as type 3 pre-charge. It may
use either a 3PCI controller or a fixed source with a resistive element instead of the resonant
capacitor, to increase the cell voltage gradually.
Pre-charge of this type requires that the input source, i.e. output of 3PCI or independent source,
be rated with high enough voltage to reach at least 90% of rated input voltage under all
conditions, without exceeding the pre-charge trip voltage. Two input sources can be used,
each is addressed according to its constraints:
NXG Control
● 3PCI source In this case, a resistor may not be required. This depends on the current
needed from the source to charge the capacitors and also on any stability issues with the
current loop of the 3PCI. The only real requirement is that it is able to charge the cell
capacitors in the timeframe allotted.
● Independent / constant source Contactor status M2 represents the contactor status in series
with the 3PCI and the enable signal to the 3PCI. In this case, the M2 contactor is connected
to the pre-charge secondary winding through the series resistor. The only difference is in
the threshold signal of the primary voltage. For type 3 pre-charge the threshold will be 90 %
instead of 95 % and the resistor, if used, must be rated to handle the power dissipation
during the pre-charge cycle. The resistor must be sized much larger than if it were used
only to maintain charge on the capacitors during the contactor operation. The resistor must
carry all the charging and magnetizing current of the drive.
0 2KPSHUSKDVH
,QSXW3RZHU
SKDVH$& 0 RU
3&,&RQWUROOHU
3UHFKDUJH:LQGLQJ
&HOO
$
&HOO
%
9,VRODWHG &
6HFRQGDULHV
&HOO
$
&HOO
%
&HOO
&
0
,QSXW3RZHU &HOO
SKDVH$& $
&HOO
%
&HOO
&
&HOO
$
&HOO
%
&HOO
&
,QGXFWLRQ
0RWRU
NXG Control
7.18 Pre-charge using Dedicated I/O
2. M2 is closed to connect a resistor in series with the secondary to limit in-rush to the cells,
3. When the input primary voltage reaches 90% of rated voltage, M2 is commanded to open.
PrechargeM2Close_I is set equal to false.
5. The M1 acknowledge comes back, PrechargeM1CloseAck_O is set equal to true. Pre-
charge is complete, PrechargeComplete_I is set equal to true. The pre-charge
request must be removed, PrechargeStartEnable_O is set equal to false.
6. With the removal of the pre-charge request, the drive is now ready to run.
Note
Pre-charge faults
next command
The software in these pre-charge types use dedicated I/O for controlling all contactors. Type
5 and 6 pre-charge read inputs and control outputs directly with no intervention from the SOP.
The only exception is the StartCellPrecharge_O flag to start pre-charge once the drive
is ready to pre-charge (DriveReadyToPrecharge_I is true).
Note
Water-cooled 6SR3[ ]52 (WCIII) 750V AP type cells must use type 5 open or type 6 closed
pre-charge.
Other drive types may use type 5 open or type 6 closed pre-charge if hardware is in place.
Note
Air-cooled drives used for floating platforms may use type 6 (closed) pre-charge only. Pre-
charge for these cell types is for limiting transformer in-rush only, and this is achieved through
type 6 (closed) pre-charge.
NXG Control
7.18.1 Preconditions for Pre-charge Types 5 and 6

Aside from safety concerns, and assuming that input power is available, the following
conditions need to be met to initiate pre-charge types 5 and 6. Monitor the entire pre-charge
sequence through an externally connected monitor or through the Debug Tool set to the "Drive
Misc Status Flags 2" using Ctrl-Y on the keyboard or menu selection in the tool.
NXG Control
Prerequisites to initiating pre-charge types 5 or 6

● The DriveReadyToPrecharge flag in the lower right corner must be set true for pre-
charge to begin. Monitor the progress on the ‘MedVolts’, ‘Precharge State’, and
‘PrechargeExitState’ variables on the right side. Every step in the pre-charge sequence is
logged in the event log, including any fault conditions that abort pre-charge. Also the exit
condition from the pre-charge state machine is logged.
● If all conditions are met, the DriveReadyToPrecharge_I flag is true. If any conditions
are not met, the flag is set false, therefore this flag can be used as part of the conditions to
start pre-charge. Pre-charge cannot be initialized or started if this flag is not true. Once pre-
charge commences, the flag goes false and remains false until all conditions are again met.
● When all conditions are met, the pre-charge state machine advances from the initial state
of "PRECHARGE_FAULTED" through "INIT_PRECHARGE2", into the "PRECHARGE_READY"
state. The loss of the DriveReadyToPrecharge_I flag causes the state machine to
cycle back to "INIT_PRECHARGE2" until the drive is ready.
– Type 5 or 6 pre-charge selected
– Drive not running
– MV is low (not OK)
– Output to M1 Permissive is open, DO-2d – P14 – TIMV
– Output to close M1 is open, DO-1c – P9 – CIMV
– M1 is open, M1 Close Ack – DI-2e – P18
– M2 is open, M2 Close Ack – DI-3d – P15
– No medium low fault
– LFR not tripped and latched (due to Input Protection) or dedicated input protection isn't
used
– No pre-charge fault exists
– MV is not disabled, MainInputVoltageDisable_O is false, or maintenance or
service mode is enabled.
– No pre-charge circuit breaker alarm active
– No pre-charge contactor alarm active
– No pre-charge main contactor fault
– No input protection fault
NXG Control
Note
Cells in bypass
If any cells are in bypass prior to losing MV, their respective bypass contactor is opened
since the bypass contactor power supply is energized by one phase of the MV input.
During the subsequent pre-charge, if the cell is detected as faulted, pre-charge will
pause indefinitely until a manual drive reset is activated.
Pre-charge will then proceed and the detected faulted cell will be bypassed after pre-
charge is complete.
Setting StartCellPrecharge_O to true initiates the pre-charge sequence. Pre-charge will

not initiate if DriveReadyToPrecharge_I is not true, or any of the above conditions are not
met.
7.18.2 Type 5 (Open) Pre-charge

Type 5 pre-charge is used for water-cooled 6SR3[ ]52 (WCIII) drives. Type 5 controls the main
contactor, M1 and uses three pre-charge contactors M2, M3, and M4. It is designed so that
M1 will not close until after M4 opens. This designates type 5 pre-charge as a break-before-
make, or open pre-charge type.
Type 5 pre-charge can be implemented only with the NXGII Standard I/O board using the
digital I/O Breakout board due to the dedicated I/O controlled directly through the NXG code.
Note
Pre-charge fault correction
On any pre-charge fault, you must examine the event log for the cause, and correct the
problem before proceeding to another attempt.
Note
Pre-charge is not required for air cooled cells.
The benefit of pre-charge is to limit transformer in-rush.
Due to the nature of type 5 as break-before-make connectivity, it is of little value to air cooled
cells.
NXG Control

The pre-charge circuit consists of a collection of capacitors, resistors, and contactors mounted
in the Fuse/Pre-charge/Control (FPC) cabinet on the input section of the drive.
)3&&DELQHW ;IPU&DELQHW
0
XY NY
0
0
Figure 7-13 Type 5 Pre-charge Circuit Schematic
Located on the left side is the low voltage pre-charge source coming in through the pre-charge
circuit breaker. Located on the right side is the connection to the pre-charge secondary
windings of the input transformer. Voltage during pre-charge is monitored through the input
attenuators on the primary side of the transformer. The M1 contactor connects the MV source
to the primary.
DANGER
During pre-charge, medium voltage is present on the primary side of the input transformer
even though the MV contactor is not closed.
Stay clear of the primary side of the input transformer to avoid death or serious injury.
The pre-charge contactors are controlled directly by the NXG code and require no SOP
interaction with the exception of the start pre-charge command.
NXG Control
0
0 2KPSHUSKDVH
0 0)'SHUSKDVH
SKDVH$& SKDVH6RXUFH
3UHFKDUJH&XUUHQW
3UHFKDUJH:LQGLQJ
&HOO
$
&HOO
%
9,VRODWHG &
6HFRQGDULHV
&HOO
$
&HOO
%
&HOO
&
0
,QSXW3RZHU &HOO
SKDVH$& $
&HOO
%
&HOO
&
&HOO
$
&HOO
%
&HOO
&
,QGXFWLRQ
0RWRU
Fast bypass is disabled during pre-charge, therefore faulted cells are not reset or bypassed
until after pre-charge is complete. Only fault messages will display on the keypad or Drive Tool,
there is no message to reset the drive, but reset is required. SOP flag
PrechargeNeedsReset_I becomes true when pre-charge is in this state. The flag is reset
once the drive receives a fault reset. You can use this as an indicator that a fault exists, but
do not use to directly issue a fault reset.
1. Drive starts with pre-charge state machine set at pre-charge faulted, and all contactors are
commanded open. When all conditions are met, it passes through pre-charge initialization.
2. After initializing all contactors and flags, it advances to pre-charge ready. M1 is checked to
ensure it is open, and the state controller waits for the pre-charge start command.
NXG Control
3. Drive is ready to pre-charge with all conditions met. DriveReadyToPrecharge_I is true.

4. To start pre-charge, set the StartCellPrecharge_O flag true through the SOP. This
starts the pre-charge state machine.
5. M1 is confirmed open, M2 is commanded to close.
6. With M2 closed, the drive input voltage climbs. The drive waits until 90% of rated voltage
is achieved. The pre-charge capacitors provide a resonant circuit with the input inductance
allowing a lower secondary input voltage to charge to 90% of rated drive input voltage
through the secondary.
7. When the input voltage reaches 60% of rated, cell diagnostics begins and medium voltage
is considered ‘OK’.
8. Once the input voltage reaches 90% of rated input voltage (plus tap setting), M3 is
commanded to close to dampen the resonance and maintain the voltage. Failure to connect
the resistors could result in an overvoltage condition on the cells.
9. M3 is closed, M2 is commanded open.
10.M2 is open, M4 is commanded closed. M4 provides holding voltage with no resistance drop.
This lowers the power rating requirement on the pre-charge damping/ holding resistors.
11.M4 is closed, M3 is commanded open. This sequence must complete in 30 seconds or a
timeout will occur resulting in a pre-charge fault.
12.The drive then waits for cell diagnostics to complete. If a cell is faulted, pre-charge waits
for a fault reset. The fault reset only acknowledges the fault and cell diagnostics exits so
that pre-charge can continue. Any faulted cells will be bypassed on exit if bypass is enabled.
Note
Cell Faults
A detected cell fault will display on the keypad. No other indication is given that a reset is
required.
The drive trips if any of the following conditions occur:
● overvoltage fault
● cell under-voltage fault
● input protection fault
● pre-charge is aborted
● MV falls below 60%, as read through the input attenuators.
The drive waits until the cell fault is reset.
Note
Fatal Fault SOP Flag
Any cell fault is a fatal fault and will set the FatalFault_I SOP flag.
Do not use this flag to:
● remove the pre-charge enable flag, StartCellPrecharge_O
● set the MainInputVoltageDisable_O flag
Doing so during pre-charge will abort pre-charge with a pre-charge fault.
NXG Control
13.When cell diagnostics is complete, M4 is commanded to open, resulting in a drop in input

voltage, although the cell capacitors are completely charged.
Note
Pre-charge in Service Mode
If Service mode is selected, pre-charge completes at this point with M4 closed and MV
stays on through the pre-charge source.
14.M4 is open, M1 is enabled to close through two separate digital outputs on the breakout
board: M1 close permissive (DO-14); and Precharge Complete-M1 Close (DO-9).
15.The drive waits for the M1 contactor to close, via the digital input for the M1 Acknowledge
(DI-2E). The M1 contactor closes to prevent discharge of the cell capacitors, and must be
closed before a low cell bus voltage alarm is received.
16.Once the M1 acknowledge is received, pre-charge is complete and the drive is connected
to the MV source and ready to run. The pre-charge state machine is exited and the exit
state is recorded in the event log along with all other recorded pre-charge events in the
sequence.
Note
The drive run is inhibited until pre-charge completes successfully.
On a successful pre-charge, the state machine remains in PC_COMPLETE until reset. It will
cycle back to pre-charge faulted (without fault) to begin again.
NXG Control
Setting Parameters for Type 5 Pre-charge

Use the following parameter settings to operate type 5 pre-charge. Refer to Cell Menu
(2520) in Section Options for Drive Menu (2) of Chapter Parameter Assignment / Addressing
for parameters associated with this function.
● For normal operation:
– Pre-charge Enable (2635) to "Type 5 Open".
– Use type 5 pre-charge for any cell type, but cell voltages (2550) "750V AP" and "750V
AP 4Q" must use either type 5 or type 6 pre-charge. These are the two settings that are
defined for the water-cooled 6SR3[ ]52 (WCIII) drive.
● For maintenance or service operation:
– Pre-charge Service Mode (2637). This parameter completes pre-charge with M4 closed.
M1 never closes. Use for troubleshooting purposes only.
– Pre-charge Service Start (2638). This parameter starts the service mode of pre-charge
from the menu instead of through an SOP flag.
NOTICE
Changing drive parameter settings
Do not change drive parameter settings.
Only Siemens trained personnel are authorized to change drive parameter settings.
See also
7.18.3 Type 6 (Closed) Pre-charge

Type 6 pre-charge is used primarily for water-cooled 6SR3[ ]52 (WCIII) drives but can be used
with any drive. It uses four contactors M1, M2, M3, and M4. It is designed so that M4 will not
open until M1 closes. This designates type 6 pre-charge as a make-before-break, or closed
pre-charge type.
This make-before-break operation makes this pre-charge type ideal for limiting transformer in-
rush current, and so may be used with cells that do not require pre-charging. Type 6 pre-charge
can be implemented only on the ‘new’ I/O board using the digital I/O Breakout board.
NXG Control
Type 6 pre-charge can be implemented only with the NXGII Standard I/O board using the
digital I/O breakout board due to the dedicated I/O controlled directly through the NXG code.
Note
Pre-charge fault correction
On any pre-charge fault, you must examine the event log for the cause, and correct the
problem before proceeding to another attempt.
Note
Pre-charge is not required for air cooled cells.
The benefit of pre-charge is to limit transformer in-rush.
Type 6 is of value for this purpose due to the make-before-break connectivity.
This applies in particular for drives that have high impedance feeds.
NXG Control

The pre-charge circuit consists of a collection of capacitors, resistors, and contactors mounted
in the Fuse/Pre-charge/Control (FPC) cabinet on the input section of the drive.
)3&&DELQHW ;IPU&DELQHW
0
XY NY
0
0
Figure 7-15 Type 6 Pre-charge Circuit Schematic
Located on the left side is the low voltage pre-charge source coming in through the pre-charge
circuit breaker. Located on the right side is the connection to the pre-charge secondary
windings of the input transformer. Voltage during pre-charge is monitored through the input
attenuators on the primary side of the transformer. The M1 contactor connects the MV source
to the primary.
DANGER
During pre-charge, medium voltage is present on the primary side of the input transformer
even though the MV contactor is not closed.
Stay clear of the primary side of the input transformer to avoid death or serious injury.
NXG Control
The pre-charge contactors are controlled directly by the NXG code and require no SOP
interaction with the exception of the start pre-charge command. Type 6 pre-charge can only
be enabled for water-cooled 6SR3[ ]52 (WCIII) drives.
0
0 2KPSHUSKDVH
0 0)'SHUSKDVH
SKDVH$& SKDVH6RXUFH
3UHFKDUJH&XUUHQW
3UHFKDUJH:LQGLQJ
&HOO
$
&HOO
%
9,VRODWHG &
6HFRQGDULHV
&HOO
$
&HOO
%
&HOO
&
0
,QSXW3RZHU &HOO
SKDVH$& $
&HOO
%
&HOO
&
&HOO
$
&HOO
%
&HOO
&
,QGXFWLRQ
0RWRU
MV is maintained throughout pre-charge, therefore faulted cells are reset and bypassed once
the drive is issued a reset, and if fast bypass is enabled. Only fault messages will display on
the keypad or Drive Tool, there is no message to reset the drive, but reset is required. SOP
flag PrechargeNeedsReset_I becomes true when pre-charge is in this state. The flag is
NXG Control
reset once the drive receives a fault reset. You can use this as an indicator that a fault exists,
but do not use to directly issue a fault reset.
1. Drive starts with pre-charge state machine set at pre-charge faulted, and all contactors are
commanded open. When all conditions are met, it passes through pre-charge initialization.
2. After initializing all contactors and flags, it advances to pre-charge ready. M1 is checked to
ensure it is open, and the state controller waits for the pre-charge start command.
3. Drive is ready to pre-charge with all conditions met. DriveReadyToPrecharge_I is true.
4. To start pre-charge, set the StartCellPrecharge_O flag true through the SOP. This
starts the pre-charge state machine.
5. M1 is confirmed open, M2 is commanded to close.
6. With M2 closed, the drive input voltage climbs. The drive waits until 90% of rated voltage
is achieved. The pre-charge capacitors provide a resonant circuit with the input inductance
allowing a lower secondary input voltage to charge to 90% of rated drive input voltage
through the secondary.
7. When the input voltage reaches 60% of rated, cell diagnostics begins and medium voltage
is considered ‘OK’.
8. Once the input voltage reaches 90% of rated input voltage (plus tap setting), M3 is
commanded to close to dampen the resonance and maintain the voltage. Failure to connect
the resistors could result in an overvoltage condition on the cells.
9. M3 is closed, M2 is commanded open.
10.M2 is open, M4 is commanded closed. M4 provides holding voltage with no resistance drop.
This lowers the power rating requirement on the pre-charge damping resistors.
11.M4 is closed, M3 is commanded open. This sequence must complete in 30 seconds or a
timeout will occur resulting in a pre-charge fault.
NXG Control
12.The drive then waits for cell diagnostics to complete. If a cell is faulted, pre-charge waits
for a fault reset. The fault reset only acknowledges the fault and cell diagnostics exits so
that precharge can continue. Any faulted cells will be bypassed on exit if bypass is enabled.
Note
Cell Faults
A detected cell fault will display on the keypad. No other indication is given that a reset is
required.
The drive trips if any of the following conditions occur:
● overvoltage fault
● cell under-voltage fault
● input protection fault
● pre-charge is aborted
● MV falls below 60%, as read through the input attenuators.
The drive waits until the cell fault is reset.
Note
Fatal Fault SOP Flag
Any cell fault is a fatal fault and will set the FatalFault_I SOP flag.
Do not use this flag to:
● remove the pre-charge enable flag, StartCellPrecharge_O
● set the MainInputVoltageDisable_O flag
Doing so during pre-charge will abort pre-charge with a pre-charge fault.
13.When cell diagnostics is complete, the In-Sync signal is checked to determine if M1 can be
commanded to close. There is no drop in input voltage, and the cell capacitors maintain
their charge. The wait for the In-Sync signal is indefinite as long as:
– MV is maintained through the M4 contactor
– a pre-charge fault does not occur
– the pre-charge command is not removed.
Note
Pre-charge in Service Mode
If Service mode is selected, pre-charge completes at this point with M4 closed and MV
stays on through the pre-charge source.
14.After receiving the In-Sync signal, M1 is commanded to close through two separate digital
outputs on the breakout board: M1 close permissive (DO-14), and Precharge Complete-
M1 Close (DO-9).
15.The drive waits 3 seconds for the M1 contactor to close, via the digital input for the M1
Acknowledge (DI-2E). If the M1 acknowledge does not return within 5 seconds, a pre-
charge M1 contactor fault, "PreChrg M1 Contactor Flt", occurs and pre-charge is aborted.
16.Once the M1 acknowledge is received, M4 is commanded to open.
NXG Control
17.With the acknowledge of M4 open, the following checks occur:

– input voltage must be above 80%
– pre-charge contactors (M2, M3, and M4) must all be open
– SOP flag MainInputVoltageDisable_O must be false.
18.Pre-charge is complete, the PrechargeComplete_I flag is set true and the drive is connected
to the MV source and ready to run. The pre-charge state machine is exited and the exit
state is recorded in the event log along with all other recorded pre-charge events in the
sequence.
Note
The drive run is inhibited until pre-charge completes successfully.
On a successful pre-charge, the state machine remains in PC_COMPLETE until reset. It will
cycle back to pre-charge faulted (without fault) to begin again.
Setting Parameters for Type 6 Pre-charge

Use the following parameter settings to operate type 6 pre-charge. Refer to Cell Menu
(2520) in Section Options for Drive Menu (2) of Chapter Parameter Assignment / Addressing
for parameters associated with this function.
● For normal operation:
– Pre-charge Enable (2635) to "Type 6 Closed".
– Use type 6 pre-charge for any cell type, but cell voltages (2550) "750V AP" and "750V
AP 4Q" must use either type 5 or type 6 pre-charge. These are the two settings that are
defined for the water-cooled 6SR3[ ]52 (WCIII) drive.
● For maintenance or service operation:
– Precharge Service Mode (2637). This parameter completes pre-charge with M4 closed.
M1 never closes. Use for troubleshooting purposes only.
– Pre-charge Service Start (2638). This parameter starts the service mode of pre-charge
from the menu instead of through an SOP flag.
NOTICE
Changing drive parameter settings
Do not change drive parameter settings.
Only Siemens trained personnel are authorized to change drive parameter settings.
See also
NXG Control
7.19 Paralleling Multiple Drives
Perfect Harmony drives include the ability to combine multiple drives in parallel to provide a
higher power output than is available from a single drive. There are two possible
implementations of paralleling Perfect Harmony drives with NXG Control. The following
sections provide an overview of each implementation along with the available features with
each mode.
7.19.1 Parallel Drive Control
Paralleling Multiple Drives on a Synchronous Motor

This implementation uses a PLC as a master controller that coordinates and monitors the
operation of two or more drives in parallel. Each drive operates independently of the other
drives. This mode of operation provides the following features:
● Ability to operate multiple drives (maximum of four) with a single three-phase synchronous
motor or a multi-phase synchronous motor.
● Single HMI that collects data from all of the parallel drives.
● Drives synchronize to each other without external inputs, and maintain independent
operation of speed and flux regulators while sharing torque current and field current.
● Fast bypass is possible, and drives can operate with unequal number of cells.
● User can introduce a drive into a system that is already in operation.
9)'
&XUUHQW)HHGEDFN
&RPPDQGVIURP
0DVWHU&RQWUROOHU
3RZHU
&RQWURO
&LUFXLW
'DWDVKDUHGWKURXJK
0DVWHU&RQWUROOHU
9ROWDJH)HHGEDFN
)LHOG
6XSSO\
0DVWHU
&RQWUROOHU 0RWRU
3/&
9)'
&XUUHQW)HHGEDFN
3RZHU
&RQWURO
&LUFXLW
&XVWRPHU
&RQWUROV
9ROWDJH)HHGEDFN
)LHOG
6XSSO\
Figure 7-17 Parallel Drive Control with Synchronous Motor
NXG Control
Paralleling Multiple Drives on an Induction Motor

Operating two drives in parallel on a single induction motor requires balancing the flux provided
by each drive.
The drive requires the use of a PLC to provide average Ids to each drive over a network. This
is used to modify the flux demand through the flux droop scaler.
Since flux is provided through induction from the stator to the rotor which is fed by both drives,
flux feedback to each drive must be precise to control the contribution of each drive. By
sampling the Ids feedback of each drive, an average can be calculated to feedback as a
reference to each as a modifier of the flux demand.
The PLC reads the average, individual drive reactive currents to the machine, and then divides
the current requirement into equal shares, and passes the Ids current demand share to each
drive through a network connection to the drive. It proportions the total current by the number
of drives connected to the motor, by determining the field-producing current share for each
drive.
The drives total magnetizing current must be an equal share from each connected drive. This
then equalizes the torque capability of each drive for the motor total torque so that each drive
is contributing the same amount of torque and magnetizing current. The result is equal sharing
between each drive.
The success of balancing the flux producing reactive currents between drives is more an
exercise of balancing the attenuator impedances than in any control algorithm or setting of
droop parameters.
9)'
&HOO&RQWURO 9)'
&RQWURO 3RZHU
&LUFXLW
9)' &HOO&RQWURO 9)'

3RZHU
&RQWURO
&LUFXLW
0DVWHU
&RQWUROOHU
&HOO&RQWURO 9)'
9)'
&RQWURO 3RZHU 0RWRU
&LUFXLW
6SHHG7RUTXH5HIHUHQFH
&XVWRPHU 9)'
&HOO&RQWURO 9)'
3RZHU
&RQWUROV &RQWURO
&LUFXLW
Figure 7-18 Parallel Drive Control with Induction Motor
NXG Control
Parameter for Flux Droop

The Flux Droop parameter (3195) can be used for scaling, or turning off this feature by setting
to zero, the default value.
Note
Use of Flux Droop results in lower flux on the machine. This can be adjusted by slightly
increasing the "Flux demand" (3150) parameter to greater than 1.0.
Spinning load must be disabled for running parallel drives on a single induction motor.
7.19.2 Master-Slave Drive Control

The master-slave configuration allows two or more motors that are mechanically coupled
together to share load equally. In this implementation, one drive is designated as master, while
one or more drives are designated as slave drives. Speed regulation is performed in the master
drive, and the slave drives(s) control torque based on a remote torque command from the
master. This mode of operation provides the following features:
● Ability to operate one induction motor per drive. Motors can be coupled on a common motor
shaft, through a gear box driving a common load or on a common drive belt.
● Ability to operate multiple drives (maximum of four) with a single three-phase synchronous
motor or a multi-phase synchronous motor.
● The master VFD can be determined from a digital input signal. This signal along with the
drive fault and drive torque control can be used to reconfigure the system such that the
slave can become the master in case the master drive has a fault.
● The system can be implemented using conventional analogue speed and torque signals
as well as discrete I/O. An alternate implementation using serial communications between
the customer control and the drives is also possible.
9)' &XUUHQW)HHGEDFN
0DVWHU
3RZHU
&RQWURO
&LUFXLW
9ROWDJH)HHGEDFN
&XVWRPHU 7RUTXH&RPPDQG
0RWRU
&RQWUROV 'LJLWDO,QWHUORFNV
&XUUHQW)HHGEDFN
3RZHU
&RQWURO
&LUFXLW
9)'
6ODYH 9ROWDJH)HHGEDFN
Figure 7-19 Example of Master-Slave Drive Control
NXG Control
7.20 Torque Mode
7.20 Torque Mode
Torque mode is added for applications needing this specialized feature. Torque reference is
input through analog input 3 or the network. It is a modified, saturated speed loop algorithm
allowing the torque to be controlled through the torque limit, with fall-back into speed mode,
should the torque requirement suddenly drop. This prevents a dangerous runaway condition
caused by applying a fixed torque with no speed control. The speed ramp is bypassed in this
mode for faster response, and the torque ramp is enabled to control application of torque
changes. Speed droop is disabled in torque mode.
If the VFD is used in torque mode, the speed regulation must be done externally to the VFD.
The input to the drive in this type of application is a torque demand. Figure Torque Mode depicts
a generalized view of torque mode.
5DPS5DWH 7RUTXH/LPLWV
7RUTXH
7RUTXH $YDLODEOH7RUTXH
7RUTXH'HPDQG /LPLW
5DPS
/RJLF
6SHHG 7RUTXH
0RWRU6SHHG/LPLW
5HJXODWRU 5HJXODWRU
0RWRU6SHHG
Figure 7-20 Torque Mode
Note
Speed Demand
The speed demand is set to the motor speed limit as shown in Figure Torque Mode.
The Torque Demand can be sent to the VFD in one of three ways:
NXG Control
7.21 High Performance Control
7RUTXH'HPDQG)URP$QDORJB2
$QDORJ,QSXW
7RUTXH'HPDQG)URP1HWZRUNB2
7RUTXH0RGHB2
,QGXVWULDO1HWZRUN
7RUTXH'HPDQG)URP0HQXB2
0HQX6HWWLQJ
Figure 7-21 Torque Demand Options
Depending on the source of the Torque Demand, the appropriate SOP flags and menu settings
must be configured. In all cases the TorqueMode_O flag must be set TRUE to use torque
mode, and the necessary torque command established through the selected source.
Parameters for Torque Mode

Refer to Torque Reference Menu (2210) in Section Options for Drive Menu (2) of Chapter
Parameter Assignment / Addressing for parameters associated with this function:
● SOP/menu control (2211)
● Torque setpoint (2220)
● Holding torque (2230)
● Torque ramp increase (2240)
● Torque ramp decrease (2250)
● Torque command scaler (2242)
See also
When applying Perfect Harmony drives, applications requiring high starting torque or low
speed operation are considered as "high performance" control.
7.21.1 Low Speed Operation

In some applications, when stable, low speed operation, below 1 Hz, under high torque
conditions is required, an encoder may be used to provide speed feedback. Use of a shaft
encoder is recommended where the control’s slip calculation block is disabled so that encoder
NXG Control
speed feedback is directly used as an input to the speed regulator. When an encoder is used
with the drive, set the control loop type to closed loop vector control with an induction motor
(CLVC) or to closed loop vector control with a synchronous motor (CSMC). Enable the drive's
Spinning Load function when this control mode is enabled.
7.21.2 High Starting Torque Mode

Special applications and motors require a high starting torque mode. Examples of motors that
require a high starting torque (HST) mode:
● Permanent Magnet Motors (PMM) have a fixed flux source from the magnets, and must be
moving in order to lock on to the flux phase.
● Synchronous Motors with a DC exciter (SMDC) cannot be magnetized until the field aligns
with the poles in the machine.
When starting a PMM or SMDC from standstill, the flux vector cannot be determined until
motion is established. It is necessary to apply an adequate amount of torque current for a short
period of time to overcome the inertia of the rotor and to produce movement. Once movement
occurs, the PLL can lock onto the flux vector.
Synchronous Motors (SM) and Induction Motors (IM) may require a high starting torque mode:
● SMs have an externally generated flux source that can be pulsed to provide enough
feedback to lock onto the flux angle at standstill. SMs have poor starting torque
characteristics.
● IMs have a flux created through coupling across the air gap and can be controlled directly.
● In V/Hz control mode SMs and IMs require a high starting torque mode: to overcome static
friction (stiction) that is high in either the motor or the load; or when a large inertial load is
connected; or when operating a motor on long cables in which a significant amount of load
impedance is in the cables.
7RSVLGHFDEOH &DEOH 8PELOLFDO &DEOH 09-XPSHU
NP NP NP NP NP
0
$'9ROWDJH 7UDQVIRUPHU 7UDQVIRUPHU (OHFWULFDO0RWRU

6RXUFHPRGHOHG N9WRN9 N9WRNY N90:
DVVLQXV
Figure 7-22 High Starting Torque Mode Example System
HST Secondary Current Level

The HST secondary current level is for implementation after the initial starting state, and before
the control loops are enabled to prevent saturation of transformers used between the output
of the drive and the connected motor due to the high currents and associated voltages.
Saturation can cause distortion and excessive losses. Once the load has begun to move, the
high torque is no longer needed and so then the secondary current level is adequate.
The secondary current level is implemented through parameter Trq Current 2 (2965).
NXG Control
7.22 Long Cable Applications
2SHQORRSFRQWURO
0$*&XUUHQW,GV 1RORDG

FXUUHQW
0LQLPXPVSHHG
0RWRU6SHHG
5DWHGVOLS
0D[LPXP754
FXUUHQW
754&XUUHQW,TV
6HFRQGOHYHOFXUUHQWSDUDPHWHU
3RLQWRIPRWRUVSHHG
VWDELOL]DWLRQ
Figure 7-23 Modified High Starting Torque Mode
Parameters for High Starting Torque Mode

High starting torque mode is selected internally when either PMM or SMDC is selected as the
control mode.
Refer to High Starting Torque Menu (2960) in Section Options for Drive Menu (2) of Chapter
For long cable applications, set the "Minimum Speed Limit" to approximately the same as the
percent value of the total resistance in series with the motor. For example, if a long cable
application has the total series resistance at about 30 % of motor base impedance, set a
minimum speed limit of 30 % or higher.
See also
7.22.1 Cable Inductance Compensation

Long cable applications present a challenge as the cables become a significant contribution
to the overall load impedance.
Compensation for cable inductance affects the output voltage during transient conditions of
current based on the output fundamental frequency.
Previously, compensation had been performed for cable resistance only. Drive base
impedance is calculated as:
NXG Control
Zbase = [Vrated/√3] * [1/Irated]

where:
Zbase = Drive base impedance

Vrated = Drive rated output voltage
Irated = Drive rated output current
The cable impedance must be compensated to ensure that the motor is getting the proper
terminal voltage.
0RWRU7HUPLQDO 0RWRU&HPI9ROWDJH
9ROWDJH
Lf Lc Ls
R
Cemf
'ULYH 0RWRU
&DEOH
Figure 7-24 Motor Terminal vs. Cemf
Parameters for Cable Inductance Compensation

Refer to the Output Connection Menu (2900) in Section Options for Drive Menu (2) of Chapter
● Cable inductance (2941)
See also
7.22.2 Operating Parallel Motors over Long Cables

The drive has the capability to operate parallel induction motors over long cables using the
cable inductance compensation parameter (2941).
For operation with two parallel motors connected to the same drive to work correctly the cable
length and characteristic requirements must be met.
Additional output filtering may be required for extremely long cables to compensate for
transmission line effects of the cable impedances and length. Siemens will calculate the
impedance values and need for filtering.
NXG Control
7.23 Drive with Output Transformers
Stability can be an issue due to cable resonance. This is helped by reducing the current loop
gains and reducing the dead time compensation as needed.
0RWRU7HUPLQDO
2XWSXW)LOWHU 9ROWDJH
Lf Lc Ls
R
Cemf
'ULYH
Cf 0RWRU
&DEOH
Lc Ls
R
Cemf
0RWRU
Figure 7-25 Multiple Motors on Long Cables using Single Drive
Parameters are the same as those required for standard cable impedance and if required
output filtering parameters. Refer to the Output Connection Menu (2900) for these parameters.
See also

A mismatch of drive and motor voltages may require the use of an output transformer to match
the voltages. Transformers are also used on long cable applications to reduce the cable losses
by first using a transformer to increase the output voltage on the drive, and then using a second
transformer to reduce the voltage at the motor. This reduces cable losses which are
proportional to the square of the current (not the voltage).
The following figure shows a typical setup with a step-up transformer to a long cable, connected
to a step-down transformer, which in turn attaches to the motor.
NXG Control
LT1 HV cable
LT2 LL RS
M
LC RC
Drive
6WHSXS 6WHSGRZQ
WUDQVIRUPHU7 WUDQVIRUPHU7
Figure 7-26 Output Transformer and Cable
The drive will compensate for the drive, cable, and transformer impedances when set up
correctly. In this case, the motor inductance is set up using the following parameters:
● Leakage inductance (1070): motor leakage inductance (LL)
● Stator resistance (1080): motor stator resistance (RS)
● Cable resistance (2940): resistance of the cable (len * R/len scaled by the turns ratio of T1)
● Cable inductance (2941): the total inductance of the cable + the inductance of the secondary
transformer T2 (both through the turns ratio of T1) + the inductance of T1
● Filter inductance (2920): this can be used for the transformer inductance of T1 as an
alternative to adding it to the cable impedance.
If an output transformer is used in conjunction with a cable (with or without an additional step-
down transformer), enter the impedances of the cable (and the extra transformer) after applying
the transformer turns ratio of T1 for the voltage loss (based on the current flowing through
them).
If an output transformer is used alone and connected directly to the motor, enter the transformer
inductance as either Filter inductance or Cable inductance, so that the drive can compensate
for voltage losses proportional to the output current. The following figure shows an example
of such a configuration.
LT LL R S
M
Drive
2XWSXW
WUDQVIRUPHU
Figure 7-27 Output Transformer
NXG Control
7.24 Motor Equivalent Circuit Parameters
This section provides a description of the motor parameters used to adjust additional
compensations of the control. Refer to the Motor Menu section of Chapter Parameter
Assignment / Addressing for further operational description.
1. No-load current (1060): This represents the reactive current absorbed by the motor when
operating under no-load conditions. For medium voltage motors this parameter is typically
in the 15.0% to 30.0% range. This parameter is used by the control to improve the transient
performance of the flux regulator during sudden load or speed demand changes. This
parameter has no significant effect on steady state performance of the control.
2. Leakage inductance (1070): This parameter represents the total leakage inductance of the
motor, and is approximately equal to the sum of the stator and rotor leakage inductances.
For medium voltage motors this parameter is typically in the 15.0% to 20.0% range. This
parameter is used by the control to improve the performance of the flux regulator under
transient conditions, such as sudden load or speed demand changes. This parameter has
no significant effect on steady state performance of the control.
3. Stator resistance (1080): This parameter represents the per-phase resistance of the stator
windings. For medium voltage motors this parameter is typically in the 0.02% to 2.0% range.
The larger the horsepower and higher the motor efficiency, the lower the stator resistance
value will be. If the stator resistance is not known then it is preferable to start with the default
value of 0.1%, unless high starting torque is desired, i.e. greater than 80%. It is very
important to set this parameter correctly when high starting torque is desired.
4. Inertia (1090): This parameter represents the inertia of the system and is used by the control
to display the value of inertia that is estimated after auto-tuning stage 2. Changing this
parameter does not affect control operation.
Note
Motor parameter values requirement
An accurate value of the motor parameters described in this section is required only in a
high performance application, i.e. one in which high starting torque, approximately 100%,
is required or when steady state operation below 2 Hz with high load torque is required.
See also
Entering Motor Equivalent Circuit Parameters from Manufacturer’s Data Sheet

Typically when the manufacturer provides motor data, the symbols that are used have the
following meaning. An example of a 6.6 kV, 619.7 A, 900 rpm motor is considered below.
Symbol Description Value used in example

R1 Stator resistance (in ohms) 0.029 Ω
X1 Stator leakage inductance (in ohms) 0.792 Ω
NXG Control
Symbol Description Value used in example

R2 Rotor resistance (in ohms) 0.026 Ω
X2 Rotor leakage inductance (in ohms) 0.726 Ω
l_nl Motor no-load current (in A) 172 A
s Rated slip 0.4 %
To convert these values to the NXG menu settings, first calculate the motor base impedance,
Z in ohms:
Z = Vmotor / (Imotor * √(3)) = 6.149 Ω, for this example.

Then calculate the menu entries as shown below:
Stator resistance (%) = 100 * (R1 / Z) = 0.47 %

Leakage inductance (%) = 100 * (X1 + X2) / Z = 24.3 %
No-load current (%) = 100 * l_nl / Imotor = 27.8 %
● Inertia does not have to be entered. It is used by the NXG Control to inform the user of the
value that was calculated using auto-tuning stage 2. Entering another value for inertia will
have no effect on control performance.
● The manufacturer lists the ‘hot’ value of stator resistance.
– Use 100% of the ‘hot’ resistance value only if an application is "high performance"
– Use 70% of this value in applications where there is no need for high torque or there is
low speed operation.
● When the manufacturer provides motor parameters in per unit (pu), these values have
already been divided by the motor base impedance (Z). Multiply the pu values by 100 to
calculate the menu entries.
NXG Control
Software User Interface 8
Interfaces for Changing and Tuning Controls
Use one of the following methods to change parameters in the drive:
● standard keypad
● multi-language keypad
● PC-based drive tool
● via networks.
This chapter discusses the navigation of the standard keypad and multi-language keypad in
detail, and introduces the more advanced external interface of the PC-based drive tool.
The fourth listed method involves changing parameters by means of networks. It involves
programming on an interconnected platform, e.g. an external PLC. For more information refer
to the NXG Communications Manual.
NXG Control
Software User Interface
8.1 Standard Keypad
8.1 Standard Keypad
Perfect Harmony drives are equipped with a keypad and display interface located on the front
of the drive control cabinet.
2Q5HGZKHQIDXOWHGEOLQNV

2Q5HGZKHQFRQWUROSRZHU 5HGZKHQDODUPLVDFWLYHRU 2Q5HGZKHQGULYHLV
LVVXSSOLHG XQDFNQRZOHGJHG UXQQLQJ
'LVSOD\[ 6WDWXV,QGLFDWRUV

&KDUDFWHUV 5HG/('V
0RGHVRI2SHUDWLRQ
$XWRPDWLF
.H\SDG
0DQXDO6WDUW
0DQXDO6WRS
Figure 8-1 Standard Keypad and Display Interface
Keypad Functions
Use the keypad to:
● navigate through the menu system
● activate control functions
● reset the system after faults have occurred
● edit parameter values
● enter security access codes
● place the system in automatic, manual or stop mode.
Accessing control parameters and functions via the keypad

Use the keypad and display interface to access the control parameters and functions of the
drive.
Parameters are organized into logical groups and are accessible via a menu structure.
NXG Control
8.1 Standard Keypad
1. Navigate through the menu structure to the desired parameters, to view or edit parameters.
2. Use navigation arrow keys or special key sequences as short cuts. A summary of these
key sequences is given later in this chapter.
3. Use the [SHIFT] key in conjunction with the 10 numeric keys and the [ENTER] key to access
nine common system menus, a help display function and a [CANCEL] key.
Assignment of functions to the keypad keys

The keypad contains 20 keys. Each of these keys has at least one function associated with it,
some keys have more functions. The following sections give descriptions and uses of each of
the keys on the keypad, as well as the diagnostic LEDs and the built-in display.
CAUTION
Improper Keypad Operation
Although the drive comes standard with a keypad interface, and the menu system is secured
with multiple, programmable password levels, for security or other reasons, the drive is
capable of running without the keypad.
Switching components during operation may cause personal injury or impair system functions.
Never add or remove the keypad with power applied to the control.
8.1.1 Fault Reset Key and LED Indicator
[FAULT RESET] Key

The [FAULT RESET] key is located in the top left corner of the keypad and has a dual purpose:
● If a drive fault is present the reset will attempt to clear the fault.
● If there is no drive fault but an active alarm is present then the fault reset acknowledges
the alarm.
The [FAULT RESET] key is a programmable key that works in conjunction with the drive SOP.
In its basic function the [FAULT RESET] key is used as a generic fault reset but it can be
changed to incorporate system logic specific to an application.
Fault LED Conditions

The fault LED can be flashing, on continuously, or off.
● A flashing fault LED means that an alarm is either active or unacknowledged.
● A fault LED that is on continuously means that a fault condition exists.
LED conditions are detailed in the following table:
NXG Control
8.1 Standard Keypad
Table 8-1 Fault LED Status: Standard Keypad
Fault LED Condition Display Fault Condition Alarm Condition Alarm Acknowledged
or Fault Reset?
Flashing Toggles between alarm N/A Active No
name(s) and normal display
Flashing* Toggles between alarm N/A Cleared (not No
name and normal display acknowledged)
Flashing none N/A Active (acknowledged) Yes
Flashing Toggles between alarm N/A Multiple active alarms No
name, normal display, next
alarm, normal display, etc.
On continuously Fault name Active N/A No
On continuously Fault name within display** Multiple faults N/A No
* After an alarm condition is cleared, the fault LED will continue to flash until the alarm is
acknowledged. Alarms are self-clearing.
Press the [FAULT RESET] key to acknowledge the alarm.
** Use the down and up arrow keys to cycle through the active fault list.
Clearing and resetting a fault
Note
Fault Indication
If an alarm condition occurs before or during a fault condition, the LED and display will not
indicate the presence of an alarm until the fault condition is cleared and reset. Alarm
conditions are recorded in the alarm/fault log.
A fault signals system malfunction with the output of the drive disabled.
Clear and reset a fault condition immediately to ensure proper system function.
When a fault condition occurs, the fault indicator is red.

Perform the following steps to reset the system:
1. Check the display or the alarm/fault log to determine the cause of the fault.
2. Correct conditions that may have caused the fault.
3. Press the [FAULT RESET] key on the keypad to reset the system.
Clearing and resetting an alarm

When there are no fault conditions but an alarm condition occurs, the fault indicator will flash
red. Perform the following steps to acknowledge the alarm condition:
1. Check the display or the alarm/fault log to determine the cause of the alarm.
2. Correct conditions that may have caused the alarm.
NXG Control
8.1 Standard Keypad
3. Press the [FAULT RESET] key on the keypad to acknowledge the alarm.
Acknowledging an alarm will cause all alarms to no longer be displayed on the keypad
display. However, if any alarm condition still exists, the fault LED will flash red.
4. View the alarm/fault log to verify the status of alarms.
5. If there are faults and alarms, press the [FAULT RESET] key twice to first reset the fault
and then acknowledge the alarms.
Note
Acknowledging faults or alarms in alarm/fault log
When the alarm/fault log has more than 256 unacknowledged faults or alarms, the display
shows the message "Fault/Alarm log" "overflow".
The cause may be an alarm or several that have not been manually reset to "acknowledge"
the alarm.
An alarm sets and resets itself with no external intervention. However, to acknowledge an
alarm, you must manually reset the alarm using the fault reset button or remote fault reset.
8.1.2 Automatic Key

The [AUTOMATIC] key is a programmable key located below the [FAULT RESET] key on the
keypad.
It can be used via the SOP to put the drive into automatic mode. In automatic mode, the
standard speed setting for the drive is obtained from the 4 to 20 mA input and through speed
profile parameters located in the Speed Profile Menu (4000).
Note
Customizing automatic mode
Automatic mode can be customized to suit particular application needs by modifying the
appropriate I/O parameters from the keypad and display interface.
Do not modify without first consulting Siemens customer service.
8.1.3 Manual Stop Key

The [MANUAL STOP] key is a programmable key located on the lower left side of the
keypad.
The [MANUAL STOP] key can be used, via the SOP, to put the drive into stop mode. Stop
mode shuts down the drive in a controlled manner. The drive is shutdown regardless of whether
the current state is manual, remote or automatic.
NXG Control
8.1 Standard Keypad
Note
Modifying the factory supplied program
8.1.4 Manual Start Key

The [MANUAL START] key is a programmable key located below the [AUTOMATIC] key on
the left side of the keypad.
[MANUAL START] can be used, via the SOP, to put the drive into manual control mode.
There are two control modes:
● local control mode
● remote control mode
These modes are differentiated by the sources of the velocity demand.
Note
Configuring sources of velocity demand
Use the SOP to configure the sources of velocity demand and the operation of the drive via
the various customer interfaces. An example depicting two programmed control modes is
illustrated below.
NXG Control
8.1 Standard Keypad
3HUIHFW+DUPRQ\.H\SDG
/RFDOPDQXDOPRGHLVDFWLYDWHGE\
SUHVVLQJWKH0DQXDO6WDUWNH\RQWKH
NH\SDGDQGVHWWLQJWKHYHORFLW\GHPDQG
XVLQJWKHXSDQGGRZQDUURZNH\V
MANUAL 9HORFLW\'HPDQG
START VHWPDQXDOO\
IURPDUURZNH\V
'ULYH2XWSXW
0DQXDO5HPRWH 3HUIHFW
5HPRWH'LJLWDO,QSXW WR0RWRU
+DUPRQ\
9$&/RJLF 'ULYH
([WHUQDO
5HIHUHQFH
5HPRWHPDQXDOPRGHLVDFWLYDWHGE\
SUHVVLQJWKHPRPHQWDU\LQSXWDQGVHWWLQJ
9HORFLW\'HPDQGIURPDQ WKHYHORFLW\GHPDQGXVLQJWKHUHPRWH
H[WHUQDOVSHHGUHIHUHQFH SRWHQWLRPHWHU
Figure 8-2 Example of two programmed control modes
8.1.5 Numeric Keys

The numeric keys are centrally located on the keypad. These 10 keys, labeled 0 to 9, provide
the following functions:
● Entry of security access codes
● Speed Menu function
● Numerical Menu Access mode
● Change the values of parameters
NXG Control
8.1 Standard Keypad
Entering a four digit security access code

Use the numeric keys to enter a four digit security access code. The security code consists of
any combination of digits 0 to 9 and hexadecimal digits A to F.
Note
Entering hexadecimal values
Hexadecimal (hex) is a method of representing numbers using digits 0 to 9, and letters A to
F.
Press the [SHIFT] key followed by numbers [1] to [6] to enter hex digits A to F. The following
table lists the keystrokes required to enter hex values A to F and the decimal equivalents.
The hexadecimal entry feature is available only during security code entry.
Table 8-2 Hexadecimal digit assignments on the keypad
Key Combination Hex Value Decimal Equivalent

A 10
02725
6+,)7

B 11
'5,9(
6+,)7

C 12
67$%
6+,)7

D 13
$872
6+,)7

E 14
0$,1
6+,)7

F 15
/2*6
6+,)7

Accessing menus via the Speed Menu function

Use the numeric keys for the shortcut "Speed Menu" function. Use the Speed Menu function
for direct access to 10 basic menus. Each of the numeric keys has an associated menu name
printed at the top of each key.
NXG Control
8.1 Standard Keypad
Perform the following steps to access menus via the Speed Menu function:
1. Press [SHIFT] followed by the numeric key, e.g.
– Press [SHIFT]+[1] to access the Motor Menu.
– Press [SHIFT]+[2] to access the Drive Menu.
0RWRU
1XPEHUIRUHQWHULQJ
6SHHGPHQXQDPH
SDUDPHWHUYDOXHV
8VHZLWK>6+,)7@NH\IURP
VHFXULW\FRGHV
WKHGHIDXOWPHWHUGLVSOD\
RUPHQXQXPEHUV
Figure 8-3 Numeric keypad key
Accessing menus via Numerical Menu Access mode

Use the numeric keys for Numerical Menu Access mode, a second menu access function for
all remaining menus. Use to access the following:
● menus
● submenus
● parameters
● pick lists
Numerical Menu Access mode requires more keystrokes than the Speed Menu function.
However, this feature provides access to all security-approved items rather than only the 10
basic menus.
Accessing items in this manner requires that you know the four digit ID number associated
with the target item. This number is listed on the display each time the item is displayed.
To use this feature, refer to Activating Numerical Access Mode in Section Arrow Keys of this
chapter.
Changing values of system parameters

Use the numeric keys to change the values of system parameters:
1. Select a parameter for modification. As soon as a parameter is selected, the left most digit
of the parameter value is underlined and is called the active digit.
2. Press a numeric key to change the active digit.
This method automatically advances the underline to the next digit to the right.
3. Continue pressing numeric keys until the desired value is displayed.
4. Press [ENTER] to accept the new value.
NXG Control
8.1 Standard Keypad
Note
Editing parameter values
When editing parameter values, you must use all four digit fields by using a zero where
appropriate.
For example, to change the value of a four digit parameter from 1234 to 975, enter 0975.
Note
Signed parameters
For signed parameters, i.e. parameter values that can be either positive or negative, the first
active digit is the sign of the value.
To change the sign of a value:
● Use the up and down arrow keys. The active "digit" is the left most position and is
underlined. Either a "+" or a "-" is displayed during the editing process.
● Press [ENTER] to accept the new value.
When not being edited, positive values are displayed without the "+" sign. Negative values
always show the "-" sign unless the negative sign is implied in the parameter name itself.
See also
Arrow Keys (Page 244)
8.1.6 Enter/Cancel Key

The [ENTER] key is located below the up and down arrow keys on the right side of the keypad.
Its function is similar to the [ENTER] key on a standard PC keyboard.
The [ENTER] key is used to choose or accept a selection or confirm an operation.
For example: after locating and displaying a parameter within the menu structure, use the
[ENTER] key to edit the parameter’s value.
Common functions of the [ENTER] key include:
● selecting a submenu
● entering edit mode for a selected parameter value
● accepting a new parameter value after editing
● initiating a function within the menu system
Use the [SHIFT] key with the [ENTER] key as a cancel function. The secondary function
[CANCEL] is listed on the upper portion of the [ENTER] key.
Common functions of the [CANCEL] key include:
NXG Control
8.1 Standard Keypad
● aborting the current operation

● returning to the previous menu display.
● rejecting any modifications to a parameter value in edit mode.
8.1.7 Shift Function Keys

The [SHIFT] key is located in the bottom right corner of the keypad.
This key is used to access a second set of functions in conjunction with other keys on the
keypad.
Keys that are used with the [SHIFT] key have two labels, one at the top and one at the bottom
of the key. The standard, un-shifted function of the key is listed on the bottom half of the key
and has a white background. The shifted function of the key is shown at the top of the key and
has a green background that matches the green background of the [SHIFT] key to identify that
they are used together.
When the drive prompts you for a numerical value, e.g. during entry of the security access
code or parameter modification, the [SHIFT] function of numerical keys 1 to 6 changes from
Speed Menu functions to hexadecimal numbers A to F respectively. Refer to Table
Hexadecimal digit assignments on the keypad for more information.
Activating [SHIFT] Key Functions
Note
Using the [SHIFT] key
It is not necessary to simultaneously press the [SHIFT] key and the desired function key.
1. Press the [SHIFT] key.

2. Release the [SHIFT] key. The word SHIFT appears in the lower right corner of the interface
display to indicate that the drive is waiting for the second key to be pressed.
3. Press the desired function key. The word SHIFT is removed from the display.
6+,)7
Figure 8-4 Location of shift mode indicator on the display
The SHIFT function is a toggle. Press [SHIFT] again before pressing any other key to remove
the pending SHIFT function and clear the indicator.
Common [SHIFT] key functions

● Entering speed menus by pressing [SHIFT] plus the appropriate Speed Menu key from the
default meter display.
● Using the [CANCEL] function, by pressing [SHIFT] + [ENTER] in sequence.
NXG Control
8.1 Standard Keypad
● Entering hex values A to F, by pressing [SHIFT] + [1] to [SHIFT] + [6] when editing values
or entering a security code.
● Accessing menus, parameters or pick lists based on ID numbers, by pressing [SHIFT] + [⇒].
● Returning to the top of the current menu or submenu, by pressing [SHIFT] + [⇑].
● Going to the bottom of the menu or submenu, by pressing [SHIFT] + [⇓].
● Resetting the current security level to 0, by pressing
[SHIFT] + [⇐] + [SHIFT] + [⇐] + [SHIFT] + [⇐] from the default meter display.
● Setting a parameter value back to its factory default, by pressing [SHIFT] + [⇐], while in the
parameter edit function.
A summary of [SHIFT] key sequences is listed in Section Summary of Common [SHIFT] key
sequences.
8.1.8 Arrow Keys

There are four arrow keys on the keypad.
The up and down arrow keys [⇑] and [⇓] are located in the upper right corner of the keypad.
The left and right arrow keys [⇐] and [⇒] are located on the lower row of the keypad.
Common arrow key functions

● Navigating through the menu structure
● Scrolling through lists of parameters
● Incrementing or decrementing parameter values in edit mode.
● Manually advancing to the next digit in edit mode.
● Increasing and decreasing the desired velocity demand of the drive in local manual mode.
● Clearing security level by pressing [SHIFT] + [⇐] three times from the default meter display.
● Entering Numerical Menu Access mode with [SHIFT] + [⇒].
Using the Left and Right Arrow Keys

1. Use the left [⇐] and right [⇒] arrow keys to navigate through the menu structure of the
system.
2. Use the right arrow [⇒] to advance to a submenu structure or enter parameter edit mode.
3. Use the left arrow [⇐] to return to the previous menu.
Example: accessing the main menu

● From the default meter display, press the right arrow key [⇒] to access the main menu.
● [SHIFT] + [5] is a shortcut to the main menu.
NXG Control
8.1 Standard Keypad
Using the Up and Down Arrow Keys

Use the up [⇑] and down [⇓] arrow keys to scroll through lists of items.
Example: scrolling through the list of options within the main menu
After using the right arrow key [⇒] to reach the main menu, press the down arrow key [⇓] to
scroll through the list of options within the main menu.
These options may be parameters, pick lists, or submenus.
Refer to the next section for information about the structure of the menu system.
Example: incrementing or decrementing the velocity demand in manual mode

Use the up [⇑] and down [⇓] arrow keys to increment or decrement the desired velocity demand
when the system is in local manual mode.
As the up and down arrow keys are pressed, view the changes in desired velocity demand on
the display.
02'( '(0' )5(4 530 ,727

0$18$/67$57
2))
3ODFHWKHGULYHLQORFDO 8VHWKHXSDQGGRZQDUURZ 7KHYHORFLW\GHPDQGLV

0DQXDOPRGH NH\VWRLQFUHDVHDQG GLVSOD\HGG\QDPLFDOO\RQ
GHFUHDVHWKHYHORFLW\ WKHGLVSOD\
GHPDQG
Figure 8-5 Using the up and down arrow keys to control velocity demand
Note
Default assignment on the front panel display
The velocity demand field (DEMD) on the front panel display is assigned by default.
This display assignment, and the other three variables, can be changed from the menu
system.
Editing Parameter Values

The arrow keys can be used to edit the values of parameters.
Perform the following steps to edit a parameter value:
NXG Control
8.1 Standard Keypad
1. Navigate through the menu structure using the arrow keys and locate the parameter to be
changed.
2. With the parameter displayed, press the [ENTER] key.
This places the selected parameter into edit mode.
Once in edit mode, an underscore is displayed beneath the first, i.e. the most significant
position of the parameter value.
3. The user now has alternative options to change the value of that position:
– You may press the desired numeric key.
– You may use the up [⇑] and down [⇓] arrow keys to scroll and wrap around through the
numbers 0 through 9 for that position.
– Use the up [⇑] and down [⇓] arrow keys to change the sign of signed number values.
– When using the up [⇑] and down [⇓] arrow keys to edit the value of a parameter position,
press the right [⇒] and left [⇐] arrow keys to move to the next or previous position in the
number to be edited. This is required as opposed to using the number keys which
automatically shift the underscore to the next digit in the number.
4. Press the [ENTER] key to accept the new value or press [SHIFT] + [ENTER] to abort the
change.
Canceling the Current Security Mode

Press the left arrow key with the [SHIFT] key to cancel the current security access level and
return to level 0.
You can increase the security access level by entering the appropriate security codes, but
cannot lower the security access level using the standard "Change Security Code" option of
the main menu.
Returning to security level 0

If entering level 7 as an experienced user, or any other security level and you wish to return
to level 0 for security reasons when you are finished, you have the following options:
● Wait 15 minutes with no activity and security will return automatically to level 0.
● Use key sequence [SHIFT] + [⇐] + [SHIFT] + [⇐] + [SHIFT] + [⇐] from the default meter
display only. This method resets the security level to 0 without interrupting the operation of
the drive.
Do not disconnect control power as a method to reset the security level.
When the security level is reset, the display shows a "Security Level Cleared" message.
02'( '(0' )5(4 530 ,727

6HFXULW\/HYHO&OHDUHG
Figure 8-6 Security Level Cleared message on the display
Activating Numerical Menu Access Mode

This mode allows you to go instantly to any security approved menu, parameter or pick list
using the four digit ID number associated with the target item.
NXG Control
8.1 Standard Keypad
Perform the following steps:

1. Press the [SHIFT] key followed by the right arrow key [⇒]. The display prompts you for the
desired ID number.
2. Enter the desired ID number using the numeric keys on the keypad.
If the number is a valid ID number and the current security level permits access to that item,
then the desired item will be displayed.
Note
Accessing higher security level menus
If you request access to a menu number that is assigned a higher security level than the
current security level, the drive will prompt for the appropriate security level code.
Within the menu structure, not in edit mode, the right arrow acts like the [ENTER] key upon
the menu item displayed while the left arrow climbs the menu hierarchy.
8.1.9 Summary of Common Shift Key and Arrow Key Sequences
Menu System Structure

The menu system consists of the main menu and submenus that branch from the main menu
or other submenus. Parameters are contained within these menus.
While navigating inside a parameter list or pick list, select [CANCEL] to exit to the menu.
While inside any menu select [CANCEL] to exit to the default meter display.
Table 8-3 Summary of common [SHIFT] key and arrow key sequences
Key Combination Description

Speed Menu to the Motor Menu. Access from the default meter display.
02725
6+,)7 Enter hexadecimal "A" from value edit and security prompts.

Speed Menu to the Drive Menu. Access from the default meter display.
'5,9(
6+,)7 Enter hexadecimal "B" from value edit and security prompts.

Speed Menu to the Stability Menu. Access from the default meter display.
67$%
6+,)7 Enter hexadecimal "C" from value edit and security prompts.

Speed Menu to the Auto Menu. Access from the default meter display.
$872
6+,)7 Enter hexadecimal "D" from value edit and security prompts.

NXG Control
8.1 Standard Keypad

Speed Menu to the Main Menu. Access from the default meter display.
0$,1
6+,)7 Enter hexadecimal "E" from value edit and security prompts. Right arrow [⇒] also enters at this
point from outside of the menu system.
Speed Menu to the Logs Menu. Access from the default meter display.
/2*6
6+,)7 Enter hexadecimal "F" from value edit and security prompts.

Speed Menu to the Drive Protect Menu. Access from the default meter display.
'59352
6+,)7

Speed Menu to the Meter Menu. Access from the default meter display.
0(7(5
6+,)7

Speed Menu to the Communications Menu. Access from the default meter display.
&200
6+,)7

Speed Menu to a context sensitive help menu. Access from anywhere except the default meter
+(/3
6+,)7 display.

Cancel the current action, abort the current keystroke or exit the menu system.
&$1&(/
6+,)7
(17(5
Use individually to navigate through the menu structure.

RU In edit mode, use to change the cursor position in the edit field of a parameter value.
It automatically jumps over a decimal point or field delimiter.
Use individually to scroll through lists of menu options, lists and parameters.
RU Use to change velocity demand from the default meter display.
In edit mode, increments/decrements digits under cursor and changes sign.
Enter Numerical Menu Access Mode.
6+,)7 You are then prompted to enter the 4 digit number for the associated menu or parameter.
Return to the top item of the currently selected menu, submenu or pick list.
6+,)7
NXG Control
8.1 Standard Keypad

Restore the security level back to 0.
6+,)7 Enter the [SHIFT] + [⇐] key sequence 3 times in succession from the default meter display to
restore the security level back to 0.
6+,)7
6+,)7
Go to the bottom item of the currently selected menu, submenu or pick list.
6+,)7
When editing a value that has been changed from its factory default, this key sequence returns
6+,)7 the value to its factory default.
8.1.10 Diagnostic Indicators

The standard keypad and display interface contains three diagnostic LED indicators that are
located above the display:
● [POWER ON]
● [FAULT]
● [RUN]
Functions of the diagnostic LED indicators
[POWER ON]
The [POWER ON] indicator is illuminated when control power is supplied to the system.
[RUN]
The [RUN] indicator is illuminated when the drive is running.
[FAULT]
The [FAULT] indicator is illuminated solidly when one or more system errors have occurred,
e.g. boot-up test failure or over voltage fault.
The [FAULT] indicator blinks when one or more alarms are active or unacknowledged.
● Press the [FAULT RESET] key to clear any existing fault conditions and restore the system
to normal operation.
Refer to Figure Standard Keypad and Display Interface for the location of the diagnostic
indicators.
NXG Control
8.1 Standard Keypad
See also
Standard Keypad (Page 234)
8.1.11 Display
After power up or reset, the Siemens identification and software version number is displayed
for a few seconds. Afterwards, the meter display is shown by default. The default meter display
is the starting point of the menu system. This display remains active until keys are pressed.
Re-displaying the Version Number

Use the display version number (8090) function in Meter Menu (8) to re-display the version
number.
The version number is displayed on the identification/version screen.
6LHPHQV+DUPRQ\
02'( '(0' )5(4 530 ,727
9HUVLRQ'DWH +$1'
Figure 8-7 Identification/version screen and meter display
Description of the Meter Display

The meter display screen contains five fields that are monitored and updated dynamically.
● MODE: operational mode
● DEMD: velocity demand
● RPM: calculated revolutions per minute
● VLTS: motor voltage
● ITOT: total output current
The value or state of each field is shown dynamically on the second line of the display.
)L[HGGLVSOD\ILHOG
/LQHILHOGQDPH MODE DEMD RPM VLTS ITOT

/LQHILHOGQDPH %RWWRPURZRIGLVSOD\
KYPD 80 1440 3328 50 VKRZVG\QDPLFYDOXHV
Figure 8-8 Dynamic Programmable Meter Display
[MODE] field
The [MODE] field is fixed.
NXG Control
8.1 Standard Keypad
The last four fields on the display contain parameter values that can be defined by the user.
All four variable displays can be selected from a pick list using the display parameters (8000).
The [MODE] field displays the current operational mode of the system.
This field can have any one of the displays summarized in Table Line 1 of mode display
depending on the current operational mode or the current state of the drive.
Rollback [RLBK] Mode

The following figure depicts the display in rollback mode.
)L[HGGLVSOD\ILHOG 8VHUGHILQHGGLVSOD\ILHOGV
/LQHILHOGQDPH RLBK DEMD RPM VLTS ITOT

/LQHILHOGQDPH KYPD 80 1440 3328 50 %RWWRPURZRIGLVSOD\
VKRZVG\QDPLFYDOXHV
Figure 8-9 Dynamic Programmable Meter Display in Rollback Mode
The KYPD field displays the current operational mode of the system.
Regeneration [RGEN] Mode

The following figure depicts the display in regeneration mode.
)L[HGGLVSOD\ILHOG
/LQHILHOGQDPH RGEN DEMD RPM VLTS ITOT

/LQHILHOGQDPH KYPD 80 1440 3328 50 %RWWRPURZRIGLVSOD\
VKRZVG\QDPLFYDOXHV
Figure 8-10 Dynamic Programmable Meter Display in Regeneration Mode
Modifying Parameter Values

The following sections illustrate the steps to take if attempting to locate and change the
following parameters:
● Ratio Control
● Motor Frequency
Example for changing ratio control parameters:

The metering display shows the commanded speed reference in percent.
NXG Control
8.1 Standard Keypad
&$1&(/ 02'( '(0')5(4 530 ,727

6+,)7
(17(5 +$1'
Figure 8-11 Status display in metering mode
1. Press the following key combination: [SHIFT] + [2].
'5,9( 'ULYH
6+,)7
$UURZNH\VVHOHFW
Figure 8-12 Status display after [SHIFT] + [2] key sequence
2. From this point, you can select from the nine standard menus.
Use the up [⇑] and down [⇓] arrow keys, to select the desired menu.
3. Press the down [⇓] arrow key twice. The following figure shows the display prior to the
selection of the Speed Setup Menu (2060).
6SHHGVHWXS
VXEPHQX
Figure 8-13 Status display after [⇓] [⇓] key sequence
4. Press the [ENTER] or right [⇒] arrow key to enter the Speed Setup Menu (2060).
6SHHGVHWXS
$UURZNH\VVHOHFW
Figure 8-14 Status display after [⇒] key sequence
5. Press the down [⇓] arrow key once to access the ratio control parameter (2070).
5DWLRFRQWURO

Figure 8-15 Status display after [⇓] key sequence
6. Press [ENTER] to confirm and enter edit mode for the ratio control parameter. "(edit)"
appears in the display when a parameter is in edit mode.
&$1&(/ 5DWLRFRQWURO
(17(5 HGLW s
Figure 8-16 Status display after [ENTER] key to change a parameter
NXG Control
8.1 Standard Keypad
7. Use the left [⇐] and right [⇒] arrow keys to position the cursor under the desired digit or sign
to be changed.
Set the digit by using the number keys, or increment or decrement the digit using the up
[⇑] and down [⇓] arrow keys.
Use the up [⇑] and down [⇓] arrow keys to change the sign. The parameter is written into
memory once you press [ENTER] or the right [⇒] arrow key.
8. The following figure depicts the display when a number is entered and it is within the range
of the system.
5DWLRFRQWURO

Figure 8-17 Status display upon entering a value in the range of the system
Note
Use of asterisks (*)
An asterisk (*) is used to denote when a parameter is changed from its current default
value.
This allows you to quickly see which parameters have been changed.
To return a parameter to its factory value, press [SHIFT] + [⇐] while in edit mode.
Example for changing motor frequency parameters:

1. Press [SHIFT] [⇒] to get to the parameter ID display.
Enter parameter ID for motor frequency (1020).
6SHHG3DUDPHWHU
6+,)7
(QWHU3DUDP,'
Figure 8-18 Status display after pressing [SHIFT] [⇒] and entering ID 1020
2. Press the [ENTER] key once to show the motor frequency display and then press [ENTER]
again to edit its value.
&$1&(/ &$1&(/ 0RWRU)UHTXHQF\
(17(5 (17(5 HGLW
Figure 8-19 Status display after pressing [ENTER] twice
The range of the variable is 15 to 330.

If, for example, you attempt to enter 010 for the motor frequency an error message will be
displayed for approximately four seconds.
Then the value shown before the attempted edit is displayed again.
NXG Control
8.1 Standard Keypad
0RWRU)UHTXHQF\
2872)5$1*(
Figure 8-20 Status display upon entering a value beyond the range of the system
Summary of Operation Mode Displays

The following tables list the possible operational mode displays of line 1 and 2 of the display
in order of precedence.
Table 8-4 Line 1 of mode display
Order Code Meaning Description

1 FRST Fault reset Displayed after the [FAULT RESET] button is pressed.
Note: This may not be visible because of the speed of response to a fault
reset.
2 TLIM Menu setting rollback Drive is being limited by a menu setting.
3 SPHS Single phasing rollback A single phasing condition of the input line is limiting drive torque.
4 UVLT Undervoltage rollback A undervoltage condition of the input line is limiting the drive torque.
5 T OL Thermal overload rollback The drive has limited the amount of torque produced to prevent thermal
overload of the input transformer.
6 F WK Field weakening rollback This condition exists when the motor flux is low and the application
requires high torque. This prevents "motor pull-out", an unstable
operating condition of the motor, by decreasing the motor torque until
flux is re-established in the motor
7 C OL Cell overload rollback A cell current overload model has calculated a thermal overload condition
of the drive cells and the drive has limited the amount of torque allowable.
8 NET1 Network 1 limit Torque limited by network 1 setting.
10 ALIM Analog torque Limit Torque limited by analog input.
11 EALM External analog Limit Drive is in torque limit due to external analog limit when in torque mode.
12 ENLM External network Limit Drive is in torque limit due to external network limit when in torque mode.
13 EMLM External menu Limit Drive is in torque limit due to external menu limit when in torque mode.
14 CIMB Cell imbalance Limit AFE cells in regen limit when the sum of the three phase voltage gains
exceed 3 pu. Each phase voltage gain is equal to the number of installed
cells per phase, divided by the active cells in that phase.
15 RLBK Roll back Appears during acceleration if drive has reached its torque limit setting.
16 RGEN Regeneration During normal deceleration, this message will be displayed when the
drive is operating in regen torque limit.
17 BRKG Dual frequency braking Appears while drive is decelerating with dual frequency braking enabled.
18 OVLT Regen Limit for 6-step Indicates that the six-step regeneration torque limit is in effect. It is set
when the cell voltage gets too high, and serves to reduce the regen
torque limit to limit the energy flow from the output (motor) to the cells to
prevent overvoltaging the cells.
19 BYPS Cell bypassed Indicates that one or more cells are in bypass.
20 PRCH Pre-charge One of the pre-charge modes is selected and the drive is pre-charging,
or ready to pre-charge.
NXG Control
8.1 Standard Keypad

21 OLTM Open loop test mode Appears if drive control algorithm is set to open loop test mode.
22 MODE Normal mode display This is the typical display message during normal operation.
23 CURP Current profile mode limit Appears if the current limit is due to the current profile limit curve.

1 NOMV No medium voltage No input line voltage detected.
2 INH CR3 inhibit The CR3 or "drive inhibit" input is asserted.
3 OFF Idle state The drive is ready to run but is in an idle state.
4 MAGN Magnetizing motor state The drive is magnetizing the motor or passing through the magnetizing
drive state.
5 SPIN Spinning load state The drive is trying to detect the speed of the motor in order to synchronize
the drive frequency.
6 UXFR Up transfer state The drive is in the "Up Transfer State" preparing to transfer the motor to
the input line.
7 DXFR Down transfer state The drive is in the "Down Transfer State" preparing to transfer the motor
from the input line to the drive.
8 KYPD Keypad speed demand The drive speed demand source is the keypad.
9 TEST Speed/Torque test The drive is in a speed or torque test mode.
10 LOS Loss of Signal The drive 4 to 20 mA analog input signal has dropped below a predefined
setting.
11 NET1 Network 1 Indicates drive is being controlled from Network 1.
13 AUTO Automatic mode The SOP flag AutoDisplayMode_O is set true usually to indicate drive
is receiving its speed demand from a source other than the keypad or
network. Typically used with an analog input speed source. This mode
is entirely determined by setting the SOP flag. It does not affect NXG
operation.
14 HAND Hand mode Appears if the drive is running under normal conditions.
15 BRAK Dynamic Braking Indicates that dynamic braking is enabled.
16 DECL Decelerating (no braking) The drive is decelerating normally.
17 COAS Coasting to stop The drive is not controlling the motor and it is coasting to a stop due only
to friction.
18 TUNE Auto Tuning The drive is in a "Auto Tuning" mode used to determine motor
characteristics.
19 FALT Drive fault active This mode is selected if any drive fault exists, but is not usually displayed
as the fault message is displayed instead. This is shown if the "Fault
display override" (8200) feature is enabled.
NXG Control
8.2 Multi-Language Keypad
Perfect Harmony drives are equipped with a keypad and display interface located on the front
of the drive control cabinet.
2QUHGZKHQFRQWURO 2QUHGZKHQIDXOWHG 2QUHGZKHQGULYH

SRZHULVVXSSOLHG EOLQNVUHGZKHQDODUPLVDFWLYH LVUXQQLQJ
RUXQDFNQRZOHGJHG
'LVSOD\ 6WDWXVLQGLFDWRUV
UHG/('V
.H\SDG
0RGHVRIRSHUDWLRQ
$XWRPDWLF
0DQXDOVWDUW
0DQXDOVWRS
Figure 8-21 Multi-Language Keypad and Display Interface
The multi-language keypad is intended as a direct replacement for the standard keypad. The
electrical connection and mechanical fit/mounting are the same between the multi-language
keypad and the standard keypad.
Note
Potential reduction in keypad capabilities
Eagle Control software before version 5.0 is compatible with the multi-language keypad, but
has reduced capabilities.
For the NXGII Control, Eagle Control software at version 5.0 or later is required to fully utilize
the language display capabilities of the multi-language keypad.
NXG Control
Keypad Functions
Use the keypad to:
● navigate through the menu system
● activate control functions
● reset the system after faults have occurred
● edit parameter values
● enter security access codes
● place the system in automatic, manual or stop mode.
Accessing control parameters and functions via the keypad

Use the keypad and display interface to access the control parameters and functions of the
drive.
Parameters are organized into logical groups and are accessible via a menu structure.
1. Navigate through the menu structure to the desired parameters, to view or edit parameters.
2. Use navigation arrow keys or special key sequences as short cuts. A summary of these
key sequences is given later in this chapter.
3. Use the [SHIFT] key in conjunction with the 10 numeric keys and the [ENTER] key to access
nine common system menus, a help display function and a [CANCEL] key.
Assignment of functions to the keypad keys

The keypad contains 20 keys. Each of these keys has at least one function associated with it,
some keys have more functions. The following sections give descriptions and uses of each of
the keys on the keypad, as well as the diagnostic LEDs and the built-in display.
CAUTION
Improper Keypad Operation
Although the drive comes standard with a keypad interface, and the menu system is secured
with multiple, programmable password levels, for security or other reasons, the drive is
capable of running without the keypad.
Switching components during operation may cause personal injury or impair system functions.
Never add or remove the keypad with power applied to the control.
NXG Control
8.2.1 Fault Reset Key and LED Indicator
[FAULT RESET] Key

The [FAULT RESET] key is located in the top left corner of the keypad and has a dual purpose:
● If a drive fault is present the reset will attempt to clear the fault.
● If there is no drive fault but an active alarm is present then the fault reset acknowledges
the alarm.
The [FAULT RESET] key is a programmable key that works in conjunction with the drive SOP.
In its basic function the [FAULT RESET] key is used as a generic fault reset but it can be
changed to incorporate system logic specific to an application.
Fault LED Conditions

The fault LED can be flashing, on continuously, or off.
● A flashing fault LED means that an alarm is either active or unacknowledged.
● A fault LED that is on continuously means that a fault condition exists.
LED conditions are detailed in the following table:
Table 8-6 Fault LED Status: Multi-language Keypad
Fault LED Condition1 Display Fault Alarm Condition Alarm

Condition Acknowledged or
Fault Reset?
Flashing Status display will be reduced in height and N/A Active (not No
alarm name will be shown in yellow box at acknowledged)
bottom of display.
Flashing* Status display will be reduced in height and N/A Cleared (not No
alarm name will be shown in yellow box at acknowledged)
bottom of display.
Flashing none N/A Active Yes
(acknowledged)
Flashing Status display will be reduced in height and N/A Multiple No
(see figure below) alarm names will be shown in rotation in unacknowledged
yellow box at bottom of display. alarms
On continuously*** Fault name Active N/A No
Note: Background is red for fault display.
On continuously*** Fault name within display** Multiple N/A No
Note: Background is red for fault display. faults
1
Up to three faults can be displayed simultaneously on the display.
* After an alarm condition is cleared, the fault LED will continue to flash until the alarm is
acknowledged. Alarms are self-clearing.
Press the [FAULT RESET] key to acknowledge the alarm.
NXG Control
** Use the down and up arrow keys to cycle through the active fault list.
*** Assumes "Fault display override" (ID 8200) is "Off".
Figure 8-22 Multiple Alarms Active
Clearing and resetting a fault
Note
Fault Indication
If an alarm condition occurs before or during a fault condition, the LED and display will not
indicate the presence of an alarm until the fault condition is cleared and reset. Alarm
conditions are recorded in the alarm/fault log.
A fault signals system malfunction with the output of the drive disabled.
Clear and reset a fault condition immediately to ensure proper system function.
When a fault condition occurs, the fault indicator is red.

Perform the following steps to reset the system:
1. Check the display or the alarm/fault log to determine the cause of the fault.
2. Correct conditions that may have caused the fault.
3. Press the [FAULT RESET] key on the keypad to reset the system.
NXG Control
Clearing and resetting an alarm

When there are no fault conditions but an alarm condition occurs, the fault indicator will flash
red. Perform the following steps to acknowledge the alarm condition:
1. Check the display or the alarm/fault log to determine the cause of the alarm.
2. Correct conditions that may have caused the alarm.
3. Press the [FAULT RESET] key on the keypad to acknowledge the alarm.
Acknowledging an alarm will cause all alarms to no longer be displayed on the keypad
display. However, if any alarm condition still exists, the fault LED will flash red.
4. View the alarm/fault log to verify the status of alarms.
5. If there are faults and alarms, press the [FAULT RESET] key twice to first reset the fault
and then acknowledge the alarms.
Note
Acknowledging faults or alarms in alarm/fault log
When the alarm/fault log has more than 256 unacknowledged faults or alarms, the display
shows the message "Fault/Alarm log" "overflow".
The cause may be an alarm or several that have not been manually reset to "acknowledge"
the alarm.
An alarm sets and resets itself with no external intervention. However, to acknowledge an
alarm, you must manually reset the alarm using the fault reset button or remote fault reset.
8.2.2 Automatic Key

The [AUTOMATIC] key is a programmable key located below the [FAULT RESET] key on the
keypad.
It can be used via the SOP to put the drive into automatic mode. In automatic mode, the
standard speed setting for the drive is obtained from the 4 to 20 mA input and through speed
profile parameters located in the Speed Profile Menu (4000).
Note
Customizing automatic mode
Automatic mode can be customized to suit particular application needs by modifying the
appropriate I/O parameters from the keypad and display interface.
8.2.3 Manual Stop Key

The [MANUAL STOP] key is a programmable key located on the lower left side of the
keypad.
NXG Control
The [MANUAL STOP] key can be used, via the SOP, to put the drive into stop mode. Stop
mode shuts down the drive in a controlled manner. The drive is shutdown regardless of whether
the current state is manual, remote or automatic.
Note
Modifying the factory supplied program
8.2.4 Manual Start Key

The [MANUAL START] key is a programmable key located below the [AUTOMATIC] key on
the left side of the keypad.
[MANUAL START] can be used, via the SOP, to put the drive into manual control mode.
There are two control modes:
● local control mode
● remote control mode
These modes are differentiated by the sources of the velocity demand.
Note
Configuring sources of velocity demand
Use the SOP to configure the sources of velocity demand and the operation of the drive via
the various customer interfaces. An example depicting two programmed control modes is
illustrated below.
NXG Control
3HUIHFW+DUPRQ\.H\SDG
/RFDOPDQXDOPRGHLVDFWLYDWHGE\
SUHVVLQJWKH0DQXDO6WDUWNH\RQWKH
NH\SDGDQGVHWWLQJWKHYHORFLW\GHPDQG
XVLQJWKHXSDQGGRZQDUURZNH\V
MANUAL 9HORFLW\'HPDQG
START VHWPDQXDOO\
IURPDUURZNH\V
'ULYH2XWSXW
0DQXDO5HPRWH 3HUIHFW
5HPRWH'LJLWDO,QSXW WR0RWRU
+DUPRQ\
9$&/RJLF 'ULYH
([WHUQDO
5HIHUHQFH
5HPRWHPDQXDOPRGHLVDFWLYDWHGE\
SUHVVLQJWKHPRPHQWDU\LQSXWDQGVHWWLQJ
9HORFLW\'HPDQGIURPDQ WKHYHORFLW\GHPDQGXVLQJWKHUHPRWH
H[WHUQDOVSHHGUHIHUHQFH SRWHQWLRPHWHU
Figure 8-23 Example of two programmed control modes
8.2.5 Numeric Keys

The numeric keys are centrally located on the keypad. These 10 keys, labeled 0 to 9, provide
the following functions:
● Entry of security access codes
● Speed Menu function
● Numerical Menu Access mode
● Change the values of parameters
NXG Control
Entering a four digit security access code

Use the numeric keys to enter a four digit security access code. The security code consists of
any combination of digits 0 to 9 and hexadecimal digits A to F.
Note
Entering hexadecimal values
Hexadecimal (hex) is a method of representing numbers using digits 0 to 9, and letters A to
F.
Press the [SHIFT] key followed by numbers [1] to [6] to enter hex digits A to F. The following
table lists the keystrokes required to enter hex values A to F and the decimal equivalents.
The hexadecimal entry feature is available only during security code entry.
Table 8-7 Hexadecimal digit assignments on the keypad
Key Combination Hex Value Decimal Equivalent

A 10
02725
6+,)7

B 11
'5,9(
6+,)7

C 12
67$%
6+,)7

D 13
$872
6+,)7

E 14
0$,1
6+,)7

F 15
/2*6
6+,)7

Accessing menus via the Speed Menu function

Use the numeric keys for the shortcut "Speed Menu" function. Use the Speed Menu function
for direct access to 10 basic menus. Each of the numeric keys has an associated menu name
printed at the top of each key.
NXG Control
Perform the following steps to access menus via the Speed Menu function:
1. Press [SHIFT] followed by the numeric key, e.g.
– Press [SHIFT]+[1] to access the Motor Menu.
– Press [SHIFT]+[2] to access the Drive Menu.
0RWRU
1XPEHUIRUHQWHULQJ
6SHHGPHQXQDPH
SDUDPHWHUYDOXHV
8VHZLWK>6+,)7@NH\IURP
VHFXULW\FRGHV
WKHGHIDXOWPHWHUGLVSOD\
RUPHQXQXPEHUV
Figure 8-24 Numeric keypad key
Accessing menus via Numerical Menu Access mode

Use the numeric keys for Numerical Menu Access mode, a second menu access function for
all remaining menus. Use to access the following:
● menus
● submenus
● parameters
● pick lists
Numerical Menu Access mode requires more keystrokes than the Speed Menu function.
However, this feature provides access to all security-approved items rather than only the 10
basic menus.
Accessing items in this manner requires that you know the four digit ID number associated
with the target item. This number is listed on the display each time the item is displayed.
To use this feature, refer to Activating Numerical Access Mode in Section Arrow Keys of this
chapter.
Changing values of system parameters

Use the numeric keys to change the values of system parameters:
1. Select a parameter for modification. As soon as a parameter is selected, the left most digit
of the parameter value is underlined and is called the active digit.
2. Press a numeric key to change the active digit.
This method automatically advances the underline to the next digit to the right.
3. Continue pressing numeric keys until the desired value is displayed.
4. Press [ENTER] to accept the new value.
NXG Control
Note
Editing parameter values
When editing parameter values, you must use all four digit fields by using a zero where
appropriate.
For example, to change the value of a four digit parameter from 1234 to 975, enter 0975.
Note
Signed parameters
For signed parameters, i.e. parameter values that can be either positive or negative, the first
active digit is the sign of the value.
To change the sign of a value:
● Use the up and down arrow keys. The active "digit" is the left most position and is
underlined. Either a "+" or a "-" is displayed during the editing process.
● Press [ENTER] to accept the new value.
When not being edited, positive values are displayed without the "+" sign. Negative values
always show the "-" sign unless the negative sign is implied in the parameter name itself.
See also
Arrow Keys (Page 267)
8.2.6 Enter/Cancel Key

The [ENTER] key is located below the up and down arrow keys on the right side of the keypad.
Its function is similar to the [ENTER] key on a standard PC keyboard.
The [ENTER] key is used to choose or accept a selection or confirm an operation.
For example: after locating and displaying a parameter within the menu structure, use the
[ENTER] key to edit the parameter’s value.
Common functions of the [ENTER] key include:
● selecting a submenu
● entering edit mode for a selected parameter value
● accepting a new parameter value after editing
● initiating a function within the menu system
Use the [SHIFT] key with the [ENTER] key as a cancel function. The secondary function
[CANCEL] is listed on the upper portion of the [ENTER] key.
Common functions of the [CANCEL] key include:
NXG Control
● aborting the current operation

● returning to the previous menu display.
● rejecting any modifications to a parameter value in edit mode.
8.2.7 Shift Function Keys

The [SHIFT] key is located in the bottom right corner of the keypad.
This key is used to access a second set of functions in conjunction with other keys on the
keypad.
Keys that are used with the [SHIFT] key have two labels, one at the top and one in the center
of the key. The standard, un-shifted function of the key is listed in the center of the key in black
lettering. The shifted function of the key is shown at the top of the key in white lettering that
matches the white lettering of the [SHIFT] key, to identify that they are used together.
When the drive prompts you for a numerical value, e.g. during entry of the security access
code or parameter modification, the [SHIFT] function of numerical keys 1 to 6 changes from
Speed Menu functions to hexadecimal numbers A to F respectively. Refer to Table
Hexadecimal digit assignments on the keypad for more information.
Activating [SHIFT] Key Functions
Note
Using the [SHIFT] key
It is not necessary to simultaneously press the [SHIFT] key and the desired function key.
1. Press the [SHIFT] key.

2. Release the [SHIFT] key. An up arrow [⇑] appears in the lower right corner of the interface
display to indicate that the drive is waiting for the second key to be pressed.
3. Press the desired function key. The up arrow [⇑] is removed from the display.
Figure 8-25 Location of shift mode indicator on the display
The SHIFT function is a toggle. Press [SHIFT] again before pressing any other key to remove
the pending SHIFT function and clear the arrow indicator.
NXG Control
Common [SHIFT] key functions

● Entering speed menus by pressing [SHIFT] plus the appropriate Speed Menu key from the
default meter display.
● Using the [CANCEL] function, by pressing [SHIFT] + [ENTER] in sequence.
● Entering hex values A to F, by pressing [SHIFT] + [1] to [SHIFT] + [6] when editing values
or entering security code.
● Accessing menus, parameters or pick lists based on ID numbers, by pressing [SHIFT] + [⇒].
● Returning to the top of the current menu or submenu, by pressing [SHIFT] + [⇑].
● Going to the bottom of the menu or submenu, by pressing [SHIFT] + [⇓].
● Resetting the current security level to 0, by pressing
[SHIFT] + [⇐] + [SHIFT] + [⇐] + [SHIFT] + [⇐] from the default meter display.
● Setting a parameter value back to its factory default, by pressing [SHIFT] + [⇐], while in the
parameter edit function.
A summary of [SHIFT] key sequences is listed in Section Summary of Common [SHIFT] key
sequences.
8.2.8 Arrow Keys

There are four arrow keys on the keypad.
The up and down arrow keys [⇑] and [⇓] are located in the upper right corner of the keypad.
The left and right arrow keys [⇐] and [⇒] are located on the lower row of the keypad.
Common arrow key functions

● Navigating through the menu structure
● Scrolling through lists of parameters
● Incrementing or decrementing parameter values in edit mode.
● Manually advancing to the next digit in edit mode.
● Increasing and decreasing the desired velocity demand of the drive in local manual mode.
● Clearing security level by pressing [SHIFT] + [⇐] three times from the default meter display.
● Entering Numerical Menu Access mode with [SHIFT] + [⇒].
Using the Left and Right Arrow Keys

1. Use the left [⇐] and right [⇒] arrow keys to navigate through the menu structure of the
system.
2. Use the right arrow [⇒] to advance to a submenu structure or enter parameter edit mode.
3. Use the left arrow [⇐] to return to the previous menu.
NXG Control
Example: accessing the main menu

● From the default meter display, press the right arrow key [⇒] to access the main menu.
● [SHIFT] + [5] is a shortcut to the main menu.
Using the Up and Down Arrow Keys

Use the up [⇑] and down [⇓] arrow keys to scroll through lists of items.
Example: scrolling through the list of options within the main menu
After using the right arrow key [⇒] to reach the main menu, press the down arrow key [⇓] to
scroll through the list of options within the main menu.
These options may be parameters, pick lists, or submenus.
Refer to the next section for information about the structure of the menu system.
Example: incrementing or decrementing the velocity demand in manual mode

Use the up [⇑] and down [⇓] arrow keys to increment or decrement the desired velocity demand
when the system is in local manual mode.
As the up and down arrow keys are pressed, view the changes in desired velocity demand on
the display.
8VHWKHXSDQGGRZQDUURZ 7KHYHORFLW\GHPDQGLV
NH\VWRLQFUHDVHDQG GLVSOD\HGRQWKHIURQW
GHFUHDVHWKHYHORFLW\ /&'SDQHORIWKH
3ODFHWKHGULYHLQ GHPDQG 3HUIHFW+DUPRQ\
ORFDO0DQXDOPRGH
02'( +$1'
'(0'
0$18$/
530
67$57
9/76
,727
Figure 8-26 Using the up and down arrow keys to control velocity demand
Note
Default assignment on the front panel display
The velocity demand field (DEMD) on the front panel display is assigned by default.
This display assignment, and the other three variables, can be changed from the menu
system.
Editing Parameter Values

The arrow keys can be used to edit the values of parameters.
NXG Control
Perform the following steps to edit a parameter value:

1. Navigate through the menu structure using the arrow keys and locate the parameter to be
changed.
2. With the parameter displayed, press the [ENTER] key.
This places the selected parameter into edit mode.
Once in edit mode, an underscore is displayed beneath the first, i.e. the most significant
position of the parameter value.
3. The user now has alternative options to change the value of that position:
– You may press the desired numeric key.
– You may use the up [⇑] and down [⇓] arrow keys to scroll and wrap around through the
numbers 0 through 9 for that position.
– Use the up [⇑] and down [⇓] arrow keys to change the sign of signed number values.
– When using the up [⇑] and down [⇓] arrow keys to edit the value of a parameter position,
press the right [⇒] and left [⇐] arrow keys to move to the next or previous position in the
number to be edited. This is required as opposed to using the number keys which
automatically shift the underscore to the next digit in the number.
4. Press the [ENTER] key to accept the new value or press [SHIFT] + [ENTER] to abort the
change.
Canceling the Current Security Mode

Press the left arrow key with the [SHIFT] key to cancel the current security access level and
return to level 0.
You can increase the security access level by entering the appropriate security codes, but
cannot lower the security access level using the standard "Change Security Code" option of
the main menu.
Returning to security level 0

If entering level 7 as an experienced user, or any other security level and you wish to return
to level 0 for security reasons when you are finished, you have the following options:
● Wait 15 minutes with no activity and security will return automatically to level 0.
● Use key sequence [SHIFT] + [⇐] + [SHIFT] + [⇐] + [SHIFT] + [⇐] from the default meter
display only. This method resets the security level to 0 without interrupting the operation of
the drive.
Do not disconnect control power as a method to reset the security level.
When the security level is reset, the display shows a "Security Level Cleared" message.
Sec lev cleared
Figure 8-27 Security Level Cleared message on the display
NXG Control
Activating Numerical Menu Access Mode

This mode allows you to go instantly to any security approved menu, parameter or pick list
using the four digit ID number associated with the target item.
Perform the following steps:
1. Press the [SHIFT] key followed by the right arrow key [⇒]. The display prompts you for the
desired ID number.
2. Enter the desired ID number using the numeric keys on the keypad.
If the number is a valid ID number and the current security level permits access to that item,
then the desired item will be displayed.
Note
Accessing higher security level menus
If you request access to a menu number that is assigned a higher security level than the
current security level, the drive will prompt for the appropriate security level code.
Within the menu structure, when not in edit mode, the right arrow acts like the [ENTER] key
upon the menu item displayed while the left arrow climbs the menu hierarchy.
8.2.9 Summary of Common Shift Key and Arrow Key Sequences
Menu System Structure

The menu system consists of the main menu and submenus that branch from the main menu
or other submenus. Parameters are contained within these menus.
While navigating inside a parameter list or pick list, select [CANCEL] to exit to the menu.
While inside any menu select [CANCEL] to exit to the default meter display.
Table 8-8 Summary of common [SHIFT] key and arrow key sequences

02725 Speed Menu to the Motor Menu. Access from the default meter display.
6+,)7 Enter hexadecimal "A" from value edit and security prompts.
'5,9( Speed Menu to the Drive Menu. Access from the default meter display.
6+,)7 Enter hexadecimal "B" from value edit and security prompts.
67$% Speed Menu to the Stability Menu. Access from the default meter display.
6+,)7 Enter hexadecimal "C" from value edit and security prompts.
$872 Speed Menu to the Auto Menu. Access from the default meter display.
6+,)7 Enter hexadecimal "D" from value edit and security prompts.
NXG Control

0$,1 Speed Menu to the Main Menu. Access from the default meter display.
6+,)7 Enter hexadecimal "E" from value edit and security prompts. Right arrow [⇒] also enters at this
point from outside of the menu system.
/2*6 Speed Menu to the Logs Menu. Access from the default meter display.
6+,)7 Enter hexadecimal "F" from value edit and security prompts.
'59352 Speed Menu to the Drive Protect Menu. Access from the default meter display.
6+,)7
0(7(5 Speed Menu to the Meter Menu. Access from the default meter display.
6+,)7
&200 Speed Menu to the Communications Menu. Access from the default meter display.
6+,)7
+(/3 Speed Menu to a context sensitive help menu. Access from anywhere except the default meter
6+,)7 display.
&$1&(/ Cancel the current action, abort the current keystroke or exit the menu system.
6+,)7 (17(5
Use individually to navigate through the menu structure.

RU In edit mode, use to change the cursor position in the edit field of a parameter value.
It automatically jumps over a decimal point or field delimiter.
Use individually to scroll through lists of menu options, lists and parameters.
RU Use to change velocity demand from the default meter display.
In edit mode, increments/decrements digits under cursor and changes sign.
Enter Numerical Menu Access Mode.
6+,)7 You are then prompted to enter the 4 digit number for the associated menu or parameter.
Return to the top item of the currently selected menu, submenu or pick list.
6+,)7
Restore the security level back to 0.

6+,)7 Enter the [SHIFT] + [⇐] key sequence 3 times in succession from the default meter display to
restore the security level back to 0.
6+,)7
6+,)7
NXG Control

Go to the bottom item of the currently selected menu, submenu or pick list.
6+,)7
When editing a value that has been changed from its factory default, this key sequence returns
6+,)7 the value to its factory default.
8.2.10 Diagnostic Indicators

The multi-language keypad and display interface contains three diagnostic LED indicators that
are located above the display:
● [POWER ON]
● [FAULT]
● [RUN]
Functions of the diagnostic LED indicators
[POWER ON]
The [POWER ON] indicator is illuminated when control power is supplied to the system.
[RUN]
The [RUN] indicator is illuminated when the drive is running.
[FAULT]
The [FAULT] indicator is illuminated solidly when one or more system errors have occurred,
e.g. boot-up test failure or over voltage fault.
The [FAULT] indicator blinks when one or more alarms are active or unacknowledged.
● Press the [FAULT RESET] key to clear any existing fault conditions and restore the system
to normal operation.
Refer to Figure Multi-language Keypad and Display Interface for the location of the diagnostic
indicators.
See also
Multi-Language Keypad (Page 256)
8.2.11 Display
After power up or reset, the Siemens identification and software version number is displayed
for a few seconds. Afterwards, the meter display is shown by default. The default meter display
is the starting point of the menu system. This display remains active until keys are pressed.
NXG Control
Re-displaying the Version Number

Use the display version number (8090) function in Meter Menu (8) to re-display the version
number.
The version number is displayed on the identification/version screen.
02'( +$1'
'(0'
Siemens Harmony
530
Ve r s i o n #.#.# D a te
9/76
,727
Figure 8-28 Identification/version screen and meter display
Description of the Meter Display

The meter display screen contains five fields that are monitored and updated dynamically.
● MODE: operational mode
● DEMD: velocity demand
● RPM: calculated revolutions per minute
● VLTS: motor voltage
● ITOT: total output current
The value or state of each field is shown dynamically in the second column of the display.
/LQH /LQH
ILHOG ILHOG
QDPH QDPH
02'( .<3' )L[HGGLVSOD\

'(0' ILHOG
530
8VHUGHILQHG
9/76 GLVSOD\ILHOGV
,727
5LJKWFROXPQRIGLVSOD\
VKRZVG\QDPLFYDOXHV
Figure 8-29 Dynamic Programmable Meter Display
[MODE] field
The [MODE] field is fixed.
The last four fields on the display contain parameter values that can be defined by the user.
All four variable displays can be selected from a pick list using the display parameters (8000).
NXG Control
The [MODE] field displays the current operational mode of the system.
Rollback [RLBK] Mode

The following figure depicts the display in rollback mode.
/LQH /LQH
ILHOG ILHOG
QDPH QDPH
5/%. .<3' )L[HGGLVSOD\

'(0' ILHOG
530
8VHUGHILQHG
9/76 GLVSOD\ILHOGV
,727
VKRZVG\QDPLFYDOXHV
Figure 8-30 Dynamic Programmable Meter Display in Rollback Mode
The KYPD field displays the current operational mode of the system.
Regeneration [RGEN] Mode

The following figure depicts the display in regeneration mode.
/LQH /LQH
ILHOG ILHOG
QDPH QDPH
5*(1 .<3' )L[HGGLVSOD\

'(0' ILHOG
530
8VHUGHILQHG
9/76 GLVSOD\ILHOGV
,727
VKRZVG\QDPLFYDOXHV
Figure 8-31 Dynamic Programmable Meter Display in Regeneration Mode
NXG Control
Modifying Parameter Values

The following sections illustrate the steps to take if attempting to locate and change the
following parameters:
● Ratio Control
● Motor Frequency
Example for changing ratio control parameters:

The metering display shows the commanded speed reference in percent.
02'( +$1'
'(0'
530
9/76
,727
Figure 8-32 Status display in metering mode
1. Press the following key combination: [SHIFT] + [2].
Drive (2)
(A r row Keys Selec t)
Figure 8-33 Status display after [SHIFT] + [2] key sequence
2. From this point, you can select from the nine standard menus.
Use the up [⇑] and down [⇓] arrow keys, to select the desired menu.
3. Press the down [⇓] arrow key twice. The following figure shows the display prior to the
selection of the Speed Setup Menu (2060).
Drive parameters
(20 0 0) (s u b m e n u)
Speed setup
(20 6 0) (s u b m e n u)
To r q u e r e f e r e n c e
(2 210) (s u b m e n u)
Figure 8-34 Status display after [⇓] [⇓] key sequence
NXG Control
4. Press the [ENTER] or right [⇒] arrow key to enter the Speed Setup Menu (2060).
Speed setup (20 6 0)

(A r row Keys Selec t)
Figure 8-35 Status display after [⇒] key sequence
5. Press the down [⇓] arrow key once to access the ratio control parameter (2070).
5DWLRFRQWURO

6SHHGI ZGPD[OLPLW

6SHHGI ZGPLQOLPLW

Figure 8-36 Status display after [⇓] key sequence
6. Press [ENTER] to confirm and enter edit mode for the ratio control parameter. "(edit)"
appears in the display when a parameter is in edit mode.
Ratio control
(e d i t) -003.0 %
Figure 8-37 Status display after [ENTER] key to change a parameter
NXG Control
7. Use the left [⇐] and right [⇒] arrow keys to position the cursor under the desired digit or sign
to be changed.
Set the digit by using the number keys, or increment or decrement the digit using the up
[⇑] and down [⇓] arrow keys.
Use the up [⇑] and down [⇓] arrow keys to change the sign. The parameter is written into
memory once you press [ENTER] or the right [⇒] arrow key.
8. The following figure depicts the display when a number is entered and it is within the range
of the system.
5DWLRFRQWURO

6SHHGI ZGPD[OLPLW

6SHHGI ZGPLQOLPLW

Figure 8-38 Status display upon entering a value in the range of the system
Note
Use of asterisks (*)
An asterisk (*) is used to denote when a parameter is changed from its current default
value.
This allows you to quickly see which parameters have been changed.
To return a parameter to its factory value, press [SHIFT] + [⇐] while in edit mode.
Example for changing motor frequency parameters:

1. Press [SHIFT] [⇒] to get to the parameter ID display.
Enter parameter ID for motor frequency (1020).
Speed Parameter
Enter Param ID 1020
Figure 8-39 Status display after pressing [SHIFT] [⇒] and entering ID 1020
2. Press the [ENTER] key once to show the motor frequency display and then press [ENTER]
again to edit its value.
Motor frequency
(e d i t) 010.0 Hz
Figure 8-40 Status display after pressing [ENTER] twice
NXG Control
The range of the variable is 15 to 330.

If, for example, you attempt to enter 010 for the motor frequency an error message will be
displayed for approximately four seconds.
Then the value shown before the attempted edit is displayed again.
Motor frequency
OUT OF RANGE
Figure 8-41 Status display upon entering a value beyond the range of the system
Summary of Operation Mode Displays

The following tables list the possible operational mode displays of line 1 and 2 of the display
in order of precedence.

1 FRST Fault reset Displayed after the [FAULT RESET] button is pressed.
Note: This may not be visible because of the speed of response to a fault
reset.
2 TLIM Menu setting rollback Drive is being limited by a menu setting.
3 SPHS Single phasing rollback A single phasing condition of the input line is limiting drive torque.
4 UVLT Undervoltage rollback A undervoltage condition of the input line is limiting the drive torque.
5 T OL Thermal overload rollback The drive has limited the amount of torque produced to prevent thermal
overload of the input transformer.
6 F WK Field weakening rollback This condition exists when the motor flux is low and the application
requires high torque. This prevents "motor pull-out", an unstable
operating condition of the motor, by decreasing the motor torque until
flux is re-established in the motor.
7 C OL Cell overload rollback A cell current overload model has calculated a thermal overload condition
of the drive cells and the drive has limited the amount of torque allowable.
10 ALIM Analog torque Limit Torque limited by analog input.
11 EALM External analog Limit Drive is in torque limit due to external analog limit when in torque mode.
12 ENLM External network Limit Drive is in torque limit due to external network limit when in torque mode.
13 EMLM External menu Limit Drive is in torque limit due to external menu limit when in torque mode.
14 CIMB Cell imbalance Limit AFE cells in regen limit when the sum of the three phase voltage gains
exceed 3 pu. Each phase voltage gain is equal to the number of installed
cells per phase, divided by the active cells in that phase.
15 RLBK Roll back Appears during acceleration if drive has reached its torque limit setting.
16 RGEN Regeneration During normal deceleration, this message will be displayed when the
drive is operating in regen torque limit.
NXG Control

17 BRKG Dual frequency braking Appears while drive is decelerating with dual frequency braking enabled.
18 OVLT Regen Limit for 6-step Indicates that the six-step regeneration torque limit is in effect. It is set
when the cell voltage gets too high, and serves to reduce the regen
torque limit to limit the energy flow from the output (motor) to the cells to
prevent overvoltaging the cells.
19 BYPS Cell bypassed Indicates that one or more cells are in bypass.
20 PRCH Pre-charge One of the pre-charge modes is selected and the drive is pre-charging,
or ready to pre-charge.
21 OLTM Open loop test mode Appears if drive control algorithm is set to open loop test mode.
22 MODE Normal mode display This is the typical display message during normal operation.
23 CURP Current profile mode limit Appears if the current limit is due to the current profile limit curve.

1 NOMV No medium voltage No input line voltage detected.
2 INH CR3 inhibit The CR3 or "drive inhibit" input is asserted.
3 OFF Idle state The drive is ready to run but is in an idle state.
4 MAGN Magnetizing motor state The drive is magnetizing the motor or passing through the magnetizing
drive state.
5 SPIN Spinning load state The drive is trying to detect the speed of the motor in order to synchronize
the drive frequency.
6 UXFR Up transfer state The drive is in the "Up Transfer State" preparing to transfer the motor to
the input line.
7 DXFR Down transfer state The drive is in the "Down Transfer State" preparing to transfer the motor
from the input line to the drive.
8 KYPD Keypad speed demand The drive speed demand source is the keypad.
9 TEST Speed/Torque test The drive is in a speed or torque test mode.
10 LOS Loss of Signal The drive 4 to 20 mA analog input signal has dropped below a predefined
setting.
13 AUTO Automatic mode The SOP flag AutoDisplayMode_O is set true usually to indicate drive
is receiving its speed demand from a source other than the keypad or
network. Typically used with an analog input speed source. This mode
is entirely determined by setting the SOP flag. It does not affect NXG
operation.
14 HAND Hand mode Appears if the drive is running under normal conditions.
15 BRAK Dynamic Braking Indicates that dynamic braking is enabled.
16 DECL Decelerating (no braking) The drive is decelerating normally.
17 COAS Coasting to stop The drive is not controlling the motor and it is coasting to a stop due only
to friction.
18 TUNE Auto Tuning The drive is in a "Auto Tuning" mode used to determine motor
characteristics.
19 FALT Drive fault active This mode is selected if any drive fault exists, but is not usually displayed
as the fault message is displayed instead. This is shown if the "Fault
display override" (8200) feature is enabled.
NXG Control
8.4 Communication Interface
8.3 NXG ToolSuite

The NXG ToolSuite is a PC-based application software package that integrates various
software tools used for NXG based drives. One of the tools contained within ToolSuite is the
Drive Tool. The Drive Tool allows you can navigate through a drive’s features using a PC and
a mouse or touch screen, allowing you to monitor and control the drive’s functions. The NXG
Drive Tool is a high-level GUI that runs on a PC equipped with a Microsoft Windows operating
system. The NXG Control, and the PC running the Drive Tool, interface with each other using
ethernet and TCP/IP protocols.
The structure of the menu hierarchy is slightly different with this tool than with the keypad. For
full coverage of the Drive Tool, refer to the NXG ToolSuite User Manual.
The NXG Control provides a means for Perfect Harmony drives to be directly connected to
several industry standard PLC communication networks. A detailed description of the network
capabilities is defined in the NXG Communications Manual. A summary of the networks and
their associated capabilities are provided in the following subsections.
8.4.1 Available Networks

At present, the NXG Control supports the following industry standard PLC networks:
● Modbus™
● Ethernet Modbus™
● Modbus Plus™
● Profibus™
● ProfiDrive™ (compliant to ProfiDrive profile 4.1 version specification)
● DeviceNet™
● ControlNet™
Note
Modbus™ RTU or Modbus™ Ethernet is available as Network 1 without additional
hardware.
Other Network 1 communication protocols require an additional printed circuit board to be
attached to the communications card within the NXG digital card rack.
8.4.2 Multiple Networks

The NXG Control allows you to operate two independent network interfaces at one time, where
both can monitor the drive, but only one can control the drive. The networks do not need to be
NXG Control
identical. Each can map data separately. The second network, Network 2, is obtained by
placing an additional printed circuit board to the communications card within the NXG digital
card rack.
The ability to provide two networks is not implemented as a redundant or dual interface. The
VFD provides a means to use two separate ports and you can define which of the ports to use
to control the VFD. Switchover from one network port to the other is implemented via the SOP.
NXG Control
Operating the Software 9
A System Program (SOP) is developed for each drive application to configure the VFD to
function as desired by the end user. The SOP allows the end user to define the drive operation,
where possible, so that system response and I/O configuration is configured for the application.
The SOP is used to define reference sources, select a subset of operating parameters,
configure all I/O, and to define alarms and fault conditions as desired by the end user.
Note
Internal drive-generated faults defined for drive protection cannot be modified by the SOP.
9.1 SOP Development and Operation

All Siemens LD system programs must adher to Siemens standard procedures. Failure to do
so may result in damage to the drive and could void the system warranty.
The SOP file is written by Siemens and adhers to Siemens standards for protection of the
drive. The SOP can be modified by trained personnel for changing requirements. SOP testing
is performed at the Siemens LD facility.
The SOP file is downloaded to the drive in non-volatile memory. The operation of the SOP is
similar to a PLC in that it reads from top to bottom and left to right on a cyclical basis. The drive
must be in an idle state, that is, with output disabled for a new SOP to be downloaded and
started.
9.2 SOP Logic Functions

Perfect Harmony drives contain customized programmable logic functions that define many
features and capabilities of the drives. These logic functions are combined into the SOP.
Note
SOP changes must be approved by Siemens.
Examples of logic functions include:

● Start/stop control logic
● Input and output control logic, for example annunciators, interlocks, etc.
● Drive-to-machinery coordination
The SOP is stored on the CompactFlash card. Upon power-up, it is executed continuously by
the drive's run-time software in a repetitive fashion, causing the intended logic statements to
perform their functionality.
NXG Control
Operating the Software
9.5 Output Flags
9.3 SOP Evaluation

The source file is the text file containing the logic statements and I/O assignments performing
the desired operations of the drive. Evaluation of logic statements occurs in a top to bottom,
left to right manner as written in the source file. The only exception is the simple statements
in which the output variable, i.e. the flag, is set either true or false. These statements are
evaluated once only at the initialization of the SOP during power-up, or when a new SOP is
either downloaded or selected.
Once an output variable is set to either true or false, it is immediately available as an input to
any subsequent logic statements within the context of the logic tables. There is no limitation
to how many times an output variable may change logic states within the context of the
program. However, only the final evaluation is output to any assigned output flags or external
I/O.
Note
Reassignment of outputs is flagged as a warning by the SOP Utilities compiler.
Note
The SOP evaluation cycle time is based on synchronization of the slow loop with the fault
loop, with worst case being two fault loop cycles or about 6.7 msec.
9.4 Input Flags

Input flags are symbols that are encountered on the right hand side of a source statement.
They express the state of an input to the system.
Input flags are identified by <variable>_I.
Input flags represent items such as:
● digital inputs
● switches
● the state of a system process
● internal variables
● comparator flags
● a literal (TRUE, FALSE).
These input flags are combined using the unary and binary operators to form logic
expressions.
9.5 Output Flags

Output flags are symbols that are encountered on the left hand side of the assignment "="
operator. They direct the result of the input expression towards an output purpose.
Output flags are identified by <variable>_O.
NXG Control
9.7 Uploading the SOP
Output flags represent items such as:

● digital outputs
● system control switches.
Perfect Harmony drives have a set of pre-defined symbols that describe control outputs or
"switches" that can be controlled by the SOP. These switches can control functions such as
the source of the speed reference, a selection for the system acceleration rate and many more.
In most cases, to cause the system to perform in the intended manner, the proper control
switches must be set, and others cleared, by the SOP.
9.6 Downloading the SOP

The SOP must be downloaded to the drive to be used. The tools for downloading the SOP are
contained in the Siemens ToolSuite of tools.
Use one of the following methods to download the SOP:
● through a serial RS232 connection using the SOP Utilities.
● through an Ethernet connection using the Drive Tool.
Downloading the SOP via serial RS232 connection

Use a serial communications program to download the SOP via serial connection. A serial
communications program is included in the SOP Utilities, although any Windows based
terminal program can be used. The procedure to download the file is as follows:
1. Setup the drive to receive the new SOP via the SOP and Serial Functions Menu (9110).
2. Make sure the drive is connected to the PC running the communications program via a
properly configured cable.
3. Start the download process. Select the System program download (9120) function to initiate
the download process.
4. Once the drive is set to receive, start the transfer from the PC program.
If using the SOP Utilities, refer to the NXG ToolSuite User Manual for details.
Once the program is downloaded, it becomes the active SOP.
Downloading the SOP via serial Ethernet connection

Use the Drive Tool to download the program via the Ethernet connection. You do not need to
set up anything through the drive menu, it is handled directly from the PC. Once downloaded,
the file becomes the active SOP.
9.7 Uploading the SOP

The need may arise to view and/or modify the installed SOP file. This is done by
communications from the drive to an external PC, and is known as uploading. The tools for
uploading the SOP are contained in the Siemens ToolSuite of tools.
NXG Control
9.8 Multiple Configuration Files
Use one of the following methods to upload the SOP:

● through the serial communications port using the SOP Utilities
● through the Ethernet port using the Drive Tool.
Uploading the SOP via serial communications port

Use a serial communications program to upload the SOP via serial communications port. You
must use a program that can capture and save the uploaded information in a file on the PC.
The SOP Utilities provides this functionality. The procedure to upload and save the file is as
follows:
1. Setup the PC software to receive and save a file.
2. Select the System program upload (9130) function from the SOP and Serial Functions
Menu (9110) to start the transfer.
Uploading the SOP via serial Ethernet connection

Use the Drive Tool to upload the SOP via the Ethernet connection. Once a connection with
the drive is established, select the Upload System Program function from the Configuration
Menu. Refer to the NXG ToolSuite User Manual for details about the Drive Tool.
9.8 Multiple Configuration Files

The NXG Control allows for the use of up to eight separate configuration files. This is to allow
for use of the drive with up to eight separate, non-identical motors. These files contain most
of the parameters of the drive, all motor parameters and most loop tuning parameters are
contained in these files.
To use multiple configuration files, enable parameter Multiple config files (9185) in the SOP &
Serial Functions Menu. The default is off. The associated submenu is Setup SOP config flags
(9186) where slave files can be created and assigned to the SOP variables via the menu items.
Refer to Section Options for Multiple Configuration Files in Chapter Parameter Assignment /
Addressing for information on creating and programming the slave files.
Once the files are created and enabled, they are selected via the eight SOP flags
SOPConfigFile1_O to SOPConfigFile8_O in the logic of the SOP file. Ensure that only
one valid flag is set true at a time within the SOP.
CAUTION
Potential Drive Instability or Trip
Switching SOP flags could cause drive instability and/or a trip.
Do not switch SOP flags while the drive is running.
Since the configuration files can also be changed via the menu, there is a potential conflict
that could arise between whether the menu or the SOP selected file is to be used. If the menu
is used to override the SOP selection, then the menu selection becomes the active
NXG Control
9.9 Selecting the active SOP
configuration. This will remain in effect until the SOP changes the configuration file to be
different from the menu selection.
See also
Options for Multiple Configuration Files (Page 123)
9.9 Selecting the active SOP

It is possible to store multiple system programs on the flash card. The purpose is for factory
testing or commissioning, as the SOP allows the drive to be run with minimal external
connections.
Note
Requirement when selecting the active SOP
To select a different active SOP, the drive must not be running.
This could cause drive instability and/or a trip.
Use the parameter Select system program (9146) to select from a pick list of all available SOPs.
To determine the SOP that is currently selected, use the Display sys prog name (9140)
function. Find both parameters under the SOP and Serial Functions Menu (9110).
NXG Control
Troubleshooting Faults and Alarms 10
This chapter contains information for fault, alarm and error troubleshooting.
DANGER
Handling the equipment with main input power connected will cause death or severe injuries.
Always switch off the main input power to the equipment before attempting inspection or
maintenance procedure.
WARNING
Qualified service personnel
Incorrect handling and maintenance may cause death or severe injuries.
Ensure that only qualified service personnel maintain Perfect Harmony equipment and
systems.
Refer to Chapter NXG Control Description for locations and details of major hardware
components of the NXG Control. Refer to separate Operating Instructions manual for all other
details.
See also
NXG Control Description (Page 27)

If a fault or alarm condition exists, it will be annunciated on the keypad. The NXG Control
software and hardware sense faults and alarms, and store them within the alarm/fault log and
the event log. Faults are either detected via direct hardware sensing or by software algorithm.
The cell control system logic senses cell faults. The cell control system logic is located on the
cell control board in each output power cell. Each power cell has its own sense circuitry. The
NXG Control software interprets the cell faults and displays them and logs them based on the
faulted cell and the specific fault within the cell.
All faults will immediately inhibit the drive from running and remove power from the drive to
the motor. Some faults that are user defined can control the drive response via the SOP. Alarms
are annunciated and logged but usually do not inhibit the drive from operation.
NXG Control
Troubleshooting Faults and Alarms
Refer to the following table, to determine the drive response for the various fault and alarm
conditions.
WARNING
High Voltages
Disabling the drive does not necessarily remove voltage form the motor terminals.
The motor, especially if spinning, may have residual voltage on the terminals, and anything
connected to them.
Always adhere to the five safety rules and safety measures in Chapter Safety Notes.
Table 10-1 Fault/alarm type and drive responses
Type Drive responses

Fault or User Fault ● All IGBT gate drivers are inhibited.
● Motor coasts to stop.
● The fault is logged. Refer to the alarm/fault log menu (6210).
● The fault is displayed on the front panel.
● The keypad fault LED is ON.*
● Faults are logged to the event log and fault log.
Alarm or User ● Drive does not necessarily revert to the idle state via a coast or ramp stop unless specifically
Alarm required to by the SOP.
● The alarm is logged. Refer to the alarm/fault log menu (6210).
● The alarm is displayed on the front panel.
● The keypad fault LED flashes.*
* Refer to Chapter Software User Interface, Section Fault Reset key and LED Indicator for
information about the LED.
Fault handling
To reset a fault manually, use the [FAULT RESET] key on the keypad. Return the drive to the
run condition by performing manual start or by forcing the RunRequest_I equal to "true".
Certain faults can be reset automatically if enabled by the auto fault reset enable (7120). Refer
to Table Auto resettable faults, for a list of auto resettable faults. These are fixed and not
adjustable. If reset is successful, the drive will return to the run state automatically only if the
RunRequest_I is maintained at the value "true". The [FAULT RESET] key of the keypad can
acknowledge alarms.
Table 10-2 Auto resettable faults
Over Speed Fault Keypad Communication Loss Of Signal Int

Under Load Fault Network 1 Communication Loss of Signal 1 to 24
Output Ground Fault Network 2 Communication Int AI1 Loss of Signal
IOC Motor Over Volt Fault Int AI2 Loss of Signal
NXG Control
10.2 Drive Faults and Alarms
Menu Initialization Back EMF Timeout Int AI3 Loss of Signal

Medium voltage low Flt Failed To Magnetize SMDC PLL Start-up Fault
Line Over Voltage Fault Loss Of Field Current SM Pole Slip
Encoder Loss Loss Of Drive Enable Motor Pull-out Fault
See also
Fault Reset Key and LED Indicator (Page 258)

The NXG Control senses all drive faults and alarms, either from direct hardware or via software
algorithms. Use the following tables to locate major causes of fault conditions. The tables list
the type of drive response, if it is a fault (F), alarm (A), or both (F/A), and whether it can be
enabled or disabled using the system program (SOP), or if it is permanently enabled, i.e. fixed
in software.
Note
For NXGII systems or when the system I/O board is used, the amplitudes of signals are 50%
of the values of the NXG system interface board. The test points remain the same.
Handling Input Line Disturbance Faults
Table 10-3 Input line disturbance faults
Fault display Type Enable Potential causes and corrective actions

Input phase loss A Fixed Cause
Loss of input phase.
Action
1. Check the input fuses and connection to verify that the input phases
are connected properly.
2. Use an oscilloscope to verify the presence of all three input voltages
on test points VIA/TP1, VIB/TP2, VIC/TP3 of the system I/O board or
system interface board.
Input ground A Fixed Cause
The estimated input ground voltage is greater than the limit set by the
ground fault limit in the drive protection menu.
Action
1. Use an oscilloscope to verify the symmetry (L-L and L-N) of the three
input voltages on test points (VIA/TP1, VIB/TP2, VIC/TP3) of the
system I/O board or system interface board.
2. Use a voltmeter to check for common mode DC to neutral.
NXG Control

Line over voltage 1 A SOP Cause
The drive-input RMS voltage is greater than 110% of the drive rated input
voltage.
Action
Use a voltmeter to verify that the input voltages on test points (VIA/TP1,
VIB/TP2, VIC/TP3) are the expected value for rated input voltage:
● ~1.9 Vrms for the system I/O board. Values greater than ~2.09 Vrms
will trigger this alarm.
● ~3.8 Vrms for the system interface board. Values greater than
~4.18 Vrms will trigger this alarm.
Note: This alarm can be caused by a transient condition, and may not
be present when making the measurements.
Line over voltage 2 A SOP Cause
The dive input RMS voltage is greater than 115% of the drive rated input
voltage.
Action
Refer to Line over voltage 1 section above.
● For the system I/O board, values greater than 2.185 Vrms will trigger
this alarm.
● For the system interface board, values greater than 4.37 Vrms will
trigger this alarm.
Line over voltage fault F SOP Cause
The drive-input RMS voltage is greater than 120% of the drive rated input
voltage.
Action
Refer to Line over voltage 1 section above.
● For the system I/O board, values greater than 2.28 Vrms will trigger
an alarm or trip, depending on the SOP.
● For the system interface board, values greater than 4.56 Vrms will
trigger an alarm or trip, depending on the SOP.
Note: This fault will cause an input protection fault if dedicated I/O is used
for IP faults.
Medium voltage low 1 A SOP Cause
The drive-input RMS voltage is less than 90% of the drive rated input
voltage.
Action
Use a voltmeter to verify the input voltages on test points (VIA/TP1, VIB/
TP2, VIC/TP3) are the expected value for rated input voltage:
● ~1.9 Vrms for the system I/O board. Values less than ~1.7 Vrms (90%
of rated) will trigger medium voltage low conditions.
● ~3.8 Vrms for the system interface board. Values less than ~3.4 Vrms
(90% of rated) will trigger medium voltage low conditions.
Note: This alarm can be caused by a transient condition, and may not
be present when making the measurements.
NXG Control

Medium voltage low 2 A Fixed Cause
voltage.
Action
Refer to Medium voltage low 1 section above.
● For the system I/O board, the threshold is 1.33 V.
● For the system interface board, the threshold is 2.66 V.
Medium voltage low Flt F Fixed Cause
voltage.
Note: The fault will not occur, even after the threshold condition is met,
until the first cell fault occurs. This fault is then logged and associated
cell faults ignored.
Action
Refer to Medium voltage low 1 section above.
● For the system I/O board, the threshold is 1.045 V.
● For the system interface board, the threshold is 2.09 V.
Input one cycle F/A Fixed Cause
or (1) Possible fault on the secondary side of the transformer, or (2) inrush
excessive input reactive current is too high and creating a nuisance fault.
current Action
1. Remove medium voltage and visually inspect all the cells and their
connections to the transformer secondary; contact Siemens for field
support.
2. Reduce the 1 Cyc Protect integ gain (7080) and the 1 Cycle Protect
Limit (7081) to avoid nuisance trips.
Note: This fault will cause an input protection fault if dedicated I/O is used
for IP faults.
Input phase imbal F/A SOP Cause
Drive input line current imbalance is greater than the setting in the phase
imbalance limit parameter in the drive protection menu. This fault / alarm
may be in conjunction with a neutral current path or ground fault
condition, or may be due to shorted windings in the transformer.
Action
1. Verify proper symmetry of the input voltages and currents on test
points VIA/TP1, VIB/TP2, VIC/TP3, IIB/TP12 and IIC/TP13.
2. Check the values of the input attenuators.
Note: During pre-charge, if so equipped, it is normal for phases to be
imbalanced.
NXG Control

PreChrg M1 Contactor Flt F Cause
This fault aborts pre-charge and the message is issued in lieu of the pre-
charge fault.
Possible causes include:
● No power to contactor coil
● Incorrect wiring of contactor and auxiliary contact, and connection
with breakout board
● Defective breakout board
● Loose or defective cable between breakout board and system I/O
board
● Defective system I/O board
Action
1. Check for control power to contactor (customer side)
2. Check wiring; check connections to breakout board
3. Check cable connection between breakout board and System I/O
board
4. Replace breakout board
5. Replace system I/O board
NXG Control

PreChrg Contactor Alarm A Cause
During pre-charge, if any pre-charge contactor (M2, M3, and M4) does
not respond as directed, this alarm is issued along with a pre-charge
fault. After pre-charge completes, the command to the pre-charge
contactor (M2, M3, and M4) is compared to feedback (acknowledge) and
if they do not agree, an alarm is issued.
● No power to contactor coils
● Incorrect wiring of contactors and auxiliary contacts
● Defective breakout board
● Loose or defective cable between breakout board and system I/O
board
● Defective system I/O board
Action
1. Check for control power to contactors
2. Check wiring; check connections to breakout board
3. Check cable connection between breakout board and System I/O
board
4. Replace breakout board
5. Replace system I/O board
PreChrg Breaker Opened A Cause
This alarm indicates that the pre-charge breaker was commanded to
open when the precharge contactors M2, M3, or M4 failed to open. This
alarm is applicable to only pre-charge Type 5 or Type 6.
● Incorrect wiring from the breakout board to the pre-charge contactors.
● The breakout board is broken, which results in reporting incorrect
status of the contactors.
● Incorrect attenuation resistor values for required input voltage.
Action
1. Check pre-charge contactors and auxiliary contacts
2. Replace breakout board(s)
3. Evaluate wiring
4. Check input protection fault and correct
NXG Control
Handling Motor/Output Related Faults
Table 10-4 Motor/output related faults

Over speed alarm A SOP Cause
The motor speed is greater than 95% of parameter setting for
Overspeed (1170) in the limits menu (1120). An improperly set-up or
mistuned drive usually causes this fault.
Action
Verify that the motor and drive nameplate settings match the
corresponding parameters in motor parameter menu (1000) and drive
parameter menu (2000).
Over speed fault F Fixed Cause
The motor speed exceeds the parameter setting for Overspeed (1170)
in the limits menu (1120). An improperly set-up or mistuned drive usually
causes this fault.
Action
Verify that the motor and drive nameplate settings match the
Output ground fault A Fixed Cause
This fault is caused due to an output ground fault condition, when the
estimated ground voltage exceeds parameter Ground Fault Limit (1245)
in the limits menu (1120).
Action
1. Verify proper symmetry of voltages on test points VMA/TP5, VMB/
TP6, and VMC/TP7. If voltages are not a problem, check the divider
resistors in the motor sense unit or replace the system interface
board.
2. Disconnect the motor from the VFD. Use a megometer to verify motor
and cable insulation.
Encoder loss Menu Menu Cause
The software has detected an encoder signal loss due to a faulty encoder
or faulty encoder interface.
Action
1. Verify that the information in the encoder menu (1280) is correct for
the encoder being used.
2. Run the drive in open loop vector control mode. Select OLVC in the
control loop type (2050) of the drive parameter menu (2000).
3. Go to meter menu (8); select display parameters menu (8000) and
set one of the display parameters (8001-8004) to ERPM or %ESP
and observe if ERPM follows motor speed.
NXG Control

Mtr therm over load 1 A SOP Cause
Motor temperature or motor current, depending on choice of over-load
method, are above over-load pending setting.
Action
1. Verify that parameter Overload pending (1139) is set correctly.
2. Check load conditions and, if applicable, verify that submenu Speed
Derate Curve (1151) matches the load conditions.
Mtr therm over load 2 A SOP Cause
method, are above over-load setting.
Action
Verify that parameter Overload (1140) is set correctly. Refer to Mtr therm
over load 1 section above.
Mtr therm over ld fault F Fixed Cause
method, has exceeded the over-load setting for the time specified by the
over-load timeout parameter.
Action
Verify that parameter Overload timeout (1150) is set correctly. Refer to
Mtr therm over load 1 section above.
Motor over volt alarm A SOP Cause
If motor voltage exceeds 90% of the motor overvoltage limit in the motor
limit menu.
Action
Check menu settings for correct motor rating, and limit setting.
Motor over volt fault F SOP Cause
The measured motor voltage exceeds the threshold set by parameter
Motor trip volts (1160) in the limits menu (1120). An improperly set-up or
tuned drive usually causes this fault. This could include the secondary
tap setting. A high line condition can also cause this.
Action
1. Verify that the motor and drive nameplate settings match the
2. Verify that the signals on the VMA/TP5, VMB/TP6, and VMC/TP7 test
points are operating properly within:
● 1.9 Vrms +/-0.20 V at full speed for the system I/O board.
● 3.8 Vrms+/-0.40 V at full speed for the system interface board.
If an incorrect voltage is noted, check the voltage divider in the motor
sense unit or replace the system interface board.
1. Also check the tap settings on the transformer. The tap setting may
have to be changed to accommodate a high input line.
NXG Control

Thermal OT Rollback A Paramet Cause
er When enabled (Min Rollback Level, ID 7171 below 100%) and either two
cell OT alarms are active or the Transformer OT alarm is active, a torque
rollback is calculated. When this rollback affects the torque output, this
alarm will become active.
Action
1. Check cooling system for clogged filters or reduced airflow
2. Check ambient air temperature.
3. Check wiring of transformer OT switch.
IOC F Fixed Cause
Drive instantaneous over-current (IOC) faults result when the signal from
test point IOC on the system interface board exceeds the level set by the
drive IOC setpoint (7110) parameter in the input protect menu (7000).
Action
1. Verify that the motor current rating (1050) is below the Drive IOC
setpoint (7110) in the drive protect menu (7).
2. Verify that parameter Output current scaler (3440) is set to a number
that is close to 1.0.
3. Verify that the signals on test points IMB/TP22 and IMC/TP23 on the
system interface board match the percentage of full-scale signals.
Under load alarm A SOP Cause
The torque producing current of the drive has dropped below a preset
value set by the user.
Action
This alarm usually indicates a loss of load condition. If this not the case,
verify the setting of parameter I underload (1182) in the limits menu
(1120).
Under load fault F Menu Cause
This fault usually indicates a loss of load condition when the torque
producing current of the drive has dropped below a preset value set by
the user for the specified amount of time.
Action
If this is not an unexpected condition, verify the setting of parameter I
underload (1182) and parameter Underload timeout (1186) in the limits
menu (1120).
Output phase imbal A Fixed Cause
The software has detected an imbalance in the motor currents. This
alarm may be in conjunction with a neutral current path or ground fault
condition, or may be due to shorted windings in the motor.
Action
Verify proper symmetry of the motor currents on test points VMA/TP5,
VMB/TP6, VMC/TP7, IMA/TP21, IMB/TP22, and IMC/TP23. If the
currents are unsymmetrical, verify if the burden resistors for the Hall
effect transducers are connected correctly on the signal conditioning
board.
NXG Control

In torque limit A SOP Cause
This alarm is issued when the drive is in speed rollback, due to a torque
limit condition, for more than 1 minute.
Action
1. Check load conditions.
2. Check proper settings for drive and motor ratings.
In torq limit rollback F/A SOP Cause
This fault or alarm, depending on the SOP, is issued when the drive is
in speed rollback, due to a torque limit condition, for more than 30
minutes.
Action
1. Check load conditions
2. Check proper settings for drive and motor ratings.
Minimum speed trip F/A SOP Cause
Motor speed is below the zero speed setting (2200). This is either due
to a motor stall condition, if speed demand is higher than the zero speed
setting, or a low speed demand condition, where speed demand is lower
than the zero speed setting.
Action
Increase motor torque limit (1190, 1210 or 1230) if it is a stall condition
or adjust the zero speed setting to avoid the desired low speed operating
region.
Loss of field current F/A SOP Cause
This occurs only with synchronous motor control due to field exciter
failure or loss of power to the exciter.
Action
Check if the power supply to the exciter is energized. To determine if the
field exciter is operating correctly:
● reduce Flux demand (3150) to 0.40, increase Accel time 1 (2270) to
a larger value and run the motor with 5% speed demand.
If the drive magnetizing current reference (Ids,ref) does not go to zero,
then the field exciter is not working or is not adjusted properly.
NXG Control

Failed to magnetize F/A SOP Cause
This occurs only with induction motors due to high magnetizing current
or poor power factor. The trip occurs when Ids or magnetizing current is
greater than 80% of rated current for a duration more than five times the
flux ramp rate parameter setting.
Note: This is increased by the code to 95% for induction motors with 10
or more poles.
With induction motors, this trip normally occurs only when starting, either
due to incorrect settings for Stator resistance (1080) and Cable
resistance (2940), i.e. settings that are higher than actual value, or due
to the incorrect setup of the spinning load. Once the motor is magnetized
and running, such an event is unlikely to occur.
Note: During high starting torque mode, the trip time used is the flux ramp
rate.
Action
1. Increase the flux ramp time to give more time for magnetizing current
to settle down at startup.
2. Verify if parameter Stator resistance (1080) is set too high for the
application; reduce it if continuous operation at very low speed is not
desired. Check that spinning load is set correctly.
Back EMF timeout F Fixed The software timed out waiting for the motor back EMF voltage to decay
to a safe level for bypass or turn-on (drive enable). The safe voltage is
the amount of voltage that the drive can support. The back EMF is the
motor voltage when the drive is not active. If an induction machine has
a long time constant, or if a synchronous machine has not disabled its
field, and in either case the machine is spinning, the timeout threshold
will cause a fault. This is also possible for parallel drives connected to a
single motor.
NXG Control
Handling System Related Faults
Table 10-5 System related faults

Excessive drive losses SOP Fixed Cause
Estimated drive losses are too high, due to (1) internal problem in the
cells, or (2) scaling error in voltage and current measurement on input
and output side.
Action
1. Remove medium voltage and visually inspect all the cells and their
connections to the transformer secondary.
Contact Siemens customer service for support.
2. With the drive operating above a 25% power rating, verify if estimated
drive efficiency is above 95%. If not, then voltage and current scaling
needs to be checked.
Note:
● This fault will cause an input protection fault if dedicated I/O is used
for IP faults.
● This drive protection will not function properly if the input CT’s are
installed incorrectly. This would be indicated by negative input power
on a two quadrant system.
Carrier frq set too low A Fixed Cause
The software detected a menu entry for carrier frequency menu (3580)
was below the lowest possible setting based on the system information.
Action
1. Change the value entered in carrier frequency menu (3580).
2. Check the value of the installed cells/phase menu (2530).
3. Consult Siemens customer service.
System program F Fixed Cause
The software detected an error in the SOP file.
Actions
1. Reload SOP.
Fatal startup fault F Fixed Cause
Menu initialization The software detected an error in one of the files stored on the CPU
board Compact Flash Card.
Action
Consult Siemens customer service.
Config file write alarm A Fixed Cause
Occurs if system is not able to write a master or slave config file.
Action
NXG Control

Fatal startup fault F Fixed Cause
Interrupt failure No interrupts detected on initialization.
Action
1. Power down DCR.
2. Check ribbon cable connections.
3. Retry power up.
4. If this does not solve the problem, consult Siemens customer service.
Config file read error F Fixed Cause
Occurs if system is not able to read data from a master of slave config
file.
Action
CPU temperature alarm A Fixed Cause
CPU temperature is > 70 C.
Action
1. Check air flow and chassis fans.
2. Check CPU heatsink.
CPU temperature fault F Fixed Cause
CPU temperature is > 85 C. This fault is not logged because the board
resets.
Action
1. Check air flow and chassis fans.
2. Check CPU heatsink.
A/D hardware alarm A Fixed Cause
The system A/D conversion board detected a hardware error. A hardware
error may be generated if the analog section supply is missing or below
12 V, if one of the regulators fails, or if one of the converters does not
complete a conversion. A hardware error will result in the A/D board going
Not Ready.
Action
1. Check 12V power supply
2. Replace A/D board.
A/D hardware fault F Fixed Cause
A/D board hardware error persists for more than 10 samples.
Action
1. Check 12V power supply
2. Replace A/D board or system I/O board if installed.
NXG Control
Handling Modulator Related Faults
Table 10-6 Modulator related faults

Modulator configuration F Fixed Cause
During initialization of the modulator board, a series of self-tests run to
ensure that the modulator is functioning properly.
The software detected a problem when attempting to initialize the
modulator.
Action
1. Review grounding of the digital control rack (DCR).
2. Replace modulator board.
Modulator board fault F Fixed Cause
When a cell fault is detected, the fault routine starts the cell diagnostic
routine. If no cell fault is found, this fault displays. The cell fault indication
is from the modulator master fault register.
Action
1. Review grounding of the DCR.
Cell fault/modulator F Fixed Cause
Modulator has an undefined fault from a cell. Cell shows fault but the
fault is undetectable.
Action
Check fiber links, cell, modulator board.
Bad cell data F Fixed Cause
Cell data packet mode bits incorrect.
Action
1. Check both ends of fiber links.
2. Check cell control board and modulator board.
Cell config fault F Fixed Cause
Modulator cell configuration does not agree with menu setting of installed
cells.
Action
1. Ensure correct number of cells are entered into menu setting.
2. Check modulator board.
3. Check that all fibers are connected.
Modulator watchdog flt F Fixed Cause
Modulator detected that the CPU stopped communicating with it.
Action
1. Reset drive control power.
2. Check that all boards are seated properly.
3. Check for proper grounding practices.
NXG Control

Loss of drive enable F SOP Cause
Modulator detected loss of drive enable.
Action
1. Reset drive control power.
2. Check for proper grounding practices.
Modulator battery low A Fixed Cause
The software detected a weak battery on the modulator board. This
battery is used to power the memory for the fault and historical logger.
Actions
1. Replace battery on modulator board.
Handling Low Voltage Power Supply Related Faults
Table 10-7 Low voltage power supply related faults

Hall effect pwr supply F Fixed Cause
Note: NXGII has a single One or both of the supplies that power the Hall effects on the drive output
power supply. has failed.
Actions
1. Verify +/-15 V on the Hall effect power supplies.
2. On the signal conditioning board (SCB) connector TB1, verify +15
Vdc (TB1 pin 2 referencing pin 6) and -15 Vdc (TB1 pin 4 referencing
pin 6 ) +/-5 %.
3. If +/-15 V is not present, check wiring from Hall effect power supplies
to the SCB.
4. If the signals are correct and the fault still exists, check TP23 on the
modulator board.
5. If the +5 Vdc signal is low:
– change the SCB and recheck
– change the 37 pin cable going from the SCB to the DCR
– replace the System I/O Board in the DCR.
Power supply F Fixed Cause
The chassis power supply has indicated a loss of power. This can either
be due to loss of AC or a failed power supply.
Action
1. Verify control power outputs.
2. Check wiring between the power supply and the SCB, and the I/O
Breakout board for NXGII.
NXG Control
Handling System I/O Related Faults
Table 10-8 System I/O related faults

Loss of signal (1 to 24) A Menu/ Cause
SOP The software detected a loss of signal on one of the 0 to 20 mA inputs
(1 to 24). This is usually a result of an open circuit or defective driver on
the current loop.
Actions
1. Check connection to the WAGO 0 to 2 0 mA input corresponding to
the loss of signal message and associated wiring.
2. Replace affected WAGO module.
Wago communication alarm A Fixed Cause
The software was unable to establish or maintain communication with
the WAGO I/O system. The fault is triggered when the lack of
communication exceeds timeout.
This alarm occurs only if the WAGO I/O system is detected but no I/O is
being used on the WAGO I/O system.
Actions
1. Verify that the cable between the CPU board and Wago
communication alarm module is connected properly.
2. Replace WAGO communication module.
3. Replace the CPU board.
Wago communication fault F SOP Cause
The software was unable to establish or maintain communication with
the WAGO I/O system. The alarm is triggered when the lack of
communication exceeds timeout.
This fault occurs only if I/O is being used on the WAGO I/O system.
Actions
1. Verify that the cable between the CPU board and WAGO
communication alarm module is connected properly.
2. Replace WAGO communication module.
3. Replace the CPU board.
Wago configuration F Fixed Cause
Number of WAGO modules does not equal number set in menu.
Action
1. Ensure correct number of WAGO modules are set in the menu.
2. Check WAGO modules and placement on the DIN rail.
NXG Control
Handling External Serial Communications Related Faults
Table 10-9 External serial communications related faults
Fault Display Type Enable Potential Causes and Corrective Actions

Keypad comm loss SOP SOP Cause
or Drive is not communicating to keypad.
Drive not communicating Action
1. Check keypad cable, connections.
2. Check for CPU failure.
Note: It is essential that the CPU Watchdog is enabled (2971) to properly
detect and respond to this situation.
Network 1 communication SOP SOP Cause
The drive is not communicating with the active external network.
Actions
1. Verify all network connections are secure.
2. Verify that the UCS board #1 and communications board are properly
seated.
3. If the source of the problem is not found, then replace the UCS board
#1 and then the communications board.
Network 2 communication SOP SOP Cause
The drive is not communicating with the active external network 2
Actions
1. Verify all network connections are secure.
2. Verify that the UCS board #2 and communications board are properly
seated.
3. If the source of the problem is not found, then replace the UCS board
#2 and then the communications board.
NXG Control
Handling Synchronous Transfer Related Faults
Table 10-10 Synch transfer related faults

Up transfer failed A SOP Cause
Time-out has occurred from request to up synch transfer complete.
Action
1. Check input line for voltage and distortion.
2. Check status of InsufficientOutputVolts_O flag or the output
voltage versus safe voltage to see if transfer is prohibited.
3. Increase menu setting, or set to zero to disable time out.
Down transfer failed A SOP Cause
Time-out has occurred from request to down synch transfer
Action
1. Check feedback voltage waveform.
2. Check status of InsufficientOutputVolts_O flag or the output
voltage versus safe voltage to see if transfer is prohibited.
3. Increase menu setting, or set to zero to disable time out.
Phase sequence F/A SOP Cause
Sign of input frequency and operating frequency are opposite. This will
prohibit a transfer but is not fatal for normal operation. This fault needs
to be enabled via the system program flags for transfer operations.
Action
Swap one pair of motor leads and change sign of speed command if
needed.
Handling User Defined Faults
Table 10-11 User defined faults

User defined fault (64) F/A SOP Cause
The UserFault_1 to UserFault_64 flags in the SOP have been set
to the value "true". These can be set up as either faults or alarms, and
the message can be defined via the SOP.
Action
Refer to Section User Faults and Alarms.
See also
User Faults and Alarms (Page 331)
NXG Control
Handling Cooling Related Faults
Table 10-12 Cooling related faults

One blower not avail A SOP Cause
Drive initiated alarm set when the OneBlowerLost_O SOP flag is set
true and the alarm is enabled by setting OneBlowerLost_EN_O true.
On an air cooled drive, when one of either of the cell blowers or
transformer blowers is not functioning, this is triggered via the SOP.
Action
1. Check physical input connected to SOP flag.
2. Check for faulty blowers or obstruction.
3. Consult Siemens customer service for correct SOP logic.
All blowers not avail F/A SOP Cause
Drive initiated alarm or fault when AllBlowerLost_O SOP flag is set
true and the alarm/fault is enabled by setting the
AllBlowerLostEn_O flag true. This defaults to a fault with no way to
change to a warning with this release. If an alarm is desired, then the flag
AllBlowersLostWn_O must also be set true. This is triggered by the
SOP when two of three cell banks or both transformer banks of blowers
are not functioning. This is primarily used as a trip alarm preceding an
over temperature trip, used on air cooled drives as part of the standard
SOP.
Action
2. Check for faulty blowers or obstruction.
Insufficient Cooling F/A SOP Cause
Drive initiated fault/alarm when the InsufficientCooling_O SOP
flag is set true and the InsufficientCoolingEn_O flag is set true to
enable it. The default is a fault. If you desire an alarm, then the flag
InsufficientCoolingWn_O must be set true. This is used when an
air filter becomes clogged to warn of reduced air flow. This is not part of
the standard SOP.
Action
2. Change filter or check for obstruction.
3. Check for loss of fan(s).
Note: On recent drives a separate PLC controls the cooling. In this case, refer to the supplied documentation. The following
faults will not occur within the drive if a separate cooling PLC is used.
NXG Control

One pump not available A SOP Cause
Drive initiated alarm when the OnePumpFailure_O SOP flag is set true
and the OnePumpFailureEn_O flag is true to enable it. The default is
an alarm and it cannot be changed. This is used in the standard SOP for
water-cooled drives as an alarm.
Action
2. Check for faulty pumps tripped CBs, or obstruction.
Both Pmps Not Available F/A SOP Cause
Drive initiated fault/alarm when the AllPumpsFailure_O SOP flag is
set true and the AllPumpsFailureEn_O flag is true to enable it. The
default is a fault, but it can be changed to an alarm by setting the
AllPumpsFailureWn_O flag true. This is used in the standard SOP for
water-cooled drives as a trip alarm.
Action
2. Check for faulty pumps tripped CBs, or obstruction.
Coolnt Conduct > 3 μS A SOP Cause
Drive initiated alarm when the CoolantConductivityAlarm_O SOP
flag is set true and the CoolantConductivityAlarmEn_O flag is true
to enable it. The default is an alarm and it cannot be changed. This is
used in the standard SOP for water-cooled drives as an alarm.
Action
2. Check conductivity level.
3. Check ionizer.
Coolnt Conduct > 5 μS F/A SOP Cause
Drive initiated fault/alarm when the CoolantConductivityFault_O
SOP flag is set true and the CoolantConductivityFaultEn_O flag
is true to enable it. The default is a fault, but it can be changed to an
alarm by setting the CoolantConductivityFaultWn_O flag true. This
is used in the standard SOP for water-cooled drives as a trip alarm.
Action
2. Check conductivity level.
3. Check ionizer.
NXG Control

Coolnt Inlet Temp > 60C F/A SOP Cause
Drive initiated alarm when the InletWaterTempHigh_O SOP flag is
set true and the InletWaterTempHighEn_O flag is true to enable it.
The default is an alarm but it can be changed to a fault by setting the
InletWaterTempHighWn_O flag to false. True is an alarm. This is
used in the standard SOP for water-cooled drives as an alarm.
Action
2. Check coolant temperature.
3. Check for flow.
Coolnt Inlet Temp < 22C F/A SOP Cause
Drive initiated alarm when the InletWaterTempLow_O SOP flag is set
true and the InletWaterTempLowEn_O flag is true to enable it. The
default is an alarm but it can be changed to a fault by setting the
InletWaterTempLowWn_O flag to false. True is an alarm. This is used
in the standard SOP for water-cooled drives as an alarm.
Action
3. Check for flow.
Cell Water Temp High F/A SOP Cause
Drive initiated alarm when the CellWaterTempHigh_O SOP flag is set
true and the CellWaterTempHighEn_O flag is true to enable it. The
default is an alarm but it can be changed to a fault by setting the
CellWaterTempHighWn_O flag to false. True is an alarm. This is used
in the standard SOP for water-cooled drives as an alarm.
Action
3. Check for flow.
Coolnt Tank Level < 30" A SOP Cause
Drive initiated alarm when the LowWaterLevelAlarm_O SOP flag is
set true and the LowWaterLevelAlarmEn_O flag is true to enable it.
The default is an alarm and it cannot be changed. This is used in the
standard SOP for water-cooled drives as an alarm.
Action
2. Check sensor.
3. Check and fill tank.
NXG Control

Coolnt Tank Level < 20" F/A SOP Cause
Drive initiated fault/alarm when the LowWaterLevelFault_O SOP flag
is set true and the LowWaterLevelFaultEn_O flag is true to enable it.
The default is a fault, but it can be changed to an alarm by setting the
LowWaterLevelFaultWn_O flag true. This is used in the standard SOP
for water-cooled drives as a trip alarm.
Action
2. Check sensor.
3. Check and fill tank.
Low Coolant Flow < 60% A SOP Cause
Drive initiated alarm when the LowWaterFlowAlarm_O SOP flag is set
true and the LowWaterFlowAlarmEn_O flag is true to enable it. The
default is an alarm and it cannot be changed. This is used in the standard
SOP for water-cooled drives as an alarm.
Action
2. Check sensor.
Low Coolant Flow < 20% F/A SOP Cause
Drive initiated fault/alarm when the LowWaterFlowFault_O SOP flag
is set true and the LowWaterFlowFaultEn_O flag is true to enable it.
The default is a fault, but it can be changed to an alarm by setting the
LowWaterFlowFaultWn_O flag true. This is used in the standard SOP
for water-cooled drives as a trip alarm.
Action
2. Check sensor.
Loss One HEX Fan A SOP Cause
Note: Hex fans are used on Drive initiated alarm when the LossOneHexFan_O SOP flag is set true
a water to air heat and the LossOneHexFanEn_O flag is true to enable it. The default is an
exchanger on water-cooled alarm and it cannot be changed. This is used in the standard SOP for
drives. water-cooled drives as an alarm.
Action
2. Check sensor.
3. Check for faulty fan.
4. Check for obstruction.
NXG Control

Loss All HEX Fans F/A SOP Cause
Drive initiated alarm/fault when the LossAllHexFan_O SOP flag is set
true and the LossAllHexFanEn_O flag is true to enable it. The default
is an alarm but it can be changed to a fault by setting the
LossAllHexFanWn_O flag to false. True is an alarm. This is used in the
Action
2. Check sensor.
3. Check for faulty fan..
All HEX Fans On A SOP Cause
Drive initiated alarm when the AllHexFansOn_O SOP flag is set true
and the AllHexFansOnEn_O flag is true to enable it. The default is an
alarm and it cannot be changed. This is used in the standard SOP for
water-cooled drives as an alarm.
Action
2. Check sensor.
3. Check for faulty fan.
NXG Control
Handling Input Transformer Temperature Related Faults
Table 10-13 Input transformer temperature related faults

Xformer OT Alarm A SOP Cause
Drive initiated alarm when the XformerOverTempAlarm1_O SOP flag
is set true and the XformerOverTempAlarm1En_O flag is true to enable
it. The default is an alarm and it cannot be changed. This is used in the
Action
2. Check sensors.
3. Check blowers if air cooled or flow and water temperature if water-
cooled.
Xformer OT Trip Alarm A SOP Cause
Drive initiated alarm when the XformerOverTempAlarm2_O SOP flag
is set true and the XformerOverTempAlarm2En_O flag is true to enable
it. The default is an alarm and it cannot be changed. This is used in the
Action
2. Check sensors.
cooled.
NXG Control

Xformer OT Fault F/A SOP Cause
Drive initiated fault/alarm when the XformerOverTempFault_O SOP
flag is set true and the XformerOverTempFaultEn_O flag is true to
enable it. The default is a fault, but it can be changed to an alarm by
setting the XformerOverTempFaultWn_O flag true. This is used in the
standard SOP for water-cooled drives as a trip alarm.
Action
2. Check sensors.
cooled.
Xfrm Cool OT Trip Alarm A SOP Cause
Drive initiated alarm/fault when the XformerWaterTempHigh_O SOP
flag is set true and the XformerWaterTempHighEn_O flag is true to
enable it. The default is an alarm and it cannot be changed. This is used
in the Standard SOP for water-cooled drive as an alarm.
Action
2. Check flow and water temperature.
NXG Control
Handling Input Reactor Temperature Related Faults
Table 10-14 Input reactor temperature related faults

Reactor OT Alarm A SOP Cause
Drive initiated alarm when the ReactorTemperature1_O SOP flag is
set true and the ReactorTemperature1En_O flag is true to enable it.
Standard SOP for water-cooled drives as an alarm.
Action
1. Check output current waveform for sinusoidal shape.
2. Check sensor.
Reactor OT Trip Alarm A SOP Cause
Drive initiated alarm when the ReactorTemperature2_O SOP flag is
set true and the ReactorTemperature2En_O flag is true to enable it.
Standard SOP for water-cooled drives as an alarm.
Action
2. Check sensor.
Reactor OT Fault F/A SOP Cause
Drive initiated fault/alarm when the ReactorTemperatureFault_O
SOP flag is set true and the ReactorTemperatureFaultEn_O flag is
true to enable it. The default is a fault, but it can be changed to an alarm
by setting the ReactorTemperatureFaultWn_O flag true. This is used
in the Standard SOP for water-cooled drives as a trip alarm.
Action
2. Check sensor.
NXG Control
Handling Cell Bypass Related Faults
Table 10-15 Cell bypass related faults

Cell Bypass COM Fail F Fixed Cause
The NXG Control System is not communicating with the MV bypass
board. Bypass is in use.
Action
1. Verify the fiber optic connection between the modulator board and
MV bypass board is intact.
2. Replace modulator board
3. Replace MV bypass board
Cell Bypass Acknowledge F Fixed Cause
The NXG Control issued a command to bypass a cell, but the MV bypass
board did not return an acknowledgement.
Action
1. Verify that the bypass contactor is working properly.
2. Check wiring between MV bypass board and contactor.
3. Replace MV bypass board or contactor.
Cell Bypass Link F Fixed Cause
board, i.e. the MV bypass board is either not receiving commands, or is
getting parity errors in the messages from the modulator boards. Bypass
is in use.
Action
Refer to Cell bypass COM fail above.
Cell Bypass COM Alarm A Fixed Cause
board, but the bypass system is not in use.
Action
Cell Bypass Link Alarm A Fixed Cause
The modulator board is not communicating with the MV bypass board,
but the bypass system is not in use.
Action
Cell Bypass Fault F Fixed Cause
The cell failed to go into bypass when commanded to do so.
Action
1. Check bypass system, contactor MV bypass board, and modulator
board.
2. Refer to Cell bypass COM fail above.
NXG Control

Bypass Hardware Alarm A Fixed Cause
This alarm occurs when the mechanical bypass is enabled, no Cell
Bypass Link Alarm and Cell Bypass Com Alarm are detected, and any
one of the following occur(s):
● Coil acknowledges are not valid (i.e., acknowledge is high when in-
bypass is not requested).
● Bypass board does not acknowledge enable signal.
● 32 V is missing on the bypass board.
● 72 V is missing on the bypass board.
● Watchdog Reset is active on the bypass board.
● Power Reset is active on the bypass board.
Action
1. Check supply voltage to MV bypass board.
2. Replace MV bypass board.
xx Bypass Verify Failed F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted Bypass contactor closure verify failed. Request and acknowledge do not
match.
Action
Check bypass system, contactor MV bypass board, and modulator board.
xx Bypass Ack Failed F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted Bypass contactor closure acknowledge failed.
Action
Check bypass system, contactor MV bypass board, and modulator board.
xx Bypass Avail Warning A Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted Cell level bypass unavailable alarm. Only if bypass is used but not active.
Action
Check bypass system, fiber optic cable, MV bypass board, and supply.
NXG Control
10.3 Cell Faults and Alarms
Handling Non-specific (Global) Cell Related Faults
Table 10-16 Non-specific (global) cell related faults

Cell Count Mismatch F Fixed Cause
The software detected a difference in the number of cells detected versus
the installed cells/phase menu (2530).
Action
1. Verify that the installed cells/phase menu (2530) matches the actual
number of cells in the system.
2. Verify all fiber optic cable connections are correct.
4. Replace fiber optic board(s).
Cell DC Bus Low A Fixed Cause
Cell DC bus below alarm level. This is set by the cell control board and
comes back from the cell as Cell DC bus low for WCIII, HV and HV AP
cells only (CellBusLowFlag_I SOP flag).
Action
1. Check for single phase input, low input line conditions, blown input
fuses.
2. Check for a cell control board failure.
HV AP Cell Mismatch Flt F Fixed Cause
Only occurs with HV cell types. If 1375 HV is selected, any AP type cell
detected will set this fault.
When the 1375 HV AP cell type is selected, a non-AP cell type (no link
fault) or an AP cell that produces a HV AP configuration cell fault, will set
the mismatch fault. This drive fault is persistent and not resettable.
Action
1. Program cell with proper firmware if all protections are in place.
2. Replace non-matching cell.
Cell originating faults and alarms are logged by the PC board following a power cell fault
indication. These faults are available for inspection using one of the following methods:
● through the keypad display
● uploaded to a PC via the serial port
● uploaded to a PC via the Drive Tool
All active cell faults and alarms are displayed on the keypad display. Use the arrow keys to
scroll up and down through the faults. Use the alarm/fault log upload function (6230) in the
NXG Control
alarm/fault log menu (6210) to upload the log to a PC for analysis and for sending to the
appropriate Siemens or plant personnel.
All cell faults are generated by circuitry located on the cell control board (CCB) of each power
cell and are received by the microprocessor board through circuitry on the digital modulator
board. Use the following table as a quick troubleshooting guide to locate the cause of the fault
condition. This table lists faults that may occur in all Perfect Harmony drives unless otherwise
noted. All cell faults are initiated by the CCB located in each power cell.
Handling Specific (Individual) Cell Faults
Table 10-17 Specific (individual) cell faults

xx Control Fuse Blown F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted One or more of the input power fuses to a cell are open.
Action
Determine the reason for the fuse failure then repair, if required, and
replace the fuse.
xx OverTemp Warning A SOP Cause
xx = cell that has alarm Cell temperature is above the programmable alarm limit. Each cell sends
a PWM signal to the modulator board. On AP cells - WCIII, LNG, and HV
AP, the temperature is returned in a word of this protocol.
This signal represents the heat sink temperature. The temperature has
exceeded the alarm level (20% duty cycle default setting.)
Action
1. Check the condition of the cooling system.
2. Check motor load conditions.
xx Over Temperature F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted Each cell sends a PWM signal to the modulator board. On AP cells -
WCIII, LNG, and HV AP, the temperature is returned in a word of this
protocol.
This signal represents the heat sink temperature. The temperature has
exceeded the fixed fault level (80% duty cycle).
Action
1. Check the condition of the cooling system.
2. Refer to the Operating Instructions manual.
xx Device Alarm A Fixed Cause
xx = cell that has alarm In WCIII, LNG, and HV cells, a number of conditions are monitored that
put stress on the device (OOS, switching fail, or switch without
command). After a combination of several events occur, this pending
alarm is set and cannot be cleared. After 18 OOS events occur (non-
sequential) the alarm is set.
Action
1. Acknowledge alarm to continue running until one of the following
options can be done.
2. Replace cell.
3. Replace device in cell. Reset cell internally (Siemens personnel only).
NXG Control

xx Device Failure F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted In WCIII, LNG, and HV Cells, a number of conditions are monitored that
put stress on the device. After a combination of additional events occur
after an alarm, or three successive events within 60 seconds, this fault
is set and cannot be cleared. If 20 non-sequential OOS events occur (or
three successive OOS events within 60 seconds) the fault is set.
This fault can also occur if the cell control board is malfunctioning. It is
also set by arc detection, or voltage or current in idle, a CCB watchdog
trip, or bootloader problem.
Sets the "Cell_I" SOP flag.
Action
1. Reset fault to bypass cell to continue running until one of the following
options can be done.
2. Change out cell.
3. Change out device in cell. Reset cell internally (Siemens personnel
only).
xx Control Power F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted MV is okay but control power to the cell is below an acceptable level.
One or more of the control power fuses is blown and/or the DC bus is
low possibly due to power fuses. Not all cells have control power fuses.
Action
1. Check and replace blown cell control fuse or input power fuses.
2. Repair or replace the CCB.
xx IGBT OOS n F Fixed Cause
n = 1,2,3,4 Each gate driver board includes circuits which verify that each IGBT has
xx = cell that is faulted fully turned on. This fault may indicate a bad gate driver, an open IGBT,
or a failure in the detection circuitry, i.e. logic low signals on opto-couplers
on gate drive board usually as a result of a Q1, Q2, Q3, or Q4 collector-
to-emitter short in the cell’s power bridge.
Action
Check the cell’s power components and gate driver board.
xx Cap Share F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted A capacitor share fault usually indicates that the voltage shared by the
two or three DC link capacitors in series, is not being shared equally, i.e.
the voltage on an individual capacitor in a cell has been detected over
1/2 or 1/3 rated cell DC bus voltage. This can be caused by a broken
bleeder resistor, or wire, or a failed DC link capacitor (C1 and/or C2).
Action
1. Refer to the Operating Instructions manual.
2. Contact Siemens customer service.
xx Link F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted Cell communication link failure. The cell failed to respond to a modulator
command packet.
Action
1. Check fiber optic cable connection on both ends.
2. Cell may need to be serviced.
3. Change fiber optic cable or modulator board.
4. Change CCB.
NXG Control

xx Communication F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted An error in the optical communications from the modulator was detected
by a cell. This is usually a parity error caused by noise, but can also be
a time-out error caused by a faulty communications channel on the CCB.
Action
1. Check fiber connections.
2. Change CCB.
3. Change fiber.
4. Change modulator board.
xx Control Fuse Blown F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted Cell control power fuse blown. This is rarely seen since the CCB has a
dual source of power.
Action
Check cell fuses, replace if necessary.
xx DC Bus Low Warning A Fixed Cause
xx = cell that has alarm Cell DC bus is below alarm level. This is for WCIII, LNG, or HV cells only.
Action
Check for single phase input, low input line conditions, blown input fuses.
xx AC Vav Low Warning A Fixed Cause
xx = cell that has alarm Cell AC input is below alarm level. This is set by the CCB and comes
back from the cell as /Vavail_ok internal flag in all cells except WCIII,
LNG, and HV.
Action
1. Check for single phase input, low input line conditions, blown input
fuses.
2. Check for CCB failure.
xx DC Bus Over Volt F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted The bus voltage in a cell has been detected over limit, i.e., the signal on
the VDC test point is >8.0 VDC. This is usually caused by a regeneration
limit that is too high, or improper tuning of the drive.
Action
Refer to the Operating Instructions manual.
xx DC Bus Under Volt F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted The DC bus voltage detected in a cell is abnormally low. The signal on
test point VDC on the CCB is <3.5 VDC. If this symptom is reported by
more than one cell, it is usually caused by a low primary voltage on the
main transformer T1.
Action
1. Check input line voltage.
2. Check for faults on other cells.
NXG Control
The following cell faults will occur only during the cell diagnostic mode immediately following
initialization or reset. All IGBTs in each cell are sequentially gated and checked for proper
operation, i.e. blocking or not blocking. See Table Diagnostic cell faults.
Note
Switching and blocking tests
Not every cell type has switching and blocking tests. Refer to the Operating Instructions
manual.
Table 10-18 Diagnostic cell faults

xx Blocking Qn F Fixed Cause
n = 1,2,3,4 During cell diagnostic mode, the drive checks the voltage across each
xx = cell that is faulted IGBT under "gate off" conditions. A blocking failure is reported if
insufficient voltage is detected when power transistors are off (not gated).
This may indicate a damaged IGBT, or a malfunctioning gate driver board
or CCB. No subsequent switching test will be performed on the cell.
Action
xx Switching Qn F Fixed Cause
n = 1,2,3,4 During cell diagnostic mode, the drive turns each IGBT on one-by-one,
xx = cell that is faulted and verifies the collapse of voltage across the devices. A switching failure
is reported if a device is supporting voltage while it is gated on, i.e.
voltages on test points VT1 and VT2 on the CCB are > ±0.5 VDC when
power transistors Q1-Q4 are gated. Usually, this fault is caused by a
malfunctioning gate driver board, IGBT, or CCB.
Action
xx Blocking Timeout F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted Blocking test timeout. A cell failed the blocking test. No subsequent
switching test will be performed on the cell.
Action
Check cell, or back EMF too high.
xx Switching Timeout F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted Switching test timeout. A device failed the switching test after
successfully passing blocking.
Action
Check cell, or back EMF too high to run the test.
xx Bad Cell Data F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted For non-AP cells, the mode returning does not match requested mode
data.
For AP cells, the returned data is not as expected (EPLD status lower 4
bits does not equal Dh).
Action
1. Change modulator
2. Change CCB.
NXG Control

xx Cell Fault/Modulator F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted Cell is showing a fault, but no fault can be determined.
Action
1. Change CCB
2. Change modulator
xx DC Bus Dischrge alrm A Fixed Cause
xx = cell that has alarm For HV Cells, upon removal of the input voltage, a discharge bleeding
resistor connects across the DC bus in 3 seconds. Failure to turn on
causes the alarm.
Action
Cell must be repaired. Failure in this circuit allows an unsafe voltage to
remain in the cell for an extended time.
The faults listed in the following table are related only to cells that have advanced protocol
(AP); 600V AFE, 750V AP, 750V AP 4Q, and 1375 HV AP cells. Some apply specifically to
only one type and are noted as such.
Table 10-19 AP cell faults
Fault Display Type Enable Potential causes and corrective actions

xx AFE Over-current F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted Excessive current detection in the active front end of the cell
Action
1. Check for excessive line transients
2. Check tuning in 600V AFE cells
3. Check angles in 750V AP 4Q
4. Check cell Hall effect
5. Check for loose connections
6. Replace CCB.
xx AFE Current Dev. F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted An AFE Current Dev fault occurs only for 600V AP AFE cells. This fault
indicates the cell is not able to produce the current requested.
Action
1. Check inductance of the input line reactors and replace if incorrect.
2. Check Hall effect transducers and CCB.
3. Study line conditions and reactive current demand at the time of the
fault.
4. Adjust "AFE Sat. filter" parameter ID 3046 as necessary.
5. Verify current loop tuning parameters are set correctly.
xx AFE Loss of Lock A Fixed Cause
xx = cell that has alarm This alarm occurs when the power cells AFE sync signal generated from
the modulator board is lost for 22 mS or the cell fails to get an update
after 58 carrier cycles.
Action
If it is determined that the line frequency did not go too low or that the
input breaker did not open while the drive was in operation, replace the
CCB and /or power cell.
NXG Control

xx Inlet Sensor Loss A Fixed Cause
xx = cell that has alarm This is a cell alarm that indicates the water temperature thermistor
resistance is too high. This alarm applies to 600 AP AFE, 750 AP, and
750 AP 4Q cells.
Action
1. Fix any loose connections.
2. Replace inlet water thermistor.
3. Replace CCB.
xx Outlet Sensor Loss F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted Outlet Sensor Loss is a cell fault that indicates the water temperature
thermistor resistance is too high. This fault only applies to 600 AP AFE,
750 AP, and 750 AP 4Q cells.
Action
1. Fix any loose connections.
2. Replace outlet water thermistor.
3. Replace CCB.
xx Air Temp. Warning A Fixed Cause
xx = cell that has alarm This alarm occurs when the power cell detects an air temperature greater
than 60° C at the CCB. This alarm applies to 600 AP AFE, 750 AP, 750
AP 4Q, and 1375 HV AP cells.
Action
1. Check for air restrictions to the cell and clear any obstructions.
2. Check for proper operation of heat exchanger blowers within the cell
cabinet and repair as necessary.
3. Fix any loose connections, replace outlet water thermistor, or replace
CCB
xx Over Temp. Switch A Fixed Cause
xx = cell that has alarm The over-temperature switch alarm occurs if water flow to the power cell
is insufficient to cool the cell. The overtemperature switch alarm is
applicable to 600 AP AFE, 750 AP, and 750 AP 4Q cells.
Action
1. Check for restricted water flow to the cell and correct as necessary.
2. Fix any loose connections
3. Replace CCB or replace cell
xx ADC Fail F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted This fault occurs if the analog to digital converter within the CCB ceases
to function. Applies to 600 AP AFE, 750 AP, 750 AP 4Q, and 1375 HV
AP cells.
Action
Replace CCB or power cell.
NXG Control

xx IGBT OOS n F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted Occurs when the IGBT doesn't switch properly when turned on, but has
n = 11, 12, 13,14,15,16 a voltage higher than the forward dropping voltage on the device. Applies
to 600 AP AFE and 750 AP 4Q cells.
Action
1. Check cell connections between boards, including the fiber link.
2. Change gate drive boards
3. Change cell CCB
4. Change IGBT
xx AFE Configuration F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted The AFE configuration fault occurs when a cell is not configured properly.
The AFE configuration switch fault is applicable to 600 AP AFE, 750 AP,
750 AP 4Q, and 1375 HV AP cells.
Note: On 1375 HV AP cells, this causes an unresettable HV AP mismatch
fault as well.
Action
1. Check fiber optic link connections
2. Replace CCB or replace modulator
xx Diff. Temp Warning A Fixed Cause
xx = cell that has alarm 600 AP AFE, 750V AP, 750V AP 4Q, and 1375 HV AP cells contain
sensors that monitor the inlet and outlet water temperature to the heat
sink within the cell. This difference between the inlet and outlet water
temperature is passed from each CCB to the modulator. The main
controller reads this difference in temperature and compares the value
to parameter AP diff temp fault lvl (2596).
When the difference between the inlet and outlet water temperature
exceeds the value of parameter (2596), a Cell Diff Temp alarm will occur.
Action
1. Replace clogged components within water path, i.e., cell, hoses, input
reactor.
2. Replace power cell.
xx Diff. Temp Fault F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted 600 AP AFE, 750V AP, 750V AP 4Q, and 1375 HV AP cells contain
sensors that monitor the inlet and outlet water temperature to the heat
sink within the cell. This difference between the inlet and outlet water
temperature is passed from each CCB to the modulator. The main
controller reads this difference in temperature and compares the value
to parameter AP diff temp fault lvl (2596).
When the difference between the inlet and outlet water temperature
exceeds the value of parameter (2596) by more than 2°C, a Cell Diff
Temp fault will occur.
Action
1. Replace clogged components within water path, i.e., cell, hoses, input
reactor.
2. Replace power cell.
NXG Control

xx AFE Will Not Run F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted This fault occurs if the AFE portion is asked to run when the conditions
within the cell will not allow the cells AFE portion to run. This applies to
AFE cells only (600V AFE AP and 750V AP 4Q).
Action
1. Verify that all fiber optic links are correctly connected to the
appropriate cells.
2. Verify input voltage feedback.
3. Apply medium voltage and use the "Set Angles" function to correctly
set the cell angles
xx Cell Protect Fault F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted This fault only applies when cells that use AP are used in the system.
This fault can be caused by the following conditions:
● CCB detected arc occurred by cell detection hardware.
● CCB detected bus over voltage while cell is in bypass.
● CCB detected input over current while cell is in bypass.
If no cause can be detected, or if the cell data cannot be retrieved, a
General Protection fault will appear alone.
Action
1. Check for evidence of cell damage.
2. Replace the CCB.
xx Improper cell type F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted This fault occurs if six-step cell is selected (750V AP 4Q) and cells do
not configure properly for any of the following reasons:
● Not a four-quadrant (regen) type cell
● DSP does not acknowledge six-step enabled
● EPLD does not acknowledge six-step enabled
Action
1. Check for proper CCB firmware and software
2. Replace failed cell(s) during maintenance
xx AFE Not Ready Warn A Fixed Cause
xx = cell that has alarm This alarm only applies when AFE cells that use AP are used in the
system. This alarm is caused by the following conditions:
● Medium voltage is OK
● Cell Diagnostics is finished
● AfeReadyToRun_I is false
● InvReadyToRun_I is true
Action
1. Determine cause of cell alarm
2. Re-run the angles on the cells
3. Check cell input fuses
4. Check running of Fiber Optics
5. Replace the CCB.
NXG Control

xx Temp Sensor Loss A Fixed Cause
xx = cell that has alarm This alarm occurs when either the heatsink OT sensor or the inlet
temperature sensor detect a condition higher than their setpoint. This
applies only to 1375 HV AP cells.
Action
1. Check for restricted water flow to the cell and correct as necessary.
2. Fix any loose connections
3. Replace CCB or replace cell
xx HV AP Configuration F Fixed Cause
xx = cell that is faulted The fault is set when the 1375 HV AP cell type is selected, and a non-
AP cell type (no link fault) is detected, or an AP cell that won't configure.
This cell fault will set the HV AP mismatch fault. This drive fault is
persistent and not resettable.
Action
1. Program cell with proper firmware if all protections are in place.
2. Replace non-matching cell.
10.3.1 Troubleshooting General Cell and Power Circuitry Faults

This section may vary per product. Refer to the Operating Instructions manual for specific
details. The types of faults addressed in this section include the following:
● AC fuse(s) blown faults
● control power faults
● device out of saturation (OOS) faults
● capacitor sharing faults
● bypass failed faults
● VDC undervoltage faults
● blocking failure faults
● switching failure faults.
Handling AC fuse(s) blown faults

These faults are caused by the blowing of the power fuses on the front end of the cell.
Action
1. Check the fuses and replace any that are blown, more than one could be blown.
2. Replace defective or damaged parts.
NXG Control
Handling control power faults

This fault is caused when one or more of the control fuses that supply power to the CCB are
blown. This is rarely seen because the CCB is supplied by 2 circuits: the control power supply
bridge and the DC link. If a control power fault is observed, the AC fuses might also be blown.
Action
Replace the defective or damaged parts.
Handling capacitor sharing faults

The cell capacitor bank is made up of from 2 to 3 series capacitor banks. Circuitry on the CCB
measures the voltage on each section and if the voltages are off by any amount, the fault is
set. This indicates that under load the capacitors are not sharing load evenly and could be the
result of faulty capacitors or loose connections.
Action
Fix or replace damaged or defective components.
Handling Q1-Q4 out of saturation (OOS) faults

Out of saturation faults occur when the transistor junction is depleted of charge carriers
resulting in a higher junction resistance. This in turn created a larger voltage drop and more
losses in the transistor which can lead to premature failure. The cause of the OOS can be a
defective gate driver board or a high di/dt transition on the device. The gate board is designed
with circuitry to detect the larger voltage drop when the device should be on, shutting down
the device in a fault condition. The fault can also be caused by a defective CCB or noise on
the CCB.
Repetitive OOS faults on a device can shorten the life of the device. The damage to the device
can be cumulative.
Action
The exact cause needs to be determined before pulling a power cell out of service.
Handling faults when bypass failed

This fault results from the failure of a cell to go into bypass when faulted. The cause can be
from a defective modulator board, bad link between the modulator and the MV bypass board,
a defective MV bypass board or supply, or a defective bypass contactor.
Action
Find and replace the faulty components.
Handling VDC undervoltage faults

The undervoltage fault occurs when the voltage drops below the threshold of the detection
circuitry on the CCB. This can be the result of a low MV level coupled with a high current
drainage by the load, or simply as an excessive load that may give a momentary spike in
current. It can also occur if one of the AC power fuses fails under load.
NXG Control
Action
1. Check the cell fuses and check the historic log for line dips.
2. Correct the problem before continuing operation. A faulty CCB could also give a false
indication.
3. Replace defective or faulty parts.
Handling blocking failure faults

Blocking failures occur when IGBTs short due to perforation of their junction caused by
excessive current, i.e. high current density. This may be a result of out of saturation conditions
and frequent trips. The device will need to be replaced when the cell is removed for service.
A defective gate driver may be the root cause. A faulty CCB or bad data from the CCB could
give a faulty indication of this fault.
Action
Replace damaged or defective parts.
Handling switching failure faults

Switching failures occur when a device opens or fails to turn on. It could also be caused by a
defective gate drive or a damaged device. Also, a defective CCB or modulator board could
give a faulty indication.
Repetitive OOS failures can degrade the device by reducing the conduction area. This would
result in higher current density, which could lead to eventual switching failure.
Action
Replace defective parts.
10.3.2 Troubleshooting Cell Over Temperature Faults

For water-cooled drives only, cell over temperature faults are typically caused by problems in
the coolant system. Use the following steps to troubleshoot this type of fault:
Course of action
1. Check the coolant system for proper flows and temperatures.
2. Inspect cell cooling paths for kinked hoses or major leaks.
3. Be sure all cell cabinet manifold valves are fully open.
4. Check that the blowers are working properly.
5. Check ambient temperature. Verify that all cabinet doors are shut to ensure proper air flow.
6. Check for faulty RTD on cell or a faulty CCB.
NXG Control
10.3.3 Troubleshooting Overvoltage Faults

This fault is usually caused by an improperly set-up or tuned drive. Use the following steps to
troubleshoot this type of fault.
Course of action
1. Verify that the motor and drive nameplate settings match parameters in the motor parameter
menu (1000) and drive parameter menu (2000).
2. Reduce the regen torque limit parameters (1200, 1220, 1240) in the limits menu (1120).
For WCIII (2 quadrant) and HV, set regen torque limit parameters to 0.15 %.
3. Reduce flux regulator proportional gain (3110) and flux regulator integral gain (3120)
parameters in the flux control menu (3100).
4. If the failure is occurring in bypass mode, increase the energy saver minimum flux (3170)
parameter in the flux control menu (3100) to at least 50%.
5. If the measured signals from the previous section seem to be correct, change the modulator
board.
10.3.4 Troubleshooting Cell Communications and Link Faults

Faults of this variety can be the result of circuit failures on either the digital modulator board
or CCB.
Course of action
1. Check fiber optic links and replace them, if defective.
2. Check or replace the CCB.
3. Reseat the fiber optic board and modulator board. Replace if necessary.
4. If the fault indication persists after replacing the digital modulator board, call Siemens
customer service.
10.3.5 Status Indicator Summaries for MV Mechanical Bypass Boards

The MV mechanical bypass board includes three LEDs that provide complete status of the MV
board. These LEDs are summarized in the following table.
Note
Designations for faults and alarms
User faults and alarms are closely tied to the SOP configuration and are designated here
generically as faults although they can be programmed as alarms only. Refer to Chapter
Operating the Software for more information.
NXG Control
10.5 Unexpected Output Conditions
Table 10-20 MV Mechanical Bypass Board Status LEDs
LED function Color Description

CommOK Green Indicates active communication link established with modulator board.
Fault Red Indicates that a bypass fault is active.
PwrOK Green This LED is hardware controlled and indicates that the 5 / 15 VDC supplies are in tolerance.
See also
Operating the Software (Page 283)
10.4 User Faults and Alarms

User faults occur due to conditions defined in the SOP. User faults are displayed on the keypad
in the form of user defined fault #n, where n equals 1 to 64. The faults can also be displayed
using user-defined text strings. Most user-defined faults are written to respond to various
signals from the WAGO I/O, such as the analog input modules through the use of comparators,
and the digital input modules.
A copy of the SOP is required to specifically define the origin of the fault. For example, the flag
UserFault1_O flag is used to display the event of a blower fault. The UserText1 string
pointer is used to display the specific fault message. If this string pointer is not used, then the
fault displayed would be "User Fault x" where x = 1 to 64.
In some cases, the drive will revert to operating conditions which limit the amount of output
current, output speed, or output voltage, with no apparent fault condition displayed. The most
usual causes of these conditions are described in the subsections that follow.
The keypad mode displays can sometimes be used to troubleshoot the cause of the output
limitation. On the standard keypad, the modes are displayed in two lines at the left of the keypad
display. On the multi-language keypad, the modes are displayed in two lines at the top of the
keypad display. Refer to Figures Dynamic Programmable Meter Display for each keypad in
Chapter Software User Interface.
Refer to Tables Summary of operation mode displays: line 1 and line 2 in Section Display of
Chapter Software User Interface . The tables list and describe the mode displays for the first
and second lines. The Code column of the tables lists the abbreviated message that is shown
on the keypad display. Further descriptions of possible limit situations and troubleshooting tips
are listed in the subsections that follow.
If the mode display shows one of the torque limit modes listed in the tables, the drive may be
in speed rollback mode. The drive is attempting to reduce the output speed due to a torque
limit condition. Use the following steps to troubleshoot this type of fault:
NXG Control
Action
1. Check the motor torque limit parameters (1190, 1210, 1230) in the limits menu (1120).
2. Check all motor and drive nameplate ratings against parameters set in the motor parameter
menu (1000) and the drive parameter menu (2000).
3. Check all causes of torque limit.
Note
Identifying spare parts
Spare parts are available through Siemens customer service. Check Operating
Instructions manual for parts identification.
See also
Display (Page 272)
10.5.1 Speed Rollback

Speed rollback is a feature of the speed regulator to prevent windup of the integrator term
when the regulator enters the non-linear state of being in torque limit. The output of the
regulator, which is the torque current reference, is clamped to one of the torque limits. This
sets the internal indicator as to whether the minimum limit (regeneration in forward direction)
or maximum limit (motoring in forward direction) is the active limit. The integrator is prevented
from winding up any further past the limit.
In the command generator algorithm, the speed ramp output (the speed regulator input) is
"rolled back" so that it maintains the speed regulator in saturation at the clamp limit but then
resets the ramp internal storage to that level.
This allows for a smooth transition when the limiting condition is removed. In recovery, the
ramp will then continue on from that point, to the desired speed demand until the speed
regulator is satisfied and the output speed matches the desired speed.
This action prevents a sudden speed or torque step should the torque limiting source, usually
the load, suddenly change. This allows for a smooth transition from the non-linear operating
condition.
SOP Indication of a Limiting Condition

When a torque limit is in effect and the speed rollback condition is in effect, the torque limit
causing the rollback can be indicated by one of the following indicator flags.
These flags are different than normal SOP flags. Once they are set, they will remain set until
a command is issued from the SOP to reset them. This is true even if the condition causing
the speed rollback is transitory. As shown in the following table, the first 10 flags are specific
indicators, the 11th flag is a generic flag that will be set when any rollback is in effect, and the
12th flag is toggled within the SOP to reset the latch on the other flags.
The idea of the latched flags is to prevent missing any conditions during a transitory rollback.
NXG Control
Table 10-21 Speed Rollback Indicator Flags
Speed Rollback Indicator Flag Description

MenuTorqRollback_I Menu torque limit is causing rollback
CellOverloadRollback_I Cell overload is causing rollback
SinglePhaseRollback_I Single phase condition is causing rollback
UndervoltageRollback_I Under voltage condition is causing rollback
FldWeakeningRollback_I Field weakening is causing rollback
TolRollback_I Thermal overload (TOL) is causing rollback
Network1Rollback_I Network1 torque limit is causing rollback
Network2Rollback_I Network2 torque limit is causing rollback
AnalogInRollback_I Analog input torque limit is causing rollback
OverVoltRegenRollback_I Regenerative rollback for six-step overvoltage is active
ARollbackOccurred_I Any rollback has occurred (global generic flag)
ResetIndicatorFlags_O Resets all the above latching indicator flags
SpeedRollupActive_I The drive is in the regenerative limit rollback state. This is known as "rollup" since the
ramp output is adjusted as for motoring torque limit Rollback, but the result is a speed
reference higher than before the limit condition occurs. This flag is not latched.
Disabling Speed Rollup

Speed rollback is a normal process during ramp stopping, or in full four quadrant control. Not
all processes are conducive to the speed rollback operation when the drive is in a regeneration
limit. Other processes may find it unacceptable when the torque limit occurs during the
regeneration quadrant in the motor, resulting in "speed rollup". This is when the torque limit is
preventing the motor from regenerating too quickly. The ramp is still affected, but the ramp
output will be forced to go up in speed to get to the equilibrium point of the speed reference
(the input of the speed regulator) to maintain the regulator just inside the saturation point.
This is generally true if the load is slowing down more than the speed ramp, resulting in a
regenerative condition of the motor. The ramp will "rollup" to prevent the speed error from
climbing too high. This type of load is referred to as an "over-hauling" load. An example might
be a pump with a large column of liquid or a draft fan with air flow pushing back on the blade.
These would tend to push the motor in the reverse direction requiring the drive to "regen" to a
stop before going forward. In four quadrant drive applications, this type of load is more common.
SOP flags can be used to identify or disable this condition as listed in the table below.
Table 8-10: Speed Rollup Control Flags
Table 10-22 Speed Rollup Control Flags
Speed Rollup Control Flag Description

DisableSpeedRollup_O This flag disables the speed rollback completely, for both minimum and maximum limits
in motoring and in regeneration of the motor.
SpeedRollupActive_I This flag is set when the regenerative limit is in effect and a rollup condition exists.
A special condition can occur in lightly loaded drives, usually on test stands where small motors
are used on a much bigger drive, or if a transorb in the output voltage feedback goes bad. With
NXG Control
10.6 Drive Input Protection
rollup in this case, the speed reference goes higher than the commanded speed (speed
demand). Disable speed rollup to eliminate this condition.
Speed Rollup Disable Flag

The speed rollup disable flag can be set in two ways:
● setting the SOP flag true
● setting the SOP flag conditionally.
When enabled it works as follows. If a rollup condition exists, the drive will set the
SpeedRollupActive_I flag. This can be used in the SOP as an indicator, but is not required
in the operation of this feature.
When the motor is above 10% rated speed, the feature will simply disable rollback of the speed
ramp, and the ramp will work normally. This may cause a larger speed error since nothing is
limiting the speed reference - the output of the ramp and input to the speed regulator.
Since the speed regulator output (the regenerative torque reference) is already clamped, the
condition is transparent to the system. When the ramp feedback goes below 10% of rated
speed, it goes into a special hold mode that does not let it go any lower until the speed feedback
gets down to 10%. Once the motor speed feedback goes below 10%, the speed rollup is
disabled, and the drive will continue to run as if the feature is disabled.
This section describes the routines used to detect abnormal conditions due to an internal drive
failure and provide protection to the drive. The faults generated by the routines may be used
with suitable interlocking, via a relay output and/or serial communication, to disconnect medium
voltage from the drive input.
Setting the input protection fault produces the fault message "Input Protection Fault". An
external key-switch is required for resetting the fault and the LFR.
For air-cooled 6SR4[ ]02 (GenIV) or water-cooled 6SR3[ ]52 (WCIII) cells, the input protection
is handled entirely via the dedicated I/O on the system I/O and breakout board. This also
applies to drives with parameter Dedicated Input Protect (7108) enabled "on". Refer to Section
Dedicated I/O For Input Protection.
Note
From Version 5.1.0 software onwards, both the CIMV and TIMV will open on an input
protection (IP) fault.
Input Over-Voltage Fault

From Version 5.1.0 software onwards, this fault will create an Input Protection (IP) fault. It is
hard-coded to create the fault if the input line voltage exceeds 120%. This is only true for
dedicated I/O IP. SOP based IP must include the input over-voltage,
LineOverVoltageFault_I, fault in the IP logic.
NXG Control
Cell Based Protection Faults

Cells with the AP protocol may have additional cell-based IP sensing. Refer to the Operating
Instructions manual. These include:
● arc flash detection
● over-voltage with cell in bypass
● over-current with cell in bypass.
These are cell dependent. If the cells contain these faults, they too will trigger an IP fault.
SOP Triggered Input Protection

External events can be used to trigger an IP fault. This is accomplished through the use of the
SOP flag SetIPFault_O. Setting this true for any SOP logic statement will result in generating
an IP fault.
Transformer Over-Temperature and Loss of Cooling

The temperatures of all secondary windings are monitored using two series-connected sets
of thermal switches which are normally closed. The first set opens when the transformer
temperature is above the alarm 1 temperature, the second set opens when the transformer
temperature is above the alarm 2 temperature. Two outputs, one output corresponding to each
set, are read by the control logic. A Xfrmr Temperature Alarm 1 is issued when one or more
alarm 1 switches open. A Xfrmr Temperature Alarm 2 is issued when one or more alarm 2
switches open. When both these conditions exist for 30 seconds, a Xfrmr Over Temp Fault is
generated that causes the drive to trip.
A flow sensor monitors liquid coolant flow through the Water-cooled Drive. The implementation
and use of this sensor are application dependent. As a standard default, the alarm Loss of
Coolant Flow is issued whenever the detected coolant flow rate is below a pre-set level for a
pre-set time.
The SOP can be used to trip the input Medium Voltage Breaker when the conditions of Xfrmr
Temperature Alarm 1, Xfrmr Temperature Alarm 2, and Loss of Coolant Flow exist
simultaneously.
Dedicated I/O For Input Protection

For air-cooled 6SR4[ ]02 (GenIV) or water-cooled 6SR3[ ]52 (WCIII) drives, the NXG software
controls the I/O involved with input protection. No intervention is required for activating this
usage other than selecting one of these cell types.
Dedicated I/O protection is supported by the Dedicated Input Protect parameter (7108). It
selects the dedicated I/O used with air-cooled 6SR4[ ]02 or water-cooled 6SR3[ ]52 for any
cell type. All input protection is handled independent of the SOP.
For drives other than air-cooled 6SR4[ ]02 or water-cooled 6SR3[ ]52, the parameter Dedicated
Input Protect (7018) can be used to enable the same protection if the system I/O board is
installed and the inputs and outputs are wired correctly. The SOP flags that would normally
be associated with these inputs and outputs are disabled, and have no effect when the
associated cells are selected.
NXG Control
This parameter can only enable, and cannot disable pre-assigned cell types currently hard-
coded. The fall-back for all cell types, if the parameter is not set, or if the system I/O board is
not detected, is to use SOP flags.
NOTICE
If this parameter is not used for HV-AP cell types, then all associated cell protection SOP
flags must be added to the SOP Input Protection logic to ensure that the drive has the required
protection.
In fall-back mode, the SOP is responsible for acting on protection detection SOP flags,and in
opening the input MV breaker. The SOP for these cases, must contain all the logic to properly
utilize the protection flags and assert the proper I/O to remove the connection to the MV supply
in a timely manner.
The following inputs and outputs are dedicated to input protection:
IDO_9 M1 close command This is used only with pre-charge:

● Closes the CIMV relay to pick up the MV breaker.
● Opens if TIMV drops out on an IP fault.
IDO_14 M1 permissive This opens with an IP fault and closes after the IP fault is reset,
(allows the circuit to including the Latch Fault Relay (LFR). When opened, this causes
close M1 to be the TIMV to drop out to trip the MV breaker.
completed by the
customer)
IDO_15 LFR IP latch pulse This delivers a 1 second pulse to trip the LFR with an input
protection fault.
DI-3E LFR Status This reports the status of the LFR.
(Input protection)
Refer to Sections System Inputs and Outputs and Breakout Board in Chapter Hardware
Interface Description, for descriptions of the internal I/O. If the dedicated feature is turned on,
the associated SOP flags are no longer connected.
System Arc Fault

This feature allows external detection circuitry to inform the NXG control that an arc fault
occurred and to remove MV power. The drive is then aware of the external event, and will log
it in the fault and event logs. This fault does not cause the removal of the MV power, it records
the event after the fact. Refer to Section System Arc Detection of Chapter Operating the Control
for information about this safety feature.
See also
System Inputs and Outputs (Page 51)
Breakout Board (Page 55)
System Arc Detection (Page 154)
NXG Control
10.7 Flash Disk Corruption
10.7 Flash Disk Corruption

Do not use Windows Explorer or any other operating system to update flash disk files or copy
files to the flash disk. Doing so can corrupt the flash disk contents without any visible warnings.
This is due to an incomplete write function or corruption of the boot sector of the flash disk.
Only use the Configuration Update Tool in the ToolSuite to update drive software or to copy
or clone drive settings. Proper use of this tool can help prevent corruption of flash media. Use
the Drive Tool for adding or removing SOP files.
Do not remove control power while a flash write operation is in progress. This can also corrupt
the flash disk. Wait 1 minute before removing control power after a drive fault or parameter
change, to allow sufficient time for the flash write to complete. Both the event log and parameter
configuration file reside on the flash disk.
The latest ToolSuite tools provide all the necessary functionality to update, copy, or delete files
from the flash disk. It is not necessary to use Windows Explorer, or other OS tools to read or
write to the flash disk.
NXG Control
NEMA Table A
The inverse time algorithms will only work correctly if the proper Max Motor Inertia is used. If
this is known from the manufacturer, enter this value into parameter “Maximum Motor Inertia”
(ID 1159).
If this value is zero, the NXG software will attempt to calculate the value based on the “Motor
kW Rating” (1010) and the synchronous speed (based on Motor Frequency (1020) and Full
Load Speed (1030)).
If the values are outside of the range of the NEMA Table 20-1 from NEMA Standard MG-1 in
either HP (kW) or Synchronous Speed, then the maximum value for the synchronous speed
column must be used.
The table below provides the NEMA table values in SI units, converted from lb-ft² to kg-m², for
easier application on the drive. Enter the result into the Maximum Motor Inertia parameter.
The table below was created by converting NEMA Table 20-1 values using the following
calculation:
Load Wk² = A * [Hp0.95 / (rpm/1000)2.4] - 0.0685 * [Hp1.5 / (rpm/1000)1.8]

Hp column and converting to kW by multiplying HP * 0.746
kW = 0.746 * Hp
Then converting the equivalent inertia from Wk² to SI by dividing lb-ft² by 23.73
1 kg-m² = 23.73 lb-ft² therefore:
J (kg-m²) = J (lb-ft²) / 23.73
Table A-1 NEMA Table 20-1 from NEMA Standard MG-1 1993 Part 20.42 converted to SI units, Maximum Load Inertia for
Polyphase Squirrel-Cage Induction Motors in kg-m²
Inertia from kW and speed in units of Kg-m² (23.73 lb-ft² = 1 kg-m²)

Hp kW 3600 1800 1200 900 720 600 514 450 400 360 327 300
100 75 533.9 709.2 914.5 1150.9 1419.7
125 93 657.8 874.4 1127.7 1419.3 1750.9
150 112 565.1 780.4 1037.1 1338.0 1683.9 2077.5
200 149 508.2 738.7 1020.6 1356.9 1750.5 2204.0 2718.1
250 187 401.6 624.9 908.6 1255.8 1670.5 2157.6 2713.9 3350.2
300 224 275.6 474.9 739.6 1075.9 1487.1 1978.9 2553.7 3219.6 3973.9
350 261 317.3 547.0 852.5 1240.2 1715.5 2284.0 2945.6 3712.6 4584.9
400 298 176.9 358.2 617.8 963.8 1402.4 1940.6 2583.2 3337.5 4205.6 5191.7
450 336 196.6 398.7 687.7 1073.3 1563.0 2161.8 2878.2 3721.0 4690.3 5790.1
500 373 216.2 438.3 756.8 1182.0 1721.4 2385.2 3173.2 4100.3 5166.5 6384.3
600 448 18.7 92.8 254.1 516.2 893.0 1395.3 2033.7 2815.0 3754.7 4850.4 6114.6 7555.8
700 522 21.2 105.9 290.8 592.5 1025. 1604.3 2338.8 3240.6 4323.6 5587.9 7045.9 8710.5
7
NXG Control
NEMA Table

Hp kW 3600 1800 1200 900 720 600 514 450 400 360 327 300
800 597 23.6 118.6 327.0 667.1 1156. 1809.9 2642.2 3662.0 4884.1 6312.7 7964.6 9848.3
3
900 671 25.9 131.0 362.0 740.0 1284. 2011.8 2937.2 4075.0 5436.2 7033.3 8874.8 10969.2
5
1000 746 28.2 143.0 396.5 811.6 1410. 2212.4 3228.0 4483.8 5979.8 7741.3 9768.2 12081.8
0
1250 933 33.3 171.6 479.6 985.7 1716. 2697.0 3944.4 5478.3 7315.6 9473.2 11963. 14804.0
8 8
1500 1119 38.0 198.6 558.8 1152. 2012. 3164.8 4635.5 6447.5 8617.8 11167. 14108. 17463.1
5 2 3 7
1750 1306 42.3 223.8 634.2 1313. 2296. 3619.9 5309.7 7391.5 9886.2 12819. 16207. 20067.4
5 7 2 3
2000 1492 46.2 247.8 707.1 1469. 2574. 4066.6 5967.1 8314.4 11129. 14437. 18259. 22629.6
0 8 4 4 6
2250 1679 49.7 270.5 776.7 1619. 2848. 4500.6 6611.9 9216.2 12347. 16026. 20278. 25115.9
5 7 2 1 1
2500 1865 52.9 292.0 844.1 1765. 3110. 4922.0 7239.8 10101. 13539. 17585. 22250. 27602.2
7 0 1 8 3 3
3000 2238 58.4 331.2 970.9 2044. 3615. 5739.6 8457.6 11820. 15866. 20623. 26127. 32406.2
7 7 5 0 7 3
3500 2611 62.8 366.6 1089. 2309. 4100. 6523.4 9633.4 13480. 18112. 23556. 29877. 37126.0
3 3 3 8 1 7 8
4000 2984 66.2 398.7 1199. 2557. 4559. 7273.5 10762. 15086. 20295. 26422. 33544. 41677.2
3 9 6 7 4 0 3 0
4500 3357 68.6 426.5 1301. 2793. 5002. 7998.3 11858. 16645. 22418. 29203. 37126. 46144.1
7 9 1 4 6 9 5 0
5000 3730 70.0 451.7 1397. 3021. 5423. 8697.9 12916. 18154. 24483. 31942. 40581. 50484.6
4 5 5 1 2 8 7 5
5500 4103 70.7 473.7 1486. 3232. 5828. 9367.9 13940. 19620. 26464. 34597. 43994. 54740.8
7 2 1 2 7 4 6 9
6000 4476 492.6 1569. 3434. 6215. 10021. 14934. 21049. 28445. 37168. 47324. 58912.8
7 5 8 1 7 3 0 1 1
7000 5222 522.5 1718. 3813. 6949. 11255. 16835. 23809. 32195. 42182. 53729. 67003.8
1 7 0 8 2 5 5 9 5
8000 5968 542.4 1845. 4150. 7627. 12410. 18630. 26380. 35819. 46944. 59924. 74799.8
3 9 5 5 4 1 6 8 1
9000 6714 552.9 1952. 4454. 8251. 13493. 20324. 28866. 39233. 51538. 65866. 82300.9
4 3 2 5 5 4 0 1 0
10000 7460 555.0 2040. 4728. 8824. 14504. 21913. 31226. 42520. 55920. 71597. 89549.1
9 2 3 8 2 3 0 8 1
11000 8206 2111. 4968. 9351. 15453. 23430. 33459. 45680. 60177. 77117. 96544.5
3 4 0 0 3 8 6 0 6
12000 8952 2166. 5183. 9839. 16338. 24863. 35608. 48672. 64222. 82427. 103329.
0 3 9 0 0 9 6 5 3 1
13000 9698 2204. 5372. 10282 17168. 26211. 37631. 51580. 68141. 87568. 109903.
0 9 .3 1 5 7 3 6 5 1
NXG Control
NEMA Table

Hp kW 3600 1800 1200 900 720 600 514 450 400 360 327 300
14000 10444 2229. 5533. 10686 17943. 27517. 39570. 54319. 71934. 92498. 116224.
2 1 .9 5 9 2 4 3 9 2
15000 11190 2237. 5667. 11057 18664. 28697. 41424. 56974. 75558. 97303. 122376.
7 9 .7 1 9 4 3 4 0 7
NXG Control
Abbreviations B
This appendix contains a list of symbols and abbreviations commonly used throughout this
manual group.
Table B-1 Commonly Used Abbreviations
Abbreviation Meaning
• or * Boolean AND logical operator
+ Addition or Boolean OR logical operator
∑ Summation
µ Micro
A Amp, Ampere
AC Alternating Current
accel Acceleration
A/D Analog to Digital Converter
AI Analog Input
Alg Analog
AP Advanced protocol for cell communications
avail Available
BTU British thermal units
C Centigrade or Capacitor
cap Capacitor
CCB Cell Control Board
ccw Counter clockwise
CE Formerly European Conformity, now true definition
CFM Cubic Feet per Minute
CLVC Closed Loop Vector Control
cmd Command
com Common
conn Connector
CPS Control Power Supply
CPU Central Processing Unit
CSMC Closed Loop Synchronous Motor Control
CT Current Transformer
cu Cubic
curr, I Current
cw Clockwise
D Derivative (PID), depth
D/A Digital-to-Analog (converter)
DAC Digital-to-Analog converter
NXG Control
Abbreviations
db Decibel
DC Direct Current
DCR Digital Control Rack
DCS Distributed Control System
decel Deceleration
deg, ° Degrees
Div Division
dmd Demand
e Error
ELV Extra Low Voltage
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMF Electromotive Force
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
EPS Encoder Power Supply
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
ESP Electrical Submersible Pump
ESTOP, e-stop Emergency Stop
fb, fdbk Feedback
ffwd Feed Forward
FLC Full Load Current
freq Frequency
ft, ' Feet
fwd Forward
gnd Ground
GUI Graphical User Interface
H Height
hex Hexadecimal
hist Historic
Hp Horsepower
hr Hour
HV High Voltage
HVAC Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning
Hz Hertz
I Integral (PID)
ID Identification
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor
In Input
In, " Inches
INH Inhibit
I/O Input(s)/Output(s)
IOB I/O Breakout Board
NXG Control
Abbreviations
IOC Instantaneous Overcurrent
IP Input Protection
k 1,000 (e.g., Kohm)
kHz KiloHertz
kV Kilo Volts
kVA One Thousand Volt Amps
kW Kilowatt
L Inductor
LAN Local Area Network
Lbs Pounds (weight)
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
ld Load
LED Light-emitting Diode
LFR Latch Fault Relay
Lim Limit
LOS Loss Of Signal
lps Liters Per Second
mA Milliamperes
mag Magnetizing
max Maximum
MCC Motor Control Center
Mg Milligram
Min Minimum, Minute
msec Millisecond(S)
MV Medium Voltage
mvlt Motor Voltage
MW Megawatt
NC Normally Closed
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association
NO Normally Open
NVRAM Non-Volatile Random Access Memory
NXG Next Generation Control
NXG II Next Generation Control II
OLVC Open Loop Vector Control
O-M Overmodulation
OOS Out-of-Saturation (IGBT)
overld Overload
P Proportional (PID)
Pa Pascals
pb Push Button
PC Personal Computer or Printed Circuit
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PID Proportional-Integral-Derivative
NXG Control
Abbreviations
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
PLL Phase Locked Loop
pot Potentiometer
pp Peak-to-peak
ppm Parts per Million
PPR Pulses per Revolution
PQM Power Quality Meter
ProToPS TM
Process Tolerant Protection Strategy
psi Pounds Per Square Inch
pt Point
PT Potential Transformer
PWM Pulse Width Modulation
Q1,Q2,Q3,Q4 Output Transistor Designations
rad Radians
RAM Random Access Memory
ref Reference
rev Reverse, Revolution(S)
RLBK Rollback
rms Root-mean-squared
RPM Revolutions Per Minute
RTD Resistance Temperature Detector
RTU Remote Terminal Unit
RX Receive (RS232 Communications)
s Second(s)
SCB Signal Conditioning Board
SCR Silicon Controlled Rectifier
sec Second(s)
ser Serial
SMC Synchronous Motor Control
SOP Sum-of-Products; System Operating Program
spd Speed
stab Stability
std Standard
sw Switch
T1, T2 Power Cell Output Terminals TI and T2
TB Terminal Block
TBD To Be Determined
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
THD Total Harmonic Distortion
TOL Thermal Overload
TP Test Point
trq, τ Torque
TX Transmit (RS232 Communications)
NXG Control
Abbreviations
UPS Uninterruptable Power Supply
V Voltage, Volts
VA Volt-Amperes
VAC Volts AC
var Variable
VDC Volts DC
vel Velocity (speed)
VFD Variable Frequency Drive
V/Hz Volts per Hertz
vlts Voltage(s), Volts
W Width, Watts
WAGO Brandname for Expansion I/O System
xfmr, xformer Transformer
NXG Control
Glossary
AND
AND is a logical Boolean function whose output is true if all of the inputs are true in SOP
notation, AND is represented as "∗" (e.g., C=A∗B), although sometimes it may be omitted
between operands with the AND operation being implied (e.g., C=AB).
ASCII
ASCII is an acronym for American Standard Code for Information Interchange, a set of 8-bit
computer codes used for the representation of text.
Baud rate
Baud rate is a measure of the switching speed of a line, representing the number of changes
of state of the line per second. The baud rate of the serial port of the Perfect Harmony is
selected through the Baud Rate parameter in the Communications Menu [9].
Bit
Bit is an acronym for BInary digiT. Typically, bits are used to indicate either a true (1) or false
(0) state within the drive’s programming.
Boolean algebra
A form of mathematical rules developed by the mathematician George Boole used in the design
of digital and logic systems.
Carrier frequency
Carrier frequency is the set switching frequency of the power devices (IGBTs) in the power
section of each cell. The carrier frequency is measured in cycles per second (Hz).
Catch a spinning load

"Catch a spinning load" is a feature that can be used with high-inertia loads (e.g., fans), in
which the drive may attempt to turn on while the motor is already turning. This feature can be
enabled via the NXG menu system.
CLVC
An acronym for Closed Loop Vector Control, one of the control modes in the drive. This is flux
vector control for an induction machine (IM), utilizing an encoder for speed feedback.
NXG Control
Glossary
Comparator
A comparator is a device that compares 2 quantities and determines their equality. The
comparator submenus allow the programmer to specify two variables to be compared. The
results of the custom comparison operations can be used in the system program.
Configuration Update
see Tool Suite definition.
Converter
The converter is the component of the drive that changes AC voltage to DC voltage.
Critical speed avoidance

Critical speed avoidance is a feature that allows the operator to program up to 3 mechanical
system frequencies that the drive will "skip over" during its operation.
CSMC
An acronym for Closed Loop Synchronous Machine (SM) Control, one of the control modes
of the drive. This is a flux vector control for a synchronous machine, utilizing an encoder for
speed feedback and providing a field excitation command for use by an external field exciter.
DC link
The DC link is a large capacitor bank between the converter and inverter section of the drive.
The DC link, along with the converter, establishes the voltage source for the inverter.
De Morgan’s Theorem
The duality principal of Boolean algebra used to convert system logic equations into sum-of-
products notation.
Debug Tool
Downloading
Downloading is a process by which information is transmitted from a remote device (such as
a PC) to the drive. The term "downloading" implies the transmission of an entire file of
information (e.g., the system program) rather than continued interactive communications
between the two devices. The use of a PC for downloading requires special serial
communications software to be available on the PC, which may link to the drive via RS232 or
through the Host Simulator via an ethernet connection.
NXG Control
Glossary
DRCTRY
Directory file for system tokens and flags used in the compilation of system programs. It
provides a direct lookup table of ASCII names to internal ID numbers. It also identifies whether
the flag is a word or bit-field, and also whether it can be used as an input or output only, or can
be used for both.
Drive
The term "drive" refers to the power conversion equipment that converts utility power into power
for a motor in a controlled manner.
ELV
ELV is an acronym for extra low voltage, and represents any voltage not exceeding a limit that
is generally accepted to be 50 VAC and 120 VDC (ripple free).
ESD
ESD is an acronym for ElectroStatic Discharge. ESD is an undesirable electrical side effect
that occurs when static charges build up on a surface and are discharged to another. When
printed circuit boards are involved, impaired operation and component damage are possible
side effects due to the static-sensitive nature of the PC board components. These side effects
may manifest themselves as intermittent problems or total component failures. It is important
to recognize that these effects are cumulative and may not be obvious.
Fault log
Fault messages are saved to memory so that the operator may view them at a later time. This
memory location is called the fault log. The fault log lists both fault and alarm messages, the
date and time that they occurred, and the time and date that they are reset.
Faults
Faults are error conditions that have occurred in the Perfect Harmony system. The severity of
faults vary. Likewise, the treatment or corrective action for a fault may vary from changing a
parameter value to replacing a hardware component such as a fuse.
Flash Card
Non-volatile memory storage device for the NXG control. It stores the drive program, system
program, logs, parameters, and other related drive files.
FPGA
Field Programmable Gate Array. An FPGA is an integrated circuit that contains thousands of
logic gates.
NXG Control
Glossary
Function
A function is one of four components found in the Perfect Harmony menu system. Functions
are built-in programs that perform specific tasks. Examples of functions include System
Program Upload/Download and Display System Program Name.
Harmonics
Harmonics are undesirable AC currents or voltages at integer multiples of the fundamental
frequency. The fundamental frequency is the lowest frequency in the wave form (generally the
repetition frequency). Harmonics are present in any non-sinusoidal wave form and cannot
transfer power on average.
Harmonics arise from non-linear loads in which current is not strictly proportional to voltage.
Linear loads like resistors, capacitors, and inductors do not produce harmonics. However, non-
linear devices such as diodes and silicon controlled rectifiers (SCRs) do generate harmonic
currents. Harmonics are also found in uninterruptable power supplies (UPSs), rectifiers,
transformers, ballasts, welders, arc furnaces, and personal computers.
Hexadecimal digits
Hexadecimal (or "hex") digits are the "numerals" used to represent numbers in the base 16
(hex) number system. Unlike the more familiar decimal system, which uses the numerals 0
through 9 to make numbers in powers of 10, the base 16 number system uses the numerals
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F to make numbers in powers of 16.
Historic log
The historic log is a troubleshooting/diagnostic tool of the Perfect Harmony NXG control. The
historic log continuously logs drive status, including the drive state, internal fault words, and
multiple user-selectable variables. This information is sampled every slow loop cycle of the
NXG control (typically 450 to 900 times per second). If a fault occurs, the log is frozen a
predefined number of samples after the fault event, and data samples prior to and after the
fault condition are recorded to allow post-fault analysis. The number of samples recorded are
user-selectable via the NXG control, as well as the option to record the historic log within the
VFD event log.
Host Simulator
I/O
I/O is an acronym for input/output. I/O refers to any and all inputs and outputs connected to a
computer system. Both inputs and outputs can be classified as analog (e.g., input power, drive
output, meter outputs, etc.) or digital (e.g., contact closures or switch inputs, relay outputs,
etc.).
NXG Control
Glossary
IGBT
IGBT is an acronym for Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors. IGBTs are semiconductors that
are used in the Perfect Harmony drives to provide reliable, high-speed switching, high-power
capabilities, improved control accuracy, and reduced motor noise.
Induction motor
An induction motor is an AC motor that produces torque by the reaction between a varying
magnetic field (generated in the stator) and the current induced in the coils of the rotor.
Intel hex
Intel hex refers to a file format in which records consist of ASCII format hexadecimal (base 16)
numbers with load address information and error checking embedded.
Inverter
The inverter is a portion of the drive that changes DC voltage into AC voltage. The term
"inverter" is sometimes used mistakenly to refer to the entire drive (the converter, DC link, and
inverter sections).
Jog mode
Jog mode is an operational mode that uses a pre-programmed jog speed when a digital input
(programmed as the jog mode input) is closed.
Jumpers
Jumper blocks are groups of pins that can control functions of the system, based on the state
of the jumpers. Jumpers (small, removable connectors) are either installed (on) or not installed
(off) to provide a hardware switch.
Ladder logic (Also Ladder Diagram)

A graphical representation of logic in which two vertical lines, representing power, flow from
the source on the left and the sink on the right, with logic branches running between, resembling
rungs of a ladder. Each branch consists of various labeled contacts placed in series and
connected to a single relay coil (or function block) on the right.
Loss of signal feature

The loss of signal feature is a control scheme that gives the operator the ability to select one
of three possible actions in the event that the signal from an external sensor, configured to
specify the speed demand, is lost. Under this condition, the operator may program the drive
(through the system program) to (1) revert to a fixed, pre-programmed speed, (2) maintain the
current speed, or (3) perform a controlled (ramped) stop of the drive. By default, current speed
is maintained.
NXG Control
Glossary
LVD
LVD is an acronym for Low Voltage Directive, a safety directive in the EU.
Lvl RH
This term refers the two security fields associated with each parameter of the system. These
fields allow the operator to individually customize specific security features for each menu
option (submenu, parameter, pick list, and function). These fields are shown in parameter
dumps and have the following meanings. Lvl is the term for the security level. Setting R=1
blocks parameter change, and setting H=1 hides the menu option from view until the
appropriate access level has been activated.
Memory
Memory is the working storage area for the Perfect Harmony drive that is a collection of RAM
chips.
NEMA 1 and NEMA 12

NEMA 1 is an enclosure rating in which no openings allow penetration of a 0.25-inch diameter
rod. NEMA 1 enclosures are intended for indoor use only. NEMA 12 is a more stringent NEMA
rating in which the cabinet is said to be "dust tight" (although it is still not advisable to use
NEMA 12 in conductive dust atmospheres). The approximate equivalent IEC rating is IP52.
Normally closed (NC)

Normally closed refers to the contact of a relay that is closed when the coil is de-energized.
Normally open (NO)

Normally open refers to the contact of a relay that is open when the coil is de-energized.
OLTM
An acronym for Open Loop Test Mode, one of the control modes of the drive.
OLVC
An acronym for Open Loop Vector Control, also known as Encoderless Vector Control. OLVC
is a flux vector control that is one of the control modes of the drive. The drive computes the
rotational speed of the rotor and uses it for speed feedback.
OOS
OOS is an abbreviation for out of saturation - a type of fault condition in which a voltage drop
is detected across one of the IGBTs during conduction. This can indicate that the motor is
drawing current too rapidly or in excess.
NXG Control
Glossary
OR
OR is a logical Boolean function whose output is true if any of the inputs is true. In SOP notation,
OR is represented as "+".
Parameter
A parameter is one of four items found in the Perfect Harmony menu system. Parameters are
system attributes that have corresponding values that can be monitored or, in some cases,
changed by the user.
Pick list
A pick list is one of four items found in the Perfect Harmony menu system. Pick lists are
parameters that have a finite list of pre-defined "values" from which to choose, rather than a
value range used by parameters.
PID
PID is an acronym for proportional + integral + derivative, a control scheme used to control
modulating equipment in such a way that the control output is based on (1) a proportional
amount of the error between the desired setpoint and the actual feedback value, (2) the
summation of this error over time, and (3) the change in error over time. Output contributions
from each of these three components are combined to create a single output response. The
amount of contribution from each component is programmable through gain parameters. By
optimizing these gain parameters, the operator can "tune" the PID control loop for maximum
efficiency, minimal overshoot, quick response time, and minimal cycling.
Qualified user
A qualified user is a properly trained individual who is familiar with the construction and
operation of the equipment and the hazards involved.
RAM
RAM is an acronym for Random Access Memory, a temporary storage area for drive
information. The information in RAM is lost when power is no longer supplied to it. Therefore,
it is referred to as volatile memory.
Regeneration
Regeneration is the characteristic of an AC motor to act as a generator when the rotor’s
mechanical frequency is greater than the applied electrical frequency.
Relay
A relay is an electrically controlled device that causes electrical contacts to change their status.
Open contacts will close and closed contacts will open when rated voltage is applied to the
coil of a relay.
NXG Control
Glossary
RS232C
RS232C is a serial communications standard of the Electronics Industries Association (EIA).
Slip
Slip is the difference between the stator electrical frequency of the motor and the rotor
mechanical frequency of the motor, normalized to the stator frequency as shown in the
following equation:
Slip =ω S - ω R ω S
Slip compensation
Slip compensation is a method of increasing the speed reference to the speed regulator circuit
(based on the motor torque) to maintain motor speed as the load on the motor changes. The
slip compensation circuit increases the frequency at which the inverter section is controlled to
compensate for decreased speed due to load droop. For example, a motor with a full load
speed of 1760 rpm has a slip of 40 rpm. The no load rpm would be 1800 rpm. If the motor
nameplate current is 100 A, the drive is sending a 60 Hz wave form to the motor (fully loaded);
then the slip compensation circuit would cause the inverter to run 1.33 Hz faster to allow the
motor to operate at 1800 rpm, which is the synchronous speed of the motor.
SMC
Is an acronym for Synchronous Motor Control, one of the control modes of the drive. This mode
computes the rotational speed similarly to open-loop vector control, and controls the field
reference or the synchronous motor as in closed-loop synchronous motor control.
SOP - (1)
SOP is an acronym for Sum Of Products. The term "sum-of-products" comes from the
application of Boolean algebraic rules to produce a set of terms or conditions that are grouped
in a fashion that represents parallel paths (ORing) of required conditions that all must be met
(ANDing). This would be equivalent to branches of connected contacts on a relay logic ladder
that connect to a common relay coil. In fact, the notation can be used as a shortcut to describe
the ladder logic. (2) SOP, when used as a filename extension, refers to System Operating
Program.
SOP Utilities
The program within the Siemens LD A Tool suite used for converting between text and machine
loadable code. It can also be used for uploading and downloading files over the RS232
connection.
See Tool Suite definition.
Speed Menu function

Speed menu is a feature of the menu system that allows the operator to directly access any
of the menus or parameters, rather than scrolling through menus to the appropriate item. This
NXG Control
Glossary
feature uses the [Shift] button in conjunction with the right arrow. The user is prompted to enter
the four digit ID number associated with the desired menu or parameter.
Stop mode
Stop mode is used to shut down the drive in a controlled manner, regardless of its current
state.
Submenus
A submenu is one of four components found in the Perfect Harmony menu system. Submenus
are nested menus (i.e., menus within other menus). Submenus are used to logically group
menu items based on similar functionality or use.
Synchronous speed
Synchronous speed refers to the speed of an AC induction motor’s rotating magnetic field. It
is determined by the frequency applied to the stator and the number of magnetic poles present
in each phase of the stator windings. Synchronous Speed equals 120 times the applied
Frequency (in Hz) divided by the number of poles per phase.
System Operating Program

The functions of the programmable inputs and outputs are determined by the default system
program. These functions can be changed by modifying the appropriate setup menus from the
front keypad and display. I/O assignments can also be changed by editing the system program
(an ASCII text file with the extension .SOP), compiling it using the compiler program, and then
downloading it to the controller through its serial port, all by utilizing the SOP Utility Program
with the Siemens LD A Tool Suite.
Tool Suite
Is the suite of programs developed by Siemens that allows easier access to the drive for
programming and monitoring. It is comprised of the following components:
● Tool Suite Launcher - also referred to as Tool Suite; used for coordinating other tools.
● SOP Utilities - used to launch an editor that compiles or reverse compiles a System
Program. It also allows for serial connection to the drive for uploading and downloading
System Programs.
● Configuration Update - allows for backing-up, updating, and cloning drives via direct access
to the Flash Disk.
● Host Simulator - used for monitoring, programming, and controlling a drive remotely from
a PC over the built-in ethernet port of the drive. Parameter changes, status display, and
graphing of internal variables are its main functions.
● Debug Tool - this tool is used to display the diagnostic screens of the drive for diagnosing
drive problems or improving performance via the built-in ethernet port of the drive.
NXG Control
Glossary
Tool Suite Launcher

Torque
The force that produces (or attempts to produce) rotation, as in the case of a motor.
Uploading
Uploading is a process by which information is transmitted from the drive to a remote device
such as a PC. The term uploading implies the transmission of an entire file of information (e.g.,
the system program) rather than continued interactive communications between the two
devices. The use of a PC for uploading requires communications software to be available on
the PC.
Variable frequency drive (VFD)

A VFD is a device that takes a fixed voltage and fixed frequency AC input source and converts
it to a variable voltage, variable frequency output that can control the speed of a motor.
VHZ
Is an acronym for Volts per Hertz control, one of the control modes in the drive. This mode is
intended for multiple motors connected in parallel. Therefore, it disables spinning load and fast
bypass. This is essentially open-loop vector control with de-tuned (smaller bandwidth obtained
by reducing the gain) current regulators.
NXG Control
Index
Cabling, 19
cell control board, 330
A cell current overload setting, 158
parameter, 158
A/D Converter, 33
cell fault, 58
Abbreviations, 343
cell trip, 58
Advanced Protocol, 17
closed loop vector control, 42, 54
cell faults, 323
command generator, 159, 189, 332
alarm, 171, 289, 290
analog input sources, 160
cell, 318
set point sources, 162
troubleshooting, 289
Commissioning, 19
alarm/fault log, 237, 260
Communication circuits, 34
analog input sources, 160
communication interfaces, 280
analog inputs/outputs, 52, 59, 60
communications board, 32
analog testpoint, 89
Communications Menu, 120
Arcing, 19
Serial Port Setup Menu, 121
Asynchronous motors, 19
SOP and Serial Functions Menu, 121
Auto Menu, 98
TCP/IP Setup Menu, 123
Analog Input Menu, 99
communications protocol, 192
Analog Output Menu, 104
configuration update tool, 337
Incremental Speed Setup Menu, 106
Control Loops, 49
PID Select Menu, 106
control modes, 188
Speed Profile Menu, 98
summary, 38
Speed Setpoint Menu, 106
Control Overview, 15
automatic mode, 237, 260
Control platform
Auto-tuning, 72, 166
NXG, 28
motor equivalent circuit parameters, 166
NXGII, 28
spinning of the motor, 168
control signals, 129
Stage 1, 96, 167
frame of reference, 129
Stage 2, 42, 72, 96, 167
Control Structure, 35
Auxiliary Inputs, 103
Control system
Auxiliary power supply, 19
boards, 28
available networks, 280
cabinet, 28
power supplies, 28
critical speed avoidance, 162
B parameter, 163
baud rates, 121 Current Limit Profile, 74
braking torque, 182 Current Loop, 49
breakout board, 55, 334
D
C data
cables motor related, 182
drive base impedance, 226 data loggers, 169
inductance compensation, 227 DC injection braking, 178
long, 187, 226 debug functionality, 171
parameter, 227 Debug port, 169
reflections, 187 Dedicated I/O, 56
shielded output, 187
NXG Control
Index
DFB Electrostatic Protective Measures, 24

Dual-frequency braking, 179 EMC-compliant installation, 19
Limitations, 182 emergency stop, 33
diagnostic data, 171 encoder, 54, 225
digital (relay) outputs, 52 speed feedback, 225
digital I/O, 62 energy saver, 140
digital inputs, 52 parameter, 140
digital inputs/outputs, 59 error
Digital Modulator, 33 troubleshooting, 289
digital modulator board, 330 ESD guidelines, 23
down transfer ethernet, 280, 285, 286
induction motor, 190 communications network, 192
preconditions, 193 connection, 58
synchronous motor, 193 Ethernet port, 62, 169
drive core software, 61 event log, 196
drive efficiency, 148 Excessive drive losses
drive losses implementation, 152
calculating, 151 internal threshold, 153
Drive Menu, 75 inverse time curve, 152
AP Settings, 83 parameters, 153
Cell Menu, 81 External and internal inputs
Conditional Timer Setup Menu, 81 configuring, 100
Critical Frequency Menu, 80 external flux reference, 177
Drive Parameter Menu, 76 parameters, 178
External I/O Menu, 85 external I/O, 59
High Starting Torque Menu, 90 configuring, 85
Internal Analog Input Menus, 86 External outputs
Internal Analog Output Menus, 87 configuring, 105
Internal I/O Menu, 86
Internal Test Point Menus, 88
Output Connection Menu, 90 F
Speed Ramp Setup Menu, 79
fast bypass, 58, 80
Speed Setup Menu, 78
cell fault detection, 132
Spinning Load Menu, 80
limitations, 132
Synchronous Transfer Menu, 84
number of cells, 132
Torque Reference Menu, 79
fault, 171, 283, 289, 290
Drive Protect Menu, 113
AC fuse blown, 327
Input Protect Menu, 114
auto resettable, 290
Single Phasing Menu, 115
blocking failure, 329
drive tool, 233, 280, 285, 286, 337
bypass failed, 328
Drive trip, 132
capacitor sharing, 328
drive tuning, 166
cell, 318, 319
Dual-frequency braking, 97, 178
cell AP, 323
limitations, 182
cell based protection, 335
operation, 179
cell bypass, 316
parameter, 181
cell communications, 330
cell diagnostic, 322
cell over temperature, 329
E control power, 328
Electromagnetic fields, 25 cooling, 308
electro smog, 25 display, 318
Electrostatic discharge, 23 external serial communications, 306
NXG Control
Index
handling, 290 input reactive current, 149

input line disturbance, 291 Input side monitoring, 147
input over-voltage, 334 input/output (I/O) signals, 51
input protection, 334 Installation, 19
low voltage power supply, 304 integral timer, 150
modulator, 303 Internal I/O, 86
motor/output, 296 internal threshold, 153
MV mechanical bypass board, 330 inverse time curve, 152
power circuitry, 327 inverse time TOL, 72
Q1-Q4 out of saturation, 328
switching failure, 329
synchronous transfer, 307 K
system, 301
keypad, 58
system I/O, 305
accessing control parameters, 234, 257
accessing security level, 247, 270
user, 290, 307, 331
accessing the main menu, 244, 268
VDC undervoltage, 328
activating numerical menu access mode, 246,
fiber optic, 58
270
Fiber Optic Interface, 34
arrow keys, 244, 247, 267, 270
Field-Weakening Limit, 158
automatic key, 237, 260
Five safety rules, 20
cancel key, 242, 265
flash card, 287
canceling security mode, 246, 269
flash disk, 31
changing system parameters, 241, 264
control power, 337
clearing and resetting a fault, 236, 259
files, 337
clearing and resetting an alarm, 236, 260
flux feed-forward, 176
default meter display, 250, 272
parameters, 177
diagnostic LED indicators, 249, 272
saliency constant parameter, 177
display interface, 234, 256
Flux loop, 50
editing parameter values, 245, 268
flux profile, 178
enter key, 242, 265
fault LED conditions, 235, 258
fault reset key, 235, 258
G front panel display, 245, 268
Grounding, 19 functions, 234, 257
hexadecimal values, 240, 263
manual start key, 238, 261
H manual stop key, 237, 260
menu structure, 280
harmonic component, 148
menu system structure, 247, 270
high performance control, 224, 231
meter display, 250, 273
high starting torque, 224
mode field, 250, 273
high starting torque mode, 42, 225
modifying parameter values, 251, 275
parameters, 226
multi-language, 233, 256
numeric keys, 239, 262
numerical menu access mode, 241, 264
I operation, 235, 257
I/O breakout board, 52 operation mode displays, 278
I/O Specification, 53 regeneration mode, 251, 274
induction motor, 36, 42, 225 rollback mode, 251, 274
Industrial network, 19 security access code, 240, 263
input protection, 151, 334, 335 shift key, 240, 243, 247, 263, 266, 270
dedicated I/O, 335 signed parameters, 242, 265
NXG Control
Index
speed menu function, 240, 263 Motor Menu, 66

standard, 233, 234 Auto-tune Menu, 72
velocity demand, 245, 268 Current Profile Menu, 73
Encoder Menu, 72
Limits Menu, 68
L Motor Parameter Menu, 67
Speed Derate Curve Menu, 71
LED, 290, 331
motor thermal overload, 140
line-to-line voltage, 134
alarms, 141
Link Fault, 34
inverse time with speed derating, 141
Lock-out / Tag-out procedure, 21
motor thermal model, 141
Log Control Menu, 111
parameters, 141
Alarm/Fault Log Menu, 111
straight inverse time, 141
Event Log Menu, 111
multiple configuration files, 191
Historic Log Menu, 112
creating, 123
loggers
file extension, 123
alarm/fault log, 170
multiple motors, 191
event log, 170
slave setup and configuration parameters, 124
fault or alarm, 171
multiple drives in parallel, 220
historic log, 170
multiple motors, 42
Loss of field fault, 41
multiple networks, 281
loss of signal, 100
low speed operation, 224, 231
low-level fault currents, 151
N
network, 233
M network adapter boards, 62
network interface, 281
Main Menu, 107
neutral point shift
Security Edit Functions Menu, 109
15 cell drive in which no cells are bypassed, 134
manual control mode, 238, 261
after loss of 3 cells, 136
local, 238, 261
after loss of 5 cells, 137
remote, 238, 261
Drive output with 2 cells bypassed, 135
master-slave drive control, 222
NXG digital card rack, 280
mechanical cell bypass
activating, 134
limitations, 134
Meter Menu, 115
O
Display Parameters Menu, 116 One cycle protection, 149
Hour Meter Setup, 119 integral timer, 150
Input Harmonics Menu, 120 parameter, 151
Modbus, 62 transformer model, 149
coupler, 60 transformer protection constant, 150
modulator, 52, 57 Open Loop Test Mode, 40
watchdog, 58 Open Loop Vector Control, 39, 42
modulator board, 58 output filters, 187
motor
base impedance, 231
equivalent circuit parameters, 230 P
manufacturer’s data sheet, 230
parallel drive control, 220
parameter values, 230
parameter, 63
protection, 140
changing, 63, 65
signal polarities, 131
download functions, 122
NXG Control
Index
Drive running inhibit, 110 WCIII 750V AP type cells, 205

help, 66 Processor, 33
menu structure, 63 protection
rated values, 76 excessive drive loss, 151
upload functions, 122 ProToPS, 164
values, 65 implementing, 165
Parity, 34 pulsation frequency, 179
Peak Reduction Enable, 71
Permanent magnet motor control
auto mode, 44 R
auto phase advance mode, 46
ratio control, 160
disabled mode, 43
regeneration, 129
manual mode, 45
regenerative braking, 183
manual network mode, 46
limit conditions, 184
parameters, 47
OV rollback function, 183
permanent magnet motors, 42, 225
parameters, 183
phase error threshold
regulator
parameter, 85
flux, 176
phase lock loop, 187
frequency, 173, 186
PID controller, 107, 160
internal field control, 194
configuring, 161
magnetizing current, 187
parameter, 161
speed, 173, 332
PLC, 220
torque current, 186
cooling, 308
rollback, 154
polarity control, 163
single-phase, 156
pole of software integrator, 94
transformer thermal, 157
Power Cell, 34
under-voltage, 155
Power cell overload capability, 158
RS232 serial port, 111, 122, 171, 285
Power Quality Meters, 140
RS485 serial port, 192
pre-charge, 195
air-cooled cells, 208, 214
cell faults, 211, 218
cells in bypass, 198, 208
S
circuit design, 199, 202, 209, 215 safety
electric shock hazard, 209, 215 electrical hazard, 186, 289
fatal fault SOP flag, 211, 218 high voltages, 290
fault, 208, 214 scaling, 100
faults, 201, 203, 205 Security
maintenance or service operation, 213, 219 default access codes, 110
overvoltage protection, 196 Security Edit Functions, 109
preconditions, 197, 206 menu, 110
sequence of operation, 200, 203, 205, 210, 216 serial communications port, 286
start enable signal, 196 set point sources, 162
type 1, 195 Shielding, 19
type 2, 195, 202 signal conditioning board, 51
type 3, 195 Signal Interface and Conditioning, 33
type 4, 196 Signal Polarities, 131
type 5, 196, 205, 208 Single induction motors, 39
type 5 parameters, 213 Slaves, 34
type 6, 196, 205, 213 slip compensation, 173
type 6 parameters, 219 calculations, 174
type 1, 199 disabling, 174
NXG Control
Index
motor speed, 173 multiple motors, 191

software version, 15, 32, 152, 250, 273, 334 parameters, 195
keypad, 256 PLC interface, 192
SOP, 283 synchronous motor, 192
SOP utilities, 285 up transfer, 188
spare parts, 332 system I/O board, 32, 51, 52, 55, 335
speed demand, 223 system program, 59, 283, 331
speed droop, 175, 223 active SOP, 287
parameter, 176 compactflash card, 283
speed feedback signals, 54 downloading, 285
speed limit, 164 input flags, 284
Speed Loop, 50 logic functions, 283
speed profile logic statements, 284
parameter, 162 output flags, 284
Speed Profiling Control, 99 SOP flag switching, 286
speed ramp, 163 source file, 284
speed reference, 107 uploading, 285
speed rollback, 332 system program interpreter, 61
disabling, 333
indicator flags, 333
speed rollup, 333 T
speed rollup
TCP/IP, 280
control flags, 333
ToolSuite, 280, 285, 337
disabling, 334
torque demand, 223
spinning load, 39, 42, 80, 168, 194, 225
torque limit, 332
parameter, 169
Torque Limit Setting, 157
Stability Menu, 91
parameter, 157
Braking Menu, 97
torque mode, 223
Control Loop Test Menu, 98
parameters, 224
Flux Control Menu, 95
torque reference, 223
Input Processing Menu, 92
trained personnel, 60
Low Frequency Compensation Menu, 94
transformer, 149
Output Processing Menu, 93
transformer model
Speed Loop Menu, 95
one cycle protection, 149
Stator Resistance Estimator Menu, 96
Transport, 19
Var Control Menu, 93
stop mode, 237, 261
electrical hazard, 289
stopping modes, 160
high voltages, 290
Symbols, 343
transformer over-temperature:loss of cooling, 335
synchronous motor, 36, 42, 48, 177, 188, 225
unexpected output, 331
control, 40
with AC Brushless Exciter, 40
synchronous motor operation with DC brushless
exciter
U
parameters, 48 up / down transfer
Synchronous motors, 19 timeout, 85
synchronous transfer, 187, 188, 189, 192 up transfer
circuitry damage, 192 induction motor, 190
down transfer, 188 synchronous motor, 193
fault, 188, 190
implementing, 189
input/output signals, 189
NXG Control
Index
V
Variable-Speed Drives, 19
vector control
algorithms, 36, 37
current regulators, 36
feed-forward compensation, 37
flux and speed regulators, 36
modes, 38
motor model, 36
velocity demand, 238, 261
voltage attenuator resistors, 186
electrical hazard, 186
supported voltages, 186
Volts/hertz control, 42
W
WAGO, 331
timeout, 85
WAGO I/O system, 52, 59
watchdog protection
CPU watchdog, 49
I/O watchdog, 49
Modulator watchdog, 49
parameter, 49
waveforms, 140
NXG Control
www.siemens.com/automation

A5E03870010A NGX Operating Manual

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

A5E03870010A NGX Operating Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

A5E03870010A NGX Operating Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

0HGLXP9ROWDJH9DULDEOH)UHTXHQF\'ULYH

SINAMICS Perfect Harmony GH180

Answers for industry.

NXG Control Description 3

Operating the Control 6

Software User Interface 8

Operating the Software 9

Siemens AG A5E03870010A Copyright © Siemens AG 2012 - 2013.

4.5 Bypass Control............................................................................................................................58

6.8.4 Torque Limit Setting..................................................................................................................157

7.15.3 Synchronous Transfer for Permanent Magnet Motors (PMM)..................................................194

8.2.9 Summary of Common Shift Key and Arrow Key Sequences....................................................270

Table 3-1 Symbols used in Figure Vector Control Algorithms.....................................................................38

Table 4-1 I/O Specification .......................................................................................................................53

Table 5-36 Stability Menu (3) Parameters.....................................................................................................92

Table 5-75 Pick list variables for the front display.......................................................................................117

Table 10-17 Specific (individual) cell faults...................................................................................................319

Figure 2-1 ESD Protective Measures...........................................................................................................24

Figure 6-2 Typical Power Cell with Bypass Contactor................................................................................133

Figure 7-17 Parallel Drive Control with Synchronous Motor ........................................................................220

Figure 8-29 Dynamic Programmable Meter Display.....................................................................................273

NXG Software Version

1.1 Power Topology

1.2 Control Overview

3. The cell control confirms that the switch pair gated.

1.3 Protocol for Cell Communication

Advanced Protocol (AP)

2.2 Safety Concept

2.3 Observing the Five Safety Rules

2.4 Safety Information and Warnings

2.5 ESD-sensitive Components

Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD)

Components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge (ESD)

Figure 2-1 ESD Protective Measures

2.6 Electromagnetic Fields in Electrical Power Engineering Installations

7UDQVIRUPHUDQG 3RZHU 2XWSXW

Figure 3-1 NXG Control in a typical drive system

3.1 Control System

NXG Control Platform

Figure 3-2 NXG Master Control Chassis

The NXG Control uses the following power supplies:

● One rack-mounted power supply

NXGII Control Platform

Figure 3-3 NXGII Master Control Chassis

The NXGII Control uses a single integrated power supply with:

Figure 3-4 Location of Flash Disk on the NXGII Microprocessor Board

NXG Board Communications

NXGII Board Communications

3.1.1 Software Version Requirements and Limitations

3.2 Control Structure

Signal Interface and Conditioning

Fiber Optic Interface

Figure 3-5 Control Structure for 6000V Drive

To disable overmodulation, set the "OverModulationDisable_O" SOP flag true.

3.3 Control Modes

Components of Vector Control

Flux and Speed Regulators

Figure 3-6 Vector Control Algorithms

0HGLXP9ROWDJH9DULDEOH)UHTXHQF\'ULYH

,GV )OX['V 'D[LV

,GV )OX['V 'D[LV

5HVHUYHGIRU )HHGEDFN(QFRGHU (QFRGHU 6KLHOG